The URL can be used to link to this page

Specifications 1 Fanno Creek Place Table of Contents: 00 0110 October 12, 2006 Page 1 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 0110 Table of Contents AVAILABLE INFORMATION 00 3132 Geotechnical Data 1 CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 1 00 7200 General Conditions; Modified AIA Document A201 ' DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1100 Summary of Work 01 2500 Substitution Procedures Substitution Request Form 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 01 2900 Payment Procedures ' 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 01 4115 Design -Build Requirements ' 01 4200 Definitions and Reference Standards 01 4500 Quality Control 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 7329 Cutting and Patching 01 7400 Cleaning 01 7419 Construction Waste Management 01 7700 Closeout Procedures DIVISION 3 CONCRETE ' 03 3000 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03 4713 Tilt -Up Concrete DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04 2100 Thin -Brick Masonry r DIVISION 5 METALS I 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing 05 2100 Steel Joist Framing 05 3100 Steel Decking 05 4000 Cold- Formed Metal Framing ' 05 5000 Metal Fabrications 05 5100 Metal Stairs DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1053 Miscellaneous Carpentry 061600 Sheathing 06 4000 Architectural Woodwork LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Table of Contents: 00 0110 October 12, 2006 Page 2 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1700 Bentonite Waterproofing 07 1900 Water Repellents 07 2100 Thermal Insulation 07 2400 Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) 07 2500 s Weather Barriers 1 07 2616 Below -Grade Vapor Retarders 07 5423 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO) 07 6000 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07 7233 Roof Hatches 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping 07 8443 Fire - Resistant Joint Firestopping 07 9200 Joint Sealants ' DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 1113 Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 1400 Wood Doors 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels 08 4113 Aluminum- Framed Entrances, Storefronts, and Windows 08 4413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 08 6300 Metal- Framed Glazed Canopy 08 7100 Door Hardware ' 08 8000 Glazing 08 9000 Louvers and Vents DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 2117 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 09 3000 Tiling 09 5100 Acoustical Ceilings 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories 09 6800 Carpeting ' 09 8110 Acoustic Insulation and Sealant 09 9000 Painting 09 9653 Elastomeric Coatings r DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES I 101440 Signage 10 2113 Metal Toilet Compartments 10 2813 Toilet Accessories 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS ' 12 4813 Entrance Floor Mats 12 9313 Bicycle Racks 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Table of Contents: 00 0110 October 12, 2006 Page 3 ' DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14 2400 Hydraulic Elevators DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION ' Design -Build DIVISION 22 PLUMBING — Sections Prepared by WRG Design 22 0500 Common Results for Plumbing 22 1100 Water Distribution 22 1300 Sanitary Sewerage 22 1400 Storm Drainage ' DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) - Design -Build DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL - Design -Build ' DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS - Design -Build DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY - Design -Build ' DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK — Sections Prepared by WRG Design 31 1000 Site Clearing I 31 2000 Earth Moving 31 2500 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls ' DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS — Sections Prepared by WRG Design 32 1216 Asphalt Paving 32 1313 Concrete Paving 32 1373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 1415 Extruded Concrete Curbs ' 32 1713 Parking Bumpers 32 1723 Pavement Markings 32 8400 Planting Irrigation 32 9200 Turf and Grasses 32 9300 Plants DIVISION 33 UTILITIES I 33 4613 Foundation Drainage END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Ir Fanno Creek Place Geotechnical Data: 00 3132 October 12, 2006 Page 1 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT A. A copy of a geotechnical report with respect to the building site, prepared by Terra Associates, Inc., 12525 Willows Road, Suite 101, Kirkland, Washington 98034, is included herewith and is titled as follows: "Preliminary Geotechnical Report, Fanno Creek Commons, SW Fanno Creek Place and SW Upper Boones Ferry Road, Tigard, Oregon" dated December 7, 2005. B. This reports identifies properties of below grade conditions and recommendations for the design of foundation systems, but is not a warranty of subsurface conditions. C. The recommendations described shall not be construed as a requirement of this Contract, unless specifically referenced in the Contract Documents. D. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Sum accruing to the Owner. I END OF DOCUMENT • I I .1 LRS Architects, Inc. II I _ : .' - IEB . 2 3 . 2006 : . . : �� = • [ ' - ::;,-; ..) • .... ',:-. - - r -. - PRELIMINARY GEOTE R = . ` . ,t .. . . .. , , . E.nno. 'Commons . _ • I ( - SW F`ar�no Creek •P lace;and $W Uppof 8 oones Ferry Road • . , : Project No; T -581 7. . . 1 ' - :t i .41.4:1C1' ; - . .. Te Associat 14c. . . • I -_ I ' : Prepared 4 t • - - ' • Opus Northwest LL C _ • i - ■• . - .. . Portland; Oregon I [ , , . _ . , . _ . • • i T I I - - :- :;w ` \ \� TER RA ASS OCIATES, . In c. . f . f Consultants in Gieotechnical Engineering, Geology' : .- -- • rid . •-' _ Environmental Earth Sciences t . H i. i • �. . • .Deehber- 7; 2005 III i Projeet1 o. T - '17 .Mr. John , - • . , .. . -.. Opns Northwest : 3 _ • 1544 SW First Street, Suite 1104 . Portland, Oregon 97201' • Subjects ' Preliminary Geeitechnical - Fanao Creek Commons . • • • SW Fames Creek Place and SW Upper flcrbace Ferry Road . - • I - - Tigard, Oregon • - ' , • • • • hear Mr.'Hendry; ' . t • ' ' As • requested,- - $e have ceirduoteti a preliminary - geotechoical engineering study for the subject project. ''The .• . • 'attached report .presents our findings recommendations fbr' the geotechnisal aspects of project design and nstruction: : • - Our field exploration. indicates t4.0 _ate is . generally underlain by 6 inches of topsoil or- 9 to 42 - inches • off . fill overlying interbedded sandy - silt and silty • sand consistent With glacial flood •deposits The ' _. dxisting ' fill was. _ .. , - predoitilantly granular in nature but was mixed With organic' debris. at Test Pits `tP -5 and TP=7.. We observed - • mmmerate groundwater seepage in all of'the test pits at . dep't'hs ranging'from I.5 to 5.5 feet below existing surface in oiar Qpinien, the soil -and groundwater condition s are suitable - for' tyre planned developm itable be ent. Suaring ' for. standard Spread 'footing -foundations - Will be provided by ed rpeterit native soils or Structural fill-pieced and . _ _ .corgi acted above these native sailsoils:: - The'existing, organicrlaoed =fill as obsery ed at _Teat , att • Pits TP -5'and TP -'7 and- rriay,exist elsewhere ort -site should' be:overeeea'aated anid placred:with new str`uetural • fill. :• . - . H 111 • 12525 Willows Road, Suite 1'01, - Kirkland, Washington-98034 - • Fax (425) 821 4 34 _ - Phone (42S) 821-7777 i 3 I I Ms. S ohn I Zendr +`= • • I3erktrer 7,b5 = . - _ : ... t?efaileci recommendatiot .sdpnessuig these itiOs and other' geoteel nical•desigrt eonniderafion are.presenfed in•: • • the at(acheci itpo . ' WF tr+ist :tjie.'infortpatth i' is sufficient for. 3rcrur uyrnt' need& , .If you have_SO, . " - . • gaegti os requir additional itfonnation, pled‘'' all,: " - ' - • • _ ' - • .. • • . - , • i • • - - • >SW oe rely Y9rsx =: , - •• - • •• TE : ASSOCIA.t , ES, INC: , - • - .. _ P pfri.,440g -. Er ". 2 c_ 74„iy-7. ... .. . . . 'ect F • • = f:� r tal -155 • :--- d .. - - ,- :iPPFfih�1 i `3�, A DATE: J i r, 3 i _ _. ... ._ - , ' • . " - • - . , ProaectlTo, T' -5817 _ • Page No: ii . - I I .- - TABI ROF L'a nS• -• -. : _ - _ . - ' . • - .. .- . ase `. - - .B No..' - 1 • ,. Pru tl es vnp [ n. ' .... 1 • - 20 . `-` Seope. ofWtn1t.•,•,,...:::::,;:,,... ., • a..,..•••:• »..:::.:;..::: ;..,... R - •_:.,,•a,•.r:::r.1 - -• ' Oiiditiens: ••,. : • -- . . '; . ::• .. :. • ........ : . ........... 2 • .. •. 3,4 Srtc ..:...:� ....t ....•1, :.:... •1,:1.0.;.. � - . • - • ' ,3:1 • . Siirl'acc...• • ,:..:: •.:,.:• 1�•,•�;•..; 4.:. -. .... .....7: ;; .- ••_•.:r.,.--= .:..:.••,_:::7 ' • - l Spits,;: - •, ft;• .•�. ere .Yr.. r•:• • •11_•r ii•:I •. i iri.•• ..... •• :( t•i i.... e.. •••5 ti.•..... • -- = ' .3.3 .. Groutldwater'• i,,,._,- Mar., :.:•: .... .:.:,y•_rS :.. .. ..•.•.,3.,. • • _ . ■ ... .4 . . eisna0.: � •.. :,.A„1.�• :.C.. <•„5•• ...... a .iL✓q -••L q.....i...uw. .•••'__.yo..•- .zF.•,•i.u•.yv._3 . • • 4.0 iscussi a,an4-Rec n hicndatti ins.:, . ' - ' - . -. , _ •' _ - ' `. ..,: . 3" Pre 4 Gra : • • :, .....,.....-.• _ ,_ , • _ � Sits $II 1118 ...:........... i •• :4,3f. ., c va Lons,,:,. ,..• .,..•:.:e • - - k_:: ... .....,. --r+.. .. ..••.....:•,•r,.•.'F.9 ,•.. _ • _ • ' - 4 .. oun4atia11Q-•i •• •••... .. .•• . • y•••• i•....... - : • ....... • • •,•..•r:, • :w5_ - . • _ 4S SJb - Gras a B ioc,rs ;.:•. "...:. : :..: :.,: ;••:,:�:..:•.. l..' .. �: = • • 4tt.6, • - Ree,,`,nageainingWails . • • • • • ;.ti ' ,..... y.6 ` - - 4•J.•-.: +J'tai:...w.•.,.... <' • '. • rui • - e , _ ..., r -, • 4 'Uiilities•• :: • ....�.: _7 - • 4 :9 - Eavem .•x... •. :. ... = . • 7 • ` • - 5,0 Ad&itioba1Services• ;.;.._,... . . - - .. n :••.... , . .•.•.•.:: ..•. ' .:z.:.:.,....,.5 . . : , . 64 - Liraitttions i;• . , 1•.. .......,..::.:..._. {..,..::1.., • • Y , ; . - �:. .. , - • Figure -1 • - • , . Vicinity Map . . n ExpThraiion LQ xian en. .....:...: :•:.:.1..r: " . i re 2 • . y ►ical Wall ge Det'ail , - ; ' .i • - _ • • ',r., - - ;1.r:•;: • „,.�:,.1igare.3 - .. _ • , Appendix . t • . •- . < - Field$ xp1oratiOn .and LabbraforyTTsting:•t_.i .•.•, •.••..•• :.•••..•••1 ; . , AppeidiXA -. :- I • • I , I : : II I .. . • 1 I . . _ . • . • ... , , , . . . . _ - • . . . I . - . . .. . .. , .. . . . '. - -. . .. . • .- . - . ., .. . . . . _. . . . - • „ .. _.- . .' • • , . . : ' • - . . - - • ' . _ . . : . • . , . „ • ' . " ' .- - ... . . ' • • . . .. . . - • , - . . . • . •_. . • - . . . _ - ..• ., '' . .• -•- - . __.- - - . - • • - Preilinjn,ary Geotechnical Repoli - - , .. ...--- -.",. • - - - _ . -. - . .. - _ PginnO *Creek Commons - .. --.• - -; - . - -. - - ..- • -.. _ . . . . _ _. . $01 Fanno-treek Place and SW Upper Bobnes Perry Road . , • •-. - - . "., .- - -..- _, . • Tigarc4 Oregon • • - • ....-... . ' ... , . . . - ._ • .- • - - • . . • • -. • • „ _ , • - . . . .. - • • - • I . . • . .. . .. .. • . • .. , .. .. . . _ , _ . , .. . . .. . . . . -• • ... -' - • , , ... - ..-• - - .1-.1i. - pRig0•T, DEsdliPTION .. . , • • -• • - - . • - _ •-,_ • :,- . • . -' •,..- . _ - - • • , - • ' . . . ... . , .., . . . • , - .. .. _ - . . • • . , . . ...- .. _ - • - . . • • - . • . • it •• „. The proposed redevelopment will 'Consist -Off coristrijeting one or pew otce.buildings centrally . located'. o n the , • • _ ' ., ..._ ifte The existing ()Mee building currently lbcarectin:ihe sites *tem- *per will ternaitt We were provided '' • _ with -tWd.conbePtual site Piaui.' One plen..shoWs conitructiOrttot a single, approximately 4Z000 :- • - . .. floor), three-story bnilifirtgand the Seco:lid islansfloWs construction, of two, approiclink.elsi.20,00p square-tobt (per floor), tliree Paved surface parking will be provided slotg All „add of the liewrokeibuildink(s): ' r •Access to -the site liii11 fella two locationin.ff bif SW tipper Booties Ferry Road, one tithe a ltOs eastern corner, and tbe sebond at the sit southern ca•rij.er..- Siia grading will-ionsisf of minor outs and fills to atliieve planned , • - . _ I - , - - ‘ flpish ea d dp : , . . . • . - , • - - • - • - .• , - • We ex pect building bonsiivaion will consist of Perinietcr pre-TcaSt co'ncrete tilt-up wall panels, withinterinp , . . I isohited crilumns.„ Specific ing loads Were not provided jEtoweiter,. based on our experience, with similar 1 building design, -structural loads will likely 'be 4. tb• 6 }zips -pet lineal foot for perimeter Wail* and 100 2(10 laps .. ' . • • .... for interior isolated columns'. -. ' • . , . , - • - - .- - • • . • . . . . _ 1 -. • .. 2 , . , . . . , _ . • • ' - The recoruniendations in:the folliwing` -Sections ottlus• - report - are based on o underatanding of the . , . - - • • • Project design 'feat as . discussed above, we should -review project civil and - structural drawings :as they become available tn" ' order to sap' plament or amend bur recommendations, if required _- , . _ . . . . . . . . • , . . • . . . . . .. - ...-- - . • • _ . . , ' . _ . , . . , . ... • .. . 2,0 • SCOPE OF worn( ' -- • - • - • i • . • . . . • • • ,. ... , - . I , . . . - -.-... - • . ., - . • . - . . Our work was completed in accordance. with our authorized proposal, dated October . 21, 'Abb" orclingly, on • Istovemt er -a, 2605; we eicavated; a test pits to a uraxittnan depth of IO feet beloVir existing mace grades. Using _ ' • . ... the infortnanOn Obtained from the subsurface exploration, we 'performed •inalyse,S .de , idliip gebiechnical I - ' . - • . recommendations for project design and bonstruotiont Specifically, thisrdpoit addresses_ the foiloWing: . . -- , • • . • . • . . " . . • . . - _ _.• .. - „ . . . . . • _ - • • - - sail gei&gioliticiwafer co nditions - ' . •• . . • • -. - . - . '. - •:.- . , . . 11 . . . • . . ,_ . . • .. •- ' • Site preparation and grading , ' - • • • - - . . _ .. , . - _ • . • . „ . . _ I 0 -:15W41. 1 *.IOTC , ' :,._ . _ . , . . • - . . • '- . . . .. . . _ .. . -r - . • . _ .. . , . . • ' • : ' . • POUrid - gdPn8 ' ' : . . . . . . - ' - • . -, . . - ' . - , . „. , . , - , • - , ' I . 3 • .. • . Slalc,on.-grade floors' ' .. • ,, , • • . . •,_ - ....- . • • r- - '-- •• - . . . . . , , • - • - SubsurfAce drainage • , - '• .. • . , • ' ' - - - • - i -- • • . . „ . . .. . 0 T.Itilkiet •• - -- • - - ' . . . - - _ . -. : . " . , - . - , • , „ - , . . " . - , • . , , - • - .. • - Pavements - -• .• - - . ' . , • • .. ' . - . • . . . . . . . . • , . . • _ . . . . • I . . . • . - . , , - ... • - , . . - . , - . , - . . , - _ • ' • . ..• - - • ' . . • . • • . • . • • . • . _ , . • . .. .- _ _ . . . . . . . . . . • . • ' • • . I I - _ -- - ' • Dedembtr I, 400-. . I aijeet No : -581;i . . ' : _ . -s a are e assoiiiat . • ii soil - I , _ :- str'eng�tft; - design earth - pressures; eioSion, and stabilityr.lYesigti end jser' formainc c•issiaeswithtespect'.tci is - • - • as itrelafes Lathe stru tiireem'ir'onrdtnt.ii.e humidity, miide t'r inold),arebeygti4 Fer?aoei _ As ates'- purview A Il building eriVellope•'specialist or•:contractor lid consulted to ddres these issues, as needed; _ - - . , - '.;i3 ' SITE 1d11TbITIOla$ .. .. - ' - . _, - • 31. Sarfaqt. - _ • • . , The project sift, is . appr- iiThately `t reeracre:' site fitly_ developed witt. several .stmati tes: -'The` site is _ - located north - of the intersection - ofSW Upper Bobnes Ferry Eokd Arid SAN l o � e P1ace`in '><'igerd;'Qregon.. . - I -- • The. eppro imate locatioti=of the sbownon P j , " - .. 1.-..- .. covered , with crushed rock. or - asphalt paging . _ The site. is 'refati /ely flat-With With ifyi inajcmity: ?ef the Open, �. I :' t e'site,mound - the Busting structures are vegetated :with vanoifa arnamentAl landscape bushes and .. `trees: The site is- bordered by' SW .UpperB`oones' Rerri Roar., to the soithesst, SW'Faiuro Creek PtaGti alorrgIthe ` , - . eouthwest, SW.74tft Avenue to- the northwest, and various coihmer cial buildings to t [e north" andnortheast:.i• 1 3.. `Stirs: . - . - - - Observed - in soils observe i ii tlie. test pits gerierally of 6 inches - of topsoil or 9 to • 42 inches of-fill. overlying • " - int'erbedded sandy silt and Ailtyi sand cpnsisterit'with glacial flood deposits: - ' . - . -_ ' • We 6 iircl•ies of topsoil in. the' upper' portion • of test Pit T -8 and fill to 'depths _ranging. from 9' 41-42- . - ... - '•inehe'ss• tieiow e5_tisting suurface_-grades in pits TP, . through' T? -7 The flit - ctsziaisted. lire dorninantly 41 - - ` et silt - sari trili wit avel and coes, At Test pits TP- ,aiid TP -7, , topsoil;• = I • rltediurri'dptise, to +h± ty, d d `J 1'i bbl t • aticka arid roots Were inked in•'with the granular 'fill: .. .Underlying the topsoil in Test.P'it'tP:8 - arid `thee fill Test • • - Pits -TP -l• though T -7, re obse medium= dense; moist tb - wet,• interbedded sandy *silt end silt sand.: We - . _ ' observed a layer of separatiorifreinforcemertt fabric betwee the fill andnati veesoils •in•Te stP_ita�I'P -2 andTP-3- 1 • . T he , G`eologic mop ofTe.Lake''Oswego oadran Clackaraps, Mult •., lsrand_ YWashmg tart"aCbuntie4,.Oregon,•. - . by. arvin lf.'Bees'rn'i and Teri y` L. !IIJau, (eoliig* Depa -tnient;; Portland Start Uiuveisityi; and tan P. M din, - I - ; Ore g on,D.epa#meilt of Geology and Mineral lhidustrws; :datedy 1989 - ,shows •soils_ in. :the tlie'inity, of the site .. a co f These soils. acre dcuiribed asrrse slid to silt dep a"sited bii ea# gpliic ' - _ - • - - - . -consisting a fne= grained facies fj. ' _ :.. floods i'luring ,the Pleisto • period: - The iiit rbedded - sandy, silt, acid silty sand 'observed 'fin :the test •pits :is - • consistent with _this classification. -- . ' - ' , " • - -• r The preceding dlsciisaiori is.-ititended as -a- general reviewnf tlie'sailropditiops oliservedi Figures A - 2 through A- - I present more detailed deictiptins of the subsurface encountered in , the test' pits: The appr ul te., , test pit lotions are.shawii on Figure 2. _ - Page ATo: 2'. I ' I I I , . .. . _ . • I . • - . . .. - . .- - ' - . - ' .'. . ' •. . • . . , . I . . . . . . . . I -, .- . . We obSeried. gitgimitra ter 'sr-Oak le..a.11 - eight; of th test pits 00000* the a itei The 04,page wa0 3 gelier411-Y -. • ..• - , _ - : mociarate!ityctibier:vett at doi!tbs - ianglitilfr. oil. 15 to 5•,5 feet halo* AV existing grouliti-:s*fat& The seepage • - ': 'was /10-66 on - tali Oftheliatlye Soils iirld:.i;vithiti the itpia0.-borligiis 'cif the mil* Sanity iut . od otirserio,_ • i,. .:. ' . : . - . III _.:- • - Peich'ecr firtaigdWatetiev.gig and flow rates will flaituate higheatleyela dikini . .. . • - , . .. • . - ,_ arid abortry the *et winter trioilths-.(9c0ber:tiirougl4latty)i-_ -:*- ;.• ..2. . , , . -_ . ,.• - - .. - . _ . . : • . , ..- , - . . . .., . ._ • . - - -.... .. • - . .. ., . -. . . - .. . .3.4 . • Seismic • - . S. l .. "` s - ` . , - .- • • • • - . . - - - • - • . • . ' , - , Based on the flail ei rmdtions obaoryel e-oxid the local geology', p& Chapter 16 'of the 2003 International Building I - -. • 1 COde (113C) siti class "C shoith:1 he - 1,1a4f. initruettiral iiaSitri... '- ' = . • • - : -. - - •...- , . .:, • •-._ -: - - • .. . . , . . . . .... . , ' , v . . . _ - , - • ... - - - .-' - • - • - . . . , - , • . • , • a - ■ . . ,... - - , _ . . .. . . . .. . .. . = • . : . , I, icitiofg,c tiiikii a fihermittenim where . ther a •s. ii or -e 1914 so4 Strength' due to an, iner6iie . .iii; • -.: .!, • •-• ii • .. ,.. :....• •„ • , •.....- - . . ,.. .w iii by kiihigii:F6*. utitritaellow•inaltibr afteota'geolbgiealli -recent deposits of fitiel,rairielf: II, • - :. -sands-Otatar!-belOw it &gala t a bl e soili a! this -ntitUre'dertitd the siiznith..kictrutinte4tattulat fridilorf.- -- , • - `.- = - .. - - • .. . ..- .- . . , • - , -. - -- The -generated • Wator -pressure : qt., pore pressure diseiitialty.. separitles the : aeit:-gOihs; -.8164 .' elimiiiii.t. this ' ' • -- .. • . - - irrtergratiOlatflictipn; Thus, elk-Ili:nal:1;g - the sOil'aitrengili.. .. , _ . . • . - . . ... -• - - - - - - • - - . - -.--- . '--- - Due to the *cunt crtilt aid Clg:y:ksiz* and thoitieaiurrt iddits condition Of die 1414eflyitii natiite soils • •••••, ' . . - I - -.. • : observed at the siteiit is our Opinion that the risk licfitefactiikto Occur at thiasite dfiring,alitattfignakejg 19w. • - - : • _ - - . • , ..- . - - - • ... .d• 4.0 - - liMCCISSION AND RECO30131E141)ATIONS. r .. . . ' •• - . . . . .. . . • . , . • - . • . _ . - . . . • .. .•. ....__ .. • . . . _ - . • . _. _, , ... , . , _ .. .- _ 4.1 . - Ge)iefal- '' . !, - . • ' • - • • ' - - - - - - - - • - " ' . . „ . . _ , _.:. . . .. ... _ . __ _ . - • . _ • . _ , ., „ .. .. . - . _. .- . . .. , . , . , ..., • ' . •• ,.., I • • •'. -• _.. Based on . c) . - a ',5 tu.d3;, it la. our ops irii im the site is si.iittage - iiir- .. tho: . proPiised: demi ' t 4 ia 'a' geoteelmi al 1 • •,standpnint, - The structures zap be supported toi-.Con,Ventional spread foeting foundations- llearin. on the ,.... . .. i - - • .-.. 'ea/pp native salts -op oli structural flit placed ah9ve •Mitivi- soils Floor sighs ifict•pivenionla . • - - 'airiilmiy- - Thd existing eit•sotis.obiet4a. in the 'upper lo.rtions of th teist 'are - precIfittirimillY. • . • - . • . - • -- granular and shotila be - suitable to remain i'n plieelaelow flOor slabs _and - *kir* . strfaces- - p_rOirideil - .fiiiri 4.314. .: = •••• ' .. , I • •• stable btalOiOtioer6•.iirdadit Tile- --e ObCtirE ificifti aniciugg qf -organic debris were 9bienie51. • - _ . , • ... ... . - _.. - 'w•itiiin the fill: aileh4 at Test Fita TB -5. antl TO-7: In these arias, _the . eicistib - g will notlie-siiitable- for siiii9rt. --: , ' . • ' - .. ... of - new construction imlAioolde rerhaveaaild WIIII. new v .structural tit Exiting • fill valiSila with luifikial ••• , - - ofganid catileatayi be reused as:al:Filo:11041:Bit - : ,- , - - . -- . . , - . .. . • . ... - _-- _... .._ . . _ „ _ . _, . . _ .. _ , „: .. • • _-• --_, - . - - • ..- -. - . • • — • - • - . - . - • . The majority 'of the soils at. the•aite.-deinfain - a- sufficient amount, of - Alibi. (silt and clay - size pailieles)-, - Which- ivil.l_.: .. -., , . .-... • f . iii#1ce• - thetp; diffieiiit ioconpict as structural fill when too 'wet.. 'Accordingly, the ability to Use . the' aoils fOra site ,. ' *. .• I . . 6=a:irk as sfruOtuial-fillviill.. dej;erta o' the Solids- - oiuttiire O (*tent anktthe at - : --, • -, 1 . -...- t.b.c -tine at ()Nitta efian- . If grading gotivities will ti .lilage-duiring the winter seasori, the contractor/owner '-'.• . . . should he prepared to amend soils _with_ l'iirtTanxI dernerrf,„cer4rit kiln 4list (CirtD),, or lime tO:stabiliZe the toi14 I and ficilitate.ethrip Or its/4141 flee-diviMirig granular Material for tise as Structural ill and haelcfill: . -.. - _ ... • - _ • . . • .• - . . . ..... • . . . . . . . . - . . . - - • , -- - - • . • - • . . . . , . .. . . • - . • • ..- . _ • . - . . - . -, . - - - • ' • r I - , . - • - • - : teoen*er 7,-200 : I. a • - ' ; - :' - ; • . - ' _ ' _ . ` - .. - - - grbj"ect 7sfo: T =5$l`T _ . , . • Detailed reeenimeridations- regarding these isgaes and other geoteehitical design :oMissderatrons. are, provided • .- ' the fdllowing of this' repel;' Out reeo s' II niniendatio shQnld be i nxte the --f al design drawings : . a nd cnristruoti*n speoffications.. -_ . • : 1_ • • Y • -, _ . ` • I and t"ii'R • ' r ttoit an dip '� cFire d _ - a g ` - =To prepare the site fbr Sew= developfnent, deanalttioti of e siriici;uies shngld ir}ci�e; rertmYal of Misting I - `•buikhi* foundations, floor and abandoned. utilit pipes, Ab ndonedtitillt pipes that axe. oaitsule the limit, . of ne t' bitilding.eanstiuotion• pan be in place,; provided: they are sealed to prevent:intrusif n•of groundwater I seepage and °soils.:lii t}ie t irtg psiition$iof fir site, ve oh o shit a cils, o orgatiie- ca file sails • • and other deleterleus materittls" shod be s tripped nd. ierobved f rom- :below areas _of new construction.:-.79: -, _ - • -reinoye the orranic topsoil`'layer;. surface, sftippvng depths of -about eight' iurches should be expected in the' , 1 `- northeastern' a - -o•- the •:site:: To .remoi)e. the existing organic,' fill.. as• observed at Teat Fitt P -5.. and TP,7; . • • excavation - depth's : of about .1 0 to 5:5f-feet. shci4d. be- exp *ted,,, Vegetation debris 1r-ohi clearing operation should - bra.• - - removed from the kite., Organic topsoil will not 1 e 'soit_ab1a for iu54 as struotur'al-'fill;,but may. b ,.-us e . f or - ' ;, limited .depthi: im noiistrntet l' areas or Tor landscaping purposes,> - - - . : _ - . i • . once• demolition, eleairinp and'strippiitg. operntione:iare rotnpTete cat arid fill `oper lations c a n l e initiated - to - - • - 'es iOlish *stied building grades.: Prior tv placing An; 0:1 exposed suriimea should be prbofroIled to•detettnine if . :`• • 4 an iso soft .and yielding • areas •are,picsent. :Pre ofroliing should also be: performed in• gut areas 'that Will _ .. -- provide :d_ irect support for hew: construction:' If excessively yielding_' areas are observed and-catmbf be stabilized - • - : in •plane by compaction, the• affected- soil's should bee - excavated and reaxo 'ved t6. firm bearing grade teetered: ' I . _ - with new structural Till,.. If the 'depth of excavation to remove /instable soils"'is :excessive, use 'of a geotextite reinfercingisegarra-tiah fabric, such;asNlirai 500X or equivalent, ear be- consfdexed;m eorujnc1am with structural - '= -: -' • • fill. Our- exp er1encae lia's showis that, iwgeneral, a minimum of '1E inches_ of a clean, .grautdar.structural fill. over. • : , th-e g eotextile,fabric should e tabIisli a stable bearing 'surface. . . A r-epresefttative ofTeira.AssoeiateS, tnc: should obOerve proofrollmg operations end the; condition of all exposed. '• , . _' bearing:subgrasle prior. td consfruotion.•to. verify that 'soil: conditions_exj are as expeeted :=and suitable-'k`or. ., support df biu'Idirig c rostiu�oir ras designed: • - - -, . Our Study indicates that the upper Soils contain up is 56 " percetit. .frneS (silt _aid• slay 1:1 ize- patticles), wltich-• - 1' • - ' ' Wvill'make them difficult to as- striiatural•flIl if they aro'too. Wet or too drys s4 acordi l<yz the ability. to use • • _( • - native soiL• from site exca%altils as structural fill'will - depend oil. their inol5ti r'e` coritent and the prevailing • - _Weather cendidoilswhen.site gr activities takeplaee: - ' • • _ - -' If.grsdip..g'activ'ities` ire- planned' dieting the Wet winter 'noddy; or if they `are initiated summer and.. . 11 • . *tend into fall Lind wm ter,; the ecnintraotor'sbould -be prepared imp - wel weather struoturS.l fill.. For this _ • purpose, warecommend importing a granular soil that meets the following ding Ye ireinents. - _ I - ' - . -, ; -- • •- -, V S: Steve Ira's = •••.. Paecei<it tzassing. ' :.. - - • - t}imches • - - . • , ¢ -. 'Y• •100•: - _ . - - . . Ito. 4i_ ,. - 75 rnaxinuiiu ' - - • 'l o, 2Ui1 • . _ . ; . 5 rxaiii '� .. • • t - - ; . . - `$ Based on the 3:f4- lri . _ : ' I . Page No - _ 4 ' - - • . • .. I • I • - 1or tt'uo, Terra ssoaates, Yxid, shonld..'exam and test all uiported to the for rise tractitre.1 _ fill:' Alternatiyely,asoils•=that are to \'vet ta"pto lFly could he a zei`ided: with, orttanrl cemerif, ADO, or - _. . .lime to iedi$be- the soils'moishire snd f; ilifate compaeti "ctis. -'i6 ":1r ut_ `amendgtent : requiid_4`iiY be . dependant 'on• c nditign.of the soil at fire time 1` grading which,,i €used; sliould`be eva•Infted - - • . • $truatuiat-fill should .be placed , ig uniform Ioos& 1e$ers-not a feeding 1 12• Inclhes oompaEied:to a.m fin ifm of •. • f ` •95 percent of the maximum drydeneity,- as= deteri lined l y the Anierican-Socie:ty fir"•TeStinga,.nd Materials (ASTM.), test- tie>tlgnation D - 698 {Stand Procto -.'f'h tn e oisturp•content i the 'abiI ti ie 9f co ipaction " . •should• F -gyp ithiii wo.percent its'dp- f nui_m, as deIe inmed this _ASTIti atah ard: noes ncttiial•areas,, the_ degree of sointipactioneanit reduced to.9tl percexrt. J ' ; - • = ". 4: E a' atioats . ' : Alt - ex it the site 'as sorlfined apaees, such;•ss' utility trenches, *Inv :lie votnpletted_ in - . • ' , _ accotdaneg with : state, :or-federal::iequi ,mints. Based '. ;current i_5coiupat oral 'safety, arid - Health . _ - . . • Administration "(OSIIA) ;regull }tions, the so_ rts A t he site -would . pen .fty be ilas$ifzed as..Type' - C'•soils_ . - i - • - • . • • ,. • , Accordingly, `side : slopes . f or e3tcavations in 'type' 6' - sails _ should •be • eloped to • ail n clinatan_ of • .1: , • : . ,. - (HQrizontaTVert cal)., ., •Altopiatiye.1y =utility ''trench sidewa`ils can be supported• - a, properly designed• ..... ' . installedahoring treach box... • _ • _ _ I ' Based on nthtton eebserved during our exploration, groundwater r seepage into excavations should expectf d.. - - The • grounclivat r is 'perched, and ;seepage -coritlitions will be mote- preial tint during the no�rtnally, wet_ winter .. . (l ' - - m onths.. We expe We seepage flows Will diminish _ after ,initml exposure as the skied volume of"water,'is . a _ - _ -depleted With time.: Conweritioiial salmi_ pui With collection tros, as ches needed should • he . capable of '•. • maffitniriingselati'efy dry working .. " •- : • - - • This u,fermaUot isprovided solely for the efi: of the owner and °other design consultants, arid not he - - construed -to i mply. that ;Terra Associ'ates,;Trtie. assenres rdsponsibility for job- site-safety.: 7It is "I :etstood that job 1 -= sitisafety iatlxe sole responisihility Of the project, contractor:, ' - • . • - . - - • _ • ' - • , . . 4• o _ _ - • I . J; , gs . \ - � - -. ._ ' - _ . - • , . '.:he b lc&ing(s)) maybe supported on ctiriventianal, spread footing fburidatioris bearing •oh competent nattiWO soils •or on ihneturaf fills plaeed'above.these native soils: Foundation subgradeasshould be piep as reCOrrimended I ie: Seetinri 4:2. of this report..As: previOTNg d} §cussed;` the existing organie,lacedfilI s tts soil•Qbs teed at Test Fits - • TP -5 and TF -7 •sbould`he.rei owed and replaced with - limit ual fill. father areas of existing granular fill could •. • remain- vviided it is'cprnpacted .to a firn- stable condition. • . . ` , -: . - - • I I , - • . -• _ ' De 2005. • 1 • - • • - . • . _ - _ .. , - Project No,, T-51317-. . . ' • .. , " - • � • - , : -' ; , " - • • .. ` - �• - - '� ' ' depth_ of i.5 fuo�l�4�rior - .. ll "Perimeter• 0tiindations owed to - tine weather should•beai alga plinimun ep — • ' _ gradeerci.r-ftost iirotegilonr_ jnt foundatioliscan i o oi�s'l .icted at any :convenient below •t ie' id rslalft.�- - - r _ , .:For, •support obtained on undisturbed. healing surfaces C-Omposetl of "n ve- soil or.- . hmii. and _stable - granular.; -: -. . - -- ; �etural fill; we•reeomr iedd desigpimg foundations• for a-net allowable' bearing o a'i a g ity - of - 3,Qi99 pounds p0- . , - •, s foot -(per):L For shoxt-term loads,. h as wind: ana..•seisrnic; a one4hi rd inesease'th t its :allowa`ble capacity - • : ' . , - can be;used: - With thepnti:iipated l gds -and this bearing striae applied building scftlemei to stiodld be le. es• 1 _ . one-half tataland one -quark diftbrential. _ . -; ., •,..-.- • . For desigt3ing fpttiidati 's" t< resist .l2teral. loads, :a lease fricfion 'eoefficient,of 0.35 - -can ba.•usedi - Passive earth : , • ° 1 Isressure3; ntitig On the "sides ' e ft the footings: •eitii.'also be eonsideied.: We "re4orti>riend latmg' this _late al . _ -. • resrstande using an etini:+ea1 nt. luhi Weight of N00 pounds percubfefoot'(pdf), .•' a recommend trot including the ' - -' :upper'12,.inaliea.of soil in this computation eCausO -heat be affected. by weather or distil ;by futziiie'gra : -._- _ • . • - activity_ - :This value aotitnes the •foundation Will, be constructed' neat against, connpstetit 8011.- or with" II structural fill, as described in section.' :7ryof this report. The values i'ccutcriniended isiclude'a r. "faetpu of 1:5; , • • • 4..4 - Sl-nh- an Gratiart-loor-s, • . -- • - ' • . • -:- • • - • "Slab - one -grede floors "inlay be - supported - on subgrades,- as recommended. in Section 4:2 of this feporf.. Immediately . • _ • ibelow the 'flour $labs,. i e .reeoniuiend placing, a four -inch thicle capillary -brea k -layer of clean, free- drairang . : - coarse sand or fna,�ravel that has less. than three- percent by weight of material passing - the Na : 20(1 sfeve. Tli ' *material- will • reduce tile upward movement. of Water through the _undehlying soil and ; . subsequent wetting ' of_the floor slabs., _ • • • __ " . - , ' .. • I 'f he . Oapillary -bi`ealc layer: will not' - prevent nloi tint intrusion throne the slap c , used by - water " vapor • - , . - . . tranarnission.: Where •mcihture by vapor trartsmissiari is undesirable, ..suelt as coveted floor areas, :a. common : _ . 1 • practice is to plaice, a duiable:plastic memlik on the capillat breakiayer and - then• Over the .ipernbrane a - . layer-of clean sand*firie'gravel ta•protgct it from damage during-eopstruetiou r and aid in ntzifoim•curing.ofthe concrete "slab. kW be sand or gravel, layer overlying the arse is saturated pr • ior ii : •- po the Slab; it will be ineffective in *assisting in uniform elating of the gist), and elan actually :sery as e - Water - ; - supply for moisture' :tratisdmiasion through the slab • and affecting floor eoverings, : .Therefore, in our -opinion", i - 1 'ccta;Teriiig; the inn rnhrdtre v4ith a layer of sand Or- gravel 'slootiTd be a►jioided if floor slab constraetoft "oeciiizs during - ' the winter months attd the layer cannot be effeativ • = _ - _ -" - fitter methods are available_ for pr€yeating ott- reducing *att<r, vapor -1xan4tnission - through the slab.: W-e • - t - 'iccomindnd consulting witlt'a:building •envelope - specialist - iv iontractor for additional assistance' regarding this ' • • , I • .6 Retaining Valle. - I • • = The magnitude of _earth�pr- ssure developiitent• onbslow grade Walls will"partly depend, on the" ity of the wall - . , • b"aekfill, We revgriimend placing• and *compacting Will haclefill as sthzctural fill. _Below improved areas; 'such as, - - I I " pavements orr1 oor-slabs, the backfili should; be•compacted ta_a ii of o5 per -cent`of its. ma'Rimuin ctiy unit : - I. • : . • weight, as detertnined by ASTIMI Test Designation D P8'(Standard Proctor; in•`unimproved areas; the relative . 2 - - compaction` can "bereduced•to 90 percentr , , • . -- • - - • : • ' I 1?a Nn b 1 , _ -' . - - ` • •. ' ,• =Doeemluer7;2t}Q3 - • • . _ _ ; : - .. - - t P roject Nb. T..- 5.8•1.7 • To. guard airisi.hydroLatic;py sure ejoli�hients wall be installed.: � t q iea1`wall: draar - - - d etail isthdwn on- Figure.3. = - •.. - F ' . , - - - _ ; ' = -. - " - - -- F . With •wall,bac c ll:.. slac eomnpactect.M, recommendettanti d gg.•_properly installed, -w recommend _ • = designing' w;i'estisried. walls for and adtive eacth:pr $ilte equivalent to -.a' fluid weighitrg -3-5 pcfi . - Fir estramed • . _ ; I _ -.` ' _ •walls, atl•additional uniform-. lateral- presafire•of 100 . psf sAiorild be' included: Thfse'Tta u s sssinpe a. lioriz‘fal• " backfiil,coilditibn and that ,no, .ether surctge Ioading, aucli as•trafl"ic, sloping en ardartenits,•or' adjacetit _ . . • _ - buiidiigs,'Will at on'tlie•wall: su conditions exisf, then :the imposed loading - mUsi, be iiliCh ded the wall - •_ II _ - --- design ' Ysieuon at•thebase Of ihiatidatioils and passive'earth yrassure will provide resistanc - to these, lateral: . • " - . loads_ . \clues for these ` arantefers rovided in S tiolr4.4 ofthi __ . - . - j t 4 7 - ` D' ' ic _ Fina1'extetior- promote fee. and •positive dfawrrage away tosii the building. areas. We recommend:. providing )3L gradient df legit three percent 'fol a. tniniinutur distance of •ten leer osn Ijie 1?tiilding: pe3rinzei�ex, - - . except fn pa'ved.locations: , lh pa a nuninutir►_ gradient of two' percent: ; ahould "ire provided •unless_' - a proVitioiisre,,nelridecl for c c olletion an disposal of scrface.wateradjacentto tlie;strrtcture: • ••• • S hsrsrfrice _ v - "- We recommend • installing a eorrtitiuous drain `al'ons the outside lower edge perimeter- building foundations. - ` • ' ' The Toundaticm• drains shiqul , fie- tightlined- tQ an approved p alit of controlled discharge independent lit rite roof - _ • - drairi Sripsurface.draws must nt sufficie'iit to promote'posi#ive flow •to _tlte<pOmt of discharge,: -All :should. be (provided with el earioi is at easily - accessible locations: , These- cleaiiouts should • - _ _ be serviced afileasi once even _. , _ • - ' Utilrt pities should. be bedded. and 1 in accordance with Ameri Public Works, Association (APWA# - •'.•specifications: •.As . .a in nium; trench bac lT shquldhe placed - and=conipacted is siruotiral ll� an descn'bed h•- -- f - .Section 4.2 Of this *por=t. .4, s�iccessfitl tae of an -site_ soils as. Ali . will require 'close znois r e ; control: -. - - • When ontroltod.toj acilitate prop r 6)104a treiscli `ill shbuld-consist of an imported . - gra arail th il :s at meets the gradatioarequjrements in 42•of this report - • I . . -she d- be _conatnioted -on subgiades as described_'in Seetior( 4.2'of this r Regardl Hof 11'1 ' • . deIree of relative ooxnpacti�on achieved, the.• •sibgr ode crust be hiin and retati,T*y. un beffcsre paving. Proafrollingthe•subgrade with hea aon' strnction equfipment shouldlre completed• to• verify this conditicina. - I _ - Page hTnc 7 : i • I t` _ flecembel7,2O�5e Project No: -5 &17 - the de soils anti e��sUb `ili � "th _ arta:in' 'cif . `the l� - n• is de en "t "tint" s[i " _�` - . 'o den g , 'ate � a _ se�E� _ . a' Pp ' the . eilt . R... Is .. ppainPn 7� '� .. .. . hall' cOric&itio-iis to wli ch -it will be bjected,', = -We eetpect•traffio to *idly consist of light :passenger 400 14, - • G $s • with only ecclsinmd. beavy service Voliicles in the'foofiefi very . - aaidloridinse removal -*chi 1 ' . Based on this . intbr nat on1H. i'ld. assolsng:.a` px prepared'ai d. stable sub"grrade,,we recopuno` rid - the following pavement" • • _ , s : : _ • - _ - : - - ; Twoinches pf' ,'spha.1t eorier oval- four n d es of crt7shed•ro ck baio ptB) - . - " , - • . I ; Two'inehes of kCbtre;r tl iie int<he's -- of as0slt.treated base (A'f» . • . • Al Tn [her event_Bµfi paviugiiaferi ais should Cork to the Wit Oregob Dept -hi-1 t o n (OE0' specifications,; • I 1 ` ode I?iParafi . ",thi g•the•norm. - DIY i et Winter to -early' sprng season and.paving c� 11ionelr' _ and soils are 'Wet of optifnum and=wistalile; as'an alteuiiative to reply entwit :graval borrow, :we,', - roa the soils wit Porllaind 'Cemcnt'ananbristiucfing b soil cement bye (SCB)- for stuppor of the ' asphalt pavenwcri[t:' Based'on our experietice;`for,this procedure,, existing i ne}rganiic g nular fill . sd=itativr; soils, - .' _ . ehbuld•.ba 'with I=P` land- cement at •a -rate bf .65 - psf Of, surface.area- per of depth, moisture , - . - •onditidned as riecessarit end then compacted as straC ural fill.: prior- to;u inig, the s e soil' moisture - conte ; ` I .• 'should be at or•'s1ightly'above the soil• ,O- optii'num moisture, Ifreigaired;'water should be '.a g"ihixing to ' • - - - - ma.intatr this moisture ennditlorihig.' Once blenided and toiul4 nqd, initial ed or the rapture :_ ho - • suld be accortiplislted,with a sheep's foot compactor :,Poulowing this initial.t:Otripaction;•the sail Cement *hi _ - graded 'with final.. - conipaetion. - then -achiev4d with' a. static. 'sipapt i -diupt lCol1e0: -. The Soil- cement- shou'ld'.be ' - compacted- to a nliniantrn relative compaction :o95 f ' pet AS* test•Designatioxi t) -98 (Standard- ...- _ Proctor). _Grading and compaction of the so •cetheut should occur. Within three lours s - of initial Maiin,g - li Onee completed, traffic on - th e s cerant si bgrade sitOuld - be kept to a ntlnnnum, �aritl the cement allowed to - - . . . mire 'a •initimum of three d'ays.prior to During this time,. the surface. of the soil cebient_should not be-"- : - • allowed-to dry excessively. Watering With a water ttuckor enverurg=the surf ce witlytarps'should, be;' completed ; ..• - 1 iy as nerensa to e prevnt the •SCS frrrii.exceSsive cicyang duiringtlua. viii aliuimgpetiod.. - - " _ - - ,. - .0e 'soil cniin_ent should have a ni imum "thicIeness,of sigh t.ianches. Depepnding . on: . - sitd .ae;ridif on(s, a tlr[cleer_ .. . -, - section may be .regt - With a stable soil cemegt constructed as recorrimended; for traffi h voiwnes • • . . I - • - expected, a ntinirnum AC)hickrless of twomehes-ahouldbe •user ..= :- , ` ` - _ • :_ Low;- -term pavement performance. will depend on surface drainage: - A poorly - chained pavemeal- sectionn will: be _ 1 . . sul ect to prematuie failure ,as a- result of Surface Water 'infiltrating • ato the'subgrade soils' - aild'reducmg their -, sup _ p g. capabil1ity.. To frinprove p'erformance, we iebonv�nend`- a ce drainage. gradients at least two - " percent: Sonic longitudunal and trensver se craclking of the.pavement surface slaoiild'be- expected over time:, Post . . " -• .conscnxcti4xm settlements- along"parking areas may also be experienced xlue to lie d of epth the loose fills in -some _ - areas. Regplar•maint'enaince should be- planned•to seill_oigcks they occur. _ - - - - ` •• - - _ - . ' Terra Associates should review the final project designs and. specifications in ardor to v . that earthwork • • - = and - foundation record Tien Jatioris• have been properly= interpreted and incorporated into 'project design. -" We ' . . _'should also pro gedtecimi si sera 'Aces dung coinstnintion it observe compliance with our design"coneeppts,: _ speci0ea turis;•end. recoimm�ndatii is: Lhis for`-exp_edf nt d oharges' if" subsritface lifter fromthbae anficipatecd pii6r to the• start ofconstrUcction, _ • • 111. I s , -- 'D _ R TQ:'T 5$l7 . . ' We. prepa -- titi ,teprtit. iii accoridane °wftb , generaliy accepted gegteolrnieaT engineering` ac iee6; 1■To•:other _ I - - : tivariatit}t `or irapiie4,:i, made, 'l ' nsxe ort fa the - eoyy�i0ht€d`prppeitif of Terra' Msgoiatts,'nc:,and is - • iiiiiiidpd speci'$c`applieatitnt- to'the -Fat* 001i:Commori 'eprojeet iu4 Ti rd,:Oregon.• - hip'repo'r. is for the. .- . , - e to uswe iise of Opts Northwest` I,L C ana pntative . • - 'The iina'iy acid preliminary zecpiri riettdations -presented in; tingviport .re' based,on data. ;obtairted' ni_tie- on.- . _ . -_. s t pits:.V ati ins in soii can occ th6 riaturq, 4r[d of winch�may riot, : - _ _ • untij'odtstru iti(n =.Xf tiaristions appear 'es'id`ent, Terra;t so*ia14 - iJnc. slion d l recqueSte0 to`reevaJil be ; -the : , " rei� in'this repoit prior to pr caeedtag pith cozistruic `: - ° _ . • .. - . • j : . - • • • I paeNe;9. .. 1 •- __ 1„ ,i)..4? - ,....% _ . 'i 4. iN'_ ; i i 1 - -i1 a i m • R. • - J -• � , • - _ i .'_ L #: - - - • te e - - : ` ;,, :k - - -_ _ • l • • _ ._ �, -- ^ = I t'' ' "-` -' a' _ - .•_._. . . -'_ •: •ter•..; ' .- -.. :-.., • . ' : . : -•,- ': ..'• ,::,- 1 .:":_ --:_:"^. ; --" ;1:i r. - \ -:-.:::..-::_,.,. •,:-;,:. • - . - • . ` - - ,,--:- - _ - Tr � - f ��il : - +.� _ - ' - <��•, _ �-' = I '- ' XIS _ - - - ' • S ' - 4 it - -:,f ' [ r � a/ i . ,. ., .,, • / ' '' ' d- _ - -' _ '-: - -` - _ : { . -rr . - - • - .. - - - - - - - hi' - - , { E. - 'l ._7 f p , .�..,,�.-• l - , - : } _ I t ; ri t ti " F - • . c - • ,, •,- :.. .: - .,0! - -: : .:';. 1 7 - ig&; : ..Z i i kii.ji - _t_ - .- =', .---,.-. f.. --- - - ." -i ' -.3. :-, -- `'. i t , ,! z I :- :'"'-': ' '.-. ":": .'--, - - : • a '..- R :.::: ' e rn" r ... f .. REFERENCE `M CR FT MAPPO N _ - .. I JOT TG) SCALE 1 II .. -. s :_ - ... • .VICIJVI MAP ' • Terra __ • • ' = : ' _ F ANNED -CREEK COMMONS • Oontultants In G815t chnical Ertgtneering ., , Gsdiog ans� Prof NO. P5817 'bate DEC _ o�5'. _ Figu' a 'I • ' • . . Livironmenia �ari(7. clences - - E • 111111 Ilia 111111 11111M OM MI NM MB IN II. Alla MO 111111. IIIII 111111 111111 IIIIII Illi NE • i. PARKING • . • • S • a „ a : iii PARKING ' ' a T J Eu / • j t I. .. I �c W • , . - st y,- ( , �, . - -3 - a' . 1 1 , s T -, / r,- T ,,. �+ / p . T p45 k } 44 . " —* 9 PAfiKIN6 L eh` N • � PARKING ' ±:3 .S {� ?( S , � �,. PAR KING r �ci � � _ • F . • F • // . • • • •, ,'� • Mott:: LEG ND: , , .. . - T148a1TE PLAN 18 BQHEMATIG. ALL LOCATIONS AND ' a j ,. 2*P4 AppRoxiMATE LOCATION OF TEST PIT ' DIA( ENMONS ARE APPROXIMATE. LTto INTRNDEDFOR . • . . _ .. 31% T' effa EXPLORATION LOCATION PLAN . RE8 4 EN ONLY AND SHOULD 0N PU RPP08ES. JOED FOR ' 0 100 200 -'• y AjiAtc `XO , . - FANNO. CREEK COMMONS . . > ,�\ -� Associates, I nc. _ h OARD, OREGON' ' • REFER • - - APPROXIMATE SCALE IN FEET OonWBin* In Elocisoynlol gn • • BITE PLAN PROVIDED BY OPUSNORD- MAST - - - - . .. n„ pp Ind EerylroMA 8ahrow - Prof . No. T�B17 .Dat DBE, 206b Flours 2 I • I I' ' • ' 12" 'MINIMUM 3T4 "_•' _ . - ' 4 • - . - GRAVEL _ - • • • SLOPE TO' DRAIN ' - . : :.t' . _:' f, � A: ^ T •:•7 .:: ::- : - : :: _ :: ,1 . 11. : .-. : . .. ::'. • - - _ 21 �':�..:' :LY::f:T� _ "A1:•':::: ..L•' :A ".:..- ... :. -•1. ':.':: i:" :';A F.: 7t:'1: : ._...�_Yt.:.�:tl.:_ : :._: . :: -- - . Y. : •' •aY : Y i:•f..':.t::^.'.:Y�Y'Y :ll,:�:::.'.:.... -.- .t -5 . «.rA ^.' ... . C f:: Y2 .Y: i v , g..+ •4?- " 0 . : .i ': ' .Y::.:•.' „.- _ - - - 17c .- -•- t :Y':'A' «:- . ' �: ... ...1'::.'. " -.' _.. - _::r _ ....�Y ": :. Se: : ._.._. J - , Jf f :. _ ._._ : b. : : : ' T::f:K:g � i' 32i '.': Y:.: tiff:: t . : : - :2tg.: . : >' t r : 47 . ' - r ::. :m:_. r . • :. ,.. . y s. , 3::: : . : :: E t ic. i -F •:t::: : 2: :: : 'Si ' _ - 1. }�.r l;_,- ,...a:$i'?•F(J•Vii' a : : z.a ri :i_:f. , _. :•'��::.F.4:...�7:ix:X•ii. _ r::: - - r f ∎0: f:::. ....'31.,P: .. , F.T- ' ,Y.•. ::X.' :.T .... • Er:- 'L: e ...... ....... . ::.Y:.Y:::.Y� -r. - • 1� 1. '::` Y...:.::-.::::: n;; i' J�:::.._ T: 1 ::+.:.'.' Y' 1'.'.':- L: :::: 1': ....•::r,;.':.�.1:':'!"''!: -'. :!::. �. :S:,+' • • . - . ?i •1.".::.: LET::::":: j�=: 1: a-;_ f::: K'_'::. ^_.Y.•::Y ::J::.:." -'R::. : r G: ^ : 'Ilf' . :]ti �:':f':�� l A..:_ t" "/ .' N , . f + ::� -:.' Y j' :.- ..S e... ::.:. J Ai I:'.- ..A.:.......Y.n.. ,... .4•Al : : :... . YAI : .. � •L �� .t� :Sr �.:� Y :'7::�::Y:':: :':Y' i rf :�: Y... : i Y Y '... . :.... '�!::�/��:: _ • • - - ��* f � , V{f.: A.'. Y : .' : ' w:: A '. � .� :?.5.:: }.:....'.:'�• ''' : : Y: a • 0- . :x:: ._ 1�/ /1 r � _ PE a xii••h::;::: STS t .- :... :: ;; ....... >.:.;t (SEE REPORT TEXT - • ._ +�' f • � :. � . ,. , i.:iriix•s:: ^ �: }ii �Y:Kih:._arr�' s.:,:: _; FOR APPROPR1A�TE' • 4 4 eas•10- 0 4 •. t y ,. .,�e Q�.. - IZ OVER PIP E• . -. I - • _ • •,_ • f• °�f)q• }•r'F +'• e« t �j: r +.J }w mo - , - • . ., s.:. .. : ,r;.a: ' . t . 'r i f t - • - ' . • • - . BELOW W. PIPE : - . _ 4 DIAMETER PERFORATED PVC FIFE-. - = 1 _ _ . . . - -- No- rTO•SCALE ' • : - ,• - - •- . - • - ' MLRADRA N G100N PREFABR • D SIMILAR - . . - . • ` _ ' PRQDUCTCAN - gE $UBSTITUTED'POR THE 112 -INCH WIDE iRA -' ' s . - - - - DRAIN.BEHIND WALL, DRAINAGE PANELS SHOULD,bXTEND A MINIMUM • ' - .. ' -' OF SIX LNeFIES„']NT - 0 12 -INCH THICK DRAINIAGE GRAVEL LAYER -. ' ; - • - '' - - - • - ' - " OVER PERFORATED-DRAIN PIPE, - ' - .. " - ; - : - - . ` _ t �T. 1 • .: ` `' Terra -- - _- • -- • . - _ TYPICA L, W DRAINAGE DETAIL • - - _ _ - �,:; k 0 REEK p[+iIM I • ```� 1 1fi $ � � _ = ` OREGON • Corrkuttiedsin GoOtechnlcal ng&teEring _ . _ . , < . • r. - •- - -. Geofpgy aoa P • W T 58 17, Date DEC,2005 f - - Figure - .3 . '£nuirontq'erM EaittrS ieiMet ' • I/ I .. r F11 1 p—t pLoR4m *AN) LLBCy.gAirORY ts.0 ITG - _ -• ' _ .• - n . n hgr'Creeli'Commons _- . . • • _ = er d l�ire . , . - `t7n:Navernber 8 iO05� we ex 1or ed. ' sz}bsurtace-'condittons at> site by exca 8 ba 0. to, a.' ' ' - mg)amurfi`degt of -10 feet below existtng,�rxtfa grades. T e approxiti*Itestpit locaticrna are•s} awn do Figiim ill !..,--• . • 2; Tfe test pit; Logs aro present on Figores A- 211ropgh Ala, ' .. - : : - - _ . ' A' eoteo1inidal. en 'near from oil offiee' coridupfedthe,lied exploration, nialt,named a of aach pit,.' - - - S _ classified 'the. stiiis: e roiori d, collected esezt alive soil satz ilas, and observed pertinent site:fetes.'. Mr. • - , - .. soil samples w ere visizally in.ace atic�e;with th Unded o r; Class fication' pi'([JE!S sn�ed: , . .o�i_Figitre A -1. • ; . dec : , ; • I. _ Repre`sentati-ve soil • iarnples obtained' from ^ 1h test pits were placed in-- sealed " containers =and--taken .to _ our ... • laboratory; for further- eeanziii tfou an d besting. 'he Moisture each sa iplg- ' as measured..and fs' ' . _ - , repoiied,on- the ,teat:pit lags: Grain size �alysts *Ors 1 performed onr four' ofthe spnxples: • : resulta•aie'shown' • - - on Fa eS 6 an - ' . . in I : , ..,.‘„, .-: ...,.. _- _• : . , . . .... -. : 1. : s " . ... PrgjectNo. '-5817 -- : .,.:,•., . Il . : L TYPICAL DESCRIPTION " . - . • - . N R. IAJO.DIVISIOfiIS' -, , • ;zYMBoL : • - , _ Well- graded'graveis, travalsartd•middres,'lifi[Q or ny I - G GtaVpl;;• ' firms, • - . W co,' -• - • _ _Riess than . ' GP Pcorl graded S'ravelsT'gra t sand mixtures, liltle :o _ r- _ • - a ,. t H • _ _ - Mora tfian - : E% fires) , .ns- flltes.: ; . . • : -• :. • - • t13 •� $3 0% co rse " . :Silty a . - - graveis. 9tavel-S ; nd -sift= ttil res - : fradien is= - • . _ • .fines... . - • - - _ • • --.�, • . larger than: Ho. • - f ' fiii,t s :' ;. ' - . y ` ' - ' ` • 4 sEe�re ' C a rave - yiav e I - - mixtures; p las tl e fines 4. .2 l e- red d sands- raven sans ;anted pt na- fines.. • • - • .a` • • . • . • Ciel ds. _ SW - t '' - - . Q , - - s g , >i, d : • . _ : _ • rn 'SANDS- •': �_. , :� • • - ... '- -. C • jettf thin ' , Paorbi sands or•gravelly sSnda,• .or ng• I - . 2 _ • < .Move • than: ,5 %: fine Si' fine _ _ - _ • - . • 4 o f Hoare.$ = • . - ` - ar - - fraction js •r • - . S _pRY s, r .p f+nes.. . �.. sands; safici- sllfrnixture I , Rn ls tic • -- : 'CY • . - smsil"er• - than. , • • Sands _ ., . . :: • _. . _ ,.., •.: - . °=.. - . .. . No.. 4 ;sieve i flth f(ies Clayey' sands,. sand -clay, mixtures, plastic • tines. - • ', - .' - - '• • "_ ' E . - -int r silts; rock'-flour "clayey sifts with 'slight' - .C3?A - ptas'{icity _ `, _ - _ ' - � - • C° � SILTS S - D _ _ - - -- 4 � . - - :' � - ' ,,..-,• ` - ' ieari �clayf . � I - O R - • . ' _ `CL , • Indrgt#nlc lay low . 'medium plasticity, • - to : �. • : .•; - - _ + , - . • - - • t= d,y ' L : iquid` limit Is • fees .than 5 .. , - .- . . _ " 'erg 1 • - . _ .. " OL Ongpntc•sllts• and-.organl days of tow p l , ais .- city� . . _ ' . .Q . ' •. - _ " . • • i- • inorgantc silts, elastic: • • . _ . • • ' e ' ', as. 63 ' . , • SILTS AND CLAYS ; , • CH .. Inorganic clays of high `piastfcity, fat. days. • - - i - • z 0. y. Liquid: llrnit•'is greater-• than 5 • - - • • fI - : _ " _ OI Organic days df Kiln pl : - _ -, - . • - . • - ' H1CHLY ORGANIC. SOILS , . -:PT. 'seat.-` • • • ' - . •- - I : . • - • DEFINITION OF - TERMS AND SYIi-i1BOL$.. . -- .: - - 1 . - .- anda1d`penetlat'iori • 2a bUlt61D5'[)IAMETEit • Sl?I:IT - " w " : iZenstty .R &ststance. in. eawsionQf •- - . ' :I - . SPOON. SAMPLFR ' - 64 2.4" INSIDE bt�ETER .RING SAMPLER • L eery loose - 4-i - . . OR - I - t I_,BY TUBE SAMPLER • - _ • Median• dense, - _ ' 30,30 - W A f� R LEV {DATE }. - _ -_ .Dense - - - - • 3t) -;;0 . , - ,.. .. o . - Very dance.• .- - .50 ' - . -- .T _ .,T0 fiVANE tsf - - • - . - - - -: Standard. Penetretioon - . Pp PEN O METER' F EADING, . _- i Consi$iency. _ Resistande •in Slosets(Foot - - OD • DRY - DENSITY pi und$ -•per cubic foot'" • • - - ' .Very' , Safi . • ' ' = 0 -2= •' • - - LL -. l.•IQUI D - enf ... - - - - • • - ill • . Soft . . • • • . : a-4 _ • PE P 1�4 �C INDEX ` Medium stiff 4-$' . • Stiff ' 5` • T t- sTANDARD NET1�ATlOht; blows fer root - I Hard ' . X82 _ . • -- - : UN1FIED CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM ' • - i \"� �tiw Cate Inc. FAE�I,NO 't:R EI ,'';7:' s-4 .'. SSC141 4r .:. • TIOARD-, •.OREGON _ . • Eonsuilaq(siii eotechncal en6inei: ing • - . = oeol - " ' Rroj. iNo, T-5B17 " Datee' D EC - 240 Figur A I. . • - • . • - Env'Ir4AmentaT Firth Sdenr:es . - _ • • .. _ i. I Pit No. • • .. L ogged : by: BPK . _ Date; .11 x$ /05 ...: - i z... : !A Elev. , - Depth : -$ to _ : }= _ ; . St,il Descriptlo l , `'D nt : ` ` f ini;hee GE AVE:) _ - . • - : F ILL: bruit i silty sand with gra�rel; frequent fraotured eolDDsfesto 3•trIches,. - . . , medlla dense;,rnolst JSM) . . - : ' 15'7• - - , _ : . _, '• - bluish -gray sandy S1LT occasional InaTea k fairit'organic odor, Nedipro'• 25 .P. • fifitf, moist. (ML) • ' Gray, rriot ed erangesend SILT I`r diumstiff,inolsttowet, - (ML) - ' . - • _ •_, Hit'' a 3 -ln 'ofj diameter clay pipe'at 4feet,, • • - ' • 2"• • - ..- ` Brown silty SAND, fife grelrtetl- , dense; ' wet (SM) . ' . - - • • . ' , - - • _ -Test pit terminated at 8.5 feet. - ,*, -- •. • , ..• .., " - - • - - .... • - - • . _ : • Moderate, grounchki eterseepagenoomi tradat:5feet•andbelow5.Q -feat • • . .. . - - T est P t - N o=. •• TPw2 . • ; . - • - s • - . • 11 Logged ky` RPK - . . ... .- : . • • _ - .. • • • -. - - date ::i$ /810S • Approximate Eev. . - . Depth - - • • • Moist Jrr . (f#.) Soil DescriptionGo teftt 0 3 inoher GRAVEL) : } • - Ft11•brown slily s and'1-11? fabrfekinc'h oruslned tat;k, medium dense, weir; - : • • Reinforcement /aepagbserved at 14 birdie$; • - - ' - • • Blui shggra��yysandy :S1tj=accasfwtialiIne ts;fairitor/ania�odot, -• - - . - . - -, medium-stiff, moist. (M 5.3 - laiaigo; rriottled grey sandy 511-1' lnferbedded With fine:grained; silt' SAN A,. - •, -• - - medium dense, Moist- (ML1S 1)-:. . ' . - - - • obblea to 8 inches from 5 tab feat. , ' ._• " • ! . - .: 36:5 • • - :. - Brown silty SANE); inlsrbedded; dense, diet: (SM):- ' . _ _ : _ • I • • .: - - _ • _, Gray r- ottfed orange SILYwitirsend, depse,: rnais".. (ML). - :a.3 9 - :- - : 7 _ 'Test pittierrninated•st0fest:' • . - .. Moderate groundwater seepage"ent:aunterecl a t -1,5 d below 5.5 feet: . - . ..4 -.1 Terra ; TEST PLT-1..OGS " _ • • : , it t� • :. FANNO _GREEK COMMON'S • • - -• `�; + °, Associ f s, Jnc . _ . TIOA� OREGON. • . - c orisuttarits 10 Geatacttaieal•Enginaaarig • - • - - - ' • • _ - • - _ • ... G�logy and I -1 Env tronrrtantal'Ea ith Sciences _ • PrbJ_ No; • T -58t7 Date b.EC 2 01)5 .. i A -2 • I _ • - ' - _ - - -P t• = - ... - • . Logged by. Bits-• : _ - • . . _ . -' - • . - - _ .. • • • : - , - • - • • Ap pt *imate 51ev. . • -, : 'Date 1;18/OS i - - : - _ - • • = - • Depth' - ., Moisture. - •-` - ' ( ) , . - - _ ; - • Content - = Soil - D escriptto h - -(° /a�-_ - • - . -(9 Intilad1 rowriSilty sand and vraVerfilif - - • • _ ... _ - - 9 . 4 ' • . • ".- . - - - (Reinforem-ent!$eparafiorrfabne at- 91 • • - • • _ ' : . _ ' • . Blutsh -gray sandy piIA rtiots mgatilcoodor, medium • . 21.$ - _ • - _ • - . eta, moist: • (SAL) . ' - - • " '' .. . T ' ' - ` - • • - - - O , mottled bro+Nn and aren a sandy-St!_T1ntei edded with time - - - _ ,,...• - - -. grained siltyr SAt�lD, mediurrl 'dense, rrioi ;t to wet, {M>:1SM)_ • - . ' 29:8 . • • :. 2 9 . - - •:'B silty SAND; fracas giavet, tine to medium g rained;, mo ,3 - - • - ; I cemented, den'se, rliatsttowet (SM). _ • • • • • ' . Test pit tenfilnated' at 5 feet. - ' : : •, • - - Mod erate .6NQet. - _ - - - • - - I • - est fit . Q :� r � .. . - • • Cog ged by: BPK _ - Approximate Elev. - . • . - - - Date:11 /8/05 " . • . • • , - .. , - • Depth - . _ - , • M oisture . • • (ft) Sail Description content •• • (8,3nches of brown slily sand -arid.grevel•f111t ; • . - - . .' _ " ` - - - ' ` - :. ' Bluish- graysandy_�SILfi,occesional:flQe r ©ots� faint aq anicAdoi, �, -• -. •" 92.9.- -`‘-� ' nledlum stiff, moist: (ML) • ' • - _ .. - , -.. • 28:8- - • • - • Grayy, r[tgftied brown end rusty gra oc caatonai fine rooter, ; - , .. - • • - - - • • medium dens stet.' (kW-. - " • - - - • - _ , _ Hit a 3 -i ricli diemetei Clay pipe 2.'5. . feet: _ • - X5 .. • - _ - 1 - BrOwn silty SAND;'tinegreined", interbed ded;rnedium demise, wet, (SM) - `- = - - I Dense below7-feef... : _ . : . -. i s 31:4 _ '; • 1 : Test'p t tertttinated at 1ta feet'. - LIgtit•grbundwater•seepage ;erlco a t 3 feet. - _ , S - \ -Terra,- ' - , :. ' _ 'f 'PEST PIT LOG S -' - . , ,. � • • y , Asss:ociates I ri c. �. I=ANNO iC] l K cc�n�li or�ld . ,,l eotech _ Tf GAF' D,- bftEO4N . I - Oonsultafits-in- nrcal Engltiee7tr<g , - - . - - _ . , . Eriv enial Earn Stiencas'' :Prof: No;, T -5817 Date D8.G 2005 Figure A. 1 • • I I • • . - ' . ' ' ,.' . . • . ; - • ... „'• .. • _. -. ,.. . .. . . . I • . .- . . . . . , . ,,, ... • , , • `, . ".- - ' ' ' " . . ., . • • • - ' .. . . :• " -: .. . ' ' .. .. - .- • • - . . Test Pit No .. .... ... • . • •_. - .. - - .. . . • • -. -- _ •- -••,• • -- . _ - • -. . • • . ,•. _ r ' • - :'.- • • . ' - Lodged by:.BPIC „. „ _ • , .' -- . - . ,_. - - :.- . .- • • - -, : --• - - , . . _ -. .-,., : - _ . . .. ... . .., . - I i ,- - ' --- - ,.., -- .: . ----- --.. „,- --." - - ,:. , -....... • ...- . . Approximate 00. -. • ., . -• . ' • ' I ' - - - • _ . • - • - • • ' tepti. Moisture - • . _ • -- . -' - , . „ -. . -.• : --..._ ... -- SO Description - - ... • = • '_. r! ; .. ' ria) ' . -• - : - '- " '• I _. .. .., . ... . • . _ • . - . , .. :- - : . -_ FILObrtiwn alltysatiCi trit rock, 'afi*,. roots, and .: - -. 27 : 9 ' .. '-• ' . '.. .- • ... , . ' - ,•.__ jog* medium dense moist to Wet - • _ '. ...-• .-_. _ . „-• , i . : ._ : . . , ...:,• -, . - . . :, - . . . • • ..... .. ... • • - I .• .. . ' - • • , . •. .. . . • . • • '•• • ' .' ....'• - . •• ' ' -... Bluiih,:ge.aysinliy 40._'r. occaiionalithalxials; taInt'Ortrahlabdoi, thediur6 i : ' . • -,-,: . ... . .dnse Wet eyr.r.4) , _ ...•-:-:---.. _; -. ...:... T -. :.-...-..,._ - s2 2 ' .: . : . .,-.: . . :• - , , . . . _ . _ I . . _ „ • - . • • . - ..- - • ' . . _ _ .. _ • .. _ ', . ' . . _ . 1 'Orl rriottted Ipstmi•ind rusty arargisaiiilySla,inediUM dposti,Wak. ..." - .., .. . :: •_. . -. .... . . . - .. . , _ • . . . - , . - • - _. . . . . I . - -•-• . ' ' . : - ..... 'EtiOwli silty $AND;4206 ijave1, niodera jai; cams nted; den4e, -„ __._- moist tg wet (pM) . . . i .. _ . . ..- • . ... . • - - -32.1 . . • _ • . ... , ... . i .... I Tgat pitlerm riatet a - 10 fatal. pghl grOlin5viater,sespage encounter belaiff.3.5 %pt., ... , . . . ...,..... . . _ . . -• , • .. .. , . . ,. , „ -. - .-. • : - - _ . • = Test Pt 1446 --,” • : • -- : • ' • - .. - _ • ,• .: .. ... .. . II ....., . _ • . Logged.br:SPK •. • .-.., • • ,.. _ . - •..... . • • . , . - : • . • • T: -:- • - -Approximate Rev.' - - • ' „- • " • . ., - • •••• 1118/05 Date : . . - - - . . - - • - - " - -- _ • . • _ - . , -• .. . ... . • . . - • . .. ,- . - , : ... - • ; 11/ .- -.. . . ,. . . Depth . __ . . . . , - MI: -• ; . • . ' ' . ' • .- • - Soil' Description -: ..• - - - - -' ,-.., . --; 2 . ''. - 7c r ffo i o rtri re f , • •..,•_ ._, •..,...... „ (4), ,:•.. . • ._.. I ... • . • .. .,_ ...:.:--_. FILL: brown silty 801 at,diTuSted J roodluritcleMe, Molit, - - .. . ... - , .. , •. . . . . " . • . - , • 1, .1;1114isti-10ray lk.T, odr4s1 trip toots, meclitiniclehm, moist. (ML) s, • . , - . , _ _...' s... : _. .. - • . I . . . _ , • • „' . .,. , : ' • • • . .. • ' • . . - .' ' •• . . ._ , . , _ - • . . _ . Gi'4 m0 ttles.d btOwn and rusty orange sa ricly mi se, moist (co ,.:• • _ _ , -: . ... , .. ..• - wst- (ML) - • . .• •_ _ _ . _ • .. . .„ , . . . . - I 5 : • _ .. , .. ., ... . ,.,. .._.. . _ . ., ,. • • •-•. - - .• • ... • • --. ' • • • - - -' , Briiim 4Jty SANbr InterbekIded, dense, viist. 'csmy ' „ ....-- . '• - • , _ .. . . • - . - . - ... • . _ , _ __ . - .- - . ,. _. - - ' .., _ • , _ Testiit telinin4tkid it ifeet 111 ., . • - • ..,; • ' - - . , , - - .. . . , ..- • ._ .• • . Ma derate graundwatar seepage enIxfU nterad at 1.5 feptard belays( 3.0.fe6t. .. ,..; - , • * .-- , • s - _ ... ' - ' ' • ••• .. ., . .. . - ., . -•-• •-• •-- - - -- - -- , -. . .. . . . _. _. • • • ' - ' 10 I I . • - . - - ... . .. - -: : • - •,- ...- -- , • . ., • - • - - - - • . . .,. Terett. , -.- -- - ,- .- :: . -_, •-... .. TEST. PT LOGS I - - .• - . - _: . . .: • : . rom-,,,,N8's.. :'■ - • - -- •- . ..- • •-• '- - FAINNio-itTIEEK 'COMMONS-. ,, 7 • -. , -.. - _ -, -... tale,, _ ASS Odat.e0 Inc. • ----- ---- *- . ' - . • - - ,---.- • - . TI ARD,_•OREGON, _ . • -. ' • . - _ - , .. 1 . •• . .,‘ • - . - -- .• 6onsiJitani$ In pfiabach'niaal Entneertg . .... : -:: ' : -1. .- ,- - . - " •:- -- - • - - ;GdOtny arid . . ii. .- • .- = - . • . - - .) _ : - • . EtM171618111A(EdriliS00 - • Pit4:. No T-5817 : Date D . 0135 Fig Eire A-4 • - . _ . - .. - , - .,_ _ • . _ .. . - • . - . - .. . - • . •_ . _ _ . .. . , , . . . , . . . _ . = . - 1 I _ • Test - P No. -. -7- • - - - • - ° : r .. Logged - ' WBPK- . • - -_ . : = - - • - ' - . • , - A PP r O t irhate Elev. - • D'ete : "i 1 /8/45 - - - .- .. - : - - - - _ -. - • • ' • .' • - - •bepth ' - • . - ' - - • - . - ` _ Mbis (,f,. Coltfent - . - Soif Deppription. : _ ° . ( %), - . - U I ` bro ri :silty :send with'g l isticks,:•roat.;ead €hunks§ of- bluish -gray ' " : • .- slit,�.taiet rganirr odor: reedluni dense, wet, . - ; - • ` : - ... - _ •40:5. - _' • -- Bluish- rayBandySILT,00caslolial ilite roojs, "faintorgarilco_dot Medb.le :" - ' - SIL • and - • •• • tewet. -(Ml`l . -. -, - 1 -. - Brown sit SAND; trace gravel; rnoder fly romer� d; dense, mole! do - - • • - ° 'wt- (S. ' ' - - l`Qst pitterrnlnated of 7.$ fQet, ; ; - '=. ..- - il --.. ': . "'' • .- -. -.--:- -..‘7-:'' Moderate yrouti fwat@r seep ge•enoountereCi* m 1 ;5 to . 5 f eet and • • Test Pit :. . • . Logged by:BPK i - - : - _ - . .• - Approx;imats Elet.. . . • - • Date: ilf8lli • • -_ ._ " - - Depth , • _ . Moisture, • Confenti ;[it.} - �oil.Descriptiorh. - �° /ff : _ • • (ii inphesTFPSOILJ - • a ' ' . - i ' . Gray, fnot)t"ed btavdn'and rusty, oratigB sandy ? Sit medl#rrtl dennse moist 2'8:9 • , • - - - . toot,, (ML) .. . . - ' . ° • - •Fr dtured.iobbles•observed al 3feet. - - • • 332. •_ : - • : _ ' ` Brown silty SAF(D,_trave opal; modorafely vemented, #iiferbedded„ .:- .• I • _ = dense, motet tel (SM1) . _ - { ' ; - • . _ .. fietpit terminated Bt 8 fast • . -- • - : - Madettate gnoundwatersee�ge encowi ered at 2 - grid 8 fbet. . • _ t; . • TEST PIT LOGS'. . �F�a� j ' i •. s oc a tes - Inc: - -_ A INC � REEK� t , . • • • . _- i.. • - - ' T ICAR D� • ORE G O N- - • _ - - - - Coinsul in•Geo Entgirieerfng - ' • G9orogy end :. Elwimninental Earth Sciences - _Prof.: No:.T -581 T Doe DEC . 2 ©0 5 5 . - Fi A -5: , - • - - ! . +� I I •- • : PERCENT CO BY WEIGHT _ - • - •, a o• - 4 ' - C . • ..... . .. ... . . - ° m . • ,_� o - -. . • -- . 1IOIHIII1IIIHIIIIIHIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIUIIHIIIII . - ' � - _ cd --. 111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 - . 'l•- .2--e - - - -. - - 2 . -- - . 0 0 4 1l PIIII1111111. 11111111111111101 : ; .: ! : - � ' °04 111181Pllf1I lhI11111f hIuIIIIiHI Ilr _ - -e :.io - -.-.- 0 lll■ aol�■ �a■■■ a�■ QI■ i7■ ■ ■i ■�aa ■ ■ ■i ■� ■ ■ ■ ■� ■ ■il ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 006 " o. 11e■■ U11li10t■■ i1i�Ir■ i�il�iis1E11�f ■Riieliii:iiii■eiii'• a I u1 ".1 ■ ■ ■1i11111AA17 ■1YN6i1111Q 12:21 ■2 ■ ■i111iS11iiiI211■ flha - _0 , ` : t r,J ;f)DB. ■ oa1�11waos�lai2 ■n222� ■■■�smva��a ■ c • I IIIIIIHIIHHIIilIHIIIIHHIOIHIIIIHIIIIHIII II .QZ .. . . . • • . . 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 : -: -; • . ; :: ' " -- IIIIIl1I1111i1111111I1I111I1111I1 • II III IIIIIf9IIIIIII IIJIIIIII IIitIIIIIUIIIIIIIIINI ' - I • - - • . - ■■sI■■ ail■■■■ Ua■> ia■■ ■a ■a■ ■a ■a ■as■I11 ■a■■ai ■■■■an■:a -- ` 4- . - - - iQa IlllflllllllI IlI 11111 11IIIIISIAIUI1ffI111111llll! : 08 1 - • • - - - - - 111111111I111111f� ill1IIII IIIII111HIIII III1111 -�- - : • I - .. . -- • - -1 - • illi11111111111MHIIIIIIIIIIIINI:iiill111111H111:41. -. - _ - - . . - • . � BQ i " 11 11111 1112111111111 1 .-: 40 l ail .I lof1 1 1 �1�1�1 i . . • = .-• 5 --.:::' Al . =- -- Ilirl IIIIlIIIIIIIIIIIII - : �_ _ . _:' - : ... • . - • . -.- gi i , : . . ... di 4' -. - • 8_ . - . ..-- . . . . - ' ; ;r 4 - i II1111i111111111111111111111111111111111I111Uii11 :'s. - - • -- . - . •• 1 %; . v$ fi11111111i111111lllllllhIIIIIfil111111111111111111 8 - • . ii . - :::-._..-:• - -. - • 5 _ I111OII11111111I1111111I 1A111111i111I1111i111E1111w - ' 0 - 1 - - . . 8 - - - • k ' - -. QllialllllflmaIII 'IIilllllllllllminufllllfll ovals n - 5 .. # 0 • - U . $ j4 • • -_ - [� - �■■■ aa■ a�1 a■ aaaoae■■ aaa® 11 ■l l�Na�l!! ■11111w11a1 ■Q' - _. -- � � - . a 111111111111111111111111M11111111111111111111111111111111111.' o - a • .. - I ` g ; 1 nonioaah■ IIImorm■ lovaiaa>,■a■zallaIIIIU■■■ . 1 •i- • 2 1 liaa11IIi111I11usinIS111l 111111111I1111111II11 30 : - D _ - - - z = 1 -4 P • - � .� � 1111111111IIIIl11I1 11111111111111111111111111111111 40 ' : -•' : • _- . • - • a 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 • -- -- ....- ;_• c _ ' - - . • 1? : II111111111111IIIIII11IIIIIi11Il111IIIIIIIIHIIIIE .�Q - -- - ... _ , A . ; : . - - V - _ •.•• IIIIIIIIIIIIf111111111111111OII111111111111111111I . .. - . . . . m • I . • , -.. :. 11 1111 .11IHIIBllllil _ = '. - : • 4 - ; I�11111�111I 3ba . *, • � , fit] -r- _ -, .-� •1 ; - PERCENT FINER BY WEIGHT_ • . - • • " . • - • • ••• Te :. • - : - ... GR +iIN' A f ALY • 1 N. . -- .= .--;; . . •- .- ' ._, :FANNQ ,CRe C OMMONS " - • - • .-- - t�,e '= Associa Inc -: TIGARD, - cf., qp ±I; ; - . • . , • CQ flsul t V1 rrGdetee ri gie phg = i f - _ :::y aid : P n o " No. T681•7 D_ ate [ C.2(�O5 _1-, Figure #8 _ 1 - . : .. • . Envi ron I mental Eeri Sclerr ne 1 • SIEVE'ANAt1(SIS ; :. : i 1YEiR META A 1Ak YSIS:- � R, • • ' - . " • • • SI OJ'OPENING . N As } N'. ' • , •iu' � , � , � . . 42. � , a5 E . , A ,Q O .O. . 2 ' �� :. D. • . . ,0" 100. • 1 �.■6ra�o[i.Idniaa� m . � o �Rm�aeaswr_NamNKrmroacalici_str 9' ,. • S . • rim ®��■�ii� ■err.MMOI1= ■_~_�l�.err1►vowMIllor q.Le�o�Ira■ ... . arlt�Irllowa■� v lae�oee.r igi „ .1�0 it�sses� silo ss�sLEI�MIrrs■e��k4�L� ��i�_ Ulm om�� NEmuiNsismmum a 10 . ' MIME= wllwll■e�selrrriR■ !■■ lmsr. O® �71 E ■M■i lam LA ®iiWEs ■wl��immiel • . ■• it Me. �laimwee� ■roleswL�to�Msmea•ew1lIXBM NMVIlos uo IMWI'I ee�■rio, ' ' r/� ,a 1 ®nilrrsa,wiMINIII e■aLiIIMINE reeWVraAMee� i�em ______ M smle�eeeewvnIler■iapsia S ` O. �eebe■tosseR4Ya■IlmwMim E ��i'u mmim5. m.Emi w ■rll uImmi irri� 4 MrlILeaw tasioseteli■a■ererlloww�r• L l � asli �sa .s■Leae ■allriatw! • B. Q . ..: ' - mAwlrrlrelrz,.osr i• rse■rlowa 1� I ��:�� e � w l �erL■iQaomwsae�emr e�i.Ell�a.Ieitll MI i aiiwi11•111 lt® � e..E liemeeesle ism ism - -0 , __ ___ Mill/ LIMN .gm= .leI gs_i_ wi ■e.letia�Re�l�' m'a 7 0 __ �llli oeswcmr._wla.rirt4rlwlesl m o e . , • , ill . • d� ∎�mimEmI CIIN Imm i w lo �� mmaer■l�Lrl ■ wllsmolalis a 30,, , m • : . ° -' o m.®�I PM' 111eslssaoe.rlttlll.ori � siiaasai -w oi.e.le�.aielameleIE l i�leis_r • ; • no &folk h ' • rMlaaieo .o■s■sil.tztaeat+>�iteVEw ° w � IOVOQe e r R�iw�rltaoww�Iea ■icl..aa,eoesIw •� • .rd I nin oew aal! EL �a�Ill l yM irae�i_rumr�,.dsls® _, 2 ' n y'f . � �. �� as�aGit .��oe.�lloaww�L.il. w�•r��pLi.itiDiei�� a +s�e.s.a. =itl rA�..i ir>, ® g. .� ws.rae.il s.�a.anzr_ r.s:� _i + t 0 � � llm!•. earll a ��L�_Aw_daw�a ■a6��l.tiM ■ae� (D ' '. �IM�Ilallle l■clllawi•e1� 1� moo de ∎ IMI I M . Y 'r.* avl ____ eerllal,�vme.reoel.aaew�� • e m ' r • t - • U e_a•wi ...Ildali7r�lllwl�∎unim i ∎swowl immi lwldle.11ioslll�eew■ ' -' •. �RII►r�rwwY l♦i valosll■ns Isla ® , wolf X � w E �eililidaae ©w!!a�a�i.Lro �1� ■ate ■l�ftitirl>oAl�a� • • C' - 5 m ' . a eelolll _Iiacawole � � ee Isliawo • rp R : j J , • a �.lawlewlltdINumEt ®wlL_ __ o lr ,• -' ' •0• e»I■•immi• mom insMiailral ∎ed��eed i ■aQINNIFI ■ IMI iammilI dd.l ' m .'.. mil ■Ill■siesoslsa�aawi... ®lwreo_ . wa' a o it al al Maims � ala Elm= lwe�Lel - O` '.0 , • 5,,. . .. . •' r._ ∎wii.I..Pllols.ri•wle- - _ . �7 IN l MAN s_■■■e�a iimma mom. . - m - L��Iumism ■= m IN Ea MIN u m tla�imlrrseaol r: mg; aeis�waAir.l.ia eo<a - �. .' , 0 • !.■r ∎o ®mo ENI ear■wll�lll1�I�n=so n mm allwom .elef�lin111Minit+iilEaoo.q • ' , p ' , ,5 • - . , '' • 3D i �� MMltQ�e.e� ��v �I rn ° w �ia�i�I B_____ n�� ice® 70' ."' • � �0im� ailM� � s il �immm�sl� led oo�oee■aeealw ao.IaC_Ll . , * , • Iawi mEmm i l�ml oia;sem�I '. . z wwea! wwlr�o ■leeowl■■..e��Ir�oo�ws�wsoioeo� Le.aias�aLraio .. ' ' . '•20 mom ∎ noili r meimmi ® -� aaerrurlalwo1rrilloo,os__ s.<lavleoa. • 1 • , ' - 'a• m ' - �oae ��osli il.9l�l ■∎etlt�mm 4.f.�ai mu Elms niR.IL.ad�ilare. cn 0 , b.�l mens lleeslddalwi i ��w!'. � i ifl or enle�IllL. . .'t9lst�MMOM ' CO • • .. e. 111111wlWiailMECINI ■Ilre��` awl mum dl_lE711otmrlYw1 , i�■ es�. lllert• lrlaooew�wlwllri�. s� rooeea��ral .oesss. Ili•.a • y " ^"1 ' 1 ' esoae_1 r esell. wi�altillwwae ■MMM.=oo..■■11.1EMila�lMOM 94 � geea rrMllMI da =w INN INE eae� �e�_Lrlwl alwl ni sim mg ,,GI . .., e ■•__® �r1Le t ____ + sriasI ■- iael�Iww�Meello wwse�so ■Ill�ae��Ie.ei.■oea ` •: Cl ei ��i�1.rlimminim ii*l ll� ∎�i�a!_, 1 Il 1 .IladsllA � in.aexNo .t�a� •• ' 0 ! s;■rwso Elf s■ sIi Mils ir, Ea EMU LRnIir.=11o1•1i_■an.rlapIN. mini im mom soil..oeu lammseL. ■.asllmisea® • cp ':0.�'E -• �' was ay •� ',e,s. ,1.1 +,ip'm a ea ,es 100 • �p '1 " 4 m GRAIN SIZE MI..MILLIay 'reRS w i `. R • .. - ' a Q GQ • . - • : „ COARSE • 'FINE. - EDIU GRAVEL D FINES . • e a 'I �ey' t�llxcib P U$' SCS' pesc�ipiiori Mgt* a' 1 • 11 4 . • • TP, 5.l) SIW ` sill)! SAND , . G 1 • On I ell all IN Ali M' MIS MI alp NIB MI IIIIIII 1111111 IMO 61111 111 SAIIIA D ocument A201 TM -1997 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction I for the following PROJECT: I (Name and location or address): ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: Fanno Creek Place The author of this document has Buildings A and B Shell and Core added information needed for its completion. The author may also I THE OWNER: have revised the text of the original (Name and address): AIA standard form. An Additions and Opus Northwest, LLC Deletions Report that notes added I 1500 SW First Avenue, Suite 1 100 Portland, Oregon 97201 information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A THE ARCHITECT: vertical line in the left margin of this I (Name and address): • document indicates where the author LRS Architects, Inc. has added necessary information 1121 SW Salmon Street, Suite 100 and where the author has added to or Portland, Oregon 97205 deleted from the original AIA text. I This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an TABLE OF ARTICLES attorney is encouraged with respect I to its completion or modification. 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated 2 OWNER General Contractors of America 1 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 1 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS I 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK I 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 1 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK • 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 1 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT I AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I I INDEX 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5.1, 3.10.2, 4.2.7 (Numbers and Topics in Bold are Section Headings) Architect's Authority to Reject Work I 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Copyright 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 1.6 Acceptance of Work Architect's Decisions 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5, Access to Work 4.4.6, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Accident Prevention Architect's Inspections 4.2.3, 10 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Acts and Omissions Architect's Instructions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.8, 4.4.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.8, 7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Architect's Interpretations Addenda 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6 1.1.1, 3.11 Architect's Project Representative Additional Costs, Claims for 4.2.10 I 4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.3.6, 6.1.1, 10.3 Architect's Relationship with Contractor Additional Inspections and Testing 1 . 1 . 2 , 1 . 6 , 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1 , 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 9.8.3,12.2.1,13.5 3.7.3,3.10,3.11, 3.12,3.16,3.18,4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2, Additional Time, Claims for 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 8.3.2 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, 13.4.2, ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 13.5 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors I Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.4.7 1.1.1 Architect's Representations Aesthetic Effect 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 4.2.13, 4.5.1 Architect's Site Visits Allowances 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, • i 3.8 13.5 All -risk Insurance Asbestos 11.4.1.1 10.3.1 Applications for Payment Attorneys' Fees 4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5, 3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 9.10, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Award of Separate Contracts Approvals 6.1.1, 6.1.2 I 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 3.12, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.2, 13.5 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Arbitration Portions of the Work 4.3.3, 4.4, 4.5.1, 4.5.2, 4.6, 8.3.1, 9.7.1, 11.4.9, 11.4.10 5.2 Architect Basic Definitions 4.1 1.1 Architect, Definition of Bidding Requirements 4.1.1 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 5.2.1, 11.5.1 I Architect, Extent of Authority Boiler and Machinery Insurance 2.4, 3.12.7, 4.2, 4.3.6, 4.4, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.6, 7.4, 11.4.2 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, Bonds, Lien 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 9.10.2 I Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility Bonds, Performance, and Payment 2.1.1, 3.3.3, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.4, 5.2.1, Building Permit 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.6 3.7.1 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses Capitalization 2.4,11.4. 1.1,12.2.1,13.5.2,13.5.3,14.2.4 1.3 Architect's Administration of the Contract Certificate of Substantial Completion 3.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4, 4.4, 9.4, 9.5 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 Architect's Approvals Certificates for Payment AIA Document A201 T - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 2 III reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalises, and wili be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I I I 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1, Concealed or Unknown Conditions 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 4.3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 I Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.5.4 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Certificates of Insurance Consent, Written 9.10.2, 11.1.3 1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, I Change Orders 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.4, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 4.3.9, 5.2.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 11.4.1.2, 11.4.4, 11.4.9, 12.1.2 1.1.4, 6 I Change Orders, Definition of Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.2.1 7.3.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK Construction Change Directives I 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Claim, Definition of 1.1.1,3.1 2.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1, Construction Schedules, Contractor's 4.3.1 1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, 6.1.3 Claims and Disputes Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts I 3.2.3, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.8, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 4.3.3 4.6.5 Contract, Definition of I Claims for Additional Cost 1.1.2 3.2.3, 4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.3.6, 6.1.1, 7.3.8, 10.3.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR Claims for Additional Time SUSPENSION OF THE 1 3.2.3, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions Contract Administration 4.3.4 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Claims for Damages Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating I 3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, to 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 11.5.1 Claims Subject to Arbitration Contract Documents, The 4.4.1, 4.5.1, 4.6.1 1.1, 1.2 Cleaning Up Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 3.15, 6.3 1.6,2.2.5,5.3 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period Contract Documents, Definition of I 13.7 1.1.1 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to Contract Sum 2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 4.3.5, 5.2.1, 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.4 .5,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2 I 11.5.1 Contract Sum, Definition of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 9.1 8.1.2 Contract Time Communications Facilitating Contract 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2, Administration 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Contract Time, Definition of Completion, Conditions Relating to 8.1.1 I 1.6.1, 3.4.1, 3.1 1, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, CONTRACTOR 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 3 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND Contractor, Definition of 9 3.1, 6.1.2 I Completion, Substantial 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, Contractor's Construction Schedules 1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, 6.1.3 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 Contractor's Employees Compliance with Laws 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, I 1.6.1, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6.4, 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, 4.6.6, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, Contractor's Liability Insurance 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 11.1 I AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 3 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and r,.!3 be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. i User Notes: (2609719759) I • Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors Damage to the Work I and Owner's Forces 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.4, 12.2.4 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 Damages, Claims for Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors 3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7, 11.4.8 Damages for Delay Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2 1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 8.1.2 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of I 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, 13.4.2, 8.1.3 13.5 Day, Definition of Contractor's Representations • 8.1.4 1.5.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Decisions of the Architect Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5, Work 4.4.6, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.8, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Decisions to Withhold Certification 1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7.3 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, 9.7 Rejection and Correction of Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 4.3.10, 14.1 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 Contractor's Submittals Defective Work, Definition of 3.10,3.11,3.12,4 .2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, 3.5.1 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 Definitions Contractor's Superintendent 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1, 3.5.1, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 3.9, 10.2.6 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.6, 8.1. 9.1, 9.8.1 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Delays and Extensions of Time Procedures 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.4.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14 Disputes Contractual Liability Insurance 4.1.4, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 6.3, 7.3.8 11.1.1.8, 11.2, 11.3 Documents and Samples at the Site Coordination and Correlation 3.11 1.2, 1.5.2, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Drawings, Definition of Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.1.5 111 1.6, 2.2.5, 3.11 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of Copyrights 1.1.1, 1.3, 2.2.5, 3.11, 5.3 1.6, 3.17 Effective Date of Insurance Correction of Work 8.2.2, 11.1.2 2.3, 2.4, 3.7.4, 4.2.1, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, Emergencies 12.2, 13.7.1.3 4.3.5, 10.6; 14.1.1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Employees, Contractor's 1.2 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, Cost, Definition of 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 7.3.6 Equipment, Labor, Materials and Costs 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5. 1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 2.4, 3.2.3, 3.7.4, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 4.3, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 11.4, 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work Cutting and Patching 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.7, 6.2.5, 3.14 3.10, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.3, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate 8.2, 9.5, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 Contractors Extensions of Time 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1, 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4.1, 11.4, 12.2.4 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 A1A Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this A €A`' Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalises. and will be prosecuted to the 4 , maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which . expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I I Failure of Payment INSURANCE AND BONDS 4.3.6, 9:5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 11 I Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 Final Completion and Final Payment Insurance Companies, Settlement with 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 11.4.10 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Intent of the Contract Documents Financial Arrangements, Owner's 1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 Interest I Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 13.6 1 1.4 Interpretation GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 8.1.4 1 Interpretations, Written Governing Law 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6 13.1 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Guarantees (See Warranty) 4.6.4 Hazardous Materials Judgment on Final Award 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 4.6.6 Identification of Contract Documents Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.5.1 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 42.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 5.2.1 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 Indemnification Labor Disputes 3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 • 8.3.1 I Information and Services Required of the Owner and Regulations 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 13.5.2,13.6,14 ■ Injury or Damage to Person or Property Liens 4.3.8, 10.2, 10.6 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 Inspections Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 4.6.4 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 Limitations, Statutes of Instructions to Bidders 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 1.1.1 Limitations of Liability Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.3,3.3.1 ,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7, 12, 8.2.2, 1 3.5.2 2.3, 3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.4, Insurance 10.3.3, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, Limitations of Time 9.10.5, 11 . 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 4.2.7, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, I1.4.2 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, Insurance, Contractor's Liability 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14 I 11.1 Loss of Use Insurance Insurance, Effective Date of 11:4.3 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Material Suppliers Insurance, Loss of Use 1.6, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5 I 11.4.3 Materials, Hazardous Insurance, Owner's Liability 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 11.2 Materials, Labor, Equipment and Insurance, Project Management Protective 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.6.1, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.23, 3.12, 3.13, Liability 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 11.3 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 • Insurance, Property Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and I 10.2.5, 11.4 Procedures of Construction Insurance, Stored Materials 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4 Mechanic's Lien AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA`' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 5 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I 4.4.8 11.2 1 Mediation Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 4.4.1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6, 4.4.8, 4.5, 4.6.1, 4.6.2, 8.3.1, 10.5 11.4.3 Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.6, 7.1, 7.4 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 13 2.4, 12.2.4. 14.2.2.2 Modifications, Definition of Owner's Right to Clean Up 1.1.1 6.3 Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.7.3, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, Award Separate Contracts 9.7, 10.3.2, 1 1.4.1 6.1 Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Stop the Work 6.2 2.3 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 14.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 14.2 I 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications Notice and Other Instruments of Service 2.2.1,2.3,2.4,3.2. 3,3.3:1,3.7.2,3.7.4,3.12.9,4.3, 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5 ,3.2.1,3.11.1,3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3 4.4.8, 4.6.5, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, Partial Occupancy or Use 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2 9.6.6, 9.9, 11.4.1.5 Notice, Written Patching, Cutting and 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4,4.8, 4.6.5, 3.14, 6.2.5 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, Patents 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14 3.17 Notice of Testing and Inspections Payment, Applications for • 13.5.1, 13.5.2 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2, .3, 9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, I Notice to Proceed 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 8.2.2 Payment, Certificates for Notices, Permits, Fees and 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1, 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Observations, Contractor's Payment, Failure of 1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7.3, 4.3.4 4.3.6, 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 Occupancy Payment, Final 2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.4.1.5 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, I Orders, Written 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 13.5.2, 14.3.1 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 OWNER Payments, Progress 2 4.3.3, 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 Owner, Definition of PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 2.1 9 Owner, Information and Services Required of the Payments to Subcontractors 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3. 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 1 1.4.8, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2,9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 14.2.1.2 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 PCB Owner's Authority 10.3.1 1.6, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, Performance Bond and Payment Bond 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 4.4.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, Permits, Fees and Notices 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.4.3, 11.4.10, 12.2.2, 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF Owner's Financial Capability 10 I 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 Owner's Liability Insurance . Polychlorinated Biphenyl AIA Document A201 TM — 1997. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 6 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any Portion of it. may tesu it in severe civil and crirr =.inai penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I 10.3.1 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights Product Data, Definition of 3.17 1 3.12.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 4.6.2 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Safety of Persons and Property Progress and Completion 10.2, 10.6 4.2.2, 4.3.3, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4 Safety Precautions and Programs Progress Payments 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.6 4.3.3, 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 Samples, Definition of I Project, Definition of the 3.12.3 1.1.4 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Project Management Protective Liability 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Insurance Samples at the Site, Documents and I 11.3 3.11 Project Manual, Definition of the Schedule of Values 1.1.7 9.2, 9.3.1 Project Manuals Schedules, 2.2.5 1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.Construction 12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, Project Representatives 6.1.3 4.2.10 Separate Contracts and Contractors I Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11.4 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 4.6.4, 6, 8.3.1, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Shop Drawings, Definition of 10 3.12.1 I Regulations and Laws Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6, 3.11, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, Site, Use of 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 II Rejection of Work Site Inspections 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.2.1 1.2.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Releases and Waivers of Liens Site Visits, Architect's 9.10.2 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 II Representations Special Inspections and Testing 1.5.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 9.8.2, 9.10.1 Specifications, Definition of the Representatives 1.1.6 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2. l , 4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, Specifications, The 13.2.1 1.1.1,1.1.6,1. 1.7,1.2.2,1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17 Resolution of Claims and Disputes Statute of Limitations 1 4.4,4.5,4.6 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work Stopping the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.8, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 2.3, 4.3.6, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Retainage Stored Materials 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4 Review of Contract Documents and Field Subcontractor, Definition of Conditions by Contractor 5.1.1 1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7.3, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and 5 Architect Subcontractors, Work by 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples Subcontractual Relations by Contractor 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10 10.2.1, 11.4.7, 11.4.8, 14.1, 3.12 14.2.1, 14.3.2 Rights and Remedies Submittals 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 4.3.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.3, 1.6, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11.1.3 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Subrogation, Waivers of AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 7 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. i User Notes: (2609719759) I 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 Time Limits i Substantial Completion 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 4 .2,4.3,4.4.4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3,5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, Substantial Completion, Definition of 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14 9.8.1 Time Limits on Claims I Substitution of Subcontractors 4.3.2, 4.3.4, 4.3.8, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Title to Work Substitution of Architect 9.3.2, 9.3.3 4.1.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK I Substitutions of Materials 12 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 7.3.7 Uncovering of Work Sub - subcontractor, Definition of 12.1 5.1.2 Unforeseen Conditions ' Subsurface Conditions 4.3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 4.3.4 Unit Prices Successors and Assigns 4.3.9, 7.3.3.2 13.2 Use of Documents Superintendent 1.1.1, 1.6, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3 • 3.9, 10.2.6 Use of Site Supervision and Construction Procedures 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 I 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, Values, Schedule of 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14 9.2, 9.3.1 Surety Waiver of Claims by the Architect 4.4.7, 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2 13.4.2 I Surety, Consent of Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.2, 9.10.3 4.3.10, 9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2 Surveys Waiver of Claims by the Owner 2.2.3 4.3.10, 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5. 11.4.7, Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2:4 14.4 Waiver of Consequential Damages Suspension of the Work 4.3.10, 14.2.4 5.4.2, 14.3 Waiver of Liens .Suspension or Termination of the Contract 9.10.2, 9.10.4 4.3.6, 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 Waivers of Subrogation Taxes 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 I 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.6.4 Warranty Termination by the Contractor 3.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 4.3.10, 14.1 13.7.1.3 Termination by the Owner for Cause Weather Delays 4.3.10, 5.4.1.1, 14.2 4.3.7.2 Termination of the Architect Work, Definition of 4.1.3 1.1.3 Termination of the Contractor Written Consent I 14.2.2 1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 CONTRACT Written Interpretations 14 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 I Tests and Inspections Written Notice 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1,13.5 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, TIME 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14 8 Written Orders Time, Delays and Extensions of 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 I 7.4.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963. 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 8 I reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of ?t. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 111 ;1 ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS § 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (I) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid ' or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements). § 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. § 1.1.3 THE WORK • The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. § 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. § 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL • The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. § 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. .1 Reference in the Specifications to an article, device, or piece of equipment in the singular number shall apply to as many such articles as are shown in Drawings or required to complete the installation. Mention in the Specifications or indication in the Drawings of articles, products, materials, operations, or methods requires the Contractor to furnish and install such items including all necessary plant, labor and appurtenances. Titles and headings are a part of- the Specifications, the same as the text of the article or paragraph. Notes in Drawings are considered Specifications, - equal in force to those in the printed text. .2 Dimensions shall be figured rather than by scale or rule. In the event of conflict between the Drawings and Specifications or within themselves, the Architect will decide which conflicting requirement governs. AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976. 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 9 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted f o the maximum erttent possible under the law. This document was produced by ANA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 1 § 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well -known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.2.4 Sections of Division 1: General Requirements, govern the execution of the work of all sections of the Specifications. § 1.3 CAPITALIZATION • I § 1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1.4 INTERPRETATION 1 § 1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. § 1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. § 1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations . with requirements of the Contract Documents. § 1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE § 1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of Instruments of Service, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' copyrights or other reserved rights. 1 ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 GENERAL § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1. the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976. 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.C. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized 1 D reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such I information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein. § 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER ' § 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contractor, prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. § 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees, including those required under Section 3.7.1, which are the responsibility of the I Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. I § 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. § 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness. Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work I under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. § 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such- • copies of Drawings and Project Manuals, as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. § 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK § 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty I on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK I § 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven -day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven -day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three -day period. If the Contractor within such three -day I period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. .ii ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 GENERAL § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the '' Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. I Insert A: AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966. 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute I of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized 11 reproduction or distribution of this AMA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. I User Notes: (2609719759) • § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. § 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR § 3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.2 Any inconsistencies, errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly - to the Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. § 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform - the obligations of Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner �. or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency, omission or difference and failed to report it to the Architect. § 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES I § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract,. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice- to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other AIA Document A201 - 1997. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 12 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) • facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance h ' § 3.4.3 The Contractor with shall a C enforce ange Order. strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. § 3.5 WARRANTY § 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will ' be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. ' § 3.6 TAXES § 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor which . are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. L , § 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. .1 Plan check fee and building permit fee will be paid by the Owner directly to the appropriate governing agency. ' § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. ' § 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. § 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work which the Contractor knows or should have known to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and.Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. ' § 3.8 ALLOWANCES § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items ' covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but ' not in the allowances; AIA Document A201 TM — 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Lava and International Treaties. Unauthorized 13 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. § 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. § 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT ' § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. § 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES § 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. § 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. § 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE § 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one record copy of affirmatively actioned Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. § 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract. Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of AIA Document A201 - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This Ala' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 14 I reproduction Or distribution of this AIA' Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:63:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) ' I • . separate contractors. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. I § 3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with I the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal I and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been appropriately actioned by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with reviewed submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of- I responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written acknowledgement to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been I issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop - Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's review thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, I Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect's review of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. I § 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carryout the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a ,l design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the • Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services 1 must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when I submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only I for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. ' 3.12.11 Electronic Media: For the limited purpose of assisting the Contractor, Subcontractors and suppliers in the I preparation of their Shop Drawings, the Architect may provide architectural Drawings on electronic media (which were the basis for the Drawings used in the bidding), at cost of preparation and handling, to the Owner for use by the I Contractor. .1 Use of the electronic media by the Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers will be at their sole risk and without liability, risk, or.legal exposure to the Owner or Architect and the Contractor agrees to release and, to the fullest extent permitted by law, defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and their agents and employees from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or relating to any such use of the electronic media by the Contractor or third parties. § 3.13 USE OF SITE ' § 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. AIA Document A201 TM —1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 15 reproduction or distribution of this AIA'' Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will he prosecuted to the \P maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) § 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 CLEANING UP § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. § 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK § 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS § 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. § 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION I § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Sections 11.1.4 and 11.1.5„ the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them - from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to- negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the 11 indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT § 4.1 ARCHITECT § 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing I architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. AIA Document A201 - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 16 reproduction or distribution of this AlA'' Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and wiii be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) § 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents ' shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. ' § 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. I § 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be an Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the one -year period for correction of Work described in Section 12.2. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. • § 4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will periodically visit the site (1) to become generally familiar- ' with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work - is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the ' Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site observations to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and • I responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1. § 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be ' responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons- or entities performing portions of the Work. The'services and obligations of the Architect will be provided in conformity with the standards or care and skill of the architectural profession. The Architect will not be responsible for the performance of the construction Contract(s), work or products, or any defects, deficiencies or effects resulting - I therefrom, or any contractor, subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, fabricator, consultant retained by the Owner, or II any other third party (including anyone working or acting on behalf of any of them). • § 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract ' Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor - to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with - Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. The Owner shall have the right to communicate directly with the Contractor whenever the Owner deems appropriate, provided that the Architect shall be advised of the substance, in writing, of any such communication. ' § 4.2.5 Based on the representations by the Contractor made in the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such 1 amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to advise the Owner to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to i ' recommend that the Owner require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This Ala Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 17 reproduction or distribution of this AEA" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and wilt be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible undo the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) '1 • § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information - given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. • Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of I equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's review of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a- component. The Architect will review Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct on -site observations to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret matters concerning performance under and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be } made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.2.14 The Architect's review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples and on -site observation of the construction work is to determine if the Contractor's submittals and Work appear to be in general conformance with the design concept set forth in the Contract Documents prepared by the Architect. It is understood that the Architect' s - review shall not be considered to be complete in every detail or exhaustive and shall also not relieve any Contractor, Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, fabricator, consultant or other third party from responsibility for any deficiency that may exist or for any departures or deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents or for the responsibility to coordinate the Work, or portion of the Work, of one trade with another. 4.2.15 The Architect's services will be performed solely for the benefit of the Owner and no Contractor, Subcontractor, supplier, fabricator, manufacturer, tenant, consultant, or other third party shall have any claim against the Architect as a result of the Owner - Architect Agreement or the performance or nonperformance of the Architect's services. • The Contractor shall bring this provision to the attention of the parties with whom it contracts and have them do the same with those whom they contract. § 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the AlA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 18 reproduction or distribution of this AlA'` Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) •I ' Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. § 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. § 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or ' as provided in Section 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly review such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and .Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the I ' determination. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial recommendation, subject to further proceedings • pursuant to Section 4.4. § 4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.6. 4.3.5.1 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional costs incurred by the Architect for the following causes: .1 More than two reviews of each Shop Drawing, Product Data Item, Sample and similar submittal of the Contractor. -- ' .2, More than two site visits for any portion of the Work to determine whether such portion of the Work is substantially - complete in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. .3 More than two site visits for any portion of the work to determine final completion. .4 Review of a Contractor's submittal out of sequence from the submittal schedule agreed to by the Architect and Contractor. .5 Responses to Contractor's requests for information where such information is available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the Contract documents, or Contractor - prepared coordination drawings. .6 Evaluation of substitutions proposed by the Contractor and making subsequent revisions to Instruments of Service resulting therefrom. § 4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Section 4.3. § 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time § 4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. AIA Document A201 TM — 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. YARNING: This AIA " Document is ;protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 19 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and wilt he prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I § 4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. The Architect will consider a time extension under this Subparagraph only if the following conditions are satisfied: .1 The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period is to be found to be unusually severe, that is,- more severe than the normal adverse weather days anticipated for the project location during any given month as published by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. .2 The unusually severe weather actually caused a delay to the completion of the project. .3 The Contractor's original schedule and completion date reflected normal anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather dependent activities. § 4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except ti anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. • § 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding ' those arising under Sections 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. An initial determination by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no determination having been rendered by the Architect. The Architect will not review disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. § 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) recommend to reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) recommend to approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable to make a recommendation to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Architect to review the Claim. § 4.4.3 In reviewing Claims, the Architect may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering determination. The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. § 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such- party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either provide a response on the requested - supporting data, advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and Internalianal Treaties Unauthorized 20 reproduction or distribution of this AtA" Document. or any poriron of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be presecuirrd to Ine maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 1 that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if an the Architect will PP g P P P PP g Y> either make a recommendation to reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 4.4.5 The Architect will make a recommendation to approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. • The recommendation for approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. • § 4.4.6 ' § 4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. § 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to determination of the Claim by the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration. • § 4.5 MEDIATION § 4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those - waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after initial determination by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. ' § 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and - I with the American Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a request for arbitration but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. § 4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 4.6 ARBITRATION § 4.6.1 § 4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation may be decided by arbitration if mutually agreed to by both parties, which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect as of July 1, 2001. Any provision in such Rules to the effect that rules in effect at the time of filing of a request for arbitration shall apply are hereby deleted, it being the intent that no amendments to the Rules shall apply to these parties. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the administrative - fees to be paid shall be those in effect as of the time of filing the request for arbitration.. The request for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. § 4.6.3 A request for arbitration shall be made within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event ' shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred - by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Section 13.7. § 4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute ' of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 21 reproduction or distribution of this AIA'' Document or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by NA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) manner, parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of request for arbitration must assert in the I request all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be requested. § 4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 DEFINITIONS § 5.1.1' A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number • and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. § 5.1.2 A Sub - subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub- subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub - subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub - subcontractor. • § 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as t� practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed - for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether - or not the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be- increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. No increase in Contract value will be awarded if the Contractor has not secured a written Bid from the rejected Subcontractor prior to opening of bids by the Owner. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. § 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS § 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms - of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward - the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and AIA Document A201 TM — 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized 22 reproduction or distribution of this AEA' Document. or any Portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I I I Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically '' provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor - that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub - subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available ' to their respective proposed Sub - subcontractors. Obligate each Subcontractor to make payments promptly when due to all persons and entities supplying to the Subcontractor labor or material for this Contract. § 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. I . § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's c ompensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. I ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS § 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or I operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and' waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Section 4.3. I § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner - Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor I shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. Ill § 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without I excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. § 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and I storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the I Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the AIA Document A201 — 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 23 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will he prosecuted to the max imum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. I User Notes: (2609719759) Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. § 6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. § 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP § 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 GENERAL • § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the �} Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. § 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 1 § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and .3 the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. § 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Section 7.3.3. 1 § 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; AIA Document A201 - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 24 I reproduction or distribution of this MA"' Document or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or .4 as provided in Section 7.3.6. § 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, ' provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. § 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, !; the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting • data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost.of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; ' .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. § 7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. § 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs. That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. § 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the • adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. I. § 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 DEFINITIONS t § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 25 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. 1 § 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. § 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. I. ■ § 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes - ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect believes may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for- such reasonable''--° as the Architect may deter—"— § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 4.3. § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the- Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be liable for claims for damages or extra costs due to delay on the Contractor's work which is not caused by the Owner and all costs for work delay incurred by the Contractor shall be paid by the Contractor. I 8.3.4 The Owner shall have no liability or other duty or obligation to compensate the Contractor or any other person for any loss of efficiency, morale, or attitude; fatigue; labor rhythm; construction acceleration; home office overhead; - under -run in the production of goods; trade stacking; reassignment of workers; concurrent operations; dilution of supervision; learning curve; beneficial or joint occupancy; logistics; ripple effect; season change; extended overhead; - profit or mark -up on delay damage; or other impact or similar damages that may be a direct or indirect consequence of, or otherwise attributable to, or caused by delay. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 CONTRACT SUM § 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. § 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES § 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright in 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized 26 I reproduction or distribution at this AIA Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) • § 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. § 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. § 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to- the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in- whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. All certifications and payments, including those pursuant to a pending- claim, shall be tentative and conditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to this effect. § 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner based - on the Architect's observations at the site and the Contractor's representations in the Application for Payment, that to- the best of the Architects knowledge, information and belief, the Work as progressed substantially to the point indicated and the quality of the Work is in substantial accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount - certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on -site observations to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques. sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from - Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to- payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.4.3 The provisions for payment and Certificates for Payment are solely for the benefit of the Owner and no other party (including sureties of the Contractor) shall have any negligence or other action against the owner, the Architect, - or anyone acting in behalf of either of them for waiving or misapplying these provisions. • AIA Document A201 — 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute ' of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This MA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 27 reproduction or distribution of this A1A' Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which • expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I § 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION ,' § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be a. made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, • the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of: ' .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts ,% previously withheld. § 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and .1 within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. .1 The Owner shall retain five percent (5%) of the progress payments due until such time as the final acceptance of the - work after correction of all deficiencies. Ii § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub - subcontractors in a similar manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of , completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a I Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. § 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. § 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. it II AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 28 reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document. or any poriion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the I r maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 1 • 111, 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT § 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days- "; after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut -down, delay and start -up, plus interest as I provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. I § 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the I responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will review the completed work to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's review discloses any item, whether or- t' not included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by- I the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another review by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate - ' of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of- the Owner and Contractor as agreed upon for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of- . the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written I acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. I § 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to- by the insurer as required under Section 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the . Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing- concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract ' Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit - a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not - be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 1 § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly review the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.- - § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. I AIA Document A201 1997. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA` Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 29 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/2012006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I. § 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final review and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly review the completed Work and, when the Architect finds - the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on -site visits and observations, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms - and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the - final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (I) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. § 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the O shall, upon application by the Contractor and rertifiratinn hy'the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS § 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 30 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and wilt be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I It .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. § 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. I § 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. I § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub - subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by I any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not I attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. • § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.2.8 When required by law or for the safety of the Work or adjoining property, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, - underpin and protect foundations and other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. The Contractor, before commencement of any part of the Work, shall give notices required to be given to adjoining landowners or other parties. , § 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS § 10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. § 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material t or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in 1, writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or II substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the I AIA Document A201 - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects: All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized 31 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will he prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. i User Notes: (2609719759) • amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut -down, delay and start-up, which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. I § 10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. 10.4.1 Hazardous materials such as asbestos, asbestos products, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or other toxic substances shall not be allowed on the site or be used in the Work. The Contractor shall notify the Owner if any of the - products or materials specified in the Contract document or proposed by the Contractor its subcontractor or material suppliers or encountered on the job site contain or are suspected to contain hazardous materials in any form, so that a qualified consultant retained by the owner can determine whether such materials may be used in the Work or need to be removed from the site or rendered harmless in a manner which will not affect the health or any persons and which will comply with applicable governmental laws and regulations. § 10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. § 10.6 EMERGENCIES § 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor o n arrnnn of an emergency shall be !determined ac nrnvr ded in S ection 4 3 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE , § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including explosion, collapse and damage to underground utilities, and loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; aircraft or watercraft .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. § 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence AIA Document A201 — 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 32 1 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document. or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will he prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I. or claims -made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. .1 Workman's Compensation: Statutory amounts and coverage as required by law. .2 Commercial Automobile, Insurance, including owned, non - owned, and hire vehicles; and for aircraft and watercraft liability if utilized: Bodily Injury and Property Damage Combined Single Limits Liability — $1,000,000 each person $2,000,000 each occurrence Il .3 Commercial General Liability Insurance: General Aggregate: $2,000,000 Products and Completed Operations Aggregate: $1,000,000 • Personal and Adv. Injury: $1,000,000 I Fire Damage: $50,000 Medical Expense: $5,000 .4 All of the above policies to include at least the following coverage: Premises / Operations Liability I Completed Operations and Product Liability Blanket Contractual Endorsement Personal Injury Liability Endorsement with Employee Exclusion removed Owners and Contractors Protective Liability • Ill Broad Form Property Damage Liability Broadening Endorsement, I.S.O. form or the equivalent • Coverage for "X" "C" and "U" Hazards I Waiver of subrogation endorsement .5 Liability certificates of insurance shall specify that insurance covers the hazards of underground explosion and collapse. I § 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after . I final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. I 11.1.4 The Contractor shall secure, pay for and maintain until all Work, including work required by any guarantee or warranty required by the Contract Documents, is completed, such insurance as will protect the Contractor the Owner, - '" the Architect, the Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them for claims directly or indirectly arising or alleged to arise out of the performance of or failure to perform the work, or the condition of the work or the- Project site, from claims by workmen, suppliers, or Subcontractors, from claims under any scaffolding, structural work or safe place law, or any law with respect to protection of adjacent landowners, and from any other claims for damages to property or for bodily injury, including death, which may arise in whole or in part from operations by the- Contractor or Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. Such insurance shall cover- all contractual obligations which the Contractor has assumed including the indemnification provisions under Paragraph 3.18 and Subparagraph 10.3.3. 11.1.5 The Contractor shall secure, pay for and maintain completed operations insurance for a period of one year after - the date of Final Completion of the Work or such longer period as may be required by law. I § 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE (Paragraph deleted) I § 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. • I AIA Document A201 TM — 1997. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unautha ized 33 reproduction or distribution of this AtA'' Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penatlies. and will be prosecuted the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not resale. User Notes: (2609719759) • 1 § 11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE �! (Paragraph deleted) § 11.3.1 § 11.3.2 1 § 11.3.3 (Paragraph deleted) I (Paragraph deleted) § 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE § 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk "all- risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors, the Architect and the Architect's consultants in the Project. § 11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all -risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any • applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. § 11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. § 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. § 11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit. • § 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. § 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance . required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation - and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966. 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 34 reproduction or distribution of this AMA" Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors, the Architect and the Architect's consultants in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. § 11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. § 11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. § 11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of.Section 11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. § 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.4. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. § 11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's . consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, 1 . agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall •• require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. § 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received - by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub - subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.6. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. (Paragraph deleted) § 11.4.10 The Contractor shall secure, pay for and maintain whatever Fire or Extended Coverage Insurance the Contractor may deem necessary to protect the Contractor against loss of owned or rented capital equipment and tools, - AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by J.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 35 reproduction or distribution of this AiA' Document. or any portion of it. may resuit in severe civil and criminal penalties, and wilt be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) equipment, scaffoldings, staging, towers and forms owned or rented by the Contractor. The requirements to secure and maintain such insurance are solely for the benefit of the Contractor. Failure of the Contractor to secure such insurance or to maintain adequate levels of coverage shall not obligate the Owner, the Architect or the Architect's consultants or their agents and employees for any losses of owned or rented equipment. If the Contractor secures such- insurance, the insurance policy shall include a waiver of subrogation clause as follows: "It is agreed that in no vent shall this insurance company have any right of recovery against the Owner or the Architect." § 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND '. (Paragraph deleted) § 11.5.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain until final payment has been made a Performance Bond and a labor and material Payment Bond, including performance and payment clauses, in an amount of 100 percent (100 %) of the Contract Sum, issued by a bonding company licensed to do business in the State in which the Project is located. - Bonds are to comply with requirements of American Institute of Architects, AIA Document A312, latest edition. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the bonds to the Owner prior to receipt of the first progress payment. § 11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's or Owner's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect or Owner, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract - Time. • § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect or Owner has not specifically.requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect or Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by- tf the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, beat the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. § 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Owner or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. § 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5, if. within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one -year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 36 reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I, 12.2.2.2 T he one-year o ear eriod for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first § Y period P P performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual I performance of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one -year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. • § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. I. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. I § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one -year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to 11 . correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. I § 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK § 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS I § 13.1 GOVERNING LAW § 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. § 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal . I representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. I If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing I' construction financing for the Project. In such event, the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. I § 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE § 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. § 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES § 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder I shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. § 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a �t breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958. 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized 37 I reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will he proseculed to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) II I • § 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS § 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, • ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner's expense. § 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. § 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract I, Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. § 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. § 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. • § 13.6 INTEREST § 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. § 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD § 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Section 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last. I AIA Document A201 TM —1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 38 reproduction or distribution at this AIA" Document. or any portion at it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to Ins II . maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I I ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped the respective periods set forth below through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any - of the following reasons: II .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to be stopped (120 days); .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be I. stopped (120 days); • .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents (30 days); or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1 (60 days). II § 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days I scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365 -day period, whichever is less. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' I written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. .I § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a . Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional %, , I days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. I § 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: • .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective I . agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. .5 Persistently fails to correct defective or poor quality work to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. § 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, , may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of , the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate I employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and ill; .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. i § 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 39 reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document. or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I 1 1 § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination • of the Contract. § 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.4.1 The. Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the t Contractor shall: .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. § 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. • • I I 1 I AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized 40 reproduction or distribution of this AIA " Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and wilt be prosecuted to trio maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) i I • Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 rM — 1997 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text. Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006. PAGE 1 Fanno Creek Place Buildings A and B Shell and Core Opus Northwest, LLC 1500 SW First Avenue, Suite 1100 Portland, Oregon 97201 LRS Architects, Inc. 1121 SW Salmon Street, Suite 100 Portland, Oregon 97205 PAGE 9 .1 Reference in the Specifications to an article, device, or piece of equipment in the singular number shall apply to as many such articles as are shown in Drawings or required to complete the installation. Mention in the Specifications or indication in the Drawings of articles, products, materials, operations, or methods requires the Contractor to furnish and install such items including all necessary plant, labor and appurtenances. Titles and headings are a part of the Specifications, the same as the text of the article or paragraph. Notes in Drawings are considered Specifications, equal in force to those in the printed text. .2 Dimensions shall be figured rather than by scale or rule. In the event of conflict between the Drawings and Specifications or within themselves, the Architect will decide which conflicting requirement governs. PAGE 10 1.2.4 Sections of Division 1: General Requirements, govern the execution of the work of all sections of the Specifications. PAGE 11 § 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals Manuals. as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. Insert A: PAGE 12 § 3.2.2 Any design inconsistencies, errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A2O1TM — 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 1 international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of ibis AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminai penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or made known g g Y Y Y to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. § 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, . inconsistency, omission or difference and knew ng y- failed to report it to the Architect. ' § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the : - . , . - • - : • - • - • - - • .. • . • . • - - • • . - . ontract,. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. PAGE 13 , .1 Plan check fee and building permit fee will be paid by the Owner directly to the appropriate governing agency. § 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing -it which the Contractor knows or should have known to be contrary I to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. PAGE 14 1 § 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one record copy of approved - affirmatively actioned Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. PAGE 15 § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved- appropriately actioned by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved- reviewed submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval acknowledgement to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's mil- review thereof. 1 Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 TM —1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIF Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 2 International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AMA" Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by MA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 1 I § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect's appreval- review of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. 3.12.11 Electronic Media: For the limited purpose of assisting the Contractor, Subcontractors and suppliers in the preparation of their Shop Drawings, the Architect may provide architectural Drawings on electronic media (which were the basis for the Drawings used in the bidding), at cost of preparation and handling, to the Owner for use by the Contractor. .1 Use of the electronic media by the Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers will be at their sole risk and without liability, risk, or legal exposure to the Owner or Architect and the Contractor agrees to release and, to the fullest extent permitted by law, defend. indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and their agents and employees 'from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or relating to any such use of the electronic media by the Contractor or third parties. PAGE 16 § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by • - • - • • - . • .: • insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 11.3, Sections 11.1.4 and 11.1.5„ the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's • consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. I PAGE 17 § 4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will periodically visit the site . • • . ...: • . - - I • - - : • - - • - ' - - . - • (1) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections observations to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1. § 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. The services and obligations of the Architect will be provided in conformity with the standards or care and skill of the architectural profession. The Architect will not be responsible for the performance of the construction Contract(s), work or products, or any defects, deficiencies or effects resulting therefrom, or any contractor, subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, fabricator, consultant retained by the Owner, or any other third party (including anyone working or acting on behalf of any of them). § 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. The Owner shall have the right to communicate directly with the Contractor Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S Copyright Law and 3 International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion at it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, end wsli be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I • whenever the Owner deems appropriate. rovided that the Architect shall be advised of the substance, in writing, of P any such communication. § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of representations by the Contractor made in the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to advise the Owner to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to recommend that the Owner require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. • PAGE 18 § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve -or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval- review of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. The Architect will review Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections -on -site observations to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret andmatters concerning performance under and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If-no-agreement with this Section 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such 4.2.14 The Architect's review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples and on -site observation of the construction work is to determine if the Contractor's submittals and Work appear to be in general conformance with the design concept set forth in the Contract Documents prepared by the Architect. It is understood that the Architect's review shall not be considered to be complete in every detail or exhaustive and shall also not relieve any Contractor, Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, fabricator, consultant or other third party from responsibility for any deficiency that may exist or for any departures or deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents or for the responsibility to coordinate the Work, or portion of the Work, of one trade with another. 4.2.15 The Architect's services will be performed solely for the benefit of the Owner and no Contractor, Subcontractor, supplier, fabricator, manufacturer, tenant, consultant, or other third party shall have any claim against 111 the Architect as a result of the Owner - Architect Agreement or the performance or nonperformance of the Architect's Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 T"" —1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This ALA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 4 I International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document. or arty portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and wilt be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 1 r • services. The Contractor shall bring this provision to the attention of the parties with whom it contracts and have them do the same with those whom they contract. PAGE 19 § 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are (I) r' subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract . Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature,-which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate review such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party ' in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the dccision. determination. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination, recommendation, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Section 4.4. 4.3.5.1 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional costs incurred by the Architect for the following I causes: .1 More than two reviews of each Shop Drawing, Product Data Item, Sample and similar submittal of the Contractor. .2 More than two site visits for any portion of the Work to determine whether such portion of the Work is substantially complete in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. .3 More than two site visits for any portion of the work to determine final completion. .4 Review of a Contractor's submittal out of sequence from the submittal schedule agreed to by the Architect and Contractor. • .5 Responses to Contractor's requests for information where such information is'available to the Contractor from a I. careful study and comparison of the Contract documents, or Contractor - prepared coordination drawings. .6 Evaluation of substitutions proposed by the Contractor and making subsequent revisions to Instruments of Service resulting therefrom. PAGE 20 § 4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. The Architect will consider a time extension under this Subparagraph only if the following conditions are satisfied: .1 The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period is to be found to be unusually severe, that is, more severe than the normal adverse weather days anticipated for the project location during any given month as published by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. • .2 The unusually severe weather actually caused a delay to the completion of the project. .3 The Contractor's original schedule and completion date reflected normal anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather dependent activities. § 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Sections 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. An initial decision determination by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision determination having been rendered by the 1 Architect. The Architect will not decide- review disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 MI - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S Copyright Law and 5 International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this A €/Ii.' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and wit be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 1 § 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) recommend to reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) recommend to approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable to make a recommendation to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve review the Claim. § 4.4.3 In eating- reviewing Claims, the Architect may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering determination. The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. I § 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Architect will either make a recommendation to reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. PAGE 21 I § 4.4.5 The Architect will make a recommendation to approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. 11. The recommendation for approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. § 4.4.6. .. • . . • . . I § 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution determination of the Claim by the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration. § 4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after initial decision- determination by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. § 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand- request for arbitration but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. - waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5, shall, after decision by the Architect or 30 days after I § 4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall may be decided by arbitration if mutually agreed to by both parties, which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIR` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 6 I International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA`' Document. or any portion ct it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the.maximurn extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 1 Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect as of July 1, 2001. Any provision in such Rules to the effect that rules in effect at the time of filing of a request for arbitration shall apply are hereby deleted, it being the intent that no amendments to the Rules shall apply to these parties. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the administrative fees to be paid shall be those in effect. - effect as of the time of filing the request for arbitration.. The mod- request for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. § 4.6.3 A request for arbitration shall be made • - •• - - • - .• - • - • • -. .. - • . - . • .. • - . - within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Section 13.7. PAGE 22 § 4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand- request for arbitration must assert in the demand request all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be d<manded.requested. § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architcct, after due investigation, Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall'propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be • increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. No increase in Contract value will be awarded if the Contractor has not secured a written Bid from the rejected Subcontractor prior to opening of bids by the Owner. § 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub - subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub - subcontractors. Obligate each Subcontractor to make payments promptly when due to all persons and entities supplying to the Subcontractor labor or material for this Contract. PAGE 24 I § 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. PAGE 26 Additions and Deletions Report for MA Document A201 TM' - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AtA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 7 international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AiA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and mill be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) I I § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect domes- believes may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be liable for claims for damages or extra costs due to delay on the Contractor's work which is not caused by the Owner and all costs for work delay incurred by the Contractor shall be paid by the Contractor. 8.3.4 The Owner shall have no liability or other duty or obligation to compensate the Contractor or any other person for any loss of efficiency, morale, or attitude; fatigue; labor rhythm; construction acceleration; home office overhead; under -run in the production of goods; trade stacking; reassignment of workers; concurrent operations; dilution of supervision; learning curve; beneficial or joint occupancy; logistics; ripple effect; season change; extended overhead; .rofit or mark -u on dela dama • e• or other im.act or similar dama•es that ma be a direct or indirect conse uence of or otherwise attributable to, or caused by delay. PAGE 27 § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to I the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. All certifications and payments, including those pursuant to a pending claim, shall be tentative and conditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to this effect. § 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner Owner based on the Architect's evaluation -of observations at the Work-site and the data prising Contractor's representations in the Application for Payment, that • . • . • .. : . , to the best of the Architect's Architects knowledge, information and belief, the Work as progressed substantially to the point indicated and the quality of the Work is in substantial accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections observations to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.4.3 The provisions for payment and Certificates for Payment are solely for the benefit of the Owner and no other party (including sureties of the Contractor) shall have any negligence or other action against the owner, the Architect, or anyone acting in behalf of either of them for waiving or misapplying these provisions. I PAGE 28 .1 The Owner shall retain five percent (5 %) of the progress payments due until such time as the final acceptance of the work after correction of all deficiencies. PAGE 29 I Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this ALA' Document or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) ,,;� 1 I § 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven I days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, Architect, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of I. shut -down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make-an-inspection-review the completed work to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection I review discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, I complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection- review by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor as agreed upon for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when ■ I such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 1 1.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, I . retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not I be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the.Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.Contractor. § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect I review the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. I PAGE 30 § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection review and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly review the completed 1 Work and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on -site visits and inspections, observations, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire I balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final . Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. I PAGE 31 10.2.8 When required by law or for the safety of the Work or adjoining property, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin and protect foundations and other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. I Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 9 International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Al Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. I User Notes: (2609719759) The Contractor, before commencement of any p art of the Work, shall give notices required to be given to adjoining landowners or other parties. PAGE 32 I 10.4.1 Hazardous materials such as asbestos, asbestos products, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or other toxic substances shall not be allowed on the site or be used in the Work. The Contractor shall notify the Owner if any of the products or materials specified in the Contract document or proposed by the Contractor its subcontractor or material suppliers or encountered on the job site contain or are suspected to contain hazardous materials in any form, so that a qualified consultant retained by the owner can determine whether such materials may be used in the Work or need to be removed from the site or rendered harmless in a manner which will not affect the health or any persons and which will comply with applicable governmental laws and regulations. .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including explosion, collapse and damage to underground utilities, and loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; aircraft or watercraft I PAGE 33 .1 Workman's Compensation: Statutory amounts and coverage as required by law. .2 Commercial Automobile, Insurance, including owned, non - owned, and hire vehicles; and for aircraft and watercraft liability if utilized: Bodily Injury and Property Damage Combined Single Limits Liability — $1,000,000 each person $2,000,000 each occurrence .3 Commercial General Liability Insurance: General Aggregate: $2,000,000 Products and Completed Operations Aggregate: $1,000,000 Personal and Adv. Injury: $1,000,000 Fire Damage: $50,000 Medical Expense: $5,000 . .4 All of the above policies to include at least the following coverage: Premises / Operations Liability Completed Operations and Product Liability Blanket Contractual Endorsement Personal Injury Liability Endorsement with Employee Exclusion removed Owners and Contractors Protective Liability Broad Form Property Damage Liability Broadening Endorsement, I.S.O. form or the equivalent Coverage for "X" "C" and "U" Hazards Waiver of subrogation endorsement .5 Liability certificates of insurance shall specify that insurance covers the hazards of underground explosion and collapse. 11.1.4 The Contractor shall secure, pay for and maintain until all Work, including work required by any guarantee or warranty required by the Contract Documents, is completed, such insurance as will protect the Contractor, the Owner, the Architect, the Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them for claims directly or indirectly arising or alleged to arise out of the performance of or failure to perform the work, or the condition of the work or the Project site, from claims by workmen, suppliers, or Subcontractors, from claims under any scaffolding, structural work or safe place law, or any law with respect to protection of adjacent landowners, and from any other claims for damages to property or for bodily injury, including death, which may arise in whole or in part from operations by the Contractor or Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. Such insurance shall cover all contractual obligations which the Contractor has assumed including the indemnification provisions under Paragraph 3.18 and Subparagraph 10.3.3. Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1.958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 10 International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this A €A`' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 1 11.1.5 The Contractor shall secure, pay for and maintain completed operations insurance for a period of one year after I the date of Final Completion of the Work or such longer period as may be required by law. I § 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. PAGE 34 Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the O Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of • I • •• . • - . 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5. -- - . ..' . . . - , § 11.3.1 § 11.3.2 I to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or 0thefw1 - - • •• - : : : - - - actor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as § 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk "all -risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall he maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors Sub - subcontractors, the Architect and the Architect's consultants in the Project. 1 § 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors Sub - subcontractors, the Architect and the Architect's consultants in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. PAGE 35 l § 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.4.10. clause. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub - subcontractors in similar manner. Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 TM - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA" Document is protected by L.S. Copyright Law and 11 International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe„ civil and criminal penalties, and wilt be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 1 § 11.4.10 The Contractor shall secure, pay for and maintain whatever Fire or Extended Coverage Insurance the Contractor may deem necessary to protect the Contractor against loss of owned or rented capital equipment and tools, equipment, scaffoldings, staging, towers and forms owned or rented by the Contractor. The requirements to secure and maintain such insurance are solely for the benefit of the Contractor. Failure of the Contractor to secure such insurance or to maintain adequate levels of coverage shall not obligate the Owner, the Architect or the Architect's consultants or • their agents and employees for any losses of owned or rented equipment. If the Contractor secures such insurance, the insurance policy shall include a waiver of subrogation clause as follows: "It is agreed that in no vent shall this insurance company have any right of recovery against the Owner or the Architect." PAGE 36 4 11.5.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain until final payment has been made a Performance Bond and a labor and material Payment Bond, including performance and payment clauses, in an amount of 100 percent (100 %) of the Contract Sum, issued by a bonding company licensed to do business in the State in which the Project is located. Bonds are to comply with requirements of American Institute of Architects, AIA Document A312, latest edition. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the bonds to the Owner prior to receipt of the first progress payment. § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's or Owner's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, Architect or Owner, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect or Owner has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect or Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. • § 12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect Owner or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. PAGE 39 § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped fer- a- peried -ef 30 consecutive days the respective periods set forth below through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which .requires all Work to be stepi3edistopped (120 days); .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stoppcd;stopped (120 days); .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201 T M - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 12 international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AiA'" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the taw. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) i I I payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; Documents (30 days); or I .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.2.2.1 (60 days). .5 Persistently fails to correct defective or poor quality work to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. § 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, .:: - - - . . : - . ' . . . • exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: PAGE 40 1 I • I. I 1 I 1 . I I 1 I I I Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201" - 1997. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 13 international Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA' Document, or any portion ct it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. I User Notes: (2609719759) 1 1 Certification of Document's Authenticity AIA® Document D401 TM — 2003 I, LRS Architects, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No. 1000253806_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA Document A201 — 1997 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report. I (Signed) 1 (Title) 1 (Dated) 1 1 1 1 I AIA Document D401 TM - 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by ti_S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA• Document, or any portion of it, may 1 result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:53:57 on 09/20/2006 under Order No.1000253806_1 which expires on 8/20/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2609719759) 1 Fanno Creek Place Summary of Work: 01 1100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Scope of work. 2. Type of Contract. 3. Work of Other Contracts. 4. Use of premises. 5. Specification formats and conventions. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Project Identification: Fanno Creek Place, Buildings A and B Shell and Core. 1. Project Location: Upper Boones Ferry Road, Tigard, Oregon. B. Owner: O PUS Northwest, L.L.C., 1500 SW First Avenue, Suite 1100, Portland, Oregon 97201. 1 C. Architect: LRS Architects, Inc., 1121 SW Salmon, Suite 100, Portland, Oregon 97205. 1. Contract Documents prepared for the Project by LRS Architects, Inc. are dated October 12, 2006. D. Contractor: OPUS Northwest, L.L.C., 1500 SW First Avenue, Suite 1100, Portland, Oregon 97201. E. The Work of the Contract includes new construction as indicated in the Drawings and as specified in this Project Manual, including Modifications incorporated into the Contract Documents. 1. Building A and B Projects consists of 3 story, Type II -B construction, steel frame office buildings, B Occupancy, with fire sprinklers. 1.3 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Concurrent Work: 1 1. Owner has or will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract: a. Tenant improvements. b. Other site work related to existing one story building located on Project site. c. Telecommunication system. d. Security system. 2. Products furnished by Owner and installed by Owner are identified as OFOI (Owner Furnished, Owner Installed). 3. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under other contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work of this Contract. LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Summary of Work: 01 1100 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1 4. Provide access to site and coordinate work according to the General Conditions of the Contract. C. If Work of other contractors in any way interferes with the Contractor's Work, notify party sufficiently in advance to give reasonable time to make necessary adjustments. D. If the Contractor's Work in any way interferes with the work of other contractors, notify other party and Owner as soon as possible and modify schedule to accommodate the other party's work, or make other arrangements to accommodate other contractors work as agreed to by Owner. ' E. Contractor recognizes that Owner is entitled, under the Contract Documents, to perform Work on site during the course of Contractor's performance, whether by Owner's forces, consultants, or separate contractors. I 1.5 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall confine construction operations, including storage of materials and equipment, to within the staging area established by the Owner. 1. Contractor's use of area established for construction operations is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other Contractors for portions of Project. 2. Use of Owner's property outside staging area will not be permitted except under unusual circumstances for limited periods of time as approved by Owner. B. Maintain clear access to project at all times for emergency vehicles, delivery of materials, and , Owner and Owner's employees access. C. Contractor shall make arrangements with city and county agencies for use of public property for construction purposes and pay all fees required for such use. D. Contractor is responsible for necessary cleaning and repair of adjacent streets resulting from Contractor's operations. 1.6 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50 1 Division format and The Construction Specifications Institute's (CSI) "MasterFormat" 2004 Edition numbering system. 1. Division 01 - General Requirements: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of 1 the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations, as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: 1 a. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. b. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. c. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. d. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words as singular, where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. • 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Fanno Creek Place Summary of Work: 01 1100 October 12, 2006 Page 3 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. P 9 Y P a. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be preformed by Contractor. b. Subjective or indicative language may be used for clarity to describe ' responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. c. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION • 1 1 I 1I I i 1 t I 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Substitution Procedures: 01 2500 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedures for the following: Ii. Contractor's responsibilities concerning substitutions. 2. Substitutions requests during the bidding period. 3. Substitutions requests after award of Contract. I 4. Substitutions not permitted. B. Related Sections: I1. Section 01 4200: Definitions and Reference Standards, for applicability of industry standards to products specified. 2. Section 01 6000: Product Requirements, for requirements governing Contractor's selection of products and product options. I 1.2 DEFINITIONS Substitutions: Contractor proposals for changes in products, materials, equipment, and I A. methods of construction required by the Contract Documents made during bidding and after award of Contract are considered to be requests for substitution. I 1. The following are not considered to be requests for substitution: a. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by Owner or Architect. b. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the t1 c. Contract Documents. Contractor's determination of and compliance with regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. I B. Substitutions accepted during the bidding period are accepted by Addendum prior to award of Contract, and thereafter are included in the Contract Documents. C. Substitutions requested and accepted after award of contract are accepted only by Change Order, and thereafter are included in the Contract Documents. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES I A. Contractor's responsibilities for substitution requests made after award of Contract are as follows: I 1. Investigate proposed products and determine they are equal or superior in all respects to products specified. 2. Provide same guarantee for accepted substitutions as for products specified. 3. Make changes in, and coordinate, the Work as may be required to incorporate and I install accepted substitutions. 4. Waive all claims for additional costs that subsequently become apparent which are related to substitutions. 1 1.4 SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Acceptability of different materials or products shall be determined by methods set forth in this I Section. B. Architect will be sole judge of acceptability of any proposed substitution, and decision of Architect will be final. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Substitution Procedures: 01 2500 October 12, 2006 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS DURING THE BIDDING PERIOD I A. Submit request for approval of a substitution on CSI Substitution Request Form; Copy included at the end of this Section. B. All substitution requests must be received in the Architect's office no less than 10 working days prior to Bid Date, unless otherwise stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. 2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS REQUESTED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT I A. Substitutions will normally not be considered after award of Contract, except due to unforeseen circumstances. B. Architect will receive and consider Contractor's request for substitution after award of Contract when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions are not met, Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. The specified product cannot be provided within the Contract time. a. Architect will not consider the request if the product cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 2. The specified product cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority. ,I and the requested substitution can be approved. 3. The specified product cannot be coordinated with other materials and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 4. The specified product cannot provide the required warranty and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the warranty. 5. The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, or other considerations after deducting additional Owner's cost of compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction, and similar considerations. C. Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or I Samples for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval. 2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS NOT PERMITTED I A. Substitutions indicated or implied on submitted Shop Drawings or Product Data without first 1 requesting approval in accordance with requirements of this Section. B. Where manufacturers, products, or systems listed in the Specifications are not followed with "or approved" or "Substitutions: Provide in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500," it is intended that substitutions are not permitted. END OF SECTION 1 I I LRS Architects, Inc. I t SUBSTITUTION REQUEST I TO: I PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: I Section Page Paragraph Description 9 9 P P I PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data I adequate for evaluation of request including identification of applicable portions. Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents that proposed substitution requires I for proper installation. Undersigned certifies following items, unless modified by attachments, are correct: I 1. 2. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. Undersigned pays for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. I 3. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts available locally or readily obtainable for proposed substitution. I Undersigned further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. .,1 Undersigned agrees, if this page is reproduced, terms and conditions for substitutions found in Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution. I Submitted by: I Name (Printed or typed) General Contractor (if after award of Contract) Signature For use by A/E I Firm Name ❑Approved o Approved as noted Address Not Approved ❑ Received too late I City, State, Zip By Date Date Telephone Fax Remarks I September 1997 The Construction Specifications Institute Northwest Region I Advancement of Construction I Technoioyy I Fanno Creek Place Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing the following Contract modifications: I 1. Requests for Interpretation. 2. Architect's Supplemental Instructions. I 3. Proposal Requests. 4. Construction Change Directives. 5. Change Orders. I B. Related Documents and Sections: 1. Document 00 7200: General Conditions. 2. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures, for administrative procedures for handling I 3. request for substitutions made after Contract award. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures, for requirements for inclusion of contract modifications in record documents. 1.2 RESPONSIBLE PARTIES A. Immediately following Contract execution, Owner and Contractor to identify each person who I is responsible for executing Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 111 A. Request for Interpretation (RFI): 1. Written request submitted by Contractor to Architect on standard form requesting interpretation of Contract documents. I 2. An RFI shall only be used as a vehicle for confirming or verifying an issue through an interpretation of the Contract Documents; responses that result in change to Contract Documents and adjustment to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time must be I documented in a Change Order. B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions (ASI): 1. Architect's written order of instruction to Contractor, signed by Architect, that authorizes minor changes in Work that do not change Contract Sum or Contract Time. I C. Proposal Request (PR): 1. Initiated by Architect: Written request by Architect to Contractor to quote change to I Contract Sum and /or Contract Time for proposed change to Contract Documents. 2. Initiated by Contractor: Written request by Contractor to Architect proposing change to Contract Documents accompanied with quotation for change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time. I D. Construction Change Directive (CCD): 1. Written order prepared by Architect, signed by Owner and Architect, directing ' Contractor to proceed with change to Contract Documents which may affect Contract Sum and /or Contract Time, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order after change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time has been determined. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600 October 12, 2006 Page 2 E. Change Order (CO): 1. Prepared by Architect and signed by Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement to a change to Contract Documents and adjustment to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time. 1.4 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI): A. Submit RFIs numbered in sequential order, reviewed by Contractor with respect to Construction Documents, with the following information: 1. Project name and address. 2. Architects name. 3. Contractors name. 4. Date of RFI. 5. Drawing and /or Specification reference. 6. Signature of Contractor's reviewer. 7. Indicate "URGENT" on RFIs that may cause impact to the project schedule. B. Architect will receive RFIs only from the Contractor; Architect will not accept RFIs directly from subcontractors, suppliers, or other entities. C. Architect will receive only legible, properly prepared RFIs. ' 1. Unreadable facsimile machine RFIs, illegibly written RFIs, or RFIs with incomplete information, will be returned promptly without action. 2. RFIs may be transmitted to Architect by facsimile machine. a. Architect will return response by same method received from Contractor. 3. Architect will review RFIs with respect to Contract Documents and return response within 7 calendar days. a. RFIs marked "URGENT" will take precedence, in order received, over outstanding RFIs and be answered by Architect as soon as possible. D. Contractor, in being fully familiar with Construction Documents, shall not be relieved of responsibility to coordinate the Work to prevent adverse impact to Project schedule when submitting RFIs to Architect for interpretation of Contract Documents. 1.5 ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS (ASI) ' A. Architect's Supplemental Instructions may include supplementary or revised Drawings and /or Specifications to describe minor changes to Contract Documents. B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions will be executed on AIA Form G710, or other similar form designated by Architect. 1.6 PROPOSAL REQUEST (PR) I A. Proposal Request Initiated by Architect: 1. Proposal Request is a request for information only, and is not an instruction or 1 authorization to execute the change, or an order to stop Work in progress. 2. Proposal Request may include supplementary or revised Drawings and /or Specifications to describe a proposed change to Contract Documents. 3. Contractor shall submit cost and /or time quotations to Architect within 10 working days following receipt of Proposal Request. LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600 October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Proposal Request Initiated by Contractor: 1 1. Proposal Request is for a change in the Work accompanied by a detailed quotation of impact on Contract Sum and /or Contract Time. 2. Proposal Request may include revised Drawings and /or Specifications to describe a proposed change to Contract Documents. 3. Proposal Request is a request for information only, and does not authorize the Contractor to execute the change or stop Work in progress without the Architect's and ' 4. Owner's authorization. Contractor initiated Proposal Requests may take the form of a "Claim" where Contractor finds it necessary for proper execution of the Work, to propose a change in the Work that is not shown or indicated in Contract Documents, and may affect ' Contract Sum and /or Contract Time, which for which no Proposal Request or Construction Change Authorization has been issued by the Architect. a. Contractor's determination that Architect's response to an RFI that affects ' Contract Sum and /or Contract Time may be addressed in a Proposal Request. 5. Architect shall respond to Contractor initiated proposals within 10 working days following receipt of Proposal Request. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE (CCD) A. A Construction Change Directive is issued in lieu of a Proposal Request when time is of the essence and change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time cannot be determined prior to start of the work. B. A Construction Change Directive is executed on AIA Form G714 or other similar form designated by Architect, and may include supplementary or revised Drawings and /or Specifications to describe change to the Contract Documents. ' C. Both Owner and Architect will sign and date a Construction Change Directive that directs the Contractor to proceed with change to the Contract Documents prior to determination of cost I and /or time. D. Contractor shall submit to Architect itemized change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time within 10 working days when possible, and no more than 30 calendar days, except for the following conditions: 1. Unit prices have been agreed upon and quantities cannot be determined until work described in the CCD has been completed. ' 2. Owner has agreed that Contract Sum and /or Contract Time of can be determined at completion of work described in the CCD. E. When Owner, Architect, and Contractor concur on change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time, as described in the General Conditions for "Construction Change Directives," the change to Contract Sum and /or Contract Time will be included in a Change Order. ' 1.8 CHANGE ORDERS A. Architect will prepare each Change Order utilizing AIA Document G701, or other similar form acceptable to Owner. ' LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Contract Modification Procedures: 01 2600 October 12, 2006 Page 4 B. Changes to Project Contract Sum and /or Contract Time listed or indicated in Change Orders shall include or be determined by methods described in the General Conditions, and as follows: 1. Proposal Requests approved for change to Contract Documents by Owner and Architect that have not been converted to a Construction Change Directive. 2. Construction Change Directives where Owner, Architect, and Contractor have agreed I to change in Project Contract Sum and /or Contract Time. 3. Changes to Project Contract Sum and /or Contract Time that have not been documented by Proposal Request or Construction Change Directive, but have been agreed upon by Owner, Architect, and Contractor. I 1.9 DOCUMENTATION FOR CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS A. Cost and Time Quotations: Support quotation for changes in the Work with sufficient I substantiating data to allow Architect to evaluate quotation, to include the following: 1. Labor expended in hours and unit cost. I 2. Equipment cost. 3. Products, with quantities used and unit cost, including purchase source. 4. Taxes, Insurance, and Bonds. 5. Credit for deleted work where applicable with same documentation as required for I cost increases for additional work. 6. Overhead and profit, determined after credits have been deducted from additions. 7. Justification for change in Contract Time. B. For claims for Work not authorized through Proposal Requests or Construction Change I Directives, provide supporting documentation for each claim for additional cost as indicated above for cost and time quotations with the following additional information: 1. Name of Owner's authorized agent who ordered work, and date of Order. I • 2. Dates and hours work performed, and by whom. 3. Timecard records, including summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. I 4. Receipts and invoices for products used including quantities and unit costs. 5. Receipts and invoices for equipment utilized, including dates and time of use. 6. Provide the same documentation indicated above for subcontracts same as required for Contractor's own forces. I C. Document requests for Product substitutions according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 1.10 CORRELATING CHANGE ORDERS WITH OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Revise Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment to record each Change Order as separate item of work with adjustment to Contract Sum and Contract Time as described in I Section 01 2900: Payment Procedures. B. Revise Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. C. Revise Subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by modifications to I Contract Documents. D. Record modifications in Record Documents. 111 END OF SECTION I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 'Fanno Creek Place Payment Procedures: 01 2900 p October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and I process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 2600: Contract Modification Procedures, for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES • I A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. I 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: I a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. List of Subcontractors, principle suppliers, and fabricators. c. Submittals Schedule. I 2. Submit the ,Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line I items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. I 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. I e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one - hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued I evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total to equal the Contract Sum. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Payment Procedures: 01 2900 October 12, 2006 Page 2 5. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing for items stored off -site. 6. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 7. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Application for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 1 B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment date is as agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in that Agreement. 1. Comply with Section 60, chapter 675, Oregon Laws 2003 for projects in the State of Oregon: a. Progress payments must be made on the basis of certified billing or estimate of the work during the preceding 30 day billing cycle, unless notice of an alternate billing cycle is stated on each page of Drawings and Specifications in accordance with Oregon law. b. The Owner shall make progress payments to the Contractor within 14 days after the date the billing is submitted, unless notice of allowance for payments to be made later than 14 days is stated on each page of Drawings and Specifications in accordance with Oregon law. c. A billing or estimate is deemed to be certified 10 days after the Owner or Architect receives the billing or estimate, unless the Owner or Architect issues a written statement detailing those items not approved, as allowed for by Oregon law. The Owner may extend the period within which the billing or estimate may be certified if such extended period is stated on each page of Drawings and Specifications in accordance with Oregon law. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703. D. Application Preparation: Compete every item of form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Match entries with data on the Schedules of Values. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Payment Procedures: 01 2900 October 12, 2006 Page 3 E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each application for payment to I Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. I F. Waivers of Mechanic Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from subcontractors, sub - subcontractor, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. P1. . Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested in previous applications, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit I 4. waivers. Submit final Application for payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 1 5. Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or I coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. P3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Products list 5. Submittals Schedule. 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. I 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Initial progress report. 10. Report of preconstruction conference. 111 11. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 12. Performance and payment bonds. 13. Data needed to acquire the Owner's insurance. 1. H. Application for Payment at Substantial. Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. I 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued I 3. previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with this . application include the following: I a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. c. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Final cleaning. f. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. g. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. I h. List of incomplete Work recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 aY Fanno Creek Place Payment Procedures: 01 2900 October 12, 2006 Page 4 Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the. Contract Sum. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 6. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 7. Assurance that.incomplete Work not accepted, if applicable, will be completed without undue delay. 8. Evidence that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 9. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 10. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on ill Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General Project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. I 3. Project meetings. 4. Construction schedule. 5. Submittal schedule. 6. Field Engineering. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 3300: Submittal Procedures. I 2. Section 01 6000: Product Requirements, for coordinating selection of products. 3. Section 01 7400: Cleaning, for coordinating progress and final cleaning. 4. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures, for coordinating Contract closeout I requirements. 1.2 COORDINATION I A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Specification Sections to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, which depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. I 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Coordinate storage or staging areas for all trades. 1 B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1 C. Administrative Procedures: 1. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other I construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: I a. Preparation of Contractor's construction Schedule. b. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. c. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. d. Delivery and processing of submittals. e. Progress meetings. f. Preinstallation conferences. g. Startup and adjustment of systems. h. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Project Management and Coordination: October 12, 2006 Page 2 E. Coordination of Key Personnel: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. 1. Identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities. 2. List addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. 3. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, and temporary field office. Keep list current at all times. 1.3 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Content: Project specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components for architectural, 1 structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicated required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on Contract Documents and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise 1 indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions, and agreements achieved. Distribute meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 72 hours after each meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: 1 1. Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but not later than 15 days after execution of Agreement. a. Hold conference at Project site or other location agreeable to Owner and Architect. b. Conduct meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties deemed necessary. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 3. All participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. I 4. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: I a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and Tong -lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. I e. f. Procedures for requests for interpretations (RFIs). Procedures for testing and inspection. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of Contract Documents. I i. j. Submittal procedures. Routing of correspondence. k. Preparation of Record Documents. I. Use of premises. I k. Work restrictions. m. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. n. Construction waste management and recycling. I o. Site access, traffic, and parking availability and rules. p. Office, work, and storage areas. q. First aid. r. Security. I s. Progress cleaning. 5. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes. ( C. Preinstallation Conferences: l 1. Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. I 2. Attendees: Contractor and its superintendent, installer and representatives of manufacturer's and fabricator's involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or I 3. will follow. Include code enforcement personnel if required by local codes. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: I a. b. The Contract Documents. Related Change Orders. c. Submittals. d. Review of mockups. I e. Possible conflicts or compatibility problems. f. Time schedules. g. Weather limitations. h. Manufacturer's written recommendations. I i. Warranty requirements. j. Acceptability of substrates. , k. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. I I. Testing and inspecting requirements. m. Installation procedures. n. Coordination with other work. o. Protection of adjacent work. 1 ' 4. Do not proceed with installation if conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene conference at earliest feasible date. II LRS Architects, Inc. n Fanno Creek Place Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 October 12, 2006 Page 4 5. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes to each party present and to parties who should have been present. D. Progress Meetings: 1 1. Conduct progress meetings at Project site at regular scheduled intervals. a. Coordinate meeting dates with preparation of payment request. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, Contractor, and each subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of immediate future activities. a. Participants shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that affect progress, including topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Progress cleaning. 5) Status of correction of deficient items. 6) Field observations. 7) Requests for interpretation (RFIs). 8) Status of Proposal Requests. 9) Status of Change Orders. 10) Project administration issues. 5. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes only to Owner and Architect. Contractor shall be responsible for distribution to subcontractors, suppliers, or other entities concerned with current progress. 6. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal bar -chart type Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days after date established for commencement of Work. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 . Fanno Creek Place Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 October 12, 2006 Page 5 • I B. Indicate each significant construction g ct on activity separately. Identify first working day of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1 1. Include start-up, finish, duration, slack time, approval dates, material ordering, delivery dates, anticipated shutdowns, partial occupancy and Owner use, Completion I Date and other such information required to allow Owner's monitoring of progress of project and identifying critical path of events required to meet Completion Date. 2. Use same breakdown of units of Work as indicated in Schedule of Values. I C. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. D. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting I where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. 1. Bring significant deviations from Schedule immediately to Owner's and Architect's attention. ill 1 . 6 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE • I A. Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. I 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontract, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1.7 FIELD ENGINEERING i A. Engineering Services: 1. Provide field engineering services as required for construction. I 2. Locate and maintain an accurate benchmark on or near site that has been established by a Registered Surveyor. Relate subsequent elevations of finish grades and building elements directly to this benchmark. B. Existing Control Points: 1. Protect control points prior to starting Work, and preserve permanent reference points I 2. during construction. Make no changes or relocations of control points without prior written notice to Architect's Representative. 3. Report to Architect's Representative when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or I requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. C. Instrument Layout: I 1. Use site benchmarks and existing elevation control points to establish lines and levels, located and laid out by survey instrumentation. 2. Locate water supply, storm and sanitary sewer lines. I 3. Locate edge and level of paving, curbs, walks, and sloping landscape. 4. Locate building foundations, column locations, and floor levels. 5. Locate controlling lines and levels required for plumbing, mechanical and electrical Work within 5 feet of building perimeter. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. il Fanno Creek Place Project Management and Coordination: 01 3100 October 12, 2006 Page 6 D. Corrections: • 1. Record changes in elevations or location of Work on project record Documents. 2. Report errors in horizontal and vertical dimensions and grades prior to starting Work. E. Verification and Coordination: 1. Verify dimensions of new and existing Work. 1 a. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawings, modify to accommodate. If field measurements differ significantly, notify Architect prior to commencing Work. 2. Coordinate locations of openings through floors, roofs and walls with Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. F. Documentation: 1. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work when requested by Architect. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of Work, including Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. B. Related Sections: I 1. 2. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures, for substitutions submittal requirements. Section 01 2900: Payment Procedures, for Applications for Payment and Schedule of Values submittal requirements. 3. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination, for Coordination Drawings, Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittals Schedule, and distribution of meeting and conference minutes submittal requirements. 4. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for test and inspection reports submittal requirements. 5. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures, for Record Drawings, Record Specifications, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and warranties submittal requirements. 6. Sections with specific requirements for submittals indicated in those Sections. ' 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. ' B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings may be provided by ' Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals under provisions stated in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed by need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. ' a. Architect reserves right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. b. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with these provisions. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements of Section 01 3100, Project Management and Coordination, for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. 1 D Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. 1. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 2. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. LRS Architects, Inc. 1. Fanno Creek Place Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 October 12, 2006 Page 2 3. Initial Review: Allow minimum 10 working days for initial review of each submittal. a. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 4. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 5. Resubmittal Review: Allow minimum 10 working days for initial review of each submittal. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 2. Include the following information on label: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Name of manufacturer. g. Submittal number, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a I decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g. 06 1000.01). Resubmittals should include an alphabetic suffix (e.g. 06 1000.01A). h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. I i. Drawing number and detail reference, as appropriate. j. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. I F. Submit items pertaining to only one Specification Section in each submittal. G. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. 1 1. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. 2. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than , Contractor. I. Resubmittals: make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, t fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others necessary as necessary for performance of construction activities. K. Use for Construction: Use only submittals with mark indicating Architect's final release. L. Submittal Log: Maintain an accurate submittal log for duration of Work, showing current status of submittals at all times. Make log available to Owner and Architect for review upon request. 1 • LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. I 2.2 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of I product or equipment. 1. If information must be specifically prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not Product Data. 1 B. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 1. Product Data, such as general product brochures containing information on other products that are not required or proposed for Work, which are not clearly marked to indicate which products and options are applicable to Project will be returned by Architect without review or action. 1 C. Include following information, as applicable: 1. Manufacturer's written recommendations. I 2. 3. Manufacturer's product specifications. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Standard color charts. 5. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. I 6. Compliance with specified referenced standards. 7. Testing by recognized testing agency. 8. Performance characteristics and capacities. I 9. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 10. Wiring diagrams showing factory installed wiring. 11. Printed performance curves. 12. Operational range curves. I 13. Mill reports. 14. Notation of coordination requirements. D. Colors and Patterns: Except where specific color and pattern is indicated in Contract Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in specified products, I submit minimum 2 color and pattern charts to Architect for selection. E. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 1 F. Number of Copies: Submit the following for each required submittal: 1. 2 copies for Architect. I 2. Number of copies as required for Maintenance manuals. 3. Number of copies as required by Contractor for distribution. I G. Architect will retain 2 copies and return remainder to Contractor, marked with action taken and, where applicable, corrections or modifications required. 1. Distribute Product Data necessary for performance of construction activities. 2. Retain number of copies required for maintenance manuals. LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 October 12, 2006 Page 4 • 2.3 SHOP DRAWINGS I' A. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project specific information, drawn accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show pertinent aspects of item and its method of connection to Work. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings are permitted. B. Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as 1, applicable: 1. Dimensions; Identify dimensions established by field measurement. i 2. Identification of products. 3. Fabrication and installation drawings. 4. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. I 5. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer installed and field installed wiring. 6. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. 7. Templates and patterns. 8. Schedules. 9. Design calculations. . 10. Compliance with specified standards. 11. Notation of coordination requirements. 12. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 13. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. C. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full -size drawings, at least 8 -1/2 by 11 I inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches D. Number of Copies: Submit 3 opaque copies of each submittal. 1. One copy will be returned to Contractor marked with Architect's action taken and, I where applicable, corrections or modifications required. 2. Contractor is responsible for reproduction and distribution of final Shop Drawings as reviewed and necessary for performance of construction activities. 2.4 SAMPLES A. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these I characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of those characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories 1, together in one submittal package. B. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 1 1. Generic description of Sample. 2. Product name and name of manufacturer. • 3. Sample source. 4. Submittal number, and number and title of appropriate Specification Section. C. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. D. Field Samples: Full -size examples erected on -site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish Project standard. Il 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 October 12, 2006 Page 5 E. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of P 9 9 colors, textures, and patterns available. 1 • 1. Submit 2 color charts. Architect will return 1 color chart with options selected. F. Samples for Verification: Submit full size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from I same material to be used in the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. 1 . 1. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components. I b. Small cuts or containers of materials. c. Complete units of repetitively used materials. d. Swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. e. Color range sets. I f. Components used for independent testing and inspection. 2. Number or Samples: Submit 3 sets of Samples. Architect will retain 1 sample and return remainder of sets to Contractor. I a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication • techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics are to be I b. demonstrated. If variation in color, pattern, or texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets that show approximate limits of variations, or number of units indicated in individual U Specification Sections. 2.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS I A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: 2 copies for Architect, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. I 2. Certificates and Certifications. a. Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an I office or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 4500, I 4. Quality Control. Welding, Installer, Manufacturer, Product and Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. B. The following are Informational Submittals: I 1. Test and Inspection Reports. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Qualification Data. I 5. Welding Certificates. 6. Installer Certificates. 7. Manufacturer Certificates. 8. Product Certificates. S LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 October 12, 2006 Page 6 9. Material Certificates. 10. Material Test Reports. 11. Research /Evaluation Reports. 111, 12. Compatibility Test Reports. 13. Field Test Reports. 14. Maintenance Data. 15. Design Data. 16. Manufacturer's Instructions. 11, 17. Manufacturer's Field Reports 18. Material Safety Data Sheets.. a. Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1 b. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. 2.6 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. B. Delegated Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit 3 copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed by a design professional. 1 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW 1 A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. 1. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. PP P B. Approval Stamp: Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION 1 A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, mark with an action stamp, and return to Contractor. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 October 12, 2006 I Architect will stamp Action Stamp: amp each submittal with an action stamp, and mark stamp 7 appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: II , 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When a submittal is marked "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN," Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. I 2. Final- But - Restricted Release: When a submittal is marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED," Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on submittal and requirements of Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. I . 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When a submittal is marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT," do not proceed with Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. I . a. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to notations and resubmit. Repeat as necessary to obtain an action releasing submittal. • b. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "REVISE AND 1 RESUBMIT," at Project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Submittals for Record: a. Where a submittal is for record purposes or special processing or other I activity, Architect will return submittal marked "RECORD ONLY." ID. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, return it marked " RECORD ONLY," or will reject and return it if it does not appear to comply with requirements. II E. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect may not review submittals not required by the Contract Documents. Such submittals may be returned to sender without action, or discarded. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS 1 A. Submittals are required, but not limited to, the following items; refer to each of the following Specification Sections for specific submittal requirements: Section Section Name Product Shop Samples Other No. Data Drawings 01 2900 Payment Procedures X I 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination X 01 4115 Design -Build Requirements X X 01 7329 Cutting and Patching X Ill 01 7419 Construction Waste Management X 01 7700 Closeout Procedures • X 1 03 3000 Cast -In -Place Concrete X X X 03 4713 Tilt -Up Concrete X X X 04 2113 Brick Masonry X X X X 1 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing X X 05 2100 Steel Joists Framing X X X 05 3100 Steel Decking X X X 11 1 , 05 4000 Cold- Formed Metal Framing X X 05 5000 Metal Fabrications X X X 05 5100 Metal Stairs _ X X 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 October 12, 2006 Page 8 1 06 1053 Miscellaneous Carpentry X X 061600 Sheathing X X it 06 4000 Architectural Woodwork X X II 07 1700 Bentonite Waterproofing X X X 07 1900 Water Repellents X X 07 2100 Thermal Insulation X 07 2129 Sprayed Insulation X 07 2400 Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems X X X 1 (EIFS) _ I 07 2500 Weather Barriers X X 07 2616 Below -Grade Vapor Retarders X X 07 5100 Built -Up Bituminous Roofing X X X 07 5216 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing X X X (SBS) 07 6000 Flashing and Sheet Metal _ X _ X X X 07 7233 Roof Hatches X 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping X X 07 8443 Fire - Resistive Joint Firestopping X X 07 9200 Joint Sealants X X 08 1113 Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames X X X 08 1400 Wood Doors X X X X 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels X X 08 4113 Aluminum- Framed_Entrances, Storefronts, X X X X and Windows 08 4413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls X X X X 08 6300 Metal- Framed Glazed Canopy X X X X I 08 7100 Door Hardware X _ X X 08 8000 Glazing X X X 08 9000 Louvers and Vents X X 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies X 09 2117 Gypsum Board Shaft -Wall Assemblies X X 09 2900 Gypsum Board X I 09 3000 Tiling X _ X 09 5100 Acoustical Ceilings X X X 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories X X 09 6800 Carpeting X X X X I. 09 8110 Acoustic Insulation and Sealant X X 09 9100 Painting X X X 09 9653 Elastomeric Coatings X X X 1 101400 Signage X X X 10 2113 Metal Toilet Compartments X X X 10 2813 Toilet Accessories X X 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties X X 12 4813 Entrance Floor Mats X X 12 9313 Bicycle Racks X 1 14 2400 Hydraulic Elevators X X X 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1: Fanno Creek Place Submittal Procedures: 01 3300 October 12, 2006 Page 9 I 22 0500 Common Results for Plumbing X X 22 1100 Water Distribution X X 22 1300 Sanitary Sewerage X X X 22 1400 Storm Drainage X X X I 31 1000 Site Clearing X 31 2000 Earth Moving X X 31 2500 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls X 1 32 1216 Asphalt Paving _ X X 32 1313 Concrete Paving X X X I 32 1373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants X X 32 1615 Extruded Concrete Curbs X 32 1713 Parking Bumpers X 32 1723 Pavement Markings X 32 8400 Planting Irrigation X X X 32 9200 Turf and Grasses X X 32 9300 Plants X X I 33 4613 Foundation Drainage X 1 END OF SECTION 1 I 1 1 1 I I LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Fanno Creek Place Design -Build Requirements: 01 4115 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Certain components of the Work under this project are Design Build. It is the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate and assume or assign to subcontractors the complete 11 responsibility for the design, calculations, submittals, fabrication, transportation, and installation of the Design Build portions or components as required in this Section. The I Applicant is responsible for submitting to the City of Tigard, Bureau of Buildings, all Design Build documents required for the separate approval for each Design Build item. There are no exceptions. Design Build components of this Work are defined as complete, operational . systems, provided for their intended use. I , B. The Architect's or Engineer of Record's review of Design Build submittals shall be for design intent and shall not lessen nor shift the responsibility from the Applicant or the assigned it II subcontractor to the Owner nor to the design professional. The Owner shall not be responsible for paying for any delays, additional products, additional hours of work or overtime, restocking or rework required due to failure by the Applicant or the subcontractor to coordinate their Work with the Work of other trades on the project or to provide the Design Build portion or component in a timely manner to meet the schedule of the project. C. City of Tigard Requirements: Follow the City of Tigard's requirements current at the time of I submission. The Applicant is responsible for coordinating and submitting all material required by the City so that the City's review will not adversely affect the construction schedule. At or near the time of application, the Applicant shall meet with the City to identify Design Build I components and how they are to be submitted and processed. D. Design Build Components of the Work: Design Build components known at this time: I 1. Irrigation system. 2. Metal stairs and railings. 3. Storefront systems. 4. Curtainwall systems. I 5. Tilt -up precast concrete. 6. Glazed canopy system. 7. Steel joist framing. . 8. Miscellaneous metal fabrications. I , 9. Division 21, Fire Suppression. 10. Division 22, Plumbing. 11. Division 23, Heating, Ventilating, and Air Condition (HVAC). I 12. Division 26, Electrical. 13. Division 27, Communications. 14. Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security. 1 E. Refer to systems descriptions in technical Sections of these Specifications for additional information on Design Build work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Applicant: Person applying for building permit and person coordinating Design Build systems with basic building and with each other. Includes coordination of required submittals. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Design -Build Requirements: 01 4115 October 12, 2006 Page 2 B. Architect or Engineer of Record: Architect or Engineer registered in state that Project is located, engaged by the Owner to provide plans and computations, and establish design criteria for Design Build components and specifications required by the Building Official for principle Project systems. Includes staff, consultants, and consultants' staffs. C. Contractor: Entity engaged by the Owner to construct the Project. Includes employees, subcontractors, suppliers, and their employees. 1 D. Design Build Engineer: Professional Engineer registered in state that Project is located, engaged by the Contractor to provide plans, computations, and specifications required by the Building Official for adesignated builder- designed specialty system, in accordance with criteria set forth in Contract Drawings and Specifications. E. Seal: Certification that plans, computations, and specifications were designed and prepared under the direct supervision of the Engineer whose name appears thereon. F. Review Stamp: Certification that the Architect or Engineer has reviewed plans, computations, and specifications bearing the seal of the Design Build Engineer, verifying conformance with information given and design concept set forth in Contract Drawings and Specifications. G. Approval Stamp: Certification that the Building Official has reviewed a submittal and finds it 1 acceptable with respect to applicable code compliance. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures. B. Design Build submittals are required to show complete criteria, design assumptions, details, calculations, submittals, instructions for fabrication, assembly, installation and interface with other trades, unless noted otherwise in the specific Specification Section. C. Complete submittals shall be submitted with the Design Build Engineer's seal and calculations 1 for that portion of Work. Submittals without required calculations, without the Design Build Engineer's seal, and which have not been reviewed by the Contractor will not be reviewed by the Architect or Engineer of Record. 1.4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS A. Some Design Build components are shown in the Contract Documents for design intent. The 1, purpose is to have the Contractor responsible for providing, coordinating, and installing the Design Build component. ; B. Design Build components attached to the structural frame or supplemental to the structural frame shall be designed for the anticipated loads as outlined in the Contract Documents. These Design Build components shall be coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. 1 C. Load reactions at the interface between the Design Build components and the structural frame shall be clearly defined to allow for a review by the Architect or Engineer of Record. END OF SECTION 1, LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 • October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS • A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved ": When used to convey Architect's action on the Contractor's applications and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Reviewed ": When used in lieu of "Approved" to convey Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. D. "Directed ": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted," have the same meaning as "directed." E. "Indicated ": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in the Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." F. "Regulations ": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that I control performance of the Work. G. "Furnish ": Supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. H. "Install ": Operations at the Project site including unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. I. "Provide ": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. J. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. K. "Experienced ": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully i completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. L. "Project Site ": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown in Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project located. M. "Testing Agencies ": Independent entities engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of I those inspections or tests. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 I October 12, 2006 Page 2 1 B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project should be familiar I with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, I obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Conflicting Requirements: Comply with the most stringent requirement when compliance with 1 two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels. 1. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the Architect for decision before proceeding. E. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. III 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS I A. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 800 - 872 -2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) 202- 272 -0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board 202 - 272 -0080 www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations 888 - 293 -6498 1 Available from Government Printing Office 202 - 512 -1530 www.gpoaccess.govecfr/index.html UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards 800- 872 -2253 Available from Access Board 202- 272 -0080 1 www.access-board.gov B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) 202 - 862 -5100 , www.aluminum.org AABC Associated Air Balance Council 202 - 737 -0202 www.aabchq.com 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 October 12, 2006 Page 3 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 847- 303 -5664 www.aamanet.org I AASHTO American Association of State Highway and 202 - 624 -5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org 1 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and 919- 549 -8141 Colorists (The) I www.aatcc.org ACI American Concrete Institute / ACI International 248- 848 -3700 www.aci - int.org III AFPA American Forest & Paper Association 800 - 878 -8878 www.afandpa.org 202 -463 -2700 I, AGA American Gas Association 202 - 824 -7000 www.aga.org I AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) 703 - 548 -3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (See CPA) . I Al Asphalt Institute 859- 288 -4960 www.ashpaltinstitute.org 1 AIA American Institute of Architects (The) 202 - 626 -7300 www.aia.org I AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 800 - 644 -2400 www,aisc.org 312- 670 -2400 1 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 202- 452 -7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 303 - 792 -9559 ww.aitc- glulam.org I w ALGA Associated Landscape Contractors of America -3 -2 p 800 95 522 www.alca.org 703 - 736 -9666 1 ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee, Incorporated 301 - 972 -1700 www.alsc.org I AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. 847 - 394 -0150 www.amca.org I ANSI American National Standards Institute 202 - 293 -8020 www.ansi.org APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association 253 - 565 -6600 I www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association 941- 454 -6989 www.archprecast.org I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 October 12, 2006 Page 4 1 ARI Air - Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute 703 - 524 -8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association 202 - 207 -0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 800 - 548 -2723 I. www.asce.org 703- 295 -6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and 800 - 527 -4723 Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 404 - 636 -8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International 800- 843 -2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org 212- 591 -7722 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering 440 -835 -3040 III www.asse - plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International 601- 832 -9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International 703 - 534 -8300 www.awci.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 800 -449 -8811 www.awinet.org 703- 733 -0600 AWPA American Wood - Preservers' Association 334 - 874 -9800 www.awpa.com • AWS American Welding Society 800 - 443 -9353 www.aws.org 305 - 443 -9353 AWWA American Water Works Association 800- 926 -7337 www.aws.org 305 - 794 -7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 212 - 297 -2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) 703 - 620 -0010 www.bia.org 1 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. 216- 241 -7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association 630- 584 -1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 423- 892 -0137 1 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 301 - 596 -2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I. Fanno Creek Place Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 1 , October 12, 2006 Page 5 CPA Composite Pan Association 301- 670 -0604 www.pbmdf.com I CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association 800 - 510 -2772 www.cppa - info.org 202 -462 -9607 I CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) w 800- 882 -8846 ww.carpet- rug.com 706- 278 -3176 I CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 847- 517 -1200 www.crsi.org CS Commercial Standard of National Bureau of Standards 202- 512 -1800 I CSA CSA International 800 -463 -6727 (Formally: IAS - International Approval Services) 416- 747 -4000 www.csa-international.org I CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) 800 -689 -2900 www.csinet.org 703- 684 -0300 I DHI Door and Hardware Institute 703- 222 -2010 www.dhi.org I EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association 800 - 294 -3462 www.eima.com 770 - 968 -7945 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. 914 - 332 -0040 I www.asce.org FMG FM Global 401- 275 -3000 1 (Formally FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com GA Gypsum Association 202 - 289 -5440 I www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America 785 - 271 -0208 www.glasswebsite.com 1 , GSI Geosynthetic Institute 610 - 522 -8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) 1 HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association 703 -435 -2900 www.hpva.org IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) 212 -419 -7900 I www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 212- 248 -5000 www.iesna.org ITS Intertek 800 - 345 -3851 www.intertek.com 607- 753 -6711 I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fann oCe Creek Place Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 October 12, 2006 Page 6 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council 315 - 646 -2234 www.igee.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) 613- 233 -1510 1 www.igmaonline.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 74901 11 www.iso.ch ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association 702 - 567 -8150 www.issfa.net LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association 216 -241 -7333 II MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association 312 - 644 -6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MIA Masonry Institute of America 213 - 388 -0472 MIA Marble Institute of America 440 - 250 -9222 I www.marble-institute.com MPI The Master Painters Institute 888- 674 -8937 www.paintinfo.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 312- 332 -0405 www.naamm.org NAIMA The North American Insulation Manufacturers Association 703 - 684 -0084 www.naima.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association 703 - 713 -1900 I ff I www.ncma.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association 202 - 775 -3550 I. www.ncma.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 301 - 657 -3110 www.necanet.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1847 Rosslyn, VA 22209 703 - 841 -3200 www.nema.org NFPA National Fire Protection Association 800 - 344 -3555 www.nfpa.org 617- 770 -3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council 301 - 589 -1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association 703 -442 -4890 www.glass.org 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 11. Fanno Creek Place Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 I October 12, 2006 Page 7 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association 800 - 933 -0318 www.natlhardwood.org 901 -377 -1818 1 NLGA National Lumber Grades Association 604 - 524 -2393 www.nlga.org I NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 800-323-9545 www.nrca.net 847- 299 -9070 ii NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association 888 - 846 -7622 II www.nrmca.org 301 - 587 -1400 NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association 800 - 342 -1415 I www. ntma.com 703 - 525 -8788 NWCB Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (Seattle) 800 - 524 -4215 Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau (Portland) 503- 295 -0333 I NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) I PCA Portland Cement Association 847- 966 -6200 www.portcement.org. I PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute 312 - 786 -0300 www. pci. org PTI Post Tensioning Institute 602 - 870 -7540 I www.post- tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections 800 - 644 -2400 III www.boltcouncil.org 312- 670 -2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute 301 - 340 -8580 www. rfci. com l SDI Steel Deck Institute 847- 462 -1930 www.sdi.org I SDI Steel Door Institute 440 - 899 -0010 www.steeldoor.org SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council 315 - 646 -2234 II www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association I (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute 803-626-1995 www.steeljoist. I SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' 703-803-2980 National Association, Inc. www.smacna.org I SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturers Association 312- 456 -5590 www.ssma.org 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I • Fanno Creek Place Definitions and Reference Standards: 01 4200 I October 12, 2006 Page 8 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings 877- 281 -7772 www.sspc.org 412 - 281 -2331 SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute 816 -472 -7974 www.swrionline.org 9 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. 864 - 646 -8453 www.tileusa.com 1 UL Underwriter's Laboratory, Incorporated 800 - 704 -4050 1 www.ul.com 847 - 272 -8800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council 202 - 828 -7422 www.usgbc.org WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 800 - 283 -1486 www.wclib.org 503 - 639 -0651 ' WDMA Wood Window & Door Manufacturers Association 800 - 223 -2301 www.wdma.org 847- 299 -5200 WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association 800 - 550 -7889 www.wmmpa.com 530 - 661 -9591 I WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association 800 - 725 -0333 www.wsrca.com 650- 548 -0112 i WWPA Western Wood Products Association 503 - 224 -3930 www.wwpa.org C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. IBC International Building Code ICC International Code Council, Inc. 703 - 931 -4533 1 www.iccsafe.org ICC -ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. 800 -423 -6587 www.ice - es.org 562- 699 -0543 OSSC State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specification or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 202 - 272 -0167 www.epa.org OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration 800 - 321 -6742 www.osha.gov 202 - 693 -1999 I END OF SECTION 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 ' Fanno Creek Place Quality Control: 01 4500 1. October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services. I 1. Quality control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. a. Requirements do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. 2. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 7329: Cutting and Patching, for requirements for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities. I 2. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for independent testing of concrete mix design and for concrete slab moisture vapor emissions. 3. Section 03 4713: Tilt -Up Concrete, for independent testing requirements of concrete mix design. 4. Section 09 6500: Resilient Flooring, for independent testing requirements for concrete slab moisture vapor emissions. 5. Section 09 6800: Carpeting, for independent testing requirements for concrete slab moisture vapor emissions. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES II A. Owner will contract separately for services of independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. B. Inspections and testing costs required by defective Work or improperly -timed notices shall be paid by Contractor: C. Utilization of testing laboratory services shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to Y 9 perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1. 1.3 RETESTING A. Contractor responsible for retesting and associated cost where results of inspections and I tests prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements. 1.4 ASSOCIATED SERVICES 1 A. Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. B. Provide auxiliary services as requested. 1 C. Notify agency in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. D. Auxiliary services include, but are not limited to, following: 1 1. Providing access to Work. 2. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. • r Fanno Creek Place Quality Control: 01 4500 October 12, 2006 Page 2 I E. Coordinate activities to accommodate services with a minimum of delay. F. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests. 1. Except where indicated as responsibility of testing agency, Contractor is responsible for taking samples. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1, A. Qualifications for Inspection and Testing Agencies: 1. Engage inspection and testing service agencies that are prequalified as complying with American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in types of inspections and tests to be performed. 1 2. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in State where Project is located. B. Duties of Testing Agency: 1. Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performing its duties. I 2. Agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests. 3. Agency shall notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities of deficiencies observed in Work during performance of its services. 4. Except as otherwise specified, testing laboratory shall secure, handle, and store samples and specimens for testing. C. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection and test to: 1. Architect 2. Contractor 3. Governmental agencies requiring submission of reports 4. Other persons as directed by Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Applicable 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 1 A. Comply with requirements of Section 1701 of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on 2003 Edition of the International Building Code. B. Following Sections contain requirements for special inspections: , 1. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete 2. Section 03 4713: Tilt -Up Concrete 3. Section 05 1200: Structural Steel Framing 4. Section 05 2100: Steel Joist Framing 5. Section 05 3100: Steel Decking 6. Section 05 4000: Cold- Formed Metal Framing 7. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications 8. Section 05 5100: Metal Stairs 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Quality Control: 01 4500 ' October 12, 2006 Page 3 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. 1. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer and Owner. B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe: 1. Site conditions 2. Conditions of surfaces and installation 3. Quality of workmanship 4. Start-up of equipment 5. Test, adjust, and balance of equipment applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for review. 3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, and sample taking, repair damaged construction. 1. Restore substrates and finishes. 2. Comply with Section 01 7329, Cutting and Patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for inspection and testing. 3.4 EVALUATION OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Satisfactory completion of Work will be judged on results of laboratory and site tests and inspections. 1 B Results of tests and inspections that indicate Work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents will be considered deficient. C. Contractor has responsibility to remove and replace deficient Work at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. • Fanno Creek Place Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, security and I protection facilities. .USE CHARGES 1 A. General: Include cost or use charges for temporary facilities in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to: 11 1. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police and fire department rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations." 2. ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition." 3. NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." C. Electric Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code." D. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 A. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. B. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on -site. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide new materials, or use undamaged, used materials in serviceable conditions, suitable for use intended. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000 October 12, 2006 Page 2 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job -built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes, of sufficient size and furnished to accommodate needs of construction personnel. 1. Provide enclosed space within field office adequate for project meetings. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL- rated, with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self- contained, liquid propane gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline burning space heaters, or open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by UL, FM, or another a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service. 1 1. Arrange with utility company, for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. 1 D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. 1. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of the fixtures and facilities. E. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Locate area distribution boxes so that individual trades may furnish and use 100 ft. II I maximum length extension cords to obtain power and lighting at points where needed for work, inspection, and safety. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that will provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. I 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and requirements without operating entire system. I G. Heating: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. 1 H. Telephone: Provide temporary telephone service in common use facilities for use by all personnel engaged in construction activities. I 1. 2. Provide one telephone line in each field office. Provide a dedicated telephone line for a facsimile machine in each field office. 3. Make telephone and facsimile service available to use by the Owner and Architect. 4. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers, including the following: I a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. I c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineer's office. f. Owner's office. I g. Principal subcontractor's field and home offices. I. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service including electronic mail, in primary field office. I 3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES I A. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. 1. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and I paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas as necessary for construction operations. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 31 2000, Earth Moving. I 3. Delay installation of final course of permanent asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair base course pavement before installation of final course of asphalt pavement specified in Section 32 1216, Asphalt Paving. B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. I D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. I E. Project Identification Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 1 F. Water Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419, Construction Waste Management. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Temporary Tem Facilities and Controls: 01 5000 October 12, 2006 Page 4 . G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. I 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. H. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for use of elevators for construction operations. 1 I. Temporary Stairs: Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate until permanent stairs are available. . J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective 1 covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at the time of acceptance. 3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES A. Environmental Protection: 1. Provide P , rotection operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and P by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or that other undesirable effects. 2. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. B. Site Enclosure Fence: Provide site enclosure fence in manner that will prevent people and I animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, or similar violations of security. D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structural adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. 1. Provide appropriate warning signs to inform personnel and the public of hazards being protected against. E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 111 F. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses until permanent fire protection facilities are operable. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire protection equipment. 4. Supervise welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. Develop and post information for overall fire prevention and protection program for personnel at Project site. 6. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection when required by code or authorities having jurisdiction. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Temporary Facilities and Controls: 01 5000 October 12, 2006 Page 5 3.4 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL ' A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in.use of temporary facilities to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when the need for its service has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. 2. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs. D. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. 1. Where temporary paving has occurred in areas intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill of subsoil in I the area. a. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of I plant materials or lawn. 2. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as 9 P rY required by the governing authority. 1 E. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Product Requirements: 01 6000 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 2500: Substitution Procedures. 2. "Section 01 4200: Definitions and Reference Standards. 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1 A. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work. 1. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of I 2. similar intent. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, listed in the manufacturer's published I product literature. B. "Materials" are products shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. C. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping. I 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Before Contractor's first request for payment, submit a complete list of major products proposed for use in the Project. 1 1. Include proprietary product names, manufacturer's name, and installing Subcontractor's name. I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Source Limitations: Provide products of the same kind from a single source to the fullest I extent possible. B. Compatibility of Products: When given the option of selecting 9 P 9 roducts, Contractor is products, for providing products and construction methods that are compatible with I previously selected products and construction methods, or products that have been specified to which the selected products must be compatible. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations. I B. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at the site. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, or other losses. I D. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. II LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Product Requirements: 01 6000 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1 E. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. F. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. G. Store products subject to damage by weather above ground, under cover in a weathertight 1 enclosure, and with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 1. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. PART2 PRODUCTS • 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the time of installation. B. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions are permitted. C. Semi - proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated that complies with Specifications. No substitutions are permitted. 1 D. Nonproprietary Specifications: When products or manufacturers are not listed, the Contractor may use any product by any manufacturer that complies with the Specifications and 1 referenced standards. E. Product Substitutions: Where products or manufacturers are named and accompanied by the term "equal," "approved," or "approved equal," comply with Section 01 2500, Substitution Procedures, to obtain approval of an unnamed product. F. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where a product or assembly listing exact characteristics required, provide a product or assembly that provides those characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. G. Performance Specification Requirements: Where compliance with performance requirements are specified, provide products that comply with those requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. H. Specified Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation is specified, provide a product that complies with that code, standard, or regulation. Visual Matching: Where matching a sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. 1 J . Visual Selection: Where product requirements include the phrase " .. as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures, .. " or a similar phrase, the Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected that complies with other specified requirements. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 !I Fanno Creek Place Product Requirements: 01 6000 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 K. Inappropriate Product Selections: If Contractor believes specified product, method, or system is inappropriate for use Contractor shall notify the Architect before performing Work in 1 question. 1. If notice of objection is not received prior to delivery to site, it will be assumed by 1 Owner that Contractor agrees specified products, methods, and systems are appropriate for use in the Project. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in I the applications indicated. 1. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 1 2. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary from damage and deterioration. "B. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with Manufacturers' instructions, consult Architect for further instructions. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 . Fanno Creek Place Cutting and Patching: 01 7329 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for cutting, fitting, and patching of Work required to: I 1. Make several parts fit properly. 2. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill -timed work. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. I 4. Remove and replace defective work. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination, for coordinating cutting and patching with other construction activities. 2. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for cutting and patching operations related to inspection and testing. . I 3. Refer to individual Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching. 4. Divisions 22, 23 and 26, for mechanical and electrical requirements and limitations I applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where cutting and patching involves structural elements, I submit for approval a proposal describing procedures. Include the following information in the proposal: I 1. Describe extent of cutting and patching required, how it will be performed, and why it cannot be avoided. 2. Indicate changes to structural elements, and changes in appearance of visual elements. Include structural calculations. I 3. List products proposed for use and entities that will perform the Work. 4. Indicate dates that work will be performed, duration of the Work, and when work will be uncovered for Architect's observation. I 5. List utilities that cutting and patching work will affect. 6. Submit cost estimate and secure Architect's approval of cost estimate and type of reimbursement before proceeding with cutting and patching ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load carrying capacity of load deflection ratio. I 1. Obtain approval before cutting and patching structural elements. I B. Do not cut and patch operating elements in a manner that would reduce their capacity to perform as intended, cause increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. C. Do not cut and patch exposed elements of construction that in the Architect's opinion would I reduce the visual aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. 1. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unacceptable manner. 1 1.4 WARRANTY A. Cut and patch construction using methods and with materials in such a manner as to not void any warranties required or existing. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 n Cutting and Patching: 01 7329 Fan no Creek Place 9 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 1 A. Use new materials identical to existing materials. B. For exposed surfaces where identical materials are not available, use materials that visually 1 match existing adjacent surfaces as nearly as possible. C. Use materials whose installed performance is equal or better to that of existing materials. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 1 A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling. B. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new Work. C. Discrepancies: If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify Architect and secure direction before proceeding further. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION 1 A. Provide temporary support of work to be cut, including shoring and bracing as required to maintain structural integrity of Work. 1 B. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 3.3 GENERAL PERFORMANCE 1 A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Where required, perform excavating and backfilling in accordance with applicable requirements of Division 31 Sections. C. Provide dust proof barriers where necessary to protect existing surfaces. i 3.4 CUTTING A. Perform cutting and demolition by methods that will provide the least damage to other portions of Work. B. Prior to cutting existing work, locate concealed utilities to eliminate possibility of service interruption or damage. C. Cut through concrete or masonry with a carborundum masonry saw or diamond -core drill. 111 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. i Fanno Creek Place Cutting and Patching: 01 7329 October 12, 2006 Page 3 I D. When masonry construction must be ierced, furnish and install a steel pipe sleeve in P PP opening and grout in place neatly. I 1. Leave grout surface to match existing finish. 2. Fabricate sleeve one inch in diameter larger than pipe or insulation. 3. Pack between sleeve and pipe with waterproof sealant. I 4. At penetrations of fire - resistant rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire- resistant rated materials as require to maintain assembly of fire- resistant rating of penetrated element, or as required by Building Code. I 3.5 PATCHING I A. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide a finished installation complying with tolerances and finishes specified for type of construction involved. B. Where replacement of equipment and fixtures is required, restore existing plumbing, heating, 1 ventilation, air - conditioning, electrical, and similar systems to full operational condition. C. Refinish surfaces to match existing adjacent finish, patching with seams that are durable and as invisible as possible. I 1. Where possible, inspect and test patched area to demonstrate integrity of seam. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. I 3. 4. For assembly, refinish entire unit. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining work in manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. I D. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with existing or new work is not possible, submit to Architect, for approval, recommendation for terminating surface along straight line at natural line of division. I 1. Where change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit to Architect, for approval, recommendation for providing smooth transition. 3.6 CLEANING I A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching work is performed. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Cleaning: 01 7400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for maintaining Project buildings and site in a standard of I cleanliness during construction period. B. Related Sections: • I 1. Section 01 5000: Temporary Facilities and Control, for removal of temporary facilities. 2. Section 01 7419: Construction Waste Management 3. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures. I 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with applicable requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. I PART PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide personnel, equipment, and materials as needed to maintain specified standard of cleanliness. I 2.2 COMPATIBILITY A. Use only cleaning materials and equipment that are compatible with surfaces being cleaned, 1 as recommended by manufacturer of material. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Do not-allow accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items not I required for construction of this Work. 1. Completely remove all scrap, debris, and waste material from job site and dispose of in a legal manner. I 2. Provide adequate storage for items and waste to be removed from job site, observing requirements for fire and environmental protection. B. Storage Areas: Maintain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, 1 which does not impeding traffic or drainage. 1. Inspect arrangement of stored materials weekly. Restack, tidy, or otherwise service I arrangements. C. Site and Structures: I 1. Inspect site and structures weekly, and more often if necessary, and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material. a. Remove such items to place designated for their storage. Maintain site in a neat and orderly condition. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Cleaning: 01 7400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 2 2. Sweep interior spaces clean as often as necessary to maintain a clean environment. a. Clean, for purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable . effort and a hand -held broom. 3. As required prior to installation of succeeding materials, clean structures or applicable portions thereof to degree of cleanliness recommended by manufacturer of succeeding material. 4. Following installation of finish floor materials, clean finish flooring daily at times while Work is being performed in space in that finish materials are installed to keep floor free from foreign material that may be injurious to finish. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. "Final Cleaning," for purpose of this Section, and except as may be specifically provided elsewhere, shall be interpreted as meaning level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials. B. Prior to Substantial Completion, remove from Project site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste. C. Broom clean paved areas on site and public paved areas at approaches to site. 1 D. Exterior Surfaces: 1. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. 2. Hose down entire exterior surfaces of structure if necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness. E. Interior Surfaces: 1. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. 2. Remove paint droppings, spots, and stains. 3. Clean both sides of glass surfaces. 4. Polished surfaces: Apply polish recommended by manufacturer of material to be polished. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Construction Waste Management: 01 7419 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1 1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS A. Waste materials produced as a result of this project shall be reused or recycled to minimize I impact of construction waste on landfills and to minimize expenditure of energy and cost in fabricating new materials. 1.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN 1 A. Reuse or recycle debris generated as a result of work performed on project when practicable and cost effective. 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 ON -SITE MATERIALS SORTING AND STORAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Verify recycling facilities or waste processor requirements for preparation of materials to be I accepted and to what degree materials can be contaminated. B. Recycle the following waste materials: P1. Wood 2. Metals (ferrous and non - ferrous) 3. Cardboard 4. Drywall 5. Masonry and Concrete 6. Office paper 1 C. Coordinate with local hauler to provide separate containers for recycled materials listed above. 1. Subcontractors shall follow source separation requirements for each waste, and use I appropriate on -site container for each type of waste material. 2. Provide separate containers for non - recyclable materials. - D. Rebates: Paid or credited by hauler /recycler to Contractor. 1 E. Inform field personnel and subcontractors about recycling program, and continuously monitor program to verify proper source separation and to avoid contamination of recyclable materials. I F. Recycling Processors and Facilities: P 1. Comprehensive list of recycling facilities in Portland Metro are available from local building permit office or by contacting Metro at 503 - 234 -3000. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I '1 Fanno Creek Place Closeout Procedures: 01 7700 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1 11 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following: I 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record documents. I 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Starting and Adjusting. 6. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 1 B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections. I C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 2900: Payment Procedures, for requirements for Applications for Payment I for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Section 01 5000: Temporary Facilities and Control, for removal of temporary facilities. 3. Section 01 7400: Cleaning, for final cleaning requirements. I 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. I 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's Punch List), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. I 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner use of the Work and I access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, I and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. I 8. 9. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction to Owner's personnel. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, I construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Complete final cleanup requirements required in Section 01 7400. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes, including touchup painting. 1 B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. 1. On receipt of request, the Architect will either proceed with inspection, or without I completing inspection, advise the Contractor that based on limited inspection, the construction is not sufficiently complete for Substantial Completion. 1 i LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Closeout Procedures: 01 7700 October 12, 2006 Page 2 2. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection, or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate can be issued. a. Architect will reinspect when assured by Contractor that Work identified in previous inspection has been competed and corrected. b. If additional inspections are required, the Owner will charge the Contractor to reimburse Architect for time and expenses. c. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 3. Owner will allow Contractor no longer than 30 calendar days from Date of Substantial Completion to remedy deficiencies. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION 1 A. Prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following. 1. Submit a final Application for Payment, according to requirements of Section 01 2900. 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. 1 1. On receipt of request, the Architect will either proceed with inspection, or advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 2. Architect will prepare the final Certificate for Payment after inspection, or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate can be issued. a. Architect will reinspect when Work identified in previous inspection as 1 incomplete is competed and corrected. b. If additional inspections are required, the Owner will charge the Contractor to reimburse Architect for time and expenses. 1 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Closeout Procedures: 01 7700 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: I a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. 1 d. e. Name of Contractor. Page number. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS • 1 A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss. I B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of black line white prints of Contract Documents or Record CAD Drawings required. 1. Mark the Record Drawings to show the actual installation and construction where I installation or construction varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Drawings. I a. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. I 2. Mark record sets with erasable red - colored pencil, clearly describing change by graphic line and note. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 1 a. Call attention to entries by a "cloud" drawn around areas affected. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted I from original Drawings. a. Conversion of Schematic Layouts: Show on Record Drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, centerline of each run of items shown I schematically on Drawings. Clearly identify item by accurate note such as "cast iron drain ", "galv. water ", and the like. Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item ( "under slab ", "in ceiling plenum ", "exposed ", and the like). Relate by identification descriptive to Specifications. I b. Show final location of electrical junction boxes and outlets, telephone and data outlets, supply and return registers, and like. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate I numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawings; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind I each set with durable paper cover sheets with identification. C. Record Specifications: Submit one complete copy of Project Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. I 1. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation or from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 2. Mark copy with proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and I 3. equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. Note related Change Orders and other modifications, where applicable. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Closeout Procedures: 017700 October 12, 2006 Page 4 D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind miscellaneous records and identify each in same format as specified for Operation and Maintenance Manuals, ready for continued use and reference. 1. One set of evidence of compliance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Certificates of Inspection. b. Certificates of Occupancy. 1 2. One set of certificates of insurance for products and completed operations. 3. One set of evidence of payment and release of liens. 4. One copy of list of Subcontractors, service organizations, and principal vendors, including names, addresses, and telephone numbers where they can be reached for emergency service at all times including nights, weekends, and holidays. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1 A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations. 2. Maintenance Data: Included manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance, and copies of warranties and bonds. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submit one set of warranties, organized into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual, in same format as specified for Operation and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not applicable) 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Prior to request for certification of Substantial Completion, start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment and operating components for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Closeout Procedures: 01 7700 1 October 12, 2006 Page 5 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1 1. 2. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Include instruction for system design and operational philosophy, review of documentation, 1 operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair. END OF SECTION 1 i 1 I. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 111 1. Concrete forming 2. Concrete reinforcing. 3. Concrete accessories. 4. Concrete footings and foundation walls. 5. Floor slabs -on- grade. 6. Elevated floor slabs on metal deck. 7. Vapor retarder. I 8. Vapor Emission Control System. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for special inspection and independent testing requirements. 2. Section 03 4713: Tilt -Up Concrete, for concrete tilt -up wall construction and compatibility of bond - breaker with vapor emission control system for interior slabs. 3. Section 05 5100: Metal Stairs, for concrete filled stair pan treads. 4. Section 07 1700: Bentonite Waterproofing, for preparation requirements for concrete . substrates to receive waterproofing. 1 5. Section 07 2616: Below -Grade Vapor Retarders, for concrete slab -on -grade construction. 6. Section 09 6500: Resilient Flooring, for floor slab moisture requirements affecting Work of this Section. 1 7. Section 09 6800: Carpeting, for floor slab moisture requirements affecting Work of this Section. 8. Section 12 4813: Entrance Mats, for concrete formed recess. 9. Section 32 1313: Concrete Paving. 10. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION 1 A. Anchor bolts to be embedded in concrete, supplied under provisions of Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications. I 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: I 1. Submit manufacturers product information on concrete accessory materials, including sealer, hardener, and their VOC content. a. Provide schedule of specific areas to receive each type of product specified for interior slab -on -grade treatment, such as sealers, hardeners, and Vapor Emission Control System. Identify name of each product proposed for use. 1 B. Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Submit steel reinforcing placement drawings prior to fabrication of reinforcing. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 315. I 2. Identify and dimension each type of reinforcing bar. C. Mix Design Data: Submit a mix design formula, with supporting test data per ACI, at least 10 days prior to delivery of concrete. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 October 12, 2006 Page 2 I D. Test Reports: Submit copies of laboratory and field test reports for concrete work. 1. Submit copies of inspection and independent testing reports required in Section I 01 4500, Quality Control. E. Certificates: Submit letter from concrete supplier that concrete delivered meets specified requirements. F. Batch Ticket: Provide a batch weight ticket with each truck for inspection agency. 1. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 Batch Ticket Information. I G. Reinforcement Test Reports: Submit two copies of mill test reports on grade 60 reinforcing prior to placing concrete. I H. Documentation that application of Vapor Emission Control System for concrete slabs -on- grade has been certified by manufacturer of product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reinforcing Steel Standards: ■ 1. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" 2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, Commentary on Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. I 3. ASTM A615 and Supplement #1. 4. ASTM A82, Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. B. Mix Design Qualifications: Employ testing laboratory or concrete supplier acceptable to Architect to perform materials evaluation, testing, and design of concrete mixes. C. Plant Certification: Ready Mix Plant to comply with NRMCA certification regulations. 1. Ready Mix Plant and Equipment: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94. D. Test concrete slabs -on -grade for moisture vapor emissions prior to application of finish floor materials as described in Sections 09 6500 and 09 6800. 1. Owner will engage an Independent Testing Laboratory in accordance with requirements of Section 01 4500. 2. Provide test results to installers of work of Sections 09 6500 and 09 6800. E. Application of moisture vapor emission and alkalinity barrier to be certified by manufacturer of Vapor Emission Control System. I 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete mix design and placement requires special inspection per State Building Code I Section 1701. 1.6 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE I A. Convene a pre - installation conference within two weeks prior to commencing Work of this section. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Review installation procedures, testing procedures, and coordination required with related Work, concrete design mixes, concrete admixtures, including placement of concrete on vapor retarder and application of Vapor Emission Control System. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Deliver reinforcement to the job site bundled, tagged, and marked. 1. Tag to indicate bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings I shown on Shop Drawing placement diagrams. B. Store reinforcement in a manner to revent damage and accumulation of dirt and excessive P 9 rust. I 1.8 SITE CONDITIONS A. Temperature and Weather Requirements: 1. Do not place concrete when temperature or weather will affect performance or appearance of concrete. 2. Maximum wind velocity for unprotected floor slabs, stairs, ramps, and walks: 15 mph. 3. Minimum Ambient Air Temperature: 40 degrees F. 4. No precipitation expected within 8 hours for unprotected concrete surfaces. I B. Substrate Requirements: 1. Do not place concrete on muddy or frozen soil. 2. Remove water and ice from footing trenches. I 3. Remove ice from formed surfaces. 4. Remove water and ice from underslab vapor retarder. • PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 FORM MATERIALS I A. Forms for Exposed Concrete: Plywood, metal, or other acceptable panel -type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. 1. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to I joint system shown on Drawings. B. Smooth - Formed Finished Concrete: Form - facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. APA B -B Plyform, Class 1, Exterior exposure durability classification, mill oiled omitted, 3/4 inch thickness. I I. C. Form Lumber: Douglas Fir, Construction Grade, No. 2 or better, dressed on at least two edges and one side (Si S2E) for tight fit. I D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. E. Form - Release Agent: Commercially formulated form - release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of I concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form - release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form - facing materials. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 October 12, 2006 Page 4 F. Form Ties: Factory- fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass - fiber- reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spelling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT 1 A. Reinforcing Bars: Intermediate grade steel conforming with "Specifications for Billet -Steel Concrete Reinforcing Bars ", ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed, unless specifically noted as grade 40. B. Weld Type Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706, Grade 60. C. Reinforcing Accessories: 1. Chairs for Support of Reber: "Concrete Brick," Precast concrete or fiber - reinforced 1111 concrete, of greater strength that concrete; do not use steel devices over vapor retarder. 2. Reinforcing Tie Wire: ASTM A 82, 16 gauge, double annealed iron wire. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS I A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or Class C. 1 B. Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Water: Clean, free of oils, acids, organic material. D. Admixtures: 1. Air- Entraining: ASTM C 260. 2. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A water reducing or Type D water reducing and retarding. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Vapor Emission and Control System: Concrete sealer, hardener and curing compound for interior floor slabs -on -grade to receive applied floor finish. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CS 2000 Spray Applied System, by Creteseal (800 - 278 - 4273). 2. Provide manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty for the floor covering system covering labor and materials necessary to repair, or replace if repairs cannot be made, the floor finish covering failure due to substrate originated moisture and /or moisture -born contaminates. B. Curing Compound: Sodium Silicate, for concrete floor slabs where vapor emission and control 111 system is not used. 1. Eucosil; Euclid Chemical. 2. Day -Chem Sil -Cure (J -13); Dayton Superior Corporation. 3. Sonosil; Sonneborn - Chemrex. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 October 12, 2006 • Page 5 C. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment, (SC); Liquid Hardener, Sealer, and Dustproofer: For interior exposed concrete floor slabs. 1. Ashford Formula; Curecrete Chemical Co., Inc. with 20 year warranty. III 2. Day -Chem Sure Hard (J -17); Dayton Superior Corporation. 3. Kure -N- Harden; Sonneborn - Chemrex. 4. Seal Hard; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. D. Nonmetallic Nonshrink Grout: 1. Standard: ASTM C 1107. 2. ' Acceptable Compounds: 111 a. Burke: Nonmetallic Grout. b. Euclid Chemical Co.: NS Grout. c. Master Builders: Masterflow 713 or 928. d. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight 588 Precision Grout. e. Five Star Products, Inc.: Five Star Grout. E. Bonding Agent: 1. Standards: ASTM C 932, ASTM C 881 and ASTM C 631. 2. Acceptable Agents: I a. Hornweld by A. C. Horn. b. Weld -crete by Larsen. c. Thorobond by Thoro System Products. d. Sonocrete or Sonobond by Sonneborn. F. Patching Compound: 1 1. Acceptable Compounds: Epolith Patcher or Sonopatch by Sonneborn. G. Concrete curing membrane: I 1. Reinforced Laminated Paper for Traffic Areas: ASTM C 171, Orange Label Sisalkraft by Fortifiber Corp. 2. Reinforced Laminated Paper for Nontraffic Areas: ASTM C 171, Sisalkraft SK -10 by Fortifiber Corp. 1. H. Curing Moisture - Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene I sheet, or synthetic fiber mat complying with AASHTO M -171, such as the following: . 1. Synthetic Fiber Mat for Traffic Areas: Transguard, by ArmorIon, a Division of Reef Industries, Inc. I I. Aggregate Base Under Building Slabs -On- Grade: As specified in Section 31 2000. J. Vapor Retarder: Specified in Section 07.2616 for below -grade vapor retarders. 1 K. Self- Expanding Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium bentonite or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete. I 1. Volclay Waterstop -RX; Colloid Environmental Technologies Co. 2. Conseal CS -231; Concrete Sealants Inc. 3. Hydrotite; Greenstreak. li 4. Mirastop; Mirafi Moisture Protection, Div. of Royal Ten Cate (USA), Inc. II LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 I October 12, 2006 Page 6 I 2.5 MIXING A. Proportioning: Comply with ACI 211.1 1 1. Proportion concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Article 3.8. B. Proportion Adjustments: 1. Mix designs may be adjusted when material characteristics, site conditions, weather, test results or other circumstances warrant. ,1' a. Submit proposed revised concrete mixes to Architect. C. Ready Mix Plant Mixing Procedures: Comply with ASTM C 94. 1 1. Mix full load for 3 minutes at high speed upon arrival at site. 2. Mix additional 5 minutes after adding water. D. Design Mix Requirements: ' 1. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. 2. Maximum Slump for Footings and Floor Slabs: 4 inches + 1/2 to - 1 inch. 1 3. Maximum Slump for Walls: 4 inches + 1/2 to - 1 inch. 4. Entrained Air: 5 percent + or - 1 -1/2 percent; use only for exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Do no use for tilt -up panels. 5. Minimum Compressive Strength: a. Columns and Walls: fc = 4,000 psi in 28 days. b. Foundations: fc = 3,000 psi in 28 days. , c. Interior Slabs -on -grade and Elevated Slabs: fc = 3,500 psi in 28 days. d. Site Concrete and Pads: fc = 3,000 psi in 28 days, air entrained. 6. Probability of Test Falling Below Specified Strength: 1 out of 5. 1 7. Maximum Pozzolan (Fly Ash) Content: 15 percent of weight of cementitious material. 8. High- Range, Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494. Use for interior slabs -on- grade to achieve specified water /cement ratio, and tilt -up panels with significant reinforcement. 9. Water /Cement Ratios: a. 0.42 for interior slabs -on- grade. b. 0.50 for other concrete. E. Concrete Fill for Steel Pan Type Stairs: I 1. One part cement, 1 -1/2 parts sand, and 1 -1/2 parts size No. 7 coarse aggregate. 2. Reinforce with 2 x 2 x 14 gage galvanized wire. 3. Minimum concrete strength 3500 psi at 28 days. I 2.6 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication of Steel Reinforcing: Comply with CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, MSP -1, I ACI 301, ACI 315, and ACI 318. 1. Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7 for bending dimension. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I 1' Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 October 12, 2006 Page 7 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork in accordance with ACI 301. B. Construct formwork so concrete structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch, for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch, for other concrete surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete, unless otherwise shown or indicated. F. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form - release agent, according to manufacturer's instructions before placing reinforcement. G. Leave formwork for structural elements in place until concrete has achieved 28 -day design compressive strength. ' H. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in Work and apply new form- release agent. 1. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. Anchor Bolts: 1. Set anchor bolts for structural plates with anchor bolts double nutted to plywood or steel templates. 2. Set anchor bolts for equipment with anchor bolts double nutted to templates furnished by equipment manufacturer. 3.2 AGGREGATE BASE AND VAPOR RETARDER I A. Refer to Section 31 2000 for aggregate base under building slabs -on- grade. B. Place, protect, and repair vapor retarder as specified in Section 07 2616. 111 3.3 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING STEEL A. Comply with CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, MSP -1. B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Remove loose rust, mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Support reinforcing to prevent displacement with metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers. D. Set wires so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 1 E. Stagger reinforcing bar splices 36 inches minimum at alternate bars. i LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 October 12, 2006 Page 8 F. Lap continuous bars in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 12, Class B, unless otherwise I noted. G. Placement tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch plus or minus. I H. Construct hooked reinforcing to comply with ACI 318, Section 7.1 to 7.3. I. Notify Architect of items interfering such as conduit, pipes, inserts, sleeves, etc., and obtain I written approval on procedure before placement of concrete. J. Minimum Concrete Cover for Reinforcing Bars: Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7, Paragraph I 7.7, unless otherwise noted. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT I A. Comply with ACI 301 and 304, placing concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. B. Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand rodding and tamping. C. Work concrete around reinforcement, embedded items and forms. D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated item. II, Screed, tamp, and trowel- finish concrete surfaces. 3.5 FINISHING A. Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Public View: 1. Provide smooth form finish for concrete. it • 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 10.2.2. 3. Remove fins and projections. 4. Patch tie holes and defects. B. Concealed Concrete Surfaces to Receive Waterproofing: 1. Provide smooth form finish for concrete acceptable to applicator of waterproofing. I 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 10.2.2. 3. Provide concrete surfaces that are free of honeycomb, loose particles, cracks, pits (pinholes), fins and projections, penetrations, or foreign, including form release I materials, detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. 4. - Patch tie holes and defects. C. Floated Slab Finish: 1 1. Provide floated finish for slab surfaces to receive washed, troweled, and broomed finish. I 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 11.7.2. 3. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit float finishing. 4. Check surface plane with a 10 foot straightedge at two or more angles during or after first floating. 5. Level to flatness of 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 6. Refloat immediately to a uniform sandy texture. I is LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 I October 12, 2006 Page 9 D. Troweled Slab Finish: 1. Provide troweled finish for interior slab surfaces exposed for walking, to receive I resilient or carpet floor covering, or to receive ceramic tile flooring. 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 11.7.3. I 3. Provide a floated finish as specified above. 4. Power trowel slab to smooth surface free of defects except minor trowel marks. 5. Eliminate trowel marks by hand troweling slab when surface is sufficiently hard. 6. Perform final hand troweling when trowel rings as trowel is moved over slab surface. 7. Trowel to flatness of 3/16 inch in 10 feet. I 8. Grind slab surfaces or fill with underlayment to remove defects of sufficient magnitude to show through intended floor covering. I E. Broom Slab Finish: 1. Provide a broom finish for exterior walks, stair treads, slabs and ramps. d a ps . 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 11.7.4. I 3. Provide a floated finish as specified above. 4. Draw a broom or burlap belt across surface to give slab a course transverse scored texture. I F. Joint Finishing: 1. Tool radius exterior slab, walk, ramp, and curb edges. I 2. Cut or form interior floor slab crack control joints. G. Horizontal Surface Finish Tolerances: Finish concrete horizontal surfaces as specified in ACI 301, Articles 11.7, 11.8 and 11.9 I 1. For floors to receive resilient flooring and carpeting, provide concrete smooth, level, and without more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft. variation from level. 1 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. ii . B. Construction Joints: Install at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway- section forms, or bulkhead I forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1 -1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 5. Use epoxy- bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 1 C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated, or approved. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal I to at least one -fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: I. a. Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. b. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. c. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1 . LRS Architects, Inc. il Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 October 12, 2006 Page 10 2. Sawed Joints: a. Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond - rimmed blades. b. Cut 1/8- inch -wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: After removing formwork, install joint - filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Terminate full -width joint - filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealers, specified in Section 07 9200, Joint Sealants, are indicated. 2. Install joint - filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt -coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.6 WATERSTOPS I A. Self- Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically fastening and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. s. 3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING ' A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot !� temperatures. Comply with the following: 1. Cold Weather Protection: ACI 306.1. 2. Hot Weather Protection: ACI 305R. B. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the following materials: 1. Water. 2. Continuous water -fog spray. 3. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges withl2 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers 4. Do not moisture cure slabs with underslab vapor barrier. • C. Moisture - Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for I curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than 7 days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 1. Use moisture - retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. 2. Use moisture - retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 11 3. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture - retaining cover or specified curing compound. D. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's instructions. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.7 INTERIOR FLOOR SLAB TREATMENT A. Vapor Emission Control System: Apply to interior concrete floor slabs -on -grade to receive resilient flooring, carpeting, or other applied coatings. 1. Apply on freshly placed concrete after final finishing and soft cutting to waterproof, seal, harden, and cure concrete in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Field Quality Control: Warranty requires application to be certified by manufacturer's technical person on -site observing application of Vapor Emission Control System. B. Liquid Hardener, Sealer, and Dustproofer: Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment to interior exposed concrete slabs where Vapor Emission Control System is not used. 1. Cure concrete a minimum of 7 days prior to application, unless product is applied to freshly placed concrete as a curing agent, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not place concrete or reinforcement in footing forms until Architect or his representative has examined compacted soil and aggregate materials within forms. B. Do not place concrete until Architect or his representative has examined formwork, reinforcing steel, and condition of vapor retarder. 1. Notify Architect 24 hours prior to concrete placement for inspection of reinforcing. 2. Adjusting Reinforcing: Adjust location of reinforcing as required. ' C. Vapor Emission Control System: Manufacturer's technical person for Vapor Emission Control System to observe application of system on -site and certify application as being in conformance with manufacturer's written instructions and terms of warranty for product. L , D. Test Requirements: 1. When special Inspection is required by Building Code, Owner will employ an Independent Testing Laboratory to evaluate concrete delivered to and placed at site. • a. Notify Independent Testing Laboratory 24 hours prior to delivery and placement of concrete. 2. Test composite samples according to ASTM C 172. 3. Slump Test: Test at point of placement complying with ASTM C 143. a. Concrete for Floor Slabs (Slab -On -Grade and Elevated Floor Slabs): Perform one slump test for each truck load of ready mixed concrete. b. Other Concrete: Perform not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency �! appears to change. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Cast -In -Place Concrete: 03 3000 October 12, 2006 Page 12 4. Air Content Test: Perform one test for each set of composite sample complying with �. ASTM C 231. 5. Compressive Strength Tests: Make one set of 3 specimens for each day of structural concrete pouring or each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each class of concrete, a. Test one specimen in accordance with ASTM C 39 after curing 7 days, two specimens after curing 28 days, unless first specimen tested at 28 days does not meet specified compressive strength, in which case retain one specimen for testing after 35 days or as directed by Architect. 6. Batch Ticket: I a. Receive a batch weight ticket from each truck; batch ticket to comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 for Batch Ticket Information. b. Verify water /cement ratio. 1) No water may be added if load is at specified ratio. 2) Reject truck if ratio does not conform. 3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Surface Repairs for Exposed Concrete: 1. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat area to be patched with 9 Y P Bonding Agent. 2. Fill honeycomb voids and rock pockets with patching compound. 3. Compact in place and screed as recommended by patching compound manufacturer. 4. Finish to match adjoining work. 5. Strike off excess mortar at surface. 6. If defects in color and texture of surface cannot be repaired, remove and replace 111 concrete. B. Surface Repairs for Concrete Surfaces to Receive Waterproofing Membrane: 1. Fill honeycomb voids and rock pockets with patching compound. 2. Fill cracks, pits (pinholes), and other voids detrimental to application of waterproofing system. 3. Remove loose particles, fins and projections, and foreign materials detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. 4. Patch tie holes and defects. B. Physical Barrier Protection: ,. 1. Barricade area containing fresh concrete slabs, stairs, ramps and walks for 24 hours minimum. 2. Cover fresh concrete with plywood where exposed to public, pedestrian, and animal traffic. END OF SECTION I 1 1. LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Tilt -Up Concrete: 03 4713 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes load- bearing, monolitic tilt -up concrete wall panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4115: Design -Build Requirements. 2. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for special inspection requirements. 3. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for general concrete construction, special inspection procedures for concrete, and interior slab vapor emission control system. 4. Section 04 2113: Brick Masonry, for thin brick veneer cladding adhered to tilt -up concrete panels. 5. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications, for embedded metal items and loose hardware. 6. Section 07 2400: Exterior. Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), for decorative attachments to tilt -up concrete panels. 7. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal, for flashing receivers and reglets. 8. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for joints sealants and sealant backings between tilt - up panels. 9. Section 09 9653: Elastomeric Coatings, for field applied finish. 10. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on inserts and bond breaker. B. Design Mixtures: -For each concrete mixture. C. Shop Drawings; Detail fabrication and installation of tilt -up precast concrete units. Indicate panel locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, and details of steel embedments. 1. Include steel reinforcement, detailing fabrication, bending, and placing. Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent -bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. 2. Include additional steel reinforcement to resist hoisting and erection stresses. 3. Include locations and details of hoisting points and lifting devices for handling and erection. 4. Include engineering analysis data of additional steel reinforcement and hoisting and ' . erection details, signed and sealed by a professional engineer responsible for their preparation and licensed in State in which project is located. 5. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail cast -in inserts, I. connections and joints, including accessories. D. Welder certificates. E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories . 4. Curing compounds. F. Material Test Reports for aggregates. � G. Field quality control test and inspection reports. LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Tilt -Up Concrete: 03 4713 111- October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Use skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. 1. Provide an experienced tilt -up concrete supervisor at site at all times during performance of tilt -up Work. 2. During panel lifting, provide an experienced and qualified rigging foreman to direct performance of that portion of Work. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." 2. AWS D1.4 "Structural Welding Code -- Reinforcing Steel." 3. Use welders certified by AWS and State in which project is located, for structural welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months. C. ACI Standard: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. I D. PCA Standard: Comply with recommendations in Portland Cement Association Manual PA-0-79B, "Tilt -Up Concrete Walls." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01310, "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete design mix and placement requires special inspection 'per State Building Code. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS I A. Verify dimensions in the field prior to fabrication and indicate in Shop Drawings. B. If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions, modify Work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication, and indicate differences in Shop Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.1 FORMS AND ACCESSORIES A. Casting Slabs: As required, of thickness and design needed for production of tilt -up concrete panels. B. Edge Forms: Metal, dressed lumber, or other approved materials that are nonreactive with �. concrete and that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. C. Waterborne, Membrane - Forming Bondbreaker: Non - staining, non - yellowing polymerized emulsion containing no oils, waxes, paraffins, or silicones free, as approved. 1. Verify compatibility of bondbreaker product with vapor emission control system "Creteseal" manufacturer (800 - 278 -4273) specified in Section 03 3000 for interior floor slabs to receive applied floor finish. I 111 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Tilt -Up Concrete: 03 4713 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 a. It is not recommended to apply tilt -up slab bondbreaker to interior floor slabs where vapor emission control system treatment has been applied until I concrete floor slab substrates have cured. Application of bondbreaker to fresh concrete can interfere with effectiveness of vapor emission control system that is applied to fresh concrete. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated. I E. Reveal Strips: Metal, PVC, rubber strips, straight dressed wood or plywood; with sides kerfed. F. Lifting Inserts and Accessories: Furnish inserts, dowels, bolts, nuts, washers, and other items to be cast in panels for tilting and lifting. I G. Bearing Pads: High - density, nonleaching plastic strips, or approved. H. Nonmetallic Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107. I 1. Acceptable Compounds: a. Nonmetallic by Burke. b. Sealtight 588 by W. R. Meadows. I ' c. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders. d. Five Star Grout by U. S. Grout. I 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed. lir B. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C. Bar Supports: Manufactured according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" of plastic or I CRSI Class 1 plastic - protected steel wire or Class 2 stainless steel wire. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS I A. Provide concrete, admixtures, and curing materials specified in Section 03 3000, Cast -In- Place Concrete, unless otherwise indicated. I B. Repair Materials: 1. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or 9 9 yP P ►Y styrene butadiene. I 2. Patching Mortar: Dry-pack mix consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2 -1/2 parts fine aggregate passing No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXING I A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. j B. Concrete Mixes: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Water- Cement Ratio: 0.45. I LRS Architects, Inc. ii . 1 i Tilt-Up Fanno Creek Place P Concrete: 03 4713 October 12, 2006 Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 FORMWORK I A. Construct and brace formwork so tilt -up precast concrete panels are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated. 1. Construct forms on temporary casting slab, or on permanent floor slabs -on -grade with a the following qualifications: a. Permanent floor slabs -on -grade may be used for casting surfaces, if suitable, provided all damage to permanent floor caused by fabricating or erecting the work of this Section is repaired to the satisfaction of Architect and at no additional cost to Owner. 1) Verify that bondbreaker used will not prevent proper installation of floor finishes on permanent floor slabs. b. Prior to utilizing permanent floor slabs -on -grade as casting slabs, apply curing 1 agent specified in Section 03 3000. c. Locate forms for panels to miss depressions, floor joints, surface irregularities, and projections. 2. Provide for openings, offsets, recesses, chamfers, reveals, reglets, and blockouts. 3. Provide positive anchorage against movement of edge forms. B. Clean forms after setting, and prior to placing reinforcement, with an air hose or soft broom I and thoroughly clean floor surface free from dirt, dust, chips, and debris. a . C. Uniformly and continuously apply two coats of bondbreaker to casting slab surfaces by power II spray or roller according to manufacturer's instructions. D. After placing steel reinforcement, touch up or recoat worn or damaged areas with bondbreaker. Do not splash or coat steel reinforcement and inserts. 3.2 PANEL CASTING A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating and placing steel I reinforcement. 1. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. 2. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. 3. Field weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. 4. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. B. Comply with ACI 301 for handling, placing, and consolidating concrete. 1. Screed panel surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. 2. Begin initial floating before excess moisture or bleed water appears on surface. 3. Use bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open - textured surface place free of humps or hollows. 4. Do not disturb panel surfaces before beginning finishing operations. 5. Surface Defect: Limit visible surface defects to those permitted by TCA's "Tilt -up Concrete Association's Guideline Specifications" for Grade A, Architectural panel surfaces. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Tilt -Up Concrete: 03 4713 October 12, 2006 Page 5 C. Form chamfers at top edges of panel perimeters, openings, and similar locations not formed by chamfer strips, unless otherwise indicated. I D. Casting Tolerances: Cast tilt -up panels without exceeding the following tolerances: Height and Width of Panels: I1. a. Panels up to 20 Feet Tall: 1/4 inch wide. b. Panels 20 to 30 Feet Tall: 3/8 inch wide. c. Each Additional 10 Feet in Excess of 30 Feet: 1/8 inch wide. 2. Thickness: 3/16 inch. 3. Openings Cast into Panel: 1/4 inch. I a. Size of Opening: 1/4 inch. b. Location of Centerline of Opening: 1/4 inch. I 4. Skew of Panel or Opening: Difference in length of diagonals of 1/8 inch per 72 inches with a maximum difference of 1/2 inch. 5. Location and Placement Tolerances of Embedded Items: a. Inserts, Bolts, Pipe Sleeves: 3/8 inch. b. Lifting and Bracing Inserts: 1/2 inch. c. Lateral Placement of Weld Plates: 1 inch. I d. Tipping and Flushness of Weld Plates: 1/4 inch. 6. Deviation of Steel Reinforcement Cover: 3/8 inch, maintaining minimum cover required by ACI 301. ,li E. Concrete Finishes: 1. Exterior Wall Surfaces: Smooth, as -cast finish, free of pockets, sand streaks and honeycombs, of uniform color and texture. a. Verify acceptability of as -cast surface texture with installer of brick cladding. I 2. Interior Wall Surfaces: Trowel finish. 3. Repair defective areas. F. Concrete Protection and Curing: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures according to ACI 301. 1. Cure for not less than 7 days by moisture curing, moisture - retaining cover curing, or I curing compound. 3.3 ERECTION A. Use erection equipment with care to prevent damage to permanent floor slabs and panels. B. Lift, support, and erect panels only at designated lifting or supporting points indicated in Shop I Drawings. C. Do not erect wall panels until at least 75 percent of specified 28 day compressive strength has been verified. I ` D. Install panels level, plumb, square, and true. Maintain indicated joint width between panels. E. Place panels on leveled grout setting pads or shims in correct position. LRS Architects, Inc. ii. Tilt-Up Concrete: 03 4713 Fanno Creek Place P October 12, 2006 Page 6 I. F. Maintain joint width indicated between panels. G. Temporarily brace and support panels securely in position against loads comparable in I intensity to those for which structure was designed. 1. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been competed and permanent connections to panels are secured. H. Anchor panels in place and, if indicated, to one another. 1. Do not anchor panels in such a manner that will restrain normal volume change until I, at least 21 days after casting. Solidly grout -fill gaps between foundation system and bottom of panels. I J. Erection Tolerances: Install tilt -up panels without exceeding the following tolerances: 1. Exterior Face and Width of Joints: a. For Panels up to 20 Feet Tall: 1/4 inch. b. Each Additional 10 Feet in Excess of 20 Feet Tall: 1/8 inch. I 2. Joint Taper: Maximum 3/8 inch for entire length but not greater than the following: a. For Panels up to 20 feet Tall: 1/4 inch. b. • Each Additional 10 Feet in Excess of 20 Feet Tall: 1/8 inch. 3. Panel Alignment: a. Alignment of Horizontal and Vertical Joints: 1/4 inch. b. Offset in Exterior Face of Adjacent Panels: 1/4 inch. K. Patch holes and voids left by erecting and bracing inserts, and repair damage to tilt -up panels and permanent floor casting slabs as acceptable to Architect. 1. Cut or chip edges of voids perpendicular to concrete surface. 2. Clean, dampen with water, and brush coat voids, and blockouts with bonding agent. 3. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. 4. Remove and replace tilt -up panels that do not comply with requirements of this Section. ' L. Demolish and remove temporary concrete casting slabs. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Owner will employ a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections required by Building Code, and to submit reports. Refer to Section 01 450, Quality Control. I r LRS Architects, Inc. I i1 Fanno Creek Place Tilt -Up Concrete: 03 4713 1 . October 12, 2006 Page 7 B. Inspections: r a. Steel reinforcement placement. b. Steel reinforcement welding. c. Headed bolts and studs. d. Verification of use of required concrete design mixture. I e. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. f. Curing procedures and maintenance or curing temperature. g. Verification of concrete strength before erection of tilt -up panels. ' END OF SECTION I I I. I I I I I I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. III Fanno Creek Place Thin -Brick Masonry: 04 2100 October 12, 2006 Page 1 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following for thin -set brick veneer cladding: 1. Thin face brick. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 4713: Tilt -Up Concrete, for wall backup construction. I 2. Section 07 1900: Water Repellents, for applied sealer. 3. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal 4. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Section 07 6000, Flashing and Sheet Metal. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data, for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings, for the following: I 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail applications. C. Samples: Two clay masonry units of each size, color, design and texture specified. D. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. I Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. I a. Include size - variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerance. b. Include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. I 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. I E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout, including description of type and proportions of ingredients. I. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled masons trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. 1 B. Source Limitations for Masonry Materials: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend with the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through from one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Thin -Brick Masonry: 04 2100 October 12, 2006 Page 2 C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Comply with recommendations of Brick Institute of America (BIA) Technical Notes. E. Mock -up: I 1. At an area on site approved by Architect, construct thin brick unit mock -up panel approximately 4 ft. high and 4 ft. long. 2. Provide one mock -up panel for each combination of thin brick units, bond pattern, mortar color, and joint type used in Work. 3. Revise as necessary to secure Architect's approval. 4. Mock -up panels may be incorporated into permanent Work, when approved by Architect. 5. If mock -up panels are not permitted to be part of permanent Work, completely demolish and remove from job site upon completion and acceptance of other Work of this Section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms in a dry location. , B. If not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides with waterproof sheeting to protect against wetting prior to use. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. I C. Protect from damage. D. Store cementitious materials above ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. E. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. F. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. I 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. Work under cover during rainy weather. 1. Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining face of exposed masonry. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. B. Cold - Weather Requirements: Comply with cold - weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1., in Section 2104.3, and the following: ' 1. Do not place unit masonry when air temperature is below 40 degrees F, unless using special procedures approved by Architect. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 3. Do not build on frozen substrates. 4. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost of by freezing conditions. C. Hot - Weather Requirements: Comply with hot - weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Thin -Brick Masonry: 04 2100 October 12, 2006 Page 3 D. Protect masonry ex construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in ambient P air temperatures exceeding 90 degrees F in shade, with relative humidity less than 50 1 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Brick: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide unit masonry products from the following: 1. Summitville Tiles, Inc., Summitville, Ohio 43962 (330- 223 - 1511). I B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 BRICK • I A. Face Brick: Summitville Thin Brick, Valley Forge, complying with ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBX. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: ASTM C 216; Minimum average net -area compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 Days. 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g /30 sq. in. per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM C 67. 1, • 3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated: "not effloresced." B. Size: 2 -1/4 inches by 7 -5/8 inches by 9/16 inch thickness. fi v 1. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, and where special shapes for applications produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS I A. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A 118.4, consisting of prepackaged dry- mortar mix combined with liquid -latex additive. 1. Provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph C -4.6.1 in addition to the I other requirements in ANSI A 118.4. a. Product: Summitville S -777 / S -810 Thin Set Flexible Mortar System. I B. Latex - Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A188.6/A118.7 with liquid -latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix, color as selected. 1. Product: Summitville S -750 Thin Brick. Pointing Mortar. C. Water: Potable. • D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides. 1. Custom. 2. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. 3. Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. 4. Sonneborn Sonobrite. 5. Specmix. I ,. LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Thin -Brick Masonry: 04 2100 October 12, 2006 Page 4 2.4 MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9200; color as selected by Architect. 2.5 MASONRY CLEANER A. Proprietary acidic cleaner for new masonry; one of the following, or approved. 1. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; 202 New Masonry Detergent. 2. ProSoCo, Inc.; Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify substrates are firm, dry, clean, free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds. , B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate with other trades as required to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install in accordance with thin brick, mortar, and grout manufacturers written instructions for specified system. 1. Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. 2. Comply with latest edition of TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" guidelines for TCA installation methods indicated. 3. Comply with mortar and grout manufacturer's printed instructions. 4. Do not use chipped, cracked, or broken units. If such units are discovered in finished work, Architect will require their immediate removal and replacement with new units at no additional cost to Owner. B. Thin Brick Installation on Concrete (Thin -Set) 1. Comply with TCA W202; ANSI A108.5 and ANSI A108.10. 2. Install tile with latex portland cement mortar bond coat. 3. Install tile with latex - portland cement grout. C. Bond: Unless otherwise shown, provide running bond with vertical joints located at center of masonry units in alternate course below and above. D. Joints: Provide uniform joints, adjusted to minimize brick cutting. 1. Provide expansion joints where shown, or where not shown, at 32 feet o.c. maximum , where no change occurs in wall plane, and at construction joints in concrete tilt -up wall substrate. Do not exceed isolated masonry panel's length to height (aspect) ratio of 1 -1/2 maximum. I a. Install sealant at control joints and expansion joints. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Thin -Brick Masonry: 04 2100 I . October 12, 2006 Page 5 2. Provide uniform joints approximately 3/8 inch wide. I 3. Units to be firm when in place. If loose or crooked, completely remove unit and mortar and replace. E. Tooling: . I 1. Tool joints to a dense, smooth surface. 2. Unless otherwise noted, provide joints of "concave" profile. I 3. Tool joints to make weathertight. F. Pointing: I 1. 2. Pointing: Remove mortar fins and loose mortar. Fill cracks and bee holes. 3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION I A. Inspection and adjustment: I1. Upon completion of work of this Section, make a thorough inspection of installed masonry and verify that units have been installed in accordance with provisions of this Section. 2. Make necessary adjustments. I . B. Protect against dislodgement until mortar has set. C. Protect work of others from damage. I D. Clean, without damaging, masonry surfaces. 1. Mask to protect materials that could be damaged by cleaning agents. I 2. Follow cleaning solution manufacturer's instructions. 3. Rinse cleaning solution with low pressure water (120 psi maximum). 4. Do not use muriatic acid cleaning solutions. I END OF SECTION I • I I 1 1 in LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Structural Steel Framing: 05 1200 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes structural steel framing and grout. 1. Structural steel framing. 2. Architecturally exposed structural steel for glazed canopy framing. 3. Grout. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for independent testing agency procedures. I 2. Section 05 2100: Steel Joist Framing 3. Section 05 3100: Steel Decking for field installation of shear connectors. 4. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications, for miscellaneous steel framing and fabrications. 5. Section 08 6300: Metal- Framed Glazed Canopy, for glazing system supported with architecturally exposed structural steel framing. 6. Section 09 9000: Painting, for surface preparation and priming requirements. 7. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes I 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. I B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. I Identify pretensioned and slip- critical high- strength bolted connections. B. Welder Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements I specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. C. Weld Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Section 01 4500, Quality Control. D. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements. 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. ' 2. 3. Bolts, nuts, and washer including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. Direct - tension indicators. 4. Tension - control, high- strength bolt- nut - washer assemblies. 5. Shear stud connectors. I 6. Shop primers. 7. Nonshrink grout. I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Standards: 1 1. Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code — Steel." 2. Use welders certified by AWS and State in which Project is located for structural welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months. LRS Architects, Inc. : 05 1200 Steel Framing: Fanno Creek Place 9 October 12, 2006 Page 2 B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2.- AISC, "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2." 3. RCSC (Research Council on Structural Connections), "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 4. IBC Standard 22. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Welding of structural steel and connections with high- strength bolts, and shear stud connectors, requires special inspection per Section 1704 of State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code (IBC). Refer to requirements in Section 01 4500, Quality Control. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. B. Store materials off ground; protect steel members from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.6 COORDINATION 1 A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction. 1. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A. W- Shapes: ASTM A 992 and A 572 Grade 50. 1 B. Channels, Angles, M- Shapes: ASTM A 36 and ASTM 572, Grade 50. C. Plate and Bars: ASTM A 36 and ASTM 572, Grade 50. 1 D. Hollow Structural Sections: Cold- formed, ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS I A. Standard Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. B. High Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel washers. • 1. Finish: Plain. 2. Direct - Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible - washer type, same finish as above. LRS Architects, Inc. i I Fanno Creek Place Structural Steel Framing: 05 1200 October 12, 2006 Page 3 C. Optional Tension - Control, High Strength Bolt- Nut - Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, I heavy hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. D. High Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel washers, plain. I 1. Direct - Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible- washer type, plain. D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed stud type, cold finished I carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. I 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. I F. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. I 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. If 5. Finish: Plain. G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36. I 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. I H. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold- finished carbon steel. I. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold- finished carbon steel. t J. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold- finished carbon steel. K. Concrete Anchors: Kwik Bolt 3 by Hilti (ESR- 1385), Simpson Wedge -All (ER- 3631), or Red I Head TruBolt by ITW Ramset (ER- 1372). 2.3 PRIMER I A. Primer: SSPC -Paint 25, Type II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 GROUT MATERIALS A. Nonmetallic Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, I non- corrosive, non - staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and 30 minute working time. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Structural Steel Framing: 05 1200 October 12, 2006 Page 4 1. Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following: I a. Burke: Nonmetallic Grout. b. Euclid Chemical Co.: NS Grout. c. Master Builders: Masterflow 713 or 928. d. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight 588 Precision Grout. • e. Five Star Products, Inc.: Five Star Grout. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. ' 1. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Camber structural steel members where indicated. 3. Identify high- strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop priming operations. B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel for Glazed Canopy Framing: Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural steel. 1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, scale, and roughness. C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. I 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded according to AWS D1.1. D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. I E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP-2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or SSPC -SP -3, "Power Tool Cleaning." F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. I G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut both holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS 1 A. High- Strength Bolts: Shop install high- strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. I 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless otherwise indicated. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Fanno Creek Place Structural Steel Framing: 05 1200 October 12, 2006 Page 5 B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, 1 appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Grind exposed welds smooth. 2. Assemble and weld built -up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of I axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: I a. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. b. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable 1 ' tolerances. Prevent weld show- through on exposed steel surfaces. 1) Grind butt welds flush. 2) Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING I A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded I members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high- strength bolted with slip - critical connections. 4. Galvanized surfaces. i B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: I 1. SSPC -SP -5 "White Metal Blast Cleaning." I C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. I 1. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: I a. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 3. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. I Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL I A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 4500, Quality Control. 2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Structural Steel Framing: g 05 1200 October 12, 2006 Page 6 B. Bolted Connections: Shop - bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to 1 RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop - welded connections will be tested I and inspected according to AWS D1.1. and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option. 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 111 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, shop - welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1. for stud welding and as follows: I 1. Bend test will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less- than - continuous 360 degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify elevations of concrete bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. I B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. 1. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast - in -place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION I A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." ' B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug- tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I in Fanno Creek Place Structural Steel Framing: 05 1200 October 12, 2006 Page 7 1 1 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates with nonmetallic, nonshrink grout so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; I protect grout and allow to cure. 5. Use metallic, nonshrink grout for base and bearing plates supporting vibrating mechanical equipment. ' C. Maintain erection tolerance of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges ". I D. Align and adjust various members forming part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. E. Splice members only when indicated. I F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. I G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. I H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. I. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear I connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS I A. High- Strength Bolts: Install high- strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless otherwise indicated. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, ■ appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on I 2. surfaces adjacent to field welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built -up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel I Buildings and Bridges "for mill material. 4. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: ' a. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. b. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show - through on exposed steel surfaces. 1) Grind butt welds flush. 2) Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. 1 i LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Structural Steel Framing: 05 1200 October 12, 2006 Page 8 1 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide inspect field I welds and high- strength bolted connections and prepare test reports. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 4500, Quality Control. B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1. I 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1. and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option. a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1. for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend test will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less- than - continuous , 360 degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. 1 E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime painted steel and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC -SP2 "Hand Tool Cleaning ",or SSPC -SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning" 2. Apply same type primer paint as used in shop to a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. END OF SECTION 1 1 I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Steel Joist Framing: 05 2100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Open -web K- series steel joist framing. 2. LH- series long span steel joist framing. 3. Joist Girder framing. I 4. Ledger angles, bearing plates and bridging for joist framing. 5. Joist accessories. 6. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes • B. Related Sections: i 1. Section 01 4115: Design -Build Requirements. 2. Section 05 1200: Structural Steel Framing I 3. Section 05 3100: Steel Decking 4. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications, for furnishing steel bearing plates. 5. Section 09 9000: Painting, for field applied finish paint. I 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect joists and connections to withstand I design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Structural Loads: As indicated. 2. Design joist framing to withstand design loads without vertical deflections greater than I the following: a. Floor Joist Framing: L/360 of the span due to live load; L/240 of the span due total load. I to b. Roof Joist Framing: L/360 of the span due to live load; L/240 of the span due to total load. I 4. Design bottom chord bridging to withstand wind uplift under design wind load for roof joist framing. 5. Design bridging for lateral bracing of joist diagonals. I B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a joist manufacturer who utilizes a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data for steel joist framing. I 1. Shop Drawings and Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Structural Engineer responsible for their preparation and registered in the State where Project is located. ii , 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of joist, accessory and product indicated, to include manufacturer's material specifications, fabrication standards, factory finish, design loading tables and structural analysis. I 1. Submit SJI Recommended Code of Standard Practice and Standard Specification for K, LH and DLH Series Joists. 1 I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Steel Joist Framing: 05 2100 October 12, 2006 Page 2 B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacing of joists, with complete details and instructions for lifting, storage, and installation. 1. Indicate required bridging, end anchorage, and deck attachment. 2. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices and bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. C. Structural Analysis Data (Calculations): Submit structural analysis data on design of joist I framing. D. Material certificates signed by joist manufacturer certifying that joist framing complies with Steel Joist Institute's (SJI) "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." E. Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of bolts certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. F. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. G. Weld Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements of Section 01 4500, Quality Control. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing joist framing similar to that indicated for this Project and that has a record of successful in- service performance. , 1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists conforming to SJI standard specifications and load tables. 2. Assumes responsibility for engineering joists to comply with performance requirements. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with recommendations of Steel Joist Institute's (SJI) "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Steel Girders," (hereafter, "Specifications ") applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Welding Standards: 1. Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code." 2. Use welders certified by AWS and State in which Project is located for structural welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months. I 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." B. Protect joist framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during deliver, storage, and handling. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Open Web Joist framing: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: 1. Vulcraft Division of Nucor Corp. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Steel Joist Framing: 05 2100 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. I 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web members. I B. Steel Bearing Plates, Ledger Angles, and Bridging: ASTM A 36. C. Standard Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. I D. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A 325, Type 1 or Type 2. E. Welding Electrodes: AWS A5.1 or A5.5, E 70XX. I F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SPC- Paint -20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. I 2.3 PRIMERS A. Shop Prime Paint: SSPC- Paint -15, Type I, red oxide. I 1. Comply with local regulations for use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 2.4 STEEL JOIST FRAMING I A. Manufacture steel joist framing according to SJI's "Specifications," with steel angle top and bottom chord members, of joist types, end arrangements, and top chord arrangements indicated. 1 1. Roof Joist Framing Type: K- series steel joists. . 2. Roof Joist Framing Type: LH- series steel joists. 3. Floor Joist Framing Type: LH- series steel joists. 4. Girder Framing Type: Joist girders. 5. End arrangement and top chord arrangement as indicated. I B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Shop weld steel framing members using SJI approved methods. I C. Provide holes in chord framing members where required for securing other work to steel joists. I D. Provide SJI Type S top chord extensions, and SJI Type R bearing end extensions, where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." 1 E. Camber steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications," unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes at bearing ends of joists if joist slope exceeds 1/4 -inch in 12 inches. 2.5 JOIST FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of I material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications," for type of joist, chord size, spacing and span. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Steel Joist Framing: 05 2100 October 12, 2006 Page 4 B. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages as indicated and finish. Shop prime paint. C. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom chord elements or a separate extension unit of sufficient strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated. D. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by the joist manufacturer to complete the joist installation. 2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING ' A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except surfaces that are galvanized. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories to be primed. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC -SP -3. C. Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. D. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide State Building • Code required tests and inspections. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 4500, Quality Control. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing will be performed at Contractor's expense to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 . EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of joists. B. Proceed with installation only until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. i 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install joist framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line in accordance with Drawings, approved Shop Drawings, SJI's "Standard Specification," State Building Code, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. I 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads have been applied. I LRS Architects, Inc. r I Fanno Creek Place Steel Joist Framing: 05 2100 I October 12, 2006 Page 5 B. Field weld joist framing to supporting steel framework and steel bearing plates. 1 1. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists. 2. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality I of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. C. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using standard steel bolts, unless otherwise indicated. I D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high strength structural steel bolts, unless otherwise indicated. I E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist installation, before construction loads are applied. 1. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or I beams. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide State Building Code required tests and inspections. I . 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 4500, Quality Control. B. Field- bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1 C. Field- welded connections will be visually inspected, and tested according to AWS D1.1. Inspection procedures will be at testing agency's option. I D. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. I E. Additional testing will be performed at Contractor's expense to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION I A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions. I B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after installation, clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded areas of primed painted joists, accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand tool cleaning, SSPC -SP -2, or power tool cleaning, SSPC -SP -3. 2. Apply same type primer paint as used in shop to a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion 1 END OF SECTION I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Steel Decking: 05 3100 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Ii Steel roof decking. 2. Composite steel floor decking. l B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for independent testing agency procedures. 2. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for concrete fill and reinforcing steel. I 3. 4. Section 05 1200: Structural Steel Framing Section 05 2100: Steel Joist Framing 5. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications, for framing openings with misc. steel shapes. 6. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes I 1.2 SUBMITTALS Product data for each type of decking, accessory and product specified. I A. B. Shop Drawings showing layout and types of decking panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, decking openings, accessories and attachments to other construction. I C. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. I D. Weld Inspection Reports: Comply with Section 01 4500, Quality Control. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel decking similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. I B. When materials of this Section are used as part of an assembly indicated in Drawings in which fire- resistive construction ratings are required, demonstrate approval by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. I C. Welding Standards: 1. Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code — Steel" and I 2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel." Use welders certified by AWS and State in which Project is located for structural welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months. D. FM Listing: Provide steel roof decking evaluated by Factory Mutual and listed in Factory Mutual "Approval Guide" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1 -90 windstorm ratings. I 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Special inspection as required by State Building Code for installation of shear connectors at composite floor decking. I . I LRS Architects, Inc. • Fanno Creek Place Steel Decking: 05 3100 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect steel decking from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel decking on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1.7 FIELD MEASURMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown in Drawings and Shop Drawings. , PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: 1. Verco Manufacturing Co. 111 2. BHP Steel Building Products. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01630. 2.2 METAL DECKING UNITS A. Steel Roof Decking: Fabricate panels without top -flange stiffening grooves conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck." B. Composite Steel Floor Decking: Fabricate panels with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," and the minimum section properties indicated. C. Provide galvanized -steel sheet decking panels; ASTM A446, Grade A, G 60 zinc coating class I according to ASTM A 653, 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessory materials for steel decking that comply with requirements indicated and ' recommendations of the steel decking manufacturer and as required for a complete and proper installation. B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1010 through 1020 headed stud type, cold- finished ' carbon steel, AWS D.1., Type B. C. Sheet Steel Accessories: ASTM A 446, G 60 coating class, galvanized according to ASTM A 653. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20 with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel decking. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Steel Decking: 05 3100 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Prior to start of installation, verify that beams are in proper alignment and that surfaces are clean for welding. I C. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. I 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Install decking panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary of SDI Publication No. 28, manufacturer's recommendations, requirements of this Section, and the Drawings. I B. Install temporary shoring before placing decking panels as required to comply with deflection limitations. C. Place decking panels on supporting framework, and adjust to final position prior to permanent I welding. D. Cut and neatly fit decking panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting I through or adjacent to the decking. E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work. I F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. i 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field quality control testing. I 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 4500, Quality Control. I B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Shear connector welds will be inspected and tested according to the requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding. I D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing will be performed at Contractor's expense to determine compliance of I corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.4 TOUCH UP A. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION I I • I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Cold- Formed Metal Framing: 05 4000 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cold- formed metal framing. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 1200: Structural Steel Framing I 2. Section 05 2100: Steel Joist Framing 3. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications, for masonry shelf angles and connections. 4. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for light -gage interior metal stud framing and ceiling suspension assemblies. I 5. Section 09 2117: Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies, for light -gage interior metal stud shaft wall assemblies. 6. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold- formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. I B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold- formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including reinforcement, bracing, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. I C. Welder certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE '' A. Use workers trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. I B. Welding Standards: 1. Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code — Steel" and I 2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel." Use welders certified by AWS and State in which Project is located for light gage welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months. I C. Comply with Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries International "Specifications Guide for Cold- Formed Light Weight Steel Framing." D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the I Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold - Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." I E. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold- formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Store materials off ground, under cover and protected from corrosion, deformation and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. I I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Cold- Formed Metal Framing: 05 4000 October 12, 2006 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide cold- formed metal framing by manufacturers who are members of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA), including the following: I 1. SCAFCO Corporation. • 2. Steeler, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS 1 A. Material: Provide standard structural punched C- shaped steel studs of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges and minimum flange width of 1 -5/8 inches. 1. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated. a. Grades: ' 1) Grade for 12, 14 and 16 gage: ST50H. 2) Grade for 18 and 20 gage: ST33H. b. Coating: ASTM A 653, G60 (Z180). 2. Provide metal studs of the following uncoated thickness for gage referenced: I a. 20 gage: 0.0346 inch. b. 18 gage: 0.0451 inch. c. 16 gage: 0.0566 inch. d. 14 gage: 0.0713 inch. e. 12 gage: 0.1017 inch. B. Wall Framing: 1. Manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel studs. 2. Web: Punched. 3. Size and Uncoated Steel Thickness: As indicated in Drawings. C. Joist Framing: 1. Manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel studs. I 2. Web: Unpunched. 3. Size and Uncoated Steel Thickness: As indicated in Drawings. D. Steel Track: 1. Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel track with straight flanges. 2. Web: Unpunched. 3. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs and joists, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel framing accessories from sheet steel, ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Cold- Formed Metal Framing: 05 4000 I l October 12, 2006 Page 3 2.4 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS I A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36, zinc coated by the hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123. I B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon steel, head or headless as required, with carbon steel nuts; and flat, hardened steel washers; zinc coated. C. Expansion Anchors: Corrosion resistant, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal I to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion resistant coated, self - drilling, self- tapping steel drill screws. I 1. Head Type: Low - profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. E. Powder- Actuated Anchors: I 1. Type suitable for application indicated, of corrosion - resistant materials, with capacity to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times the design load, as determined by I testing per ASTM E 1190. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, ITW Ramset Red Head, or approved. 2.5 WELDING I A. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS I A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20. I B. Shims: Load bearing, high- density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. C. Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from standard widths available to match width of bottom track or rim track members. I D. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Specified in Section 05 1200. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with I requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and I the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete construction. B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of I foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Cold- Formed Metal Framing: 05 4000 October 12, 2006 Page 4 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install cold- formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold- Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install cold- formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold- formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. C. Install framing members in one -piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated. D. Provide temporary bracing as required until framing is permanently stabilized. E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold- formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. 1 F. Install insulation, specified in Section 07 2100, Thermal Insulation, in built -up exterior wall framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCE A. Install cold- formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation true of 1/8 inch to 10 feet, and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minimum 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.5 CLEANING AND TOUCH UP I A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on installed cold - formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I • Fanno Creek Place Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes metal fabrications as follows, but not limited to: I 1. Steel ladders. 2. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 3. Elevator hoist beams. I 4. Support angles for elevator door sills. 5. Steel framing and supports for countertops 6. Steel pipe bollards. 7. Gratings. I 8. 9. Steel gates at trash enclosure. Miscellaneous steel framing. B. Products Furnished, but not installed, under this section include the following: I 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and other items cast into concrete. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for independent testing and inspection procedures. 2. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for steel items embedded in concrete. I 3. Section 05 1200: Structural Steel Framing, for building framing. 4. Section 05 2100: Steel Joist Framing 5. • Section 05 3100: Steel Decking, for miscellaneous supports and opening reinforcement for steel deck. 6. Section 05 4000: Cold- Formed Metal Framing, for metal stud structural framing. 1 7. Section 05 5100: Metal Stairs, for miscellaneous framing and attachments. 8. Section 09 9000: Painting, for metal finishes. 9. Section 14 2400: Hydraulic Elevators, for pit access ladder and sump grating, elevator I hoist beams, support angles and miscellaneous brackets and framing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For grout, paint products, and each manufactured item specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions, fabrication details, installation, anchorage, and templates I for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. Indicate welds by American Welding Society symbols. C. Welder certificates certifying that welders comply with requirements specified in "Quality I Assurance" Article. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." I 2. AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code -- Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - -Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.6 "Structural Welding Code -- Stainless Steel." I B. Welder Qualifications: 1. Use welders certified by project S and State in which is located, for structural j welding, and who have undergone recertification in the last 12 months. II I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 October 12, 2006 Page 2 C. Comply with requirements /recommendations of American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications for design, fabrication and erection of structural steel for buildings and AISC manual of steel construction. D. Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and • under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. E. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual" and NAAMM MBG 532, "Heavy -Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual." 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Special inspection is required by State Building Code for structural welding and drilled epoxy anchor bolts of this Section; Refer to Section 01 4500. B. Provide ladders that comply with OSHA requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site with markings corresponding to markings shown on approved Shop Drawings. B. Store off round, under cover and protected from damage. 9 p 9 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS I1 A. Verify actual location of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by II field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorage for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, I templates, and directions for installing anchorage, including sleeves, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without pitting, seam marks, mill markings, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A 36. B. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1 C. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. I LRS Architects, Inc. 11 Fanno Creek Place Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 October 12, 2006 Page 3 D. Steel Tubing, ASTM A 500, cold- formed; Seamless where exposed. E. Steel pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. I1. Where exposed to view: Type S. 2. Where concealed: Type E. i F. Sheet steel: ASTM A 366. G. Gratings: ANSI A202.1. I 2.3 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 6061 -T6. I ' B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063 -T6. 2.4 FASTENERS I A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc - plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5a, at exterior walls I 1. 2. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners of type, grade, and class suited for use intended. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts; and, I where indicated, flat washers. C. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head, annealed stainless steel bolts, nuts I and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts. Alloy Group 1 (A1). D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1 1. Provide zinc - coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is galvanized. E. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, I a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. 1. Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc - plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5a. 2. Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1). Stainless steel complying with ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts. F. Cast -In -Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. I G. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. H. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 October 12, 2006 Page 4 Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1. J. Lock Washers: Helical spring type, ASME B18.21.1. 2.5 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory packaged, non - staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, complying with ASTM C 1107. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following: a. Burke: Nonmetallic Grout. b. Euclid Chemical Co.: NS Grout. c. Master Builders: Masterflow 713 or 928. d. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight 588 Precision Grout. e. Five Star Products, Inc.: Five Star Grout. 2.6 WELDING A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 2.7 PRIMER I, A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Provide primers specified in Section 09 9000. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc -dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC- Paint -20. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 1 2.8 FABRICATION A. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and 1 assembly. Use connections that maintain structural value of jointed pieces. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. 1. Use Phillips flat - headed countersink heads for exposed connections, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Located joints where least conspicuous. 3. Cut abutting members to fit with full bearing contact. 4. Form elbows and bends to uniform radii, free from buckles and twists, and with finished surfaces smooth. 5. Where exposed to weather, fabricate seams and other connections to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 6. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. LRS Architects, Inc. 1 .I Fanno Creek Place ' Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 October 12, 2006 Page 5 l F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. II 2. Provide 3/16 inch minimum fillet welds, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide full penetration butt welds. 4. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush. G. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. 1. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. 3. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 4. Fabricate steel pipe columns from Schedule 40 steel pipe for supporting wood frame construction. Provide 1/2 inch steel base plates with four 5/8 inch anchor bolts, and 1/4 inch top plates. I H. Steel Ladders: 1. Fabricate for locations shown, with dimensions, spacing, details, and anchorage as I indicated. a. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. b. For elevator pit ladders, comply with Oregon Elevator Specialty Code and I ASME A17.1. b. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2- by -2 -1/2 -inch steel flat bars, with eased edges, space not more than 16 inches apart, unless otherwise required by Building Code or indicated. I c. Bar Rungs: 3/4- inch - diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c. Provide non- slip surfaces on top of each rung. I 2. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 3. Support each ladder at top and bottom at no more than 12 inches from each end, and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 4. Grind welds smooth and flush. 1 5. Galvanize ladders at exterior locations, and at interior where indicated. I. Ladder Safety Post: I 1. 2. Steel, telescoping tubular section; automatic locking device. Stainless steel spring balancing mechanism for up and down movement. 3. Finish: Black enamel. 4. Manufacturer: "Model 1 LadderUp" by Bilco Company, or approved. I J. Pipe Bollards: I 1. Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe; grind exposed ends smooth. 2. Galvanize surfaces not embedded in concrete. K. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items I bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. 1. Galvanize plates after fabrication. .1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 • Fanno Creek Place Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 October 12, 2006 Page 6 L. Bar Gratings: Fabricate per NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual. .11 1. Securely anchor frame to structure. 2. Where size and spacing of bars is not shown, determine size from NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual's Load Tables for safe uniform load of not less than 100 PSF and connected concentrated loads of 300 pounds. 2.9 ALLOWABLE FABRICATION TOLERANCES , A. Maximum variation from dimensions shown: 1. Overall length with both ends finished: 1/32 inch. ' 2. Overall length of member without finished ends: a. For members up to 30 ft. long: 1/16 inch b. For members over 30 ft. long: 1/8 inch B. Twists, bends, and kinks are not allowed. 2.10 FINISHES A. General: Finish metal fabrications after assembly. • B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123 for steel and 9 P9 Y iron products, and ASTM A 153 for steel and iron hardware. C. Shop prime uncoated steel surfaces, except the following: I, 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Within 2 inches of surfaces to be field welded. 3. Stainless steel. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated steel surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors: SSPC -SP -6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interior: SSPC -SP -3, "Power Tool Cleaning." E. Shop Priming: Apply one coat primer with a uniform dry film thickness of minimum 2.0 mils. 1. Comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and I Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. F. Stainless Steel Finishes: I 1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. 2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. 3. Dull Stain Finish: No. 6. 4. When polishing is complete, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. • 1 r, LRS Architects, Inc. I, Fanno Creek Place Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 October 12, 2006 Page 7 ' 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL IA. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to provide State Building Code required tests and inspections. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 4500, Quality Control. I B. Shop - welded connections will be visually inspected, and tested according to AWS D1.1. Inspection procedures. C. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing will be performed at Contractor's expense to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces plumb, level, true, and free from rack; and measured from established lines and levels. 1 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. B. Field weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded I because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding of Exposed Connections: Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and I blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 1 E. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge drilled or punched holes with a burning torch. F. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal I fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction. 1. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. 2. Provide standard plate washers under bolt heads and nuts. 3. Do not thread bolts at shear plane. 1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: I 1. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' instructions and requirements indicated in Shop Drawings. 2. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Metal Fabrications: 05 5000 October 12, 2006 Page 8 B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. Tighten anchor bolts after bearing members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing place before packing with grout. 1. Pack nonshrink, nonmetallic grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. C. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings, and fill with concrete. ,, D. Metal Bar Gratings: Comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC -PA -1 for touching up shop - painted surfaces. 1. Apply to provide a minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness. 1 B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION I 1 I � LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Metal Stairs: 05 5100 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I . 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I i. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete - filled metal pan treads and closed risers. 2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 3. Steel tube railings attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4115: Design -Build Requirements I 2. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for concrete fill and reinforcing for treads and landings. 3. Section 05 1200: Structural Steel, for building framing. 4. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications, for nonframing steel support fabrications. III 5. Section 06 4000: Architectural Woodwork, for wood stair handrails components. 6. Section 09 9000: Painting, for field finish. 7. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes 1 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of I gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform load of 100 lbf/sq. ft. applied in any direction. 2. Concentrated load of 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. I . 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 of 1/4 inch, whichever is less. B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable of withstanding the I effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: '; a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. I 2. Top Rail of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 lbf/ ft. I ' applied vertically downward. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. I 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. Is b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/ sq. ft. applied horizontally. c. lnfill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Metal Stairs: 05 5100 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.3 SUBMITTALS i. A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners and accessories. 1. Include data in Shop Drawings for paint products. 2. Submit Shop Drawings and structural analysis calculations for metal stairs signed and sealed by the Engineer responsible for their preparation who is registered in State in which Project is located. B. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. Indicate vent holes. C. Submit welder certificates for welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal stairs similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 1. Design and fabrication is responsibility of fabricator to meet all building codes applicable to Work of this Section. B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Reassembled Stairs: Commercial class. I C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - -Sheet Steel." D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for stairs required to be accessible for the physically disabled. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site marked to identify location for which they are intended. 1. Use markings corresponding to markings shown on approved Shop Drawings. B. Store off ground, under cover and protected from damage. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Where metal stairs are to fit other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements Y before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION 1 A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1, LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Metal Stairs: 05 5100 October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Coordinate location of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will no encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire - resistance rated stair enclosure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FERROUS METALS ' A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. 1 B. Steel Tubing, Cold- Formed: ASTM A 500 Grade B; Seamless where exposed. C. Uncoated, Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads, exposed. r D. Uncoated, Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads. E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 G90 (Z275) coating, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), unless another grade is required by design loads. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc - plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe /Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Standard Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A, with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and where indicated, flat washers. 1. Exposed Mechanical Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of structure. C. High Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. .1 2. Direct - Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible- washer type, same finish as above. • 1 D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Provide hot -dip or mechanically deposited, zinc- coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs, 1 stairs indicated to be galvanized, or indicated to be shop primed with zinc -rich primer. E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36. I, 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. F. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the bad imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. LRS Architects, Inc. a Fanno Creek Place 1: October 12, 2006 Metal Stairs: 05 5100 Page 4 � f ''S 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ii . l' A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Primer: SSPC -Paint 25, Type II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, II. complying with SSPC Paint -20. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. E. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107; or water - resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. F. Concrete and Reinforcing for Treads and Landings: As specified in Section 03 3000. G. Wood Handrails: Specified in Section 06 4000, Architectural Woodwork. I 2.4 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, railings, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. il 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise noted. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Comply with requirements of Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code I for stairs required to be accessible for the physically disabled. C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Disassemble units only as necessary for � 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installllationg limitations. D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. 1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 1 2. Remove sharp or rough edges on exposed surfaces. E. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 1. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. al 1. F. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. III !i G. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. 1. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 2. At exposed to view locations, place plastic filler between welds; sand flush. 1 1 . LRS Architects, Inc. II 1 Fanno Creek Place Metal Stairs: 05 5100 October 12, 2006 Page 5 2.5 FABRICATION - METAL PAN STAIRS AND LANDINGS I A. Fabricate stairs with closed risers and treads, of pan construction for treads to receive field installed concrete infill. B. Form treads and risers in one piece to conform to configuration shown. I 1. Form metal pan and riser from 12 gage sheet steel, or thickness of structural steel sheet indicated in calculations to support total design loads. I 2. Form metal pan 2 inches deep minimum with smooth surface and non -slip edge. 3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 4. Concrete and Reinforcing for Tread Pans: As specified in Section 03 3000. I C. Secure risers and treads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding. D. Form stringers of rolled steel channels or plates. 1. Weld stringers to steel channel headers. 2. Weld framing members to stringers and headers. I E. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated. Weld subplatforms to platform framing. 2.6 STAIR RAILINGS i A. Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage where indicated, but not less than needed to withstand design loads. B. Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit. Weld all around at connections, including fittings. I 1. Comply with requirements for Type 2 Railing System Joint Construction in NAAMM AMP 521, "Pipe Railing Systems Manual" for welded railings. C. Steel Pipe Handrail: 1 -inch standard pipe diameter, size not less than 1 -1/4 inch or more than 1 -1/2 inch OD. D. Wood Handrails: Hardwood rails of species and profile indicated complying with Section 06 4000, Architectural Woodwork. 1. Specialty Handrail Brackets for Wood Handrails: Julius Blum & Co., Inc. "Carlstadt" p tY Self- Aligning Post and Wall Brackets, Nos. 171 and 175 as applicable. Verify size with rail to wall clearance required. E. Form changes in direction of railings by bending. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; il l maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. II F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Place Metal Stairs: 05 5100 a o Creek ac October 12, 2006 Page 6 H. Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. Connect post to stair framing by direct welding. 2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other components. 3. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush - resistant material to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. J. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry �. work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 2.7 FINISHES • A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Hot -dip galvanize items exposed to weather to comply with applicable standard listed: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanized steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153, for galvanized steel and iron hardware. 3. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Interior Stairs: SSPC -SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Shop prime uncoated steel surfaces complying with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application No. 1: �. Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," except the following: 1. Galvanized finishes. 2. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. 3. Within 2 inches of surfaces to be field welded. E. Shop Priming: Apply one coat primer with a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils minimum. 1 F. Field paint exposed steel as specified in Section 09 9000, Painting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 1 3.2 ERECTION A. Install stairs level and plumb, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or 1 performance, set accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. • 1. LRS Architects, Inc. 1' Ii Fanno Creek Place Metal Stairs: 05 5100 October 12, 2006 Page 7 B. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners required for securing metal stairs to in -place construction. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. D. Do not field cut or alter members. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Grind welds smooth and flush. F. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03 3000. G. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings 1. Provide bracket with not less than 1 -1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required for design loading. 3. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows: a. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. b. For masonry anchorage, use drilled -in- expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. c. For stud walls, drill and tap; use set screws in metal studs to provide backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation for accurate location of backing members. d. Install handrail support with same finish as handrail. 3.3 CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC -Pa -1 for touching up shop - painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair t galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. C. Clean exposed surfaces after placement of concrete in metal pans prior to finish painting. END OF SECTION .r I LRS Architects, Inc. • /1 Fanno Creek Place Miscellaneous Carpentry: 06 1053 October 12, 2006 Page 1 t. PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Plywood backing panels. #` B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1600: Sheathing. 2. Section 07 5423: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO), for nailer requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS �1 A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. • B. Lumber grading, inspection, and treatment agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 3 WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory fabricated product. I 1. Include data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. a. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. b. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. B. Research / Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with Building Code in effect for Project: 1. Preservative treated plywood. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS A. Lumber Standard: Comply with American Softwood Lumber Standard, DOC PS 20. • . 1. Dressing Requirements: Smooth four sides, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Dimension Lumber Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent at time of dressing. I LRS Architects, Inc. ,1 Fanno Creek Place Miscellaneous Carpentry: 06 1053 October 12, 2006 Page 2 2.2 GRADE AND TREATMENT STAMPS 1. A. Identify each piece of framing lumber by grade stamp of WCLIB or WWPA. B. Stamp each preservative treated wood piece with AWPB treatment stamp or furnish certificate of inspection with each shipment. 1. For exposed lumber to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificate of treatment compliance. 2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Mark lumber with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency. 1. For exposed lumber to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificate of treatment compliance. C. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. I D. Treat the following wood items: 1. Cants, nailers, blocking, curbs, equipment support bases, stripping and similar items 1' in associated with roofing, flashing and waterproofing. 2 Blocking, furring, stripping and similar items in contact with concrete or masonry. E. Where possible, precut material before treatment. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. F. Products: ,1 1. Nisus Corporation: BORA -CARE Wood Preservative. 2. Chemical Specialties, Inc., ACQ Preserve Plus. 3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.4 DIMESION FRAMING AND MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent for 2 inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for t more than 2 nominal thickness. B. Concealed Dimension Lumber: Provide species of grades indicated: 1. Bucks, Blocking, Bridging, Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB Stripping and Miscellaneous: No. 2 2. Sills, Sleepers, Plates, Nailing Pressure Treated Blocks and Other Wood in Contact Douglas Fir NLGA, WWPA, WCLIB with Concrete or Masonry: No. 2 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, not less than 1/2 inch thickness. I LRS Architects, Inc. • i f Fanno Creek Place Miscellaneous Carpentry: 06 1053 October 12, 2006 Page 3 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: 1. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified I for material and manufacture 2. Where in contact with preservative treated wood, provide fasteners as follows: ,1 a. Interior Locations: Hot -dip, zinc coated complying with ASTM A 153. b. Exterior Locations and where stainless steel framing anchors are used: Type 304 stainless steel. 1 B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1. D. Power Driven Fasteners: NES NER -272. E. Screws for Fastening Cold- Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954 except with wafer heads it and reamer wings. F. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies I and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E.488. 1. Interior Locations: Carbon steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, I 2. Class Fe /Zn 5. Exterior Locations: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. II 3. Attachment to Concrete: Kwik -Bolt or sleeve Anchor by Hilti, Red Head Wedge Anchor by Phillips, Trubolt or Dynabolt by Ramset, Parabolt by U.S.M. 4. Attachment to Masonry: Sleeve Anchor by Hilti, Red head. Sleeve anchor by Phillips. I 2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. 1 1. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01630. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Gluing to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. • I. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL I A. Set rough carpentry to required level and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. I 1. Produce joints that are tight, true, and well nailed. 2. Do not shim framing components. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Miscellaneous Carpentry: 06 1053 October 12, 2006 Page 4 B. Provide and locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Framing Standard: Comply with American Forest & Paper Association's (AF &PA) "Details for I Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. as E. Provide minimum 2 inch nominal thick blocking a nd framing a indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, trim, toilet accessories, cabinets, toilet compartments, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical, electrical equipment, and the like. F. Block edges of discontinuous sheathing, and edges of sheathing where such blocking is shown in Drawings. Install nominal 2 by 4 nominal size or thicker blocking at unsupported joints in wall sheathing. G. Provide field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative treated lumber and plywood. H Securely attach rough carpentry to substrates by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code. 2. NES NER -272 for power- driven fasteners. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, NAILER, AND CANT STRIP INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. I F +.. ..L,..r,.... :.,..1i -..,1 .,.,.J cut as d f.� . r +r.e Iona°. and !eve! of .a..tiactr.d 1. Form 111 lV Cl I0 indicated and Vol CC required V. L. Vv. .. . 2. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. 1. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cant Strips: Provide pressure treated cant strips at perimeter of built -up roofing where roof intersects vertical surfaces, and as shown or required by roofing manufacturer. Shim as required to make level. END OF SECTION I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I i Fanno Creek Place Sheathing: 06 1600 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes plywood wall sheathing, where indicated. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 06 1053: Miscellaneous Carpentry for plywood backing panels. 2. Section 07 2700: Air Barriers, for air barrier installed at over wall exterior sheathing. 3. Structural Drawings: Structural Notes related to sheathing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory fabricated product. 1. Include data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture 111, content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. In addition to complying with applicable codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically directed or permitted by Architect, comply with the following: a. WWPA Product Use Manual, for selection and use of products. b. United States Product Standards, Standard for Construction and industrial Plywood, PS1 ANSI A199.1. I c. APA Plywood Design Specification APA Y510. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Wood Structural Panels: Provide APA performance rated panels complying with grade, span rating, and exposure durability classification indicated, and the following: 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Sheathing: 06 1600 October 12, 2006 Page 2 2.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWOOD I A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency. 1. For exposed plywood to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificate of treatment compliance. C. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Treat the following wood items: 1. Plywood used with roofing, flashing, and waterproofing. 2 Plywood in contact with concrete or masonry. 3. Where indicated in Drawings. E. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or approved: 1. Nisus Corporation: BORA -CARE Wood Preservative. 2. Chemical Specialties, Inc., ACQ Preserve Plus. 2.3 WOOD SHEATHING I A. Wall Sheathing: 1. Wall Sheathing: C -C plywood, square edges, Exterior, Structural I; 1/2 inch thickness. I a. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0 o.c. b. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. 2. Oriented Strand Board: Not allowed as substitute for plywood. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Wall Sheathing: Hot -dip zinc coated complying with ASTM A 153 or Type 304 stainless steel. 1. Screws for "Dry-Wall" Type, Non -Load Bearing Steel Framing: Comply with ASTM I C 1002 for steel framing less than 0.033 inch thick. 2. Screws for Fastening Cold- Formed Metal Framing: a. Provide screws with organic - polymer or other corrosion- protective coating having a salt -spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. b. Screws for Fastening Wood Sheathing: ASTM C 954 except with wafer ' heads and reamer wings. B. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. C. Power Driven Fasteners: NES NER -272. I I, LRS Architects, Inc. I I • Fanno Creek Place Sheathing: 06 1600 October 12, 2006 Page 3 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS I . A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG -01 or ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify blocking is in place and located properly prior to installation of sheathing. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL I . A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative I . treated plywood. C Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: i 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code. 2. NES NER -272 for power- driven fasteners. I D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through complete assembly. I E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. I F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.3 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood P Y pp 9 Construction" for types of structural use panels and applications indicated. nu B Roof Sheathing: 1. Place wood sheathing panels with face grain vertically at walls, continuously over at least two supports, except where otherwise indicated. Stagger end joints 4 feet at adjacent panels. 2. Adjust layout to eliminate sheathing pieces less than one foot wide. I 3. Center joints over supports. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 4. Screw to cold- formed metal framing. 5. Back panel edges with minimum 2 by 4 blocking. 6. Fastening Wood Sheathing for Walls: I a. Space nails at minimum of 6 inches o.c. at panel edges, and 12 inches o.c. in panel field. . b. Refer to Drawings for special nailing requirements. LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Sheathing: 06 1600 1 October 12, 2006 Page 4 1 3.4 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK A. Remove and replace sheathing panels with edges split or damaged by fasteners. I END OF SECTION I I 1 I I I 1 I I, LRS Architects, Inc. it Fanno Creek Place Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 October 12, 2006 Page 1 . PART 1 GENERAL I , 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following for interior architectural woodwork: I 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Stone countertops. 3. Flush wood paneling. • 4. Stair handrails. 5. Shop finishing of woodwork. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 05 5100: Metal Stairs, for wood components for metal stairs. 2. Section 06 1053: Miscellaneous Carpentry, for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 3. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants 4. Section 09 9000: Painting, for wood finishes. I 5. 6. Division 22: Plumbing, for plumbing work incorporated in countertops. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for HVAC work incorporated in wall paneling. I 7. Division 26: Electrical, for electrical work incorporated in wall paneling. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified including cabinet hardware and I accessories, and installation instructions. • B. Shop Drawings: I. 1. Show location of each item with dimensioned plans and elevations, indicating materials, component profiles, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes. 2 Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing, HVAC, and electrical ,` work incorporated in woodwork. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show direction grain of wood faced items for transparent finish. C. Samples: II. Lumber to receive Transparent Finish: Two 5 by 24 inch long for each species and cut, finished on one side and 1 edge. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Panel Products: Two 8 by 10 inch size samples with transparent finish for each species and cut. I 4. Stone materials: Two 6 by 6 inch samples. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute's (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: 1. Firm experienced in producing casework for projects of similar size, quality and complexity. 2. Engage a firm qualified to assume single - source responsibility for fabricating, . finishing, and installing Work of this Section in accordance with the referenced standard. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Protect units from moisture damage, and damage by project construction operations. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Maintain temperature between 60 and 90 degrees F in areas where architectural woodwork is installed. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicated measurements in Shop Drawings. B. Field verify measurements of other construction that woodwork is intended to fit to prior to fabrication of woodwork. Where measurements cannot be made prior to Shop Drawings, provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established woodwork dimensions shown in Shop Drawings. 1 1.8 COORDINATION A Coordinate work of this Section with plumbing, HVAC, and electrical rough -in, and other finish I work. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, furring, blocking, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections for supporting and installing architectural woodwork items. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for 1, each type of woodwork and grade specified. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I I ' Fanno Creek Place Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 ! a October 12, 2006 Page 3 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS I E A. Softwood Lumber: DOC PS 20; average moisture content of 6 percent; Douglas Fir or Hemlock species. I B. Hardwood Lumber: AHA A135.4. C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1; core materials Douglas Fir or Hemlock species. D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2 or Grade M -2 Exterior Glue, 45 pcf density, of grade to suit application; sanded faces. 1. Duraflake; Willamette Industries, Inc. 2.3 STONE I A. Match Architects samples for variety, color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. B. Provide stone that is free of cracks, seams, and starts impairing structural integrity or function. I . C. Marble: Comply with ASTM C 503. 1. Description: Intrepid #19404, minimum 3/4 inch slab. 2. Finish: Antiqued with Antiqued edges. 3. Final slab selection by Architect. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. (� 11 B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Select type, size and finish to suit application. C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln -dried to less I than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1 1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. 2. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in -place anchors. I C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Low VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). I 1. 2. Wood Glues: 30 g /L. Contact Adhesive: 250 g /L. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 October 12, 2006 Page 4 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL i, A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom Grade woodwork complying with requirements of referenced AWI Quality Standard. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application in shop to greatest extent possible before delivery to Project site. 1. Dissemble only as necessary for shipment and installation. C. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. II I Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Shop cut and locate openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items, using templates or roughing -in diagrams. I. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a water - resisting coating. 2.7 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWI Section 300 for Standing and Running Trim. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Clear, vertical grain, Douglas Fir, plain sawn. C. Groove backs of flat trim members, and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for I members with exposed ends in finished work. 2.8 COUNTERTOPS I A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWI Section 400 Architectural Cabinets. B. Type of Top: Stone, complying with the following: II 1. Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimensional Stone -- Design Manual IV." 2. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch. Gage backs to provide units of identical thickness 3. Edge Detail: Straight (do not ease edge for tight fit to applied wood edges). 4. Seams: Fabricate countertops in sections indicated for joining in field, with seams as follows: I a. Bonded Seams: 1/32 inch or less in width. 5. Adhesive: Water - cleanable epoxy, ANSI A118.3. I 6. Stone Seam Adhesive: 2 -part epoxy -resin stone adhesive with an initial set time of not more than 2 hours at 70 degrees F. a. Bonstone Materials Corporation; A -028/B -437. b. Akemi North America; Akepox. 7. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and I applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives I I LRS Architects, Inc. I • I Fanno Creek Place Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 October 12, 2006 Page 5 1 2.9 WOOD HANDRAILS I A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWI Section 800 Stair Work and Rails. 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Fabricate to profile indicated, and for attachment to stair handrail brackets specified in Section 05 5100, Metal Stairs. B. Wood Species for Transparent Finish: White Oak. 1 2.10 FLUSH WOOD PANELING A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements of AWI Section 500 Paneling and Related Wood I Doors. B. Wood Species and Cut: Clear, vertical grain, Douglas Fir, rotary cut. I C. Wood Paneling for Transparent. Finish: 1. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Running match. I 2. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Running match. 3. Panel Matching Method: Sequence matched, uniform size set. D. Panel Mounting Clip: Monarch Metal Fabrications, Inc., Panel "Z" Clips, or approved. 2.11 SHOP FINISHING (I A. Quality Standard: Comply with requirements for AWI Section 1500 Factory Finishing. B. General: Shop finish transparent finished architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as I specified in this Section and in Section 09900 for materials. 1. To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork in the fabrication shop. 2. Touch up, clean, and polish after installation at Project site. C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. I D. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and end -grain surfaces. I 1. Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, or thermoset decorative panels. I E. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System: Post - Catalyzed Lacquer. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Sheen: Satin 30 -50 gloss units. I I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 October 12, 2006 Page 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition architectural woodwork to prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified for type of architectural woodwork involved, and as specified in this Section. B. Install architectural woodwork plumb, level, and straight. 1. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Install level and plumb to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built -in or directly attached to substrates as required for proper support and attachment. E. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations and fill flush with adjacent surfaces matching final finish. 1 F. Standing and Running Trim: 1 Install with minimum of joints possible. 2. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. 3. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. 4. Wood Base: Fill gaps between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base. G. Stone Countertops: 1. Install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water - cleanable epoxy I adhesive. 2. Bond seams with stone seam adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to seams to prevent adhesive smears. Clamp units to temporary bracing to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and seams are minimum width. H. Paneling: I 1. Anchor paneling to substrate with concealed panel hangar clips. 2. Install paneling not to exceed 1/16 inch in 96 inches vertical sup or bow, or 1/8 inch in 96 inches horizontal variation from true plane. Stair Handrails: 1. Secure wood components of stair handrails to metal brackets specified in Section 05 5100. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Fanno Creek Place Architectural Woodwork: 06 4000 October 12, 2006 Page 7 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Touch up shop applied finishes and repair and restore damaged or soiled areas to eliminate ' functional and visual defects. 1. Where it is not possible to repair defects, replace woodwork. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide protection and maintain conditions to ensure that casework is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION I I • 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Bentonite Waterproofing: 07 1700 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes Bentonite waterproofing system at elevator pits. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for waterstops and preparation of concrete I 2. substrate to receive waterproofing. Section 31 2000: Earth Moving, for backfill requirements. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I A. Waterproofing System: Capable of resisting water head of 10 feet and preventing moisture migration to interior. I B. Single Source: Provide products of one manufacturer's waterproofing system, or products recommended by membrane manufacturer for waterproofing system. I 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, for specified materials and accessories. I B. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with skilled workers experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. 1 1. Engage company currently approved in writing by manufacturer of waterproofing system. I B. Pre - Installation Conference: Prior to commencement of work to receive waterproofing, schedule meeting at mutually agreed upon time to include Owner, Architect, Contractor, Contractor's project foreman for waterproofing, manufacturer's representative, and other interested parties to review methods and procedures to be used to achieve end results. I 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with labels intact and I legible at time of use. B. Maintain products in a dry condition during delivery, storage, handling, installation, and I concealment. .WARRANTY I A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for waterproofing failure to resist penetration of water. B. For warranty repair work, include removal and replacement of materials concealing I waterproofing. . I LRS Architects, Inc. : 07 1700 Waterproofing: Fanno Creek Place P 9 October 12, 2006 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products of one of the following: 1. CETCO, Colloid Celloid Environmental Technologies Company; Building Materials I Group. a. Product: Volclay "Voltex" Bentonite Geotextile Waterproofing. b. Waterstop: Waterstop RX. c. Bentonite Sealant: Volclay "Bentoseal," or approved. . d. Drainage Composite: "Aquadrain 15X," or approved. 2. Tremco Incorporated; Paramount Technical Products, Inc. a. Product: "Paraseal" HDPE /Bentonite Sheet Membrane Dual Waterproofing System, b. Waterstop: Tremco "Superstop." c. Termination Bar: Mameco "Paraseal" Paraterm Bar." d. Temporary Joints Closure Tape: Mameco "Temporary Tape." e. Sealant: Mameco "Paramastic," or approved. f. Drainage Composite: Paramount "Paradrain." B. , Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION , A. Verify existing conditions before starting work, and that substrate surfaces are durable and free of matter detrimental to application of waterproofing system. B. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. I D. Verify items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified under provisions of Section 03 3000, Cast -In -Place Concrete. B. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or applicator. C. Seal cracks and joints with sealant materials using depth to width ratio as recommended by , sealant manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with Work of this section. B. Install Bentonite waterproofing where indicated in Drawings, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Bentonite Waterproofing: 07 1700 October 12, 2006 Page 3 ' C. Seal waterproofing penetrations, inside corners, and waterproofing termination with specified sealant, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 PROTECTION ' A. Protect panels from moisture with temporary plastic sheets. B. Install drainage composite against vertical surfaces prior to backfilling. C. Backfill as soon as possible after installation has been approved, working in accordance with Work of other Sections. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Install Bentonite waterproofing at the following areas: 1. Elevator pits. END OF SECTION 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Water Repellents: 07 1900 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes water - repellents for the following vertical surfaces: 1 1. Brick masonry. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for manufacturer's field service procedures. 2. Section 04 2100: Brick Masonry, for substrate. 3. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants. 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application I . instructions, recommendations for water repellents for each surface to be treated, protection and cleaning instructions, and chemical properties including percentage of solids and VOC content. I 1. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements. 1 B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that water repellents comply with requirements, including regulatory requirements. C. Field Quality Control Test Reports. I D. Evidence that Applicator has been trained and currently approved by manufacturer for application of manufacturer's products. I E. Warranty: Copy of special warranty specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. I 1. Applicator (actual person applying water repellent) shall have been trained and currently approved by manufacturer for application of manufacturer's products. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction concerning use of materials with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs). 1 1. Products containing 1,1,1 trichloroethane are not allowed. 1.5 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE I A. Schedule meeting minimum one week prior to start of application. Include manufacturer's technical representative in meeting. Comply with requirements of Section 01 3100. ■ B. Agenda: Schedule, site conditions, dilution ratios for concentrates, and rate of application s determined by water take up test. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Water Repellents: 07 1900 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1 A. Deliver the materials to the job site in the manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. I B. Protect liquids from freezing. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements: 1. Ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F during and 24 hours after installation. 2. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours. 3. Application proceeds more than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet. 4. Substrate is not frozen. 5. Ambient surface temperature is not above 100 degrees F. 6. Masonry mortar joints have cured for more than 28 days. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Provide a written warranty covering materials and labor in which I manufacturer and applicator agree to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency as follows within a 10 year period from date of Substantial Completion: 1. 1.0 mi1/20 minutes or greater (60 mph wind driven rain equivalent) using a water I uptake tube meeting the requirements of RILEM Method II. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Water Repellents for Brick: Subject to compliance with specification requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Diedrich Technolgies, Inc.; 303 -S. 2. Degussa Corporation; Chem -Trete BSM 40 VOC. 3. Hydrozo; Enviroseal Double 7 for Brick. 4. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc ; Hydropel WB. 5. OKON, Inc.: W -1. I 6. ProSoCo, Inc; Weather Seal Siloxane WB Concentrate. 7. Tamms: Chemstop WB Heavy Duty. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 2500. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Verify substrates are acceptable to receive water repellent treatment. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I B. Verify nd masonry mortar substrates have cured a minimum of 28 days. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Water Repellents: 07 1900 October 12, 2006 Page 3 C. Verify sealants in joints adjacent to surfaces to receive water repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Application of water repellent may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water ' repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure that surface is dry enough. 1 1. Clay Brick Masonry: Clean per ASTM D 5703. B. Verify cracks that exceed 1/64 inch wide have been filled with pointing mortar. C. Test for pH level, according to water repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical bond to silicate materials. D. Protect adjoining work from spillage, over - spraying or blow -over of water repellent. ' 1. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is a possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. 2. Cover live plants and grass. 3. Cover vehicles. E. Test Application: 1. Before perfoming water repellent work, including bulk purchase and delivery of products, prepare a 3 foot square area on an unobtrusive location of each substrate in a manner acceptable to Architect, to demonstrate the final visual, physical, and chemical effect of planned installation. 2. Run a RILEM uptake test on the treated area after sample has cured for five days. Test both brick surface and mortar joint. 3. Verify that application of water repellent coatings will produce no surface stains or discoloration. If surface stains or discoloration are noted, proceed only as directed by Architect. 4. If test is acceptable, coverage r ate used in test area must be used on entire project. 1 5. Accepted test application will be used as a standard for judging completed work. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply to exposed exterior masonry unit surfaces in two continuous, uniform coats. 1. Apply uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer for warranty period specified for substrate receiving water repellent. 2. Keep a wet edge at all times until complete surface plane has been sprayed. 3. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for limitations on drying time between coats. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. r Fanno Creek Place Water Repellents: 07 1900 October 12, 2006 Page 4 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ,' A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct applicator on the product and application method to be used. 1. Furnish a written certification that surface preparation method and final condition comply with the warranty. 2. Furnish results of test area absorption on each type of substrate. Test results shall determine application rate. • B. Spray Test: After water repellent has cured, spray coated surfaces with water. 1. After surfaces have adequately dried, recoat surfaces that show water absorption. 2. Run random RILEM tests on each elevation of structure. 3. Continue application of water repellant treatment until absorption rate meets requirements of special warranty. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas. B. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by ' water repellent application as work progresses. 1. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. ' C. Repair damage caused by water repellent application. END OF SECTION I I 1 • 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Thermal Insulation: 07 2100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: I 1. Blanket insulation. 2. Vapor retarder. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 4000: Cold- Formed Metal Framing, for exterior wall framing to receive blanket insulation. I 2. Section 07 5423: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO), for insulation specified as part of roofing system. 3. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for metal stud interior wall and furring to receive blanket insulation. 1 4. Section 09 8110: Acoustic Insulation and Sealant, for acoustic insulation. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS I A. Provide with materials of this Section a continuity of thermal and vapor barrier at building enclosure elements. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of building insulation and vapor retarder specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage a company using workers who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and ii , familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this section. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- 111 response characteristics indicated, as determined per test method indicated below: 1. Surface- Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire - Resistive Ratings: ASTM E 119. I 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING I A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. I B. Store inside and in a dry location. C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. I D. Do not expose plastic insulation to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible. I I . LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Thermal Insulation: 07 2100 October 12, 2006 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified in Part 2 articles B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 1 2.2 BLANKET INSULATION MATERIALS A. Faced Blanket Insulation: , 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. c. Owens Corning. 2. ASTM C 665, Type II, Class C. 3. Type: Glass - fiber. 4. Vapor Retarder: Kraft, with 1.0 maximum permeability. 5. Provide min. 1 inch wide flange along edges for attachment to framing 6. Thickness: As required to achieve insulation -only R -Value indicated in the Drawings. B. Unfaced Blanket Insulation: ' 1. ASTM C 665, Type I. 2. Type: Glass- fiber. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, Flame spread 25 and smoke development 50 per ASTM E 84; rated as noncombustible per ASTM E 136. 4. Thickness: As required to achieve insulation -only R -Value indicated in the Drawings. 2.3 ACOUSTIC INSULATION , A. Specified in Section 09 8110, Acoustic Insulation and Sealant. 2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS I A. LAMTEC Corporation: " LAMTEC" 3035 foil /scrim /kraft vapor retarder; 0.008 inch thickness, with permeance rating of 0.02 perm. I 1. Flame Spread 0 and Smoke Development 0 per ASTM E 84. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor- Retarder Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder facings. B. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh, 18 gage minimum. C. Adhesives: Type for insulation or vapor retarders as recommended by material manufacturer 111 for bonding to substrates indicated. D. Fasteners and Adhesives: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. LRS Architects, Inc. I Ii Fanno Creek Place Thermal Insulation: 07 2100 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements of Sections in which I substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. I B. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in Work of this Section. I 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and I application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. ' C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelope entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. I D. Water- Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. I 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION I A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, or if no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. I B. Install vapor retarding faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of assembly. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. I 2. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane to form a continuous barrier. 3. Where separate sheet vapor barrier is used, place on warm side of insulation, and lap I and seal sheet barrier joints over framing member face. C. Install mineral -fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members as follows: II Use blanket widths and lengths that completely fill cavities formed by framing . members. 2. Place insulation cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. I 3. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. 4. Place insulation between pipes in wall and exterior side of assembly. Leave no gaps or voids. 5. Maintain 3 inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Thermal Insulation: 07 2100 October 12, 2006 Page 4 6. For metal framed wall cavities support unfaced blankets mechanically using adhesive or wire mesh to prevent sagging, and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 3.5 ACOUSTIC INSULATION A. Refer to Section 09 2116 for installation of blanket acoustic insulation in metal stud partitions. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. 1. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system. 2. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose fiber insulation. B. Metal Framing: Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. 1. Seal overlapping joints and butt joints with vapor retarder tape. 2. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor retarder taper or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage, both from weather exposure or construction operations. B. Repair damaged insulation and vapor retarders. END OF SECTION I 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS): 07 2400 1 October 12, 2006 . Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over tilt -up concrete panel and brick masonry construction. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 4713: Tilt -Up Concrete, for substrate. I 2. Section 05 4000: Brick Masonry, for substrate. 3. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal, for flashing. 4. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants. 1 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Systems refers to Class PB EIFS. I B. System manufacturer refers to EIFS manufacturer. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS . I A. General: Provide systems that comply with the following performance requirements: 1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system I and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in- service conditions. 2. Weather Tightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and I assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that result in deterioration of thermal - insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish. I B. Physical Properties of Class PB System: Provide EIFS whose physical and structural properties and structural performance meet the requirements of the following referenced tests: I 1. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D 968, Method A. 2. Accelerated Weathering Characteristics: ASTM G 23, Method 1. I 3. Absorption- Freeze Resistance: EIMA 101.01: 4. Mildew Resistance: ASTM, D 3273. 5. Salt -Spray Resistance: ASTM B 117. 6. Tensile Adhesion: EIMA 101.03. I 7. Water Penetration: EIMAS 101.02. 8. Water Resistance: ASTM D 2247. 9. Impact Resistance: EIMA 101.86; meeting or exceeding the following impact I classification and range: a. Standard Impact Resistance: 25-49 inch -lb. Il 10. Positive and Negative Wind -Load Performance: ASTM E 330. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Exterior Insulation and Finish System ( (EIFS): 07 2400 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications for each component used in each system, manufacturer's published literature describing proprietary water- management system including installation requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of system, including plans, elevations, and sections, details of components, joint location and details, penetrations location and details, flashing details, and attachment to supporting construction. C. Samples: Submit two 12 by 12 inch samples illustrating coating color and texture range for each color and texture selection. Sample coating to be as specified including colored primer over specified substrates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Installer: Engage an experienced installer, with minimum 5 years experience under present name, who is certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system prior to bid date of Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain materials for system from one source and by a single manufacturer or by manufacturers approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with other system components. C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide system assemblies and components that meet the following: 1. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 450 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. D. Mockups: Build mockups to comply with the following, using materials indicated for completed Work: 1. Location and size as directed by the Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will constructed. 3. Demonstrated range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Include all shapes, reveals, and details found in the project. 4. Obtain Architect's approval before starting fabrication of Work. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 01. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels intact and clearly identifying products. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS): 07 2400 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from the weather, direct I sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Do not install system when ambient outdoor air and substrate temperatures are 40 degrees F and falling, or when rain is forecasted. I B. Apply materials to substrate that is clean, dry and otherwise suitable for covering. 1.8 COORDINATION I A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with other Work specified in other Sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Sto . ,ii B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 MATERIALS I A. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish -coat materials, primers, flashings, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with I one another and approved for use by system manufacturer for the Project. B. Board Insulation: Expanded polystyrene; ASTM C578, Type I; nominal density of 1.0 pcf, complying with requirements of "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystryene I (EPS) Insulation Board," and the following: • 1. Thermal Resistance: R of 3.7. 2. Thickness: As indicated, but not less than 1 -1/2 inch. I 3. 4. Thickness Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/16 inch maximum. Board Size: 24 by 48 inch. 5. Compressive Strength: Minimum 10 psi. I 6. 7. Water Absorption: In accordance with ASTM D 2842, 4 percent by volume maximum. Edges: Square within 1/32 inch per foot. C. Waterproof Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's job mixed I waterproof formulation designed for indicated use, complying with requirements of ASTM C 150, Type I. D. Reinforcing Mesh: Complying with ASTM D 578 and the following impact resistance when I tested according to EIMA 101.86 1. Standard: Impact resistance of 25 to 49 in.-lb. I 2. 3. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz. /sq. yd. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4 oz. /sq. yd. 4. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz. /sq. yd. I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 • Fanno Creek Place 111 Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS): 07 2400 October 12, 2006 Page 4 E. Base -Coat Materials: System manufacturer's job mixed formulation of Portland cement ' complying with requirements of ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer - emulsion adhesive designed for use indicated. I ,i F. Tinted Primer: System manufacturer's standard factory-mixed elastomeric- polymer primer for preparing base -coat surface for application of finish coat, with color closely matched to selected finish coat color. I G. Finish Coat Materials: 1. System manufacturer's factory-mixed formulation of polymer - emulsion binder, I colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. 2. Sealer: System manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic -based sealer for protecting finish coat. I 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Metal Flashing: In accordance with requirements of Section 07 6000. II B. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with system manufacturer's written requirements, manufactured from vinyl plastic and I complying with ASTM C 1063. C. Elastomeric Sealants: Provide sealant and joint filler products in accordance with 1 requirements of Section 07 9200, and the following: 1. Chemically curing, elastomeric sealant listed and recommended by system manufacturer, compatible_ with joint substrates and other related materials, complying I with requirements for products indicated in "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealant with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB." Provide one of the following, with appropriate primers, or approved: i a. Low - modulus, two component, nonsag polyurethane sealant: Pecora Dynatrol II, Tremco Dymeric, or Tremco Vulkem 922. b. Low - modulus silicone sealant: Dow Corning 790, 791, or 795. I c. Very low- modulus elastomeric sealant: Sonneborn Sonolastic 150 or Sonolastic 150 VLM (STP). 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range. 1 2.4 MIXING A. Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION : A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of system. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of fins or irregularities. C. Proceed with installation of system only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS): 07 2400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 5 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Provide temporary covering or other protection needed to protect adjacent Work. B. Protect system, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during I installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of substrates. C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with manufacturer's written requirements to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation. 1 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM PS 49, system manufacturer's written instructions for water- management system, standard system where applicable, and EIMA recommendations for "Class PB" system. I 1. Install standard system over concrete and brick masonry unit construction. B. Apply trim accessories at perimeter of system, and elsewhere, as required by EIFS manufacturer. I C. Adhesively attach insulation board to substrates. I 1. Sand insulation board to enhance bonding prior to installation. 2. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched - trowel method, in ribbons parallel with the short dimension of the board. 3. Press insulation board in place with uniform contact, achieving a continuous flush I insulation surface. a. Locate joints so no piece is less than 12 inches in shortest dimension. b. Abut boards tightly at joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and I to protrusions. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation board cut to fit gaps exactly, inserted without using adhesive or other material. I 4. 5. Install foam shapes attached to supporting substrate, where indicated. Form reveals in insulation board where indicated. 6. Form 1/2 -inch joints for sealant application at perimeter of system where EIFS adjoins dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction. I 7. Do not disturb adhered insulation for not less than 24 hours before beginning rasping and sanding insulation, or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh. I D. Wrap exposed edges of insulation board after installing insulation board and before applying reinforcing mesh. E. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to product a wall system that does I not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating. F. Apply base coat to exposed surfaces of insulation in two applications to a total nominal dry thickness of 3/32 -inch, or as recommended by system manufacturer, but not less than 1/16 - inch dry-coat thickness. I I . I LRS Architects, Inc. Creek Place Exterior Insulation and Finish System EIFS • Fanno Cre : 07 2400 Y ( ) October 12, 2006 Page 6 G. Embed reinforcing mesh into wet basecoat and smooth with trowel until mesh is fully embedded. 1. Install reinforcing mesh providing ultra -high impact resistance of over 150 in. -lb. to a minimum height of 8 feet above grade level at perimeter of building. a. Install reinforcing mesh providing standard impact resistance of minimum 25 to 49 in. -lb. 2. Lap mesh a minimum of 2 -1/2 inches on all sides. 3. Do not lap mesh within 8 inches of corners. 4. Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4- inches beyond perimeter. 5. Apply additional 9 -by -12 inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings. 6. Apply 8 -inch wide strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners. 7. At board overlays, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8- inches wide. 8. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh. H. Apply second application of base coat to thickness required so that the pattern of the mesh is '1 not visible beneath the surface. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. Apply tinted primer over base coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' J. Apply finish coat over dry tinted primer, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample. K. Apply sealer coat over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by system manufacturer. L. Apply sealant and backer rod at finish perimeter and expansion joints in accordance with requirements of Section 07 9200. 1. Do not apply sealant directly to finish coat or base coat surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other Work. B. Do not permit finish surface to become soiled or damaged. ' • END OF SECTION ' 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Weather Barriers: 07 2500 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes weather - resistive barriers for wall application. 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type product specified. I PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 AIR BARRIERS A. Air Barrier (Building Wrap): One of the following meeting requirements of IBC Section 1404.2 as an alternate weather- resistive barrier. I 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I a. DuPont: Tyvek Commercial Wrap. b. Henry Company: Blueskin SA. c. Raven Industries Inc: Rufco-Wrap. I B. Air Barrier (Building Wrap) Tape: Pressure - sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. C. Fasteners: Type as recommended in writing by air barrier manufacturer. I 2.2 BUILDING PAPER A. Building Paper: Water- vapor - permeable, kraft building paper, except that water resistance I shall not be less than 1 hour and water -vapor transmission shall not be less than 75 g /sq. m x 24 h, meeting requirements of IBC Section 1404.2 as an alternate weather - resistive barrier. 1 1. Product: Fortifiber Building System Group "60 Minute Super Jumbo Tex." PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate materials are dry and clean. I B. Coordinate installation of weather - resistant barrier with flexible membrane flashing specified in Section 07 6000 installed at wall openings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Cover sheathing with weather - resistant sheathing paper. I 1. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum of 4 inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated. 1 I I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Weather Barriers: 07 2500 October 12, 2006 Page 2 B. Air - Infiltration Barrier (Building Wrap): Comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions over wall sheathing. 2. Run horizontally, shingle fashion. 3. Lap 4 inches horizontally and 12 inches vertically. 4. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 5. Extend into jambs and sills of openings and seal corners with tape. C. Building Paper: 1. Run horizontally, shingle fashion. 2. Lap 4 inches horizontally and 12 inches vertically. 3. Fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. 4. Seal seams,. edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 5. Extend into jambs and sills of openings and seal corners with tape. 6. Coordinate installation of building paper with flexible membrane flashing installed at wall openings. 11 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Below -Grade Vapor Retarders: 07 2616 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sheet materials for controlling vapor diffusion under concrete floor slabs -on 1 grade. B. Related Sections: ' 1. 2. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for concrete placed over vapor retarder. Section 31 2000: Earth Moving, for underslab aggregate base substrate for vapor retarder. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type product specified. 1.3 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a pre - installation conference in coordination with pre - installation conference for 1 placement of concrete floor slabs within two weeks prior to commencing work of this Section. B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work for placement of ' concrete and concrete slab steel reinforcement on vapor retarder. PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder: Meeting minimum requirements of ASTM E 1745, Class B, 10 mil, except 1 where Class A is indicated: 1. ASTM E 1745, Class B Requirements: a. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.3 perms. b. Maximum Tensile Strength: 30.0 Ibf /in. c. Puncture Resistance: 1700 grams. 1 2. Acceptable Products: a. Floor Seal Technology, Inc.: TruBarrier. ' b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group: 1) Moistop Ultra 15 Underslab Vapor Retarder (Class A). 2) Moistop Ultra 10 Underslab Vapor Retarder (Class A). 1 c. W. R. Grace & Co.: Florprufe 120. (Class B). d. W. R. Meadows: Vapor -Mat 10 mil or 15 mil. e. Raven Industries, Inc.: 1) Vapor Block 15 (Class A). 2) Dura -Skrim D16WB (Class B). 1' 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Below -Grade Vapor Retarders: 07 2616 October 12, 2006 Page 2 f. Reef Industries, Inc.: I 1) Griffolyn Type -105 Vapor Retarder. (Class A). 2) Griffolyn Type -85 Vapor Retarder. (Class B). g. Stego Industries, LLC: Stego Wrap 10 mil or 15 mil Vapor Barrier (Class B). B. Vapor Retarder Tape: High density polyethylene tape with pressure sensitive adhesive, by 1 manufacturer of vapor retarder, 4 inches width. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify substrate materials are dry and clean. Remove loose or foreign matter that might 1 impair adhesion. B. Coordinate with work of other sections for location and treatment of penetrations through vapor retarder, and placement of concrete and concrete reinforcement over vapor retarder. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Place, protect, and repair vapor retarder according to requirements and recommendations of ASTM E 1643 without grandular fill, and manufacturers written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with recommended pressure sensitive tape. 2. Turn vapor retarder up over end of concrete slab -on -grade and seal to foundation wall. Leave end of vapor retarder exposed above top of slab. 3. Seal pipe penetrations with pipe boot made from vapor retarder and tape according to manufacturer's instructions. 4. Protect vapor retarder from damage during installation of reinforcing steel and utilities. 5. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged areas 6 inches and taping all four sides with pressure sensitive tape. B. Note: Vapor retarder may be identified as "vapor barrier" in drawings. 1 END OF SECTION 1 11. 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO): 07 5423 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Thermoplastic sheet roofing system, mechanically attached, complete with accessories. 2. Roof insulation. I 3. Roof traffic pads. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for inspection procedures required by manufacturer's technical representative. 2. Section 05 3100: Steel Decking, for roof substrate. 3. Section 06 1053: Miscellaneous Carpentry, for wood blocking, curbs, and nailers. I 4. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal. 5. Section 07 7233: Roof Hatches. 6. Division 22: Plumbing, for roof drains and vents. 1 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) sheet membrane mechanically attached over cover board on I rigid insulation over protection board to steel deck, with base flashing, crickets, counterflashing, and all incidentals for a manufacturer's approved and warrantable assembly. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW I A. Product Data: Membrane manufacturer's published data indicating characteristics of membrane materials, cover board materials, base flashing materials, insulation, protective I covering, and traffic pads. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate setting plan for tapered insulation, mechanical fastener layout, joint or termination details, and height of building. 1 C. Applicator Qualifications: Submit the following written documentation: 1. Applicator's qualifications including evidence that applicator is licensed or approved I by the manufacturer. Listing of five successfully completed projects similar in scope and complexity to work of this Section with current phone numbers of Architect and Owner contacts for verification. 1 3. Copy of designated project foreman's training certification by manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION I A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special precautions required for seaming membrane and fastening and adhering membrane to substrate. 1 B. Manufacturer's certificate certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 01 4500 indicating procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given. D. Copy of proposed warranty. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. i Membrane Roofing TPO : 07 5423 I Fanno Creek Place Thermoplastic g ( ) October 12, 2006 Page 2 i 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, manufacturer's 1 instructions, and as specified. B. Applicator: I 1. Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience and licensed or approved by manufacturer. 2. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation and who shall have certification of training by roofing system manufacturer. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Conform to applicable State, and local codes for roof assembly fire hazard requirements. 1. Fire Hazard Classification: UL Class A; Comply with UL 790 or ASTM E 108, for 1 application and slopes indicated. B. Uplift Requirement: Comply with requirements of FMG Class IA -90 for windstorm rating. 1 C. Insulation Fire Performance Characteristics: 1. Provide insulation materials that are identical to those whose fire performance 1 characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, or UL or other testing 1 and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. b. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. c. Combustibility Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.7 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCE 1 A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section. 1. Include Contractor, roofing applicator, Owner's representative, Architect, 1 manufacturer's representative, and applicable subcontractors. B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work. 1. Record discussions and agreements, and furnish copy to each participant. 1 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels 1 intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. I 1. Protect foam insulation from direct sunlight exposure. 2. Stand roll materials on end. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO): 07 5423 ' October 12, 2006 Page 3 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply roofing membrane or insulation during inclement weather or when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees F, unless conditions are as recommended by manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface; do not begin work until surfaces are sufficiently dry to receive new work. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be rendered watertight during the same day. D. Refrain from roofing operations when wind velocity is sufficiently high to lift roofing membrane 1 sheets and pose a danger to workers. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 1 A. Coordinate Work of installing associated metal flashings as the work of this Section proceeds. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of roofing system manufacturer that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. Warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashing, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, cover and protection boards, walkway products, and other components of roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, and meeting Energy Star Roof Products Program 1 guidelines for energy efficiency, provide one of the following roofing systems: 1. Carlisle; Sure -Weld System TPO. 2. Firestone; TPO UltraPly. 3. GenFlex; TPO Roofing System. 4. Johns Manville; UltraGard Single Ply Roofing System TPO. 5. Stevens Roofing Systems, JPS Elastomerics Corp: Stevens EP Brand of TPO Roofing System. 41 1 B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 MEMBRANE A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Sheet: Uniform, flexible elastomer sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin, reinforced, 60 mil nominal (0.060 inch) thickness. 1. Exposed Face Color: White, meeting the following Energy Star Roof Products Program guidelines: a. Initial reflectance of minimum 0.65 and 3 year aged reflectance of minimum 0.5 when tested according to ASTM E 903. b. Emissivity of minimum 0.9 when tested according to ASTM E 408. LRS Architects, Inc. I Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing TPO : 07 5423 III Creek Place p g ( ) October 12, 2006 Page 4 • 1 2.3 INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Facer Type II, felt or glass -fiber mat on I both major surfaces. 1. Compressive Strength per ASTM D 1621:20 Ibs per cu. ft. 2. Size: Maximum 4 by 4 foot sheet. 3. Thickness: As shown or required to achieve minimum aged, insulation -only thermal resistance R value of 19. 2.4 FLASHING A. Counterflashing: Metal, as specified in Section 07 6000. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, thickness, and color as sheet membrane. C. Roof Penetration Flashing: Type as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 1 D. Flexible Membrane Flashing: Rubberized asphalt, reinforced, self- adhering membrane, minimum 40 mil thickness; one of the following, or as recommended by membrane manufacturer: 1. Johns Manville, UltraGard TPO Peel and Stick RTS Strip. 2. W.R. Grace & Co., "Vycor V40" Weather Barrier Strips, Self- Adhered Weather Resistive Barrier. 3. W. R. Meadows, Inc., Sealtight "Air- Shield" Self- Adhering Air - Barrier and Flashing Membrane. III 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Membrane Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. 1 B. Seam Calk: Manufacturer's standard. C. Sealants: Type as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 1 D. Wood Nailer Strips: Furnish preservative treated wood nailer strips complying with requirements of Section 06 1000. E. Fasteners: Factory coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion II resistance provisions of Factory Mutual 4470, designed for fastening insulation to substrate, and recommended by system manufacturer to meet system requirements. /�` 1. Length required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate. F. Strip Reglet Devices: As required membrane manufacturer. ' G. Termination Bar: As recommended by system manufacturer. H. Roof Protection Board: ASTM C 1177, glass mat faced gypsum board, 5/8 inch thick; DensDeck FireGuard Type X; by G -P Gypsum Corporation. I. Insulation Cover Board: ASTM C 1177, glass mat faced gypsum board, 1/4 inch thick; DensDeck Roof Board; by G -P Gypsum Corporation. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 II • Fanno Creek Place Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO): 07 5423 I October 12, 2006 Page 5 J. Traffic Pads: Factory formed, nonporous, heavy -duty, slip resisting, surface textured walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick, of materials acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. I PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with installation requirements. I B. Verify roof openings and penetrations are in place, set and braced, and that roof drains are properly clamped into position. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly 1 sloped to drains, and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. I E. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum. Do not proceed with work until this condition is met. F. Verify roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cants and I nailers are in place. G. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. d 3.2 COORDINATION ill A. Coordinate with Work of other Sections to assure proper and adequate provision for interface with Work or this Section. 3.3 ROOF PROTECTION BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install specified fire rated gypsum roof board to metal deck prior to installation of roof insulation according to manufacturer's instructions and requirements of FM's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 1 3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Mechanically fasten insulation to steel deck through insulation and cover board according to I insulation and roofing membrane system manufacturer's instructions, and requirements of FM's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. I B. Place the second layer of insulation with joints staggered from joints of first layer. C. Apply no more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. I 1. Remove and replace insulation that has become wet or damaged from improper temporary edge seal or as result of inclement weather conditions. D. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 1 E. Install insulation cover board over insulation. 3.5 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE INSTALLATION I A. Install thermoplastic sheet according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Start installation of sheet in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. II 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO): 07 5423 October 12, 2006 Page 6 C. Accurately align sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps of E minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. 1 D. Mechanically fasten sheet securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. I E. Apply roofing sheet with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. 1 F. Seal membrane around roof penetrations and secure in place with clamping ring. G. Secure one edge of the sheet using fastening plates or battens centered within the membrane 1 seam and mechanically fasten sheet to roof deck. Field weld seam according to instructions for seam installation. 3.5 FULLY ADHERED MEMBRANE APPLICATION I A. Install thermoplastic sheet according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Roll out membrane free from wrinkles or tears. Allow sheet to relax for a minimum of 30 1 minutes. C. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet in accordance with roofing membrane system manufacturer's instructions. Allow to partially dry. 1. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of sheet. D. Overlap edges and ends and seal permanently waterproof by hot -air welding in accordance with roofing membrane system manufacturer's instructions. 1. Test lap seam with probe to verify seam weld continuity. IIII 2. Apply seam calk to seal cut edges of sheet membrane, and where indicated. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. E. Seal membrane around roof penetrations and secure in place with clamping ring. I F. Mechanically fasten sheet securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. 3.6 SEAM INSTALLATION I A. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets and weld side and end laps of sheets and flashing by hot - air welding in accordance with roofing membrane system manufacturer's instructions to ensure watertight seam installation. I B. Test lap seam with probe to verify seam weld continuity. C. Apply seam calk to seal cut edges of sheet membrane, and where indicated. '' D. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. 3.7 FLASHINGS AND ACCESSORIES 1 I,r 1. A. Apply sheet flashing to seal membrane to vertical elements; extend sheet flashing a minimum of 8 inches above top of roof plane. B. Secure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 .1 Fanno Creek Place Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO): 07 5423 1 October 12, 2006 Page 7 C. Coordinate installation of roof drains, sumps, overflows, and related flashing to NRCA recommendations. I 1. Taper sumped areas. ./ D. Install traffic pads in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, where shown or indicated in Drawings. 1. Do not cover seams with walkway pads; keep pads a minimum of 6 inches away from I seams. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Field inspection will be performed by roofing system manufacturer's technical representative by periodic observation of work in progress. 1. The representative, as a minimum, shall be present to observe the deck preparation, 1 general installation procedures, and final completion. B. Correct identified defects or irregularities. I 3.10 CLEANING A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of 1 • surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section. MI 3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. I B. Correct deficiencies in roofing or replace roofing that does not comply with requirements. I END OF SECTION I 1 1 1 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes flashing and sheet metal and trim including, but not limited to, the following: I 1. Roof drainage systems. 2. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae. 3. Copings. I 4. Metal flashing. 5. Reglets. 6. Flexible membrane flashing. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 4713: Tilt -Up Concrete, for flashing associated with concrete work. 2. Section 04 2113: Brick Masonry, for flashing associated with masonry work. I 3. Section 07 2400: Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), for flashing associated with EIFS. 4. Section 07 5423: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO), for flashing associated with roofing. 5. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for sealants. 6. Section 09 9000: Painting, for field painting. I 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener 01 disengagement. • B. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do no allow water infiltration to I building interior. C. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1 -49: I 1. Wind Zone 2: for velocity pressures of 31 to 45 Ibf /sq. ft.: 90 Ibf /sq.-ft. perimeter uplift force, 120 Ibf /sq. ft. corner uplift force, and 45 Ibf /sq. ft. outward force. I 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 1 B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal and trim, including plans and elevations. Include the following: I 1. Material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring, including fasteners, clips, I cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. C. Samples: For each type of prefinished item with specified or selected color. 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. k Place Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 Fanno Creek 9 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1 B. Fabrication Standard: Comply with applicable recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. B. Field Measurements: Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. 1.6 WARRANTY 1 A. Warrant Work of this Section to be watertight for 2 years following date of Substantial Completion. 1 1. Warranty to cover repair of water leaks and resulting damage to building construction as may occur under normal usage within warranty period. 2. Include in warranty replacement of damaged materials that cannot be adequately repaired, as determined by the Architect. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. Prepainted, Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: Sheet steel metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil- coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation, structural quality. 2. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40, structural quality 3. Exposed Finish: Fluoropolymer 2 -Coat thermocured system composed of inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss. b. Resin Manufacturers: 1) Ausimont USA, Inc. (Hylar 5000). 2) Elf Atochem North America, Inc. (Kynar 500). B. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper- bearing lead sheet. C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240, Type 304, soft annealed, with No. 2D (dull, cold rolled) 1 finish. D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not Tess than H14, finished with high - performance fluoropolymer coating; not less than 0.0359 inch uncoated thickness, unless otherwise indicated. • 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Slip Sheet: Rosin -sized paper, minimum 5 lb./sq. ft. 1 . B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt saturated organic felt, nonperforated. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 C. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397, minimum 6 mil thick black polyethylene film. I 2.3 FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE FLASHING A. Flexible Membrane Flashing: Composite, self- adhesive, flashing product consisting of a I pliable, rubberized asphalt compound, bonded to a high - density, cross - laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. I B. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following products: 1. Bakor; a Division of The Henry Company: 40 mil Blueskin SA; self- adhered, self - sealing, SBS rubberized asphalt sheet. 2. Fortifiber Building Products Systems: FortiFlash Waterproof Hashing, 40 mil. 3. W.R. Grace: Vycor V40 Weather Barrier Strips; self- adhered, self - sealing rubberized asphalt sheet. 1 C. Primer: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. D. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS II A. General: Provide materials and type of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self- tapping screws, self - locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners of non - corrosive metal designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self - drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. I C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless -steel sheet manufacturer. 1 1 D. Solder for Lead: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. E. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet. I F. Sealing Tape: Pressure - sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release -paper backing, permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, and nonstaining. G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM 920, elastomeric silicone type specified in Section 07920 by Dow Corning, GE, or approved. H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC -Paint 12, cold - applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, I sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. I. Reglets: Type and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet I and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing indicated. 1. Material: Stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer: Fry Reglet Corporation, or approved. I I LRS Architects, Inc. • Fanno Creek Place Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 9 October 12, 2006 Page 4 1 J. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL 1 A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Comply with details shown and as required to fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather - resistant performance when installed. 1. Fabricate in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C. Form exposed sheet metal Work in longest lengths practicable, without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, and true to line and levels indicated. 1. Hem exposed edges, folded back minimum 1/2 inch. 2. Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drip. D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams from one of the following types. For non - aluminum materials, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 1. Standing Seams: 3/4 inch, double lock. 2. Lap Seams: 3 inch finish width, 3. Solder -Lap Seams: 1 inch finish width; sweat full with solder. 4. S -Lock Seams: Form 1 -1/4 inch wide 'S' shaped seam on one edge of flashing sheet for concealed fastening. 5. Cover Plate Seams: Not allowed, unless specifically approved by Architect for application. E. Expansion Provisions: Form, fabricate and install sheet metal to provide for expansion and contraction in the finished Work. 1. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. 2. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant concealed within joints. 1 F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. 1. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. H. Fabricate cleats and other attachment devices from same material and thickness as sheet metal component being anchored. 2.6 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS • 1 A. Splash Pans: Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick (26 gage). B. Roof -Drain Flashing: Lead: 0.0625 inch thick (4.0 lb/sq. ft.), hard tempered. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 .1 . Fanno Creek Place Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 5 C. Exposed Trim and Fascia: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage). I D. Copings: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0299 inch uncoated thickness (22 gage). I E. Base Flashing: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage). F. Counterflashing: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0239 inch uncoated thickness (24 gage). I G. Equipment Support Flashing: Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel: 0.0299 inch uncoated thickness (22 gage). H. Roof Penetration Flashing: Lead: 0.0625 inch thick (4.0 lb/sq. ft.), hard tempered. 1 . 2.7 FINISH A. Provide prepainted, metallic coated steel sheet where indicated. 1 B. Field apply paint finish as specified in Section 09 9000 for items not prepainted. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, securely anchored, and are ready to receive Work of this Section. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. till 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in 1 place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and I other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 2. Install Work in according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. i B. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 1. Conceal fasteners where possible. 1 2. Install with exposed edges folded back to form hems. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim true to lines and levels indicated. Provide neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. I D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to result in watertight performance. I E. Expansion Provisions: 1. Space movement joints at maximum 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. I 2. Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant concealed within i joints. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 g October 12, 2006 Page 6 1 F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin . edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 -1/2 inches, except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder prepainted, metallic- coated steel sheet. . 2. Pretinning is not required for lead or lead- coated copper. 3. Stainless Steel Soldering: Pretin edges using solder recommended for stainless steel and phosphoric acid flux. Promptly wash off acid flux residue from metal after soldering. le 4. Do not use open -flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from II exposed surfaces. G. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 1. Fill joint with sealant, minimum 1/4 inch diameter bead, and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 2. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with specified seams. Tin edges to be , seamed, form seams, and solder. I. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, and • protect against galvanic action painting contact surfaces with bituminous mastic coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator of dissimilar metals. 1. Coat uncoated aluminum, stainless steel, and lead flashing and trim in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Install course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet where IIII metal flashing is installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates. J. Install reglets to receive counterflashing where shown or indicated. 1 1. Where reglets are shown in concrete or masonry, furnish reglets for installation under Sections 03 3000, 03 4713, or 04 2113. K. Counterflashings: Coordinate with installation of base flashing. 1. Lap -seam vertical joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. 2. Miter, lap -seam, and close corner joints with solder. 3. Overlap base flashing 4 inches minimum. 4. Install bottom edge spring -tight against base flashing. 1 5. Provide where roof intersects vertical surfaces, and where indicated. L. Cleats: 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. 1 2. Anchor cleats with 2 fasteners to prevent cleat rotation. 3. Bend tabs over fastener head. M. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG I Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. 1. Fabricate with standing seams spaced approximately 10 feet apart. 2. Miter corners. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. i 1 Fanno Creek Place Flashing and Sheet Metal: 07 6000 October 12, 2006 Page 7 3. Interlock exterior edge with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 16 inch centers. 4. Anchor interior edge with screw fasteners and washers at 24 inch centers. 5. Slope top of coping toward roof. I N. Scuppers: Install where indicated; continuously support, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. 1. Lap field joints at conductor heads, and solder. I 2. Install sealant around exposed flanges on roof side. O. Equipment Support Flashing: I 1. Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. 2. Weld or seal flashing with sealant to equipment support member. 1 P. Roof - Penetration Flashing: 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with I. flashing. 2. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping. 3. Counterflash with preformed cover as detailed. 1 Q. Flexible Membrane Flashing: 1. Install flexible membrane flashing at window and door openings and where shown or indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 3. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 4. Lap flashing over weather resistive building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 5. Lap weather resistive building paper over flexible flashing at heads of openings. 6. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to I ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION I A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. 1 1. Neutralize flux as work progresses with 5 percent to 10 percent washing soda solution, and thoroughly rinse. I C. Clean finished surfaces of completed installation. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. I D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim damaged or that has deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. i END OF SECTION I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Roof Hatches: 07 7233 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes prefabricated roof hatches with integral support curbs, operating hardware, I and counterflashing. B. Related Sections: I 1. 2. Section 05 3100: Steel Decking, for roof deck. Section 05 5000: 'Metal Fabrications, for access ladder and ladder safety post. 3. Section 07 5100: Built -Up Bituminous Roofing, for roofing membrane. 4. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on unit construction, sizes, configuration, jointing methods and locations when applicable, and attachment method. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Conform to applicable code for UL and FM requirements as applicable to roof hatches. I 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof hatches with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. Pi , PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: I 1. The Bilco Company. 2. Dur -Red Products. 3. Milcore Inc. 1 B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 ROOF VENTS A. Unit Size and Type: Single leaf type; 30 by 36 inches. B. Integral Steel Curb: 14 gage galvanized steel with 1 inch rigid insulation; integral cap flashing 1 to receive roof flashing; extended flange for mounting. C. Flush Cover: 14 gage galvanized steel; 1 inch glass fiber insulation; sandwiched by 22 gage steel interior liner; continuous neoprene gasket to provide weatherproof seal. I D. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard finish: I 1. 2. Compression spring operator and shock absorbers. Steel manual pull handle for interior operation. • 3. Steel hold open arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release. 4. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Roof Hatches: 07 7233 a o ree October 12, 2006 Page 2 E. Ladder and Ladder Safety Post: Specified in Section 05 5000, Metal Fabrications. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components free of visual distortion or defects. Weld corners and joints. B. Fit components for weather tight assembly. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine and verify that conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. 1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 1. Anchor securely in place. 2. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing installation of roof hatches. B. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashing for weather tight installation. C. Apply bituminous paint on surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. D. Test for proper operation; adjust opening mechanism as required until satisfactory operation results. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces. • B. Protect finished surfaces until acceptance of the work. 1 END OF SECTION i . 1 1 . 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Penetration Firestopping: 07 8413 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Through - penetration firestop systems, as defined by International Building Code and UL, for penetrations through fire- resistive -rated construction, including empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. B. Related Sections: i 1. Section 07 8443: Fire - Resistant Joint Firestopping. 2. Section 09 9000: Painting, for field finish applied to exposed fire stop materials. 3. Division 22: Plumbing, specifying piping penetrations. 4. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning )HVAC), specifying duct penetrations. 5. Divisions 26, 27, and 28: Electrical and related disciplines, specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through fire - resistive -rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through - penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of construction penetrated. B. Rated Systems: Provide through - penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined by ASTM E 814: 1. F -Rated Systems: Provide through - penetration firestop system with F- ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire - resistive rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T -Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through - penetration firestop system with T- ratings indicated, as well as F- ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire - resistive -rated shaft enclosures. C. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during after construction. • 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture resistant through - penetration systems. ' 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through - penetration firestop I systems not requiring removal of insulation. D. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame spread index of less than 25, and smoke developed index of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Penetration in :07 Fanno Creek Place Firestopp g 84 13 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated or proposed to be provided under this Section. B. Shop Drawings: For each through - penetration firestop system, submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. 1. If more than one installer for through - penetration firestop systems, provide a single submittal of product data and shop drawings, jointly prepared by all installers. II C. Qualification Data: For installer(s). If more than one installer, provide a single submittal of documentation indicating qualifications and responsibilities of each installer. D. Product Test Reports: Manufacturer's technical representative's random inspection reports to verify compliance with codes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements and II methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. 1. It is preferred that a single qualified installer approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors" be assigned for installation of through - penetration firestop systems. If installer, or installers, are not FMG approved, provide documentation that installer(s) is qualified to install Work of this Section. Architect reserves the right to reject installer(s) who does not have a successful history of installing through - penetration firestop systems. I / B. Source Limitations: Obtain through - penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition required, from a single manufacturer. C. Provide through - penetration firestop systems that comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and the following: 1. Firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated 1 systems bearing the classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through - penetration 1 firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. E. Inspections: Manufacturer's technical representative shall perform random inspection to verify 1 compliance with codes. Document compliance in writing. 1. Do not cover firestop systems installations that will become concealed behind other I construction until each installation has been examined by manufacturer's technical representative, or building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Preconstruction Conference: Comply with requirements of Section 01 3100. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 1Fanno Creek Place Penetration Firestopping: 07 8413 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Comply with the following: 1. State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on IBC, Section 712, Penetrations, I and Section 713, Fire - Resistant Joint Systems. 2. Penetrations: ASTM E 814. 3. Fire - Resistant Joint Systems: ASTM E 1966. I PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through - penetration firestop systems required for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: I 1. 2. Firestop Systems, Inc. W. R. Grace & Co. — Conn. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. N 5. The RectorSeal Corporation. 6. Specified Technologies, Inc. 7. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 8. USG Corporation. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING 0 A. Compatibility: Provide firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through - penetration firestop systems. 1 B. Provide materials that are asbestos free. C. Accessories: Provide components for each firestop system that are needed to install fill I materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Use only components specified by firestop system manufacturer and approved by the testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of I work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces in contact with firestop materials of foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of firestop materials. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestop system manufacturer using manufacturer's recommended products and methods. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Penetration Firestopping: Fanno Creek Place PP : 07 8413 9 October 12, 2006 Page 4 C. Use masking and temporary covering to prevent contact of firestop materials with adjoining 1 surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install through - penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming /damming /backing materials and other accessories of type required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire resistance ratings required. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating materials. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "warning - Through- Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Date of Installation. 3. Firestop system manufacturer's name. 1 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's technical representative shall perform random inspection to verify compliance 1 to codes, and document compliance in writing. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through - penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing through- penetration systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with 1 cleaning materials approved by firestop system manufacturers. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Repair damaged material as necessary. END OF SECTION • 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Fire - Resistive Joint Firestopping: 07 8443 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire - resistive joint systems. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 8413: Penetration Firestopping, for systems installed in opening in walls and floors with and without penetrating items. 2. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for non -fire- resistive joint systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide fire- resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and I maintain original fire- resistance rating of assembly in which fire- resistive joint systems are installed. I B. Joint Systems in and between Fire - Resistance -Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire - resistance ratings of construction that they join, and with movement capabilities indicated as determined by UL 2079 1. Load - bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test. C. Perimeter Fire - Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of fire-resistance-rated y � e edg ii floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls, provide systems of type and with ratings indicated below as determined by NFPA 285 and UL 2079. 1. UL- Listed, Perimeter Fire - Containment Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding fire - resistance ratings of floor or floor /ceiling assembly forming one side of joint. D. For fire - resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.3 SUBMITTALS II A. Shop Drawings: For each fire - resistive joint system. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1 C. Research /Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire - resistive joint system. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." I B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of fire - resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. 1 C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide fire - resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fire - Resistive Joint Firestopping: Fanno Creek Place PP : 07 8443 9 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1. Fire - resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow -up inspection services for fire- resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire - resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following: 1 a. Fire - resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire - resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire- resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. E. Do not cover up fire- resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined each installation. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the following: 1. State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code; Section 713: Fire - resistive Joint Systems. 2. Fire - Resistant Joint Systems: ASTM E 1966. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Compatibility: Provide fire- resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire - resistive joint system B. Accessories: Provide components of fire - resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire- resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 1 A. Install fire- resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire- resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. C. Designation System for Joints in or between Fire - Resistance -Rated Constructions: Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHBN. 1 END OF SECTION 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Joint Sealants: 07 9200 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes joint sealants for applications shown or indicated, and as required to provide 1 a positive barrier against passage of moisture and air without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 03 4713: Tilt -Up Concrete, for sealants required in concrete panel construction. 2. Section 04 2113: Brick Masonry, for sealants required in masonry. I 3. Section 07 2400: Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS), for sealants in EIFS. 4. Section 07 8443: Fire - Resistant Joint Firestopping, for fire - resistant sealant used in firestopping assemblies. 5. Section 08 8000: Glazing, for glazing sealant. I 6. Section 09 8110: Acoustic Insulation and Sealant, for acoustic sealant. 7. Section 32 1373: Concrete Paving Joint Sealants, for sealants for pavements, walkways, and curbing. 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each joint sealant product indicated, including manufacturer's recommended I installation procedures. B. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full Oa range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 1. Upon request of Architect, submit physical samples of each sealant, backing material, primer, and bond breaker proposed for use. 1 C. Warranties: Submit copies of special installers and manufacturers warranties. D. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Applicator Qualifications: Use workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and I familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single 1 manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI) requirements for materials and installation. I D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. I 2. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 3. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Joint Sealants: 07 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 2 4. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data I that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates. 1 E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Section 01 3100. • 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1 A. Deliver products to job site in their manufacturer's original containers, with labels intact and legible, and maintain intact until time of use. 1 B. Do not retain material that have exceeded shelf life recommended by manufacturer. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1 A. Do not install sealant when joint substrates are wet, or ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits recommended by manufacturer. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Provide warranty in which installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance requirements specified in this Section, including joint sealant failure to provide air and watertight seal, loss of adhesion or cohesion, or failure to cure. 1. Duration of warranties from date of Substantial Completion: 5 years. 11 B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide warranties in which manufacturer agrees to repair li or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance requirements specified in this Section, including joint sealant failure to provide air and watertight seal, loss of adhesion or cohesion, or failure to cure. 1. Duration of warranties from date of Substantial Completion: 1 a. Silicone and Silyl- Terminated Polyether Sealants (STP): 20 years. b. Polyurethane Sealants: 5 years. 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL 1 A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Stain Characteristics: Provide elastomeric joint sealant products that are nonstaining to porous substrates and have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 1. In exposed installation, use color of approximate color of adjacent surfaces, unless 1 otherwise approved. 2. In concealed installation use standard gray or black sealant. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Fanno Creek Place Joint Sealants: 07 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 3 D. VOC Content of Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): i 1. Sealants: 250 g /L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 gJL. I 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g /L. 2.2 SEALANT MATERIALS I A. Silicone - Ultra Low Modulus: 1. Single- Component; neutral moisture curing, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use T, NT, G, M, A, and 0; Joint movement range 100 percent in extension ' 2. and 50 percent in compression. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. a. Dow Corning 790. I b. GE SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora 890. d. Tremco Spectrem 1. 1 B. Polyurethane - Ultra Low Modulus: 1. Single- Component, non -sag, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT, M, G, A, and 0; Joint movement range 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression. 2. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. PI a. Tremco Vulkem 921. b. Tremco Vulkem 931. C. Polyurethane Sealant - Low Modulus: 1. Two component, non -sag, ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, M, G, A, and 0; Joint movement range 50 percent in extension and 50 percent in I 2. compression. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. a. Pecora; Dynatrol II. . I b. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP2. c. Tremco Dymeric 511 d. Tremco Vulkem 922 1 D. Silicone Rubber Sealant: 1. Single- Component; mildew resistant, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, Use related to joint substrate G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates I indicated, 0; Joint movement range 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression. 2. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. I a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCSI 700. c. Tremco; Tremsil 200 (White, unless otherwise indicated). 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Joint Sealants: 07 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 4 E. Foam Air - Infiltration Sealant: 1. Manufacturer and Type: The following, or approved. a. Kwik Foam by DAP. F. Preformed Foam Sealant: 1 1. Preformed, precompressed, open -cell foam sealant of high- density urethane foam, permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, with pressure sensitive adhesive backing, and compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealant; joint movement range 25 percent in extension and 25 percent in compression. 2. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following, or approved. a. Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., Emseal 25V. b. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc., Polyseal. G. • Acoustic Sealant: Specified in Section 09 8110. 1 H. Traffic -Grade Sealant: Specified in Section 32 1373. 2.2 BACKUP MATERIALS 1 A. Use only those backup materials that are non - absorbent, non - staining, and specifically recommended by manufacturer for installation with type of sealant used. 1 B. Sealant Backer Rod: Provide one of the following Type B backing rods (bicellular material with a surface skin) unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer: 1. Nomaco Inc.: "Sof Rod." 2. Sonneborn: "Soft Backer Rod." C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant 1 manufacturer. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Use only those primers which have been tested for durability on surfaces to be sealed, and are specifically recommended by sealant manufacturer for adhesion of joint sealant substrates, as determined from preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to sealant and backing material manufacturer, formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealant with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealant and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Examine joints to receive joint sealants for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. 1 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. • Fanno Creek Place Joint Sealants: 07 9200 I October 12, 2006 Page 5 3.2 PREPARATION 1 A. Surface clean joints immediately before installing sealant complying with manufacturer's instructions, and the following: I 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of sealant, including dust, oil, grease, rust, lacquer, Iaitance, loose mortar, ice and frost. I B. Concrete and Masonry: 1. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, or mechanical abrading; remove loose particles from cleaning operations by vacuuming I 2. or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Where surfaces have been treated, remove surface treatment by sandblasting or wire brushing. 3. Remove Iaitance and mortar from masonry joint cavities I 4. Remove Iaitance and form - release agents from concrete. C. Metal surfaces: I 1. Scrape steel surfaces with metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust. 2. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaner which leaves no residue to remove oil and grease, and protective coatings, wiping surfaces with clean rags. I D. Prime joints substrates where recommended by sealant manufacturer, based on . preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests or prior experience. iii 1. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond. I E. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. I 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install joint sealers in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, as applicable to materials, applications, 1 and conditions indicated. B. Sealant Backings: I 1. 2. Install material to uniform depth below sealant. Using tool, smoothly and uniformly place backup material to depth of approximately 1/2 joint width (1/4 inch to 1/2 inch), compressing backup material 25 percent to 50 I percent and securing a positive fit. 3. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 4. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. I C. Install bond breaker tape behind sealant where sealant backing is not used between sealant and back of joints. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Joint Sealants: 07 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 6 D. Install sealant by proven techniques at the same time backings are installed. 1 1. Thoroughly fill joints to recommended depth with sealant in direct contact with joint substrates. 2. Produce uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 3. Prevent three -sided adhesion of sealant to substrates. E. Tool joints to profile shown in Drawings, or as indicated below if such profiles are not shown in Drawings. 1. Provide uniformly smooth joints with slightly concave surface, flush at edges with adjacent surface, according to ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not use tooling agent unless specifically recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer. 3. Leave sealant surface neat and smooth. F. Install preformed foam sealant according to manufacturer's instructions, taking care not to pull or stretch material. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Adhesion Testing: Test completed joint - sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1 1. Test joint sealant after sealant has cured (usually within 7 to 21 days). 2. Perform 10. tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of sealant and joint substrate, and 1 test each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter. 3. Test Method: Test according to Method A, Field - Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab in ASTM C 1193, Appendix X1. 4. Record results in a field- adhesion test log. Include the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled -out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. 1) Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. 2) Compare results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field adhesion hand -pull test criteria. b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 5. Include in test log, dates when sealants were installed, names of installers, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. • 6. Repair sealants pulled from test areas by applying new sealants following same procedures used to originally seal joints. a. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. 1 • 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Joint Sealants: 07 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 7 B. Evaluation of Field Test Reports: 1. Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. 2. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. 3. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. ' 3.5 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent exposed surfaces free from sealant as installation progresses, using cleaning agent recommended by manufacturer of sealant used. 1. Repair damaged surfaces. ' 3.6 SEALANT SCHEDULE A. At building exterior door and window frames, and other openings and joints in exterior walls: Silicone - Ultra Low Modulus, unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific application and approved by Architect. 1. Color: As selected by Architect. B. At building interior door and window frames and other openings in interior walls: Polyurethane Sealant - Low Modulus. Use Ultra Low Modulus Polyurethane where application warrants. 1. Color: As selected by Architect. C. At building interior and exterior pavement joints: Traffic -Grade Sealant, self - leveling, as specified in Section 32 1373. I • D. Around electrical boxes, between framing and openings at other locations where insulation in exterior walls is interrupted: Foam Air - infiltration Sealant. E. At Toilet Fixture Joints: Silicone Rubber. F. Apply acoustical sealant as indicated in Section 09 2116 and as specified in Section 09 8110. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following fabricated according to ANSI /SDI A250.8: I 1. Standard hollow metal steel doors. 2. Standard hollow metal welded steel frames. 3. Prefinished hollow metal knockdown frames. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 4713: Tilt -Up Concrete, for concrete panel construction to receive door I 2. frame anchors. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors, for doors in hollow metal frames. 3. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware 4. Section 08 8000: Glazing, for glass in hollow metal doors and frames. 1 5. Section 09 9000: Painting, for painting of hollow metal doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, fire - resistance and temperature -rise ratings, and finishes for each type of hollow metal door and frame specified. 1 B. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of hollow metal door and frame, elevations of door designs, details of openings, dimensions, and anchorage. PM C. Door and Frame Schedule: Use same reference numbers for details and openings as those in Contract Drawings. 1 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. D. Submit evidence that doors, and door and frame assemblies, have been tested and approved I by governing jurisdiction for the following labeled construction: 1. Fire protection rating label for doors and frames. 2. Smoke control "S" label for door and frame assemblies. 1 3. Temperature rise label for doors. E. Certification: Submit certification that work of this Section complies with ANSI /SDI A250.8, or equivalent standards of HMMA 861 (Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association). I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper installation of work of this Section. B. Provide doors and welded frames from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise specifically I approved by Architect. C. Minimum Quality Standards: Comply with latest edition of following standards of ANSI and the Steel Door Institute (SDI): 1 1. ANSI /SDI A250.8, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. SDI 105, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 October 12, 2006 Page 2 3. SDI 109, Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. SDI 112, Zinc - Coated Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. SDI 117, Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 6. SDI 118, Basic Fire Door Requirements. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Hollow Metal Door and Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 1 and tested according to NFPA 252 that are listed and labeled for fire protection indicated, and for smoke control with "S" label where indicated and required by current Building Code, when tested according to UL 1784 for smoke control door assemblies. 1 1. Comply with Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, or Warnock Hersey requirements, and attach acceptance label permanently to each fire door and frame 1 assembly. B. For stair doors and in exit enclosures, where required by Building Code, provide doors that have a temperature -rise rating of 450 degrees F above ambient at the end of 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure. C. Fire -Rated Borrowed -Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire protection indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. 1 1. Label each individual glazed lite. D. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201. 1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. B. Store in protected dry area, in a vertical position with heads up, on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking, spaced to permit air circulation. C. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. 1 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames, and as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. PART2 PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Hollow Metal Doors and Welded Frames: 1 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by any manufacturer that can provide and certify to fabrication of products that meet or exceed requirements of ANSI, SDI (Steel Door Institute), or HMMA (Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association), and requirements of these specifications. B. Knock -Down Prefinished Steel Door Frames: 1 1. Timely Industries. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 October 12, 2006 Page 3 2.2 MATERIALS 1 A. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. 1 C. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 zinc (galvanized) or A60 zinc - iron -alloy (galvannealed) metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. Anchors Built Into Exterior Walls: Steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or ASTM A 1011, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanize according to ASTM A 153. F. Glass for Doors and Frames: As specified in Section 08 8000. ' 1. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201, for Category II materials. G. Sound Deadening Material: 1. _ Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company (3M): Coating EC -1000. PI 21. Vibradamp: No. 111 Sound - Deadener. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. ' 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide hollow metal doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical performance level. B. Interior Doors: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1, Full Flush Design. I 1. 2. Material: Minimum 0.042 inch (18 gage) uncoated thickness, cold - rolled steel sheet. Core: Manufacturer's standard phenolic resin impregnated kraft paper honeycomb core bonded to both face skins. C. Exterior Doors: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1, Full Flush Design. 1 . Material: Minimum 0.042 inch (18 gage) uncoated thickness, cold - rolled, metallic coated sheet steel. 2. Core: ASTM C 578 Type 1, Polystyrene or polyurethane foam bonded to both face skins with minimum U -value rating of 0.41. D. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. E. Size: As required to fit frame opening indicated in Door Schedule. LRS Architects, Inc. Fan n o Creek Place Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 October 12, 2006 Page 4 1 F. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI /SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. I G. Fire - Resistance, Smoke Control, and Temperature Rise Rating: As indicated in Door Schedule. H. Louvers: Provide louvers according to SDI 111C for interior doors, where indicated, with blade 1 or baffles formed of 24 gage cold - rolled steel sheet set into minimum 20 gage steel frame. 1. Louver Design: Inverted Y Blade. 1 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL WELDED FRAMES A. Provide hollow metal welded steel frames for doors, borrowed lights, and other openings according to ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners, full profile welded. 1. Fabricate frames installed in drywall partitions with backbend return (double backbend). C. Interior Frames: Minimum 0.053 inch (16 gage) uncoated thickness cold - rolled steel sheet. 1 1. Fabricate frames for interior openings 48 inches and wider from minimum 0.067 inch (14 gage) uncoated thickness cold - rolled steel sheet. 1 D. Exterior Frames: Minimum 0.067 inch (14 gage) uncoated thickness metallic coated cold- rolled steel sheet. ii E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI /SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as frames. F. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with head member sized to align top of head 111 member with horizontal masonry joint. G. Provide frames with steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. 2.5 PREFINISHED KNOCKDOWN FRAMES A. Manufacturer: Timely Industries, C- Series, 18 Gage frame. 1 1. Casing Style: TA -8 Standard Steel Casing, 22 gage, with MiterGard. B. Size: As indicated in Door Schedule. C. Fire - Resistance Rating: As indicated in Door Schedule. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate hollow metal door and frame units to be rigid, free of defects, warp, or buckle. 1. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels from only cold - rolled steel sheet. 2. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and molding from either cold or hot - rolled steel sheet. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 11 Fanno Creek Place Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 II October 12, 2006 Page 5 3. Close top and bottom of doors flush, except where approved by Architect for an inverted U channel to accommodate specified hardware. Il 4. Bevel lock and hinge side edges of doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches. B. Exterior Doors: I 1. Provide weep hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. 2. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. I C. Welded Frames: 1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. U 2. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. 3. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames ' installed in concrete. 0 4. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints; fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot 11 welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. II a. Stud -Wall Type: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and I b. mounted in metal -stud partitions . Concrete Type: 111) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. II c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c 7. Door Silencers: Except on frames to receive weatherstripping or gasketing, drill stops ll to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single leaf door openings, and 2 silencers on heads of double leaf door openings. D. Prefinished Knockdown Frames (Timely Industries): III 1. Provide holes on the perimeter of frame for insertion of fasteners. 2. Provide oval adjustment slots to allow for frame adjustment. n 3. Mechanically fasten casing retainer clips to frame for secure, properly aligned installation of casing. 4. Door Silencers: Except on frames to receive gasketing, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single leaf door openings, and 2 silencers on heads of II double leaf door openings. II 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 October 12, 2006 Page 6 E. Clearances: Fabricate with following clearances, except for fire doors provide clearances 1 according to NFPA 80. 1. Between doors and frames: 1/8 inch. 2. Between door bottoms and thresholds: 1/4 inch. 3. Between door bottoms and floor: 3/4 inch. 4. Between meeting edges of non -fire rated pairs of doors: 3/32 inch 1 F. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117. G. Fabricate galvanized steel doors and frames according to SDI 112. 1 H. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare doors and frames to receive hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. 1. Comply with requirements of ANSI /SDI A250.6 and ANSI /DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. • 2. Provide space, cutouts, reinforcing for concealed overhead door closers and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. 3. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings, or, if not indicated, according to ANSI /SDI A250.8. 2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS 1 A. Moldings for Glazed Lights in Doors: Provide minimum 0.042 inch (18 gage) uncoated thickness steel fabricated from same material as door face sheet. Form corners with butted or mitered hairline joints. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch high, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Locate on inside of exterior frames and on secure side of interior frames for glass and louvers. C. Loose Glazing Stops in Frames: Channel shaped cold - rolled steel, butted at corner joints and secured to the frame using countersink oval head machine screws, spaced 9 inches o.c. maximum. 1. Provide square profile, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Steel Thickness: a. Exterior: Minimum 0.053 inch (16 gage) uncoated thickness. 1 b. Interior: Minimum 0.042 inch (18 gage) uncoated thickness 2.8 FINISHES • 1 A. Preparation: Clean surfaces and apply pretreatment of conversion coating of type suited to organic finish coating. B. Prefinished Knock -Down Frames: Manufacturer's standard; color as selected. C. Hollow Metal Steel Doors and Welded Steel Frames: Factory Prime for Field- Painted Finish: 1. Apply primer immediately after surface and pretreatment, primer as specified in Section 09 9000. D. Factory Primed Hollow Metal Steel Doors and Frames: Field apply finish coats of paint as specified in Section 09 9000. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 October 12, 2006 Page 7 E. Coat inside of frame profile with sound deadening material. i PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. I 1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify flexible membrane flashing has been installed at all exterior door wall openings as 1 specified and installed under provisions of Section 07 6000. 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Install hollow metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures. 1 B. Placing Frames: Comply ANSI /SDI 250.11, and the following:. 1. Where possible, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls. I 2. Set frames accurately into position, aligned and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. NI a. Frames in final position to be plus or minus 1/16 inch maximum from squared and plumbed alignment. 3. After frames have been installed and wall construction is completed, remove I temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 4. At in -place construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and suitable anchorage devices. Provide "Z" fillers at each screw location. 5. Provide sealant between frame and adjacent wall material. 1 6. 7. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation behind frames. C. Placing Prefinished Knockdown Frames: 1 1. Install to comply with manufacturer's written instructions; coordinate with other trades to avoid conflict. 2. Use pre -fit template door or actual door in opening to assure proper alignment and I 3. clearances. Anchor frame to wall with one drywall screw adjacent to each casing clip, or as otherwise indicated by manufacturer of door frame. I 4. Align all parts with proper clearance to assure proper fit and tight miters. 5. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. D. Installing Doors: I 1. Set doors flush with frame face and plumb to hold in any position. 2. Fit doors accurately in frames within specified clearances. 3. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. I 4. Install smoke control doors according to NFPA 105 with frames that have been constructed and tested as an assembly in accordance with UL 1784 and approved for "S" label. . 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 08 1113 October 12, 2006 Page 8 3.3 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION 1 A. Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work 111 in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 1. During warranty period, check and adjust operating finish hardware items for smooth , and quiet operation. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted and damaged areas of prime coat, and apply touch up of compatible, air -drying primer. 1 C. Clean exposed surfaces of Work of this Section and repair as required. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 11 Fanno Creek Place Wood Doors: 08 1400 III October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL ill 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: g 1. Interior solid core flush wood swing doors. B. Related Sections: 11 • 1. Section 08 1113: Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, for door frames. 2. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware. 3. Section 08 8000: Glazing for glass in wood doors. 1 4. Section 09 9000: Painting, for finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS II A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings, fire- resistance and temperature -rise ratings, and factory finishing specifications. o B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations of each kind of door, location and extent of hardware blocking, and details of door construction not included in Product Data. C. Door Schedule: Use same reference numbers for details and openings as those in Contract H Drawings. . 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. oll 2. Indicate doors to be factory finished and other finish requirements. 3. Indicate fire rating for fire doors. 4. Indicate locations and dimensions of cutouts. ff D. Samples: Approximately 8 by 8 inches in size, of each door face material with each type of specified finish. 11 E. Submit evidence that doors, and door and frame assemblies, have been tested and approved by governing jurisdiction for the following labeled construction: 1. Fire protection rating label for doors and frames. II 2. Smoke control "S" label for door and frame assemblies. 3. Temperature rise label for doors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE d A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards II Illustrated." B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door through one source from a single manufacturer. fl 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated hollow metal Door and Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 fl and tested according to NFPA 252 that are listed and labeled for fire protection indicated, and for smoke control with "S" label where indicated and required by current Building Code, when tested according to UL 1784 for smoke control door assemblies. 11 U LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Wood Doors: 08 1400 October 12, 2006 Page 2. 1. Comply with Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, or Warnock Hersey 1 requirements, and attach acceptance label permanently to each fire door and frame assembly. B. For stair doors and in exit enclosures, where required by Building Code, provide doors that have a temperature -rise rating of 450 degrees F above ambient at the end of 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure. C. Fire -Rated Borrowed -Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire protection indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. 1. Label each individual glazed lite. 1 D. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. 1. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Deliver doors individually packaged in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. 3. Deliver doors clearly marked with manufacturer's name, size, and thickness. 4. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used in Shop Drawings. 5. Immediately open, but don't remove, wrap at Project site to ventilate. B. Handling: Do not drag doors across one another; lift doors and carry them into position. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 degrees F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of construction period. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with or trades as required to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 1. Coordinate fabrication of doors to receive hardware specified in Section 08 7100. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Signed by manufacturer, installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials and workmanship, and do not meet specified fabrication tolerances. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion. a. Interior Solid Core Doors: Life of installation. 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Wood Doors: 08 1400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Flush Wood Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the I following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. BJ Doors. III 3. Cenco. 4. Eggers Industries. 5. Graham. 6. Lynden Door, Inc. D 7. 8. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. Vancouver Door Company, Inc. 9. VT Industries. 10. Western Oregon Door. a B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. • il 2.2 FLUSH DOORS A. Interior Solid Core Doors: I 1. 2. Types: Flush face. Construction: a. Non -Rated Doors: PC -5. II b. Fire - Resistant Rated Doors: FD -5. 3. Sizes and Relites: See Door Schedule. 4. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches. 5. Core: a. Non -Rated and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Particleboard; ANSI A208 -1 Grade 1, II b. LD -2. Fire - Resistant Rated Doors: Non - combustible mineral composite without asbestos. 6. Side Stiles: 1 -3/8 inch minimum width. 7. Fire, Smoke Control, and Temperature Rise Rating: As indicated in Door Schedule. 8. Finish: Transparent. II B. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Face Veneer Species: Select White Maple, rotary cut. AWI Grade: Custom, with AWI Veneer Grade A face sheets. 11 3. Veneer Thickness: Minimum 1 /50th inch at 12 percent moisture content. 4. Veneers: Face: Book match. 5. Assembly: Running match. 0 6. Edge Bands: a. Side Stiles: 1 -3/8 inch minimum width hardwood stiles, matching face veneer color for doors with transparent finish. a b. Fire - resistant rated doors: As required. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. II Fanno Creek Place Wood Doors: 08 1400 October 12, 2006 Page 4 C. Glass: As specified in Section 08 8000. 1 1. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201, for Category II materials. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Comply with the following AWI Quality Standards: 1 1. AWI Section 1300 for Architectural Flush Doors. B. Bond door faces to cores, stiles and rails with adhesive. Bond edge banding to core. 1 C. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard core doors as indicated to eliminate through- bolting hardware for hardware items listed below. Provide composite blocking with improved screw - holding capability approved for fire -rated doors. 1. Closers: 5 inch top rail blocking. • 2. Kick, Mop, or Armor Plates: 5 inch bottom rail blocking. 3. Exit Devices: 5 inch midrail blocking. D. Machine and hand sand exposed surfaces. E. Light Openings: 1. Provide wood frames for Tight openings same species as door faces with recessed tapered beads. 2. Frame for Fire Doors: Wood or metal frames and metal glazing clips approved for use in fire -rated doors of fire rating indicated. F. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated with uniform clearances and bevels per requirements of referenced quality standard. 1. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 and UL 1784 for fire -rated and smoke control doors. G. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 2.4 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference between 2 diagonal measurements. 1 B. Maximum warp: 1/4 inch space measured from horizontal, vertical, or diagonal straight edge to point of maximum bow, cup, or twist. C. Maximum stile, rail and core telegraphing show- through at door face: 0.01 inch in any 3 inch span. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING 1 A. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish; Field finish door indicated to receive opaque finish. 1 1. Comply with AWI Quality Standards of Section 1500 for finishing. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Wood Doors: 08 1400 I October 12, 2006 Page 5 B. Transparent Finish: I 1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System: Post - Catalyzed Lacquer. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 1 4. Sheen: Satin 30 -50 gloss units. PART 3 EXECUTION m 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. I 1. Verify that frames comply with specified requirements for type, size, location, and swing, and have been installed plumb and level. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. II 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: Installed under provisions of Section 08 7100. 0 B. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. Il 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke control doors according to NFPA 105 with frames that have been constructed and tested as an assembly in accordance with UL 1784 and approved for "S" label. I C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frame for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Fitting and machining: 1. Tolerances: a. Bottom: 1/4 inch clearance maximum. U b. Top: 1/8 inch clearance maximum. c. Lock edge and hinge edge: Bevel 1/8 inch in 2 inches maximum. H 2. Machine doors for hardware in accordance with recommendations of hardware Manufacturers. 3.3 COMPLIANCE U A. Owner may employ a representative of reference organization to inspect and determine that Work of this Section has been performed in accordance with specified standards. 111 3.4 ADJUSTING A. During warranty period, check, adjust and service moving parts to operate smoothly and fl quietly. 1. Adjust as necessary weatherstripping, gaskets, and door bottoms for correct clearance. fl 2. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. 11 111 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Wood Doors: 08 1400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 6 B. Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if 1 work complies with requirements and show no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 i 0 Fanno Creek Place Access Doors and Panels: 08 3100 0 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 111 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Sections: 11 1. Section 03 47113: Tilt -Up Concrete, for blocking out openings for access doors in concrete panels. 2. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for blocking out openings in metal stud framing. 3. Section 09 900 Painting, for field applied finish. 4. Division 22: Plumbing, for access panels for valves. 5. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, for access panels for dampers. 6. Division 26: Electrical, for access panels for electrical equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS fi A. Product Data: Submit data for each type of product indicated. 1. Include construction details, fire ratings, components, materials, and finishes. 0 .B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 0 1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of all access units on record drawings. III 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to 0 assemblies tested for fire - test - response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. II 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 1.5 COORDINATION 0 A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work. 0 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS UNITS - WALLS AND CEILINGS U A. Non -Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit in Drywall Walls or Ceilings: 1. J. L. Industries Inc.: Model TM. 2. Karp Associates, Inc.: Type KDW 113. Larsen's Manufacturing Company: L -DWC. 4. Milcor Inc.: Standard Flush Access Door, Style DW. 5. Nystrom, Inc.: Standard NW. II 0 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Access Doors and Panels: 08 3100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 2 B. Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit in Drywall Walls or Ceilings: 1 1. J. L. Industries Inc.: Model FD or FDWB. I 2. Karp Associates, Inc.: Non - insulated Type KRP- 250FR. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company: L -FRAP. 4. Milcor Inc.: Universal Fire -Rated Access Door (UFR). 5. Nystrom, Inc.: Standard IW. I 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for ' installation. B. Access Doors and Frames for Walls and Ceilings: I 1. Fabricate frames of 16 gage steel. 2. Fabricate door panels of 14 gage steel single thickness steel sheet for non -fire rated panels, and manufacturer's standard gage for fire rated panels. I 3. Hardware: a. Hinge: 175 degree steel hinges with concealed constant force closure spring type. b. Furnish number of latching mechanisms required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. c. Lock: Screwdriver slot for quarter turn cam lock. I • C. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. D. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to type of I supports indicated 2.3 FINISHES A. Base Metal Protection: Prime coat units with baked on primer. 1 B. Finish: Field paint exposed door and frame surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9000. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Review locations where access doors are required. B. Verify clearance for door swing and door access to required equipment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install, units according to manufacturer's instructions. ' B. Set frames accurately in position and attach to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces. 1 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjusting Defective Work: Repair scratched door surfaces to match factory prime finish. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Access Doors and Panels: 08 3100 October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. 1 C. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. D. Clean door and frame surface prior to field painting. 11 END OF SECTION 11 11 11 111 a 0 0 0 a U 11 0 0 0 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 . Fanno Creek Place Aluminum- Framed Entrances, Storefront, and Windows: 08 4113 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes aluminum entrances, storefronts, and windows. 1 • B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 47113: Tilt -Up Concrete, for blocking out openings for windows in I 2. concrete panels. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants. 3. Section 08 4413: Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 4. Section 08 7100: Door Hardware 0 5. Section 08 8000: Glazing 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS . III A. Provide entrance and storefront system capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 0 B. Air.Infiltration: ASTM E 283 not to exceed 0.06 CFM at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 PSF. C. Water Infiltration: ASTM E 331, no water penetration at test pressure of 8 PSF. D. Maximum Deflection: ASTM E 330, no deflection in excess of 1/175 of span. imi E. Allowable Stress Factor of Safety: 1.65. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 0 A. Product Data: For each product specified; include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. il B. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show dimensions, fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of work of this Section with work of adjacent trades. C. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 11 D. Samples: For each exposed member illustrating finish, color, texture and sheen. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE II A. Use skilled Workers who are trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. 0 B. Installer to be approved by manufacturer. C. Product Options: Sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements indicated are based on a specific systems indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to requirements of Section 01 2500 for substitutions. 11 II II LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Aluminum- Framed Entrances, Storefront, and Windows: 08 4113 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Design entrance and storefront system to withstand wind loads and seismic loads according to provisions of Chapter 16 of State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on International Building Code. B. Doors to comply with accessibility guidelines of The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and I accessibility requirements of State Building Code. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1 A. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS I A. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication; if vary significantly from Contract Documents, obtain architects approval before proceeding. 1.8 WARRANTY 1 A. Provide warranty agreeing to replace work of this Section that fails due to defective materials or installation to be weathertight within 2 years after Date of Substantial Completion. I B. Failure due to defective materials or Workmanship is deemed to include, but not to be limited to: I 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. 3. Deterioration of metal, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. 5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. 6. Failure of operating components to function properly. PART PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems is based on 1 products by Kawneer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: III 1. Arcadia. 2. EFCO Corporation. 3. United States Aluminum. I 4. Vistawall Architectural Products. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Storefront Framing Components: 1 1. Center and off set as detailed. 2. Framing System: Kawneer Trifab VG, 451T. I 3. Nominal Size: 2 inches by 4 -1/2 inches. 4. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, 6063T5 aluminum alloy. 5 Fasteners: ASTM B 633, Aluminum, stainless steel, and zinc plated steel. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Fanno Creek Place Aluminum- Framed Entrances, Storefront, and Windows: 08 4113 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Doors: 1 1. Door System: Kawneer Wide Style 500. 2. Nominal Stile Size: 1 -3/4 by 5 inches. 3. Top Rail Height: 6 inches. I 4. Minimum Bottom Rail Height: 10 inches. 5. Door Height: See Door Schedule. 6. Swing: Single acting. Ill C. Brackets and Reinforcements: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. 1 2. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D. Fasteners and Accessories: U 1. Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1 E. Sealant: 1. Glazing Sealant: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Framing Sealant: Silicone sealant as specified in Section 07 9200, or otherwise 0 recommended by sealant and entrance and storefront system manufacturer to suit conditions. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. .1 F. Flashing: 1. Material: 0.050 inch thick minimum prefinished aluminum, with smooth texture. I 2. Finish: To match storefront. 2.3 HARDWARE 1 A. Provide heavy duty hardware units required and recommended by manufacturer for entrances indicated. I 1. Finish exposed parts to match door finish. B. Provide hardware items for complete and proper operation entrance doors specified in Section 08 7100, and the following: I 1. Weather Stripping Manufacturer's standard replaceable components; compression type made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC. I 2 Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard for application to exterior door bottoms with concealed fasteners on mounting strips. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS 1 A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation. I 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to profiles indicated. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Aluminum Framed Entrances, Storefront, and Windows: 08 4113 October 12, 2006 Page 4 B. Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or required for a complete system. C. Provide hairline fit at joints, securely fastened, with smooth continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. D. Perform fitting of finish hardware to doors and frames at factory, but do not drill or tap for surface mounted items until time of installation at site. Use concealed fasteners to maximum extent practicable. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 1 recommendations for applying and designating finishes to exposed aluminum surfaces. B. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A31 (Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing • Pi entrance and storefront systems. 1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 3. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 4. Seal joints watertight. 1 B. Provide protection against electrolysis occurring between different adjacent metals. C. Set door thresholds in full bed of sealant. 1 D. Remove protective coating completely from exposed surfaces as soon as progress of work shall permit with safety. E. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Section 08 8000. F. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Section 07 9200. 3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. During warranty period, adjust and service moving parts of doors to operate smoothly and quietly. B. Clean exposed surfaces, including surfaces affected by work of this Section, and repair as required. END OF SECTION 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: 08 4413 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes conventionally glazed aluminum curtain wall systems. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for compatibility tests for sealants used with I aluminum framing systems. 2. Section 08 4113: Aluminum- Framed Entrances, Storefront, and Windows 3. Section 08 8000: Glazing, for glass and glazing. 1 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall systems, including anchorage, capable of 1 withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. ,Il 3.. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long -term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. I 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal a, . I d. Noise nd or vibration structural movements created by to wind glazing and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. i B. Structural Loads: As indicated in Drawings. C. Structural -Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems tested according I to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. I 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of ei span. 3. Test Duration: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds. D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of its clear span or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which I reduces glazing bite to Tess than 75 percent of design dimension and which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to Tess than one inch. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: 08 4413 October 12, 2006 Page 2 E. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees G, material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling, stress on glass, glazing -edge seal failure, sealant failure, excess stress on curtain -wall framing, anchors and fasteners, or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. F. Air Infiltration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems with maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm /sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static - air- pressure differential of 6.24 Ibf /sq. ft. 1 G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum glazed curtain -wall systems that do not evidence water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum 111 differential static pressure of 20 percent of positive design wind Toad, but not Tess than 10 Ibf /sq. ft. H. Water Penetration Under Dynamic Pressure: Provide glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems that do not evidence water leakage when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive design wind load, but not less than 10 Ibf /sq. ft. 1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not considered water leakage. Condensation Resistance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems with condensation - resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 55 when tested according to AAMA 1503. J. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems with average U- factor of not more than 0.66 Btu /sq. ft. x h x degrees F when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard 1 sizes. D. Welding certificates. 1 E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 i 1 Fanno Creek Place Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: 08 4413 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 G. Field quality - control test reports. 1 H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing Work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer. I 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems including the following: I a. Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies. 1 B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by I dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in- service performance. 1 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. pi C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code -- Aluminum." 1 D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review structural load limitations. 1 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. i 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONNS II A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. ii . 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. • 1 Fanno Creek Place Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: 08 4413 October 12, 2006 Page 4 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period. 111 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. 1 c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage. e. Failure of operating components to function normally. 2. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for glazed aluminum curtain -wall system is based on Kawneer "1600 Wall System." Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. United States Aluminum. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish 1 indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. 1 B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant primer complying with SSPC -PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC -SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold - Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 611. 3. Hot - Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 570/A 570M. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high- strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: 08 4413 . i October 12, 2006 Page 5 D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, I nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turn out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self - locking devices. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. I 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads. 4. Finish exposed portions to match framing system. 5. At movement joints, use slip joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type I recommended by manufacturer. E. Anchors: Three -way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation 1 tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast -iron, malleable -iron, or steel 1 inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. F. Concealed Flashing: Dead -soft, 0.018 inch thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240 /A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer. I G. Framing Gaskets: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type. H. Framing Sealants: As specified in Section 07 9200, Joint Sealants. 2.3 GLAZING SYSTEMS y A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, Glazing. B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed- corner pressure - glazing system of black, I resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt- mastic paint complying with SSPC -Paint 12 I requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 mil thickness per coat. 2.5 FABRICATION I A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: I 1. 2. Sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation I occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to I 6. prevent glazing -to- glazing contact and to maintain required glazing edge clearances. Provisions for reglazing from exterior. 2 LRS Architects, Inc. i Fanno Creek Place Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: 08 4413 October 12, 2006 Page 6 C. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 1 D. Factory- Assembled Frame Units: 1. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 2. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure equalize system at its interior face. 4. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 08 8000, Glazing. E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES 1 A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1 B. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A31 (Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 7. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. • 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: 08 4413 October 12, 2006 Page 7 E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather- stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation. F. Install glazing as specified Section 08 8000, Glazing. G. Install sealants as specified in Section 07 7900, Joint Sealants. H. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain -wall systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: r 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch. c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or greater, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed system with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive ' stages as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Water Spray Test: After installation of aluminum curtain -wall system has been completed but before installation of interior finishes has begun, test installed system according to AAMA 501.2 which shall not evidence water penetration. C. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. i Fanno Creek Place Metal Framed Glazed Canopy: 08 6300 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Skylight frames, glazing support plates. 2. Structural design of skylight frames and glass. 3. Watertight interface with building. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4115: Design -Build Requirements 2. Section 05 1200: Structural Steel Framing, for architectural exposed structural steel I. framing system to support glazed canopy. 3. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal. 4. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants. 1 5. Section 08 8000: Glazing, for glass installed in metal framed glazed canopy. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live Toads caused by snow drift loading and positive and negative wind pressure as required by State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code based on the International Building Code. 1 B. Limit deflection of skylight members to 1/360 of their length, or limit deflection of glass to 3/4 inch over one light, whichever is less. 4 C. Design fasteners for a 4 to 1 safety factor based on ultimate loading. D. Design skylight assembly to withstand temperature variations up to 120 degrees F without over stressing glazing, fasteners or framing. 1 E. Design skylight so as to prevent excessive noise such as popping and creaking and wind harmonics. 1 F. Design bearing and edge clearances as required to accommodate expansion and contraction of glazing materials with edge clearance of 1/4 inch minimum to nearest metal surface. I G. Design skylight system with a continuous integral gutter system on glass supporting members to drain water or condensation to exterior. 1. Condensation Gutter Channels: Minimum 3/8 inch inside edge of glass support shelf on glass supporting members to capture water at intersection of glass and framing. 2. Locate horizontal gutters above rafter gutters interlocked with a positive drip tab to direct water into rafter gutter. I H. Design horizontal glazing components, including eave, flush glazed to allow water to move freely off skylight. I I. Design and engineer sealant joints for intended use. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fenno Creek Place Metal Framed Glazed Canopy: Ca py : 08 6300 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that have been tested in accordance with following methods to verify compliance with specified performance requirements: 1. Structural Performance: ASTM E 330, No breakage, component disengagement or permanent distortion at 1.0 and 1.5 times design load for both positive and negative static pressure. 2. Water Leakage: ASTM E 331; No water leakage at 6.24 PSF static pressure, with test pressure maintained for full duration of one 15- minute cycle. 3. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283, Air infiltration not to exceed 0.06 CFM / SF at 10.0 PSF static pressure. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, including construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1 1. Include structural analysis signed and sealed by a professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Glass Samples: One 12 inch square sample of each type of canopy glass. D. Finish Samples: Two samples for each type of exposed finish required. 1 E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for metal framed glazed canopy proposed. F. Sealant manufacturer's certification of sealant compatibility, approval of sealant joint design, and application procedures. G. Glass manufacturer's approval of glazing details and structural glass design. 1 H. Maintenance Data: For metal framed glazed canopy to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Include a key plan for glass sizes, make -up and source for future replacement. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: 1 1. Entity capable of assuming single responsibility for engineering, manufacturing, and installing work of this Section. 2. Design framed skylight system under direct supervision of a professional engineer experienced in design of work of the type specified in this Section and licensed in the State of Oregon. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding 1 Code — Aluminum." 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Metal Framed Glazed Canopy: 08 6300 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 • 1.6 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETING I A. Conduct a preinstallation meeting with Architect, Contractor, Installer and related trades present at least one week prior to start of installation. I 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicated measurements on Shop Drawings. I 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agrees to repair or replace any component of metal framed skylight that fail in material or workmanship within 5 years. 1 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. I b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failiures. 1 . e. Water leakage. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1 a. Silicone Sealant Manufacturer's Warranty: 10 years on weather seals and structural silicone. ill PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. DeaMor Associates, Inc. (503- 284 -6799; 206 - 574 -3449) 1 B. Other Manufacturers: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 METAL MATERIALS 1 A. Framing Members including Perimeter Angles and Caps: 1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063 or 6061, temper T -5 or T -6; Alloy and I 2. temper as recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish. Tubular or I -Beam Framing Sections: 0.10 inch minimum thickness. B. Formed Aluminum: ASTM B 209, 6061 -T6 alloy sheet material and accessories. I 1. Structural Members: Minimum 0.01 inch thickness. 2. Non - Structural Members: Minimum 0.06 inch thickness. I 3. Anchor plates as required for structural adequacy. C. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing. 1 1. Include snap -on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners. 1 . LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Metal Framed Glazed Canopy: 08 6300 October 12, 2006 Page 4 D. Anchors, Fasteners, and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion resistant, 1 nonstaining, and nonbleeding; compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Pressure Cap Fasteners: ASTM A 193, non- magnetic, 300 series stainless steel screws, with neoprene sealer washers. 2. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self - locking devices. 3. Fasteners: Non - magnetic, 300 series, stainless steel, finished to match framing system. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts Hot -dip galvanized cast -iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts i complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, Property Class 4.6, hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C. 1 F. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion resistant, nonstaining, and 1 nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. G. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components not Tess than 0.060 inch thick. H. Sealants: Silicone type specified in Section 07 9200. 1 I. Slip Joint Liner: Line slip joints to prevent metal to metal friction. 1. Teflon or 3 -M Scotch Ultra -High Modular Weight (UHMW) polyethylene tape with adhesive one side, thickness as required to allow free movement and prevent noise due to thermal expansion. J. Dissimilar Metal Protection: 3 -M "Scotchrap 50 inches, 10 mil, black vinyl corrosion resistant tape. 2.3 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000. Size overhead glazing in conformance with loading and local code requirements. B. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded silicone or Santoprene, compatible with adjacent sealant, mechanically interlocked into glazing bars and caps so that gasketing provides a setting surface and waterproof seal against both surfaces of glass. 1 1. Tape or butyl gaskets not allowed in glazing system. C. Spacers, Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types. 1 1. Provide extruded glazing wedges, mechanically locked into glazing bars, which fully support glass edges with silicone block to prevent slipping and lateral movement of glass. 1 2.4 ' FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum components before finishing. 1 1. Pre -tab and shop weld or solder flashing prior to finishing. i I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Metal Framed Glazed Canopy: 08 6300 1 October 12, 2006 Page 5 B. Fabricate aluminum components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: I 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation I occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed canopy to eicterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to I maintain required glazing edge clearances. C. Fabricate aluminum sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous component. II 1. Baffle system weep holes to prevent excessive air and water infiltration. a. Use 30 PPI polyvinyl chloride coated reticulated foam, or equivalent, 1 mechanically compressed to 50 percent of its thickness. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING 1 A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes to exposed aluminum surfaces. I B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A31 (Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine existing conditions and verify conditions are satisfactory for installation of glazed 1 canopy system. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. III 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: I 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and approved Shop Drawings. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and I 4. distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. • 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar materials, protect against galvanic I action. 1. Where possible, apply in shop. 2. Locate so as to be concealed after installation. I C. Install continuous aluminum sill closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed corners. Locate weep holes at rafters. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. i Fanno Creek Place Metal Framed Glazed Canopy: 08 6300 October 12, 2006 Page 6 D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing • members, and moisture migrating within skylight to exterior. E. Fit and secure joints with screw and spline, with rigid joints and connections that are flush, hairline, and weatherproof. 1. Reinforce aluminum components as required to receive fastener threads. F. Install components level, plumb and properly aligned with uniform joints and reveals. G. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 8000, and in accordance with glazed canopy manufacturer's instructions. 1. Retain glass with extruded caps screwed to rafters and continuous extruded horizontal members at ridge. H. Seal glazed canopy system with minimal sealant, only as engineered for structural glass retention or exterior waterproofing at horizontal butt joints. 1. Do not install sealant in contact with insulated glass seals. 2. Do not install sealant along rafter cap line or on interior of glazed canopy. Erection Tolerances: 1 1. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch where surfaces abut in line, edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches; otherwise offset limit to 1/8 inch. a. At glass supporting members, align hairline joints to within 1/64 inch. 2. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet but not greater than 1/2 inch over total length. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 1 A. Leave glass and components free of protective material, identification labels and excess sealant. B. Clean glass and components prior to final acceptance in accordance with manufacturer's recommended methods. C. Protect installed glazed canopy from damage during remainder of construction period. 1 1. Remove and replace defective or damaged components. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Door Hardware: 08 7100 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes finish hardware for doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 1113: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, to be provided templates for I 2. hardware. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors, to be provided templates for hardware. 3. Section 08 4113: Aluminum- Framed Entrances and Storefronts, for hardware provided with aluminum entrances. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data including manufacturer's technical data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. 1 B. Finish Hardware Schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. C. Keying Schedule: Indicate clearly how Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. D. Templates: For doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. 1. Verify with shop drawings and other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. E. Samples: Of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule. 1. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged may after final check of operation may be incorporated in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide services of an AHC or DAHC member of Door Hardware Institute to: 1. Be available for consultation with Architect/Owner at no additional cost to Owner during progress of construction. 2. Be available to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. B. Hardware consultant may be an employee of supplier. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware from a single manufacturer. D. Hardware supplier shall have and maintain a factory direct status with all manufacturers specified or approved during the course of the project to insure quality product knowledge and quick lead -tie response. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. F anno Creek Place I Door Hardware: 08 7100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Provide door hardware for fire rated openings complying with NFPA Standard No. 80 and current requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide only hardware that is listed and identical to products tested by U.L. or other testing and inspection agencies acceptable to governing authorities. 1 B. Provide hardware tested according to NFPA 252 and UL 1784 for fire door assemblies labeled for fire resistance and smoke control ( "S" label). C. Provide electric equipment with U.L. approved listing for complete assembly. 1 D. Comply with requirements of ANSI A117.1.,The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and State Building Code accessibility requirements for the disabled. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Individually package each unit of finish hardware, complete with proper fastenings and appurtenances, clearly marked on outside to indicate contents and specific locations in Work. B. Provide an experienced employee designated to receive, take charge of, and distribute hardware at building site. C. Provide locked secure area for storage of hardware on site. D. Protect from damage. Store above ground and under cover. 1 1.6 KEYING INFORMATION r A. If required provide keying and bitting information to Owner at no cost. k.14 I 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warrant operation of closers for 10 years. B. Warrant operation of exit devices for 3 years. 1.8 CERTIFICATION A. Prior to Substantial Completion Date, provide written certificate that hardware is complete and conforms to Specifications and approved submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fasteners: 1. Furnish necessary flat head screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor hardware in position for long life under hard use. 2. Where necessary, furnish fasteners with expansion shields, sex bolts, and other I anchors as required. Provide material to which hardware is to be applied, and recommended by hardware manufacturer. a. Provide Glass Bead Kit if necessary for proper installation of exit devices. b. Toggle bolts are not permitted. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. • 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Door Hardware: 08 7100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 3. Provide fasteners that harmonize with hardware as to finish and material. 4. Conceal if possible when door is in closed position; exposed fasteners to have Phillips 1 head. a. Through - Bolting Not permitted. 1 B. Locks and Latches: Verify: 1. Operation I 2. 3. Hand of doors Function for each opening. C. Closers: Verify for each door: 1 1. Hand of door 2. Degree of opening 3. Frequency of use I 4. Head condition. a. Provide closers that do not limit door swing. I b. Furnish drop plates for narrow top rails. c. Furnish manufacturer's standard one -piece cast arm at parallel arm location. d. Furnish closers at fire - resistant rated doors, exterior doors and elsewhere as shown. 1 D. Hinges: 1. Furnish hinges of sufficient throw to clear trim where hinges are required to swing 180 ill degrees. Furnish Furnish minimum 1 -1/2 pair of hinges per leaf, unless specifically scheduled otherwise. I E. Furnish silencers for door frames at rate of three for each single door and two for each door or pair of doors, except gasketed doors and doors with Tight seals or sound seals. I F. Furnish smoke gaskets for fire - resistive rated doors in corridors or other exitways. G. Furnish door stops in number and type to protect finishes wherever doors or hardware thereon could strike adjacent surfaces. I 2.2 KEYING A. Factory or locally key the following: 1 1. Master or Grandmaster key per Owner's direction. 2. Use Schlage "Everest Open" key system. 1 B. Furnish nickel silver keys for each lock as follows: 1. 6 masterkeys for each set I 2. 3 grand - masterkeys. 3. 2 Change keys per lockset. C. Construction keying: 1 1. Furnish a construction key system with 10 keys for locks and cylinders: 7 for Contractor and 3 for Owner. 2. Use only construction keys during construction. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Door Hardware: 08 7100 October 12, 2006 Page 4 3. Upon Substantial Completion of Work, void construction key system and, in presence 1 of Architect and Owner, demonstrate specified keying system is operating "properly. D. Identification and delivery: 1. Stamp permanent keys, "DO NOT DUPLICATE ". 2. Identify permanent keys with tags, and send direct to Owner by registered mail or receipted personal dellivery. E. Key storage cabinet 1. Manufacturer: MMF, Telkee, Yale, or approved. 1 2. Type: Surface mounted for wall, with key control tags. 3. Capacity: For required permanent keys plus 25 percent. 4. Location: As selected by Architect. 2.3 TOOLS AND MANUALS A. Deliver to Owner one complete set of adjustment tools and one set of maintenance manuals and installation instructions for Iocksets, closers, and panic devices. 2.4 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Single Source: Except as specifically otherwise approved in advance by Architect, furnish for each items (such as "Door Hinge Type 1 ") product of a single manufacturer B. Locks and Latches: 1 1. Latchbolt: Anti - friction type with curved strike lip. a. Provide extended lip where necessary to protect door frame trim from damage. b. Match hardware finish. -- 2. Fabricate with 3 -3/4 inches backset from door edge where surface applied gasketing at door frame stops and 2 -3/4 inches elsewhere. 3. Provide lever handle, unless otherwise indicated. C. Hinges: Mortise type, with non- removable pins at out - swinging doors with locks. D. Exit Devices: 1 1. Furnish with provisions for concealed mounting. Through -bolts are not acceptable unless required by fire codes or fire tests. 2. Exit device to include impact resistant, flush mounted end cap. End caps shall be of heavy -duty alloy construction and provide horizontal adjustment for flush alignment with device cover plate. No raised edges shall protrude from end cap. 3. Exit devices must be furnished with hydraulic touchpad dampener for quiet operation of device. 4. Furnish all exit devices with deadlocking latchbolts and roller strikes. 5. Furnish required filler plates and shim kits for flush mounting of exit devices on all doors. 6. Supply plastic installation template to increase accuracy and decrease installation time. • 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Door Hardware: 08 7100 October 12, 2006 Page 5 E. Door Closers: I 1. Mount on room side, and not corridor or lobby side of doors bordering circulation system unless otherwise shown. 2. Fasteners to be concealed. I 3. Closer shall have heavy duty arms, adjustable spring power with indicator dial, stick - on templates, and self reaming /tapping screws. 4. Pressure relief valves are not permitted. I F. Stops: 1. Provide wall stops; do not install floor stops unless specifically approved by Architect. 2. If wall stops cannot be installed, provide concealed overhead holder. 1 G. Flush Bolts: Provide dust -proof strikes for floor locations. H. Kickplates: 1 1. Provide metal kickplates specified in Door Hardware Groups. 2. Anchor kickplates with oval -head full- thread screws, spaced uniformly at a maximum I of 5 inches on center at kickplate perimeter. I. Provide hardware in finishes indicated in Door Hardware Groups. I J. Manufacturer and Acceptable Substitutes: Acceptable Item: Manufacturer: Substitute: 1. Hinges: Ives (IVE) Hager, Lawrence, McKinney, Stanley 2. Continuous Hinge: Ives (IVE) Pemko, Markar, R2 I 3. Locks /Latches: Schlage (SCH) None 4. Narrow Locks: Adams Rite (ADA) None 5. Cylinders: Schlage (SCH) None I 6. Exit Devices: Von Duprin (VON) None 7. Flush Bolts: Ives (IVE) None 8. Surface Closers: LCN (LCN) None 9. Coordinators: Ives (IVE) DCI, Trimco I 10. Push /Pulls: Ives (IVE) Trimco, Tice 11. Stops /Catches: Ives (IVE) Trimco, Tice 12. Overhead Stops: Glynn- Johnson (GLY) Rixson 13. Kickplates: Ives (IVE) Trimco, Tice I 14. Weatherstripping / Gasketing: Pemko (PEM) Reese, Steelcraft 15. Astragals: Pemko (PEM) Anemostat (ANE) Reese I 16. Door Bottom: Pemko (PEM) Reese 17. Thresholds: Pemko (PEM) Reese 18. Silencers: Ives (IVE) Trimco I 19. Power Supplies, Power Transfers: Von Duprin (VON) None I 1 LRS Archit. Inc. Inc. Fanno Creek Place Door Hardware: 08 7100 October 12, 2006 Page 6 PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION 1 A. Install work of this Section in accordance with: 1. Hardware groups specified. 1 2. Approved Schedule. 3. Applicable requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 4. Templates. 5. Manufacturer's and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures. B. Hardware Locations: Mount hardware at locations recommended by manufacturer, requirements of ANSI A117.1, ADA, and State Building Code, as applicable. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. 1. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D Cut and fit threshold or floor plates to door frame profile with mitered corner joints; weld multiple pieces together. Set in full bead of sealant. 1. At carpet, install closer floor plates flush with structural substrate under carpet. 2. Secure to substrate with positive anchoring devices. E. After fitting mortised hardware to surfaces to be painted, remove and store hardware in original package in a secure place, and permanently reinstall after painting has been completed. 1. Properly wrap installed hardware subjected to hand usage during construction for protection; Replace hardware units at no expense to Owner where finish has been damaged by construction activities. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of Work, and as a condition of acceptance, provide inspection, and adjustment of operating hardware, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. 1. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for li - the application made. 2. Clean operating units as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. B. After ventilation system has been balanced, manufacturer's representative to adjust closers as 1 necessary to meet ADA and State Building Code requirements for time required for closing operation and opening force. C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation and repair damaged surfaces. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Door Hardware: 08 7100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 7 D. Six Month and One Year Adjustment: Approximately six months, and prior to one year, after date of Substantial Completion, the installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of I latchsets and locksets and door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work: I 1. Examine and adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore proper operation and function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. I 3. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems of substantial nature in the performance of the hardware. 3.5 DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS 1 QUANTITY ITEM PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FINISH MFG HW SET: 01 I 8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB41P 630 IVE I 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK AL70PD OME (NO STRIKE LIP) COR X FL 626 SCH 1 EA COORDINATOR 628 IVE 2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB1 OR MB2 600 IVE I 1 EA ASTRAGAL FMA 600 ANE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 SET SILENCERS /SEAL PROVIDED BY DOOR FRAME MANUFACTURER r HW SET: 02 I 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 112HD -95" 628 IVE 1 EA DEADLOCK MS1852S 1- 118 "BS 628 ADA 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26 -098 626 SCH 1 EA EXIT INDICATOR 4089 628 ADA I 1 EA PULL /PUSHBAR 9190 -18 -NO 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP PROVIDED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER I 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452CNB AL PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 2727A AL PEM HW SET: 03 I 8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P 630 IVE I 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 626 IVE 1 EA ENTRY LOCK ND91 PD OME (NO STRIKE LIP) 626 SCH 1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE 2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB1 OR MB2 600 IVE I 1 EA ASTRAGAL 357SS 630 PEM 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SHCUSH 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW 630 IVE I 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP S88D (HEAD, JAMBS &ASTRAGAL) 3452CNB DKB PEM 2 EA DOOR SWEEP AL PEM 1 EA RAIN DRIP 346C AL PEM 1 1 EA THRESHOLD 2727A AL PEM LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Door Hardware: 08 7100 October 12, 2006 Page 8 1 HW SET: 04 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8302 -6 4" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SOUND SEAL S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM HW SET: 05 •1 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE ' 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80PD OME 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 EDA 689 LCN '1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET GASKETING S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM HW SET: 06 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE I 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80PD OME (NO STRIKE LIP) 626 SCH 1 EA ASTRAGAL FMA 600 ANE 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 450S 630 GLY 4 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 HW SET: 07 II 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8302 -6 4" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 SRI 689 LCN 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 450S 630 GLY 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 SET SOUND SEAL S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM HW SET: 08 1 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80PD OME 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 • Fanno Creek Place Door Hardware: 08 7100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 9 HW SET: 09 1 3 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98NL -F 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20 -057 626 SCH I 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET GASKETING S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM 1 HW SET: 10 I 2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT -2 689 VON 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 112HD -95" EPT 628 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE EL3547A -EO 626 VON I 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE EL3547A -TL -LESS PULL 626 VON 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20 -061 2 EA OFFSET DOOR PULL 8190 -18 -0 630 IVE 2 EA CONCEALED CLOSER 5011 689 LCN I 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S 630 GLY 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452CNB AL PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 2727A AL PEM I 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS873 -2 GRY VON 1 EA CARD READER PROVIDED BY OTHERS POWER SUPPLY REQUIRES 110VAC. PROVIDE 12 GAUGE WIRING FROM POWER SUPPLY TO 1 EACH EXIT DEVICE (HOME RUN TO EACH.) 4" TALL HEADER IS REQUIRED ON DOOR FRAME FOR DOOR CLOSER INSTALLATION. VERIFY IF AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS ARE DESIRED. 1 HW SET: 11 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 111 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98L -F 996L -OME 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20 -057 626 SCH � 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 EDA 689 LCN I 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET GASKETING S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM 1 HW SET: 12 I 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 112HD -95" 628 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD35A -NL -OP 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20 -057 626 SCH I 1 EA OFFSET DOOR PULL 8190 -18 -0 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP PROVIDED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 3452CNB AL PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 2727A AL PEM I VERIFY IF CARD READER IS DESIRED. LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Door Hardware: 08 7100 October 12, 2006 Page 10 . I HW SET: 13 III 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98L -F 996L -OME 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20 -057 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 SET GASKETING S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM HW SET: 14 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE I 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK AL70PD OME 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 840010" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET GASKETING S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM HW SET: 15 3 EA HINGE 5881 4.5 X 4.5 652 .IVE 1 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80PD OME 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET GASKETING S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM HW SET: 16 1 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98L -F 996L -OME 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20 -057 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER • 1461 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE II 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET GASKETING S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM 1 HW SET: 17 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98NL -F 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20 -057 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 SET GASKETING S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Door Hardware: 08 7100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 11 HW SET: 18 I 6 EA HINGE 5661 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT F6458 626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE I 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80PD OME (NO STRIKE LIP) 626 SCH 1 EA ASTRAGAL FMA 600 ANE 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 450S 630 GLY 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE I 4 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE I HW SET: 19 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE I 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK AL70PD OME 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SOUND SEAL S88D (HEAD & JAMBS) DKB PEM 1 END OF SECTION 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Glazing: 08 8000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following applications: I 1. Windows 2. Doors 4. Glazed entrances I 5. Storefront framing 6. Curtain walls 7. Glazed canopy 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 1113: Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2. Section 08 1400: Wood Doors I 3. Section 08 4113: Aluminum- Framed Entrances, Storefront and Windows 4. Section 08 4413: Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 5. Section 08 6300: Metal- Framed Glazed Canopy 1 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and I wind and impact Toads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. I B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimum and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses indicated in Glass Product Schedule by analyzing Project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass in lites in the thickness designations indicated for various I size openings, but not Tess than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: I 1. Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300 according to design wind Toads applicable to Project according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." I a. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lite per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. I b. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not Tess than 6 mm, except where window system is shop glazed and tested by manufacturer of window I to perform as specified. . I A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: With each product data submitted, other than monolithic clear float glass, include: I 1. 2. Glass: 12 by 12 inch samples of each type. Sealants and Gaskets: 12 inches long of each type installed between samples of material to be glazed, fully cured. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. : 08 8000 Fanno Creek Place Glazing: October 12, 2006 Page 2 C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated in Drawings, listing glass types and 1 thicknesses for each size opening and location. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts, familiar with specified requirements and methods of installation for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Source Limitations: Provide glass materials from one primary glass manufacturer for each t type of glass specified. 1. Insulating Glass: Obtain components for each type of unit from same source as used in other applications for same components. 2. Provide glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. C. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in the following publications, unless more stringent requirements are indicated: • 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual" and GANA Laminated Division's 1 "Laminated Glass Design Guide." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000. "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulated Glass Units." 1 D. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201. E. Insulating Glass Certification: Permanently mark on each unit with appropriate certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with safety glazing requirements of State Building Code, Section 2406. B. Comply with wind loading requirements of State Building Code. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions, and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Provide written warranty against failure of glazing products due to 1 defective materials or installation, including water leakage or air infiltration in excess of specified standard, for a period of 2 years after date of Substantial Completion. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Glazing: 08 8000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Manufacturer's Special Warranties: Provide the following on manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by manufacturer: I 1. Insulating Glass: 10 year labor and materials to warrant units against failure of hermetic seal. I 2. Coated Glass: 10 year labor and materials to replace unit deterioration including peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. 3. Laminated Glass: 5 year labor and materials to replace unit deterioration including defects in edge separation, delaminating, obstruction vision through glass, and I blemishes exceeding those allowed in referenced standard. PART PRODUCTS I 2.1 GLASS MATERIALS A. Products: Provide products that comply with requirements indicated in the Glass Product Schedule at end of Part 3. I B. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality Q3 (glazing select), of class indicated in the Glass Product Schedule. 1 C. Heat - Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, (transparent flat glass) Quality Q3 (glazing select), class, kind, and condition indicated in the Glass Product Schedule. I 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller- hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat- strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of individual lites and to comply with glass design requirements. 3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS float glass where safety glass is indicated or required by State Building Code. I a. Safety Glass: Where fully tempered glass is used as safety glass, provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201, for Category I or II materials as applicable. I D. Sputter Coated (Low E) Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic oxide or metallic nitride deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any). I E. Ceramic Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface ceramic coated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality Q3 (glazing select), and complying with other requirements specified. I 1. Provide Kind HS (heat- strengthened) coated float glass in place of coated annealed glass to resist thermal stresses in ceramic coated glass. F. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, interlayer of clear polyvinyl butyral sheet, kind as indicated in Glass Product Schedule. G. Insulating Glass: ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units, complying with requirements in Glass I Product Schedule, and following: 1. Sealing System: Dual Seal. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat- strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where I needed to resist thermal stresses produced by differential shading of lites and to comply with glass design requirements. 3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed of Kind HS glass where safety glass is indicated or required by State Building Code. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1� Fanno Creek Place Glazing: 08 8000 October 12, 2006 Page 4 1 2.2 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other 1 materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920, Type S (single component), Class 100/50, Grade NS (non -sag); Use NT (nontraffic), M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates, O. 1 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types, or approved as recommended by window assembly manufacturer: a. Dow Corning; 790. b. General Electric; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecor; 864. d. Sonneborn Div of ChemRex, Inc; Omniseal. e. Tremco: Spectrem 3. 2.3 GLAZING TAPE A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl based elastomeric tape complying with 9 9 p tY p ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed cell, PVC foam tape, factory coated with adhesive 1 on both surfaces, complying with AAMA 800, for applications where tape acts as a primary seal or is used in combination with a full bead of sealant. 2.4 GLAZING GASKETS A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material and type recommended by window assembly manufacturer for application, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide other materials complying with referenced glazing standard and requirements of glass manufacturers as required for applications indicated. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 1 C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85 plus or 1 minus 5. D. Spacers and Edge Blocks: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place and to limit glass lateral movement. 2.6 FABRICATION • A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings as indicated for Project. 1. Provide edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with referenced standards and requirements of product manufacturers. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 i I Fanno Creek Place Glazing: 08 8000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing for compliance with the following: I 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system for exterior glazing. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 1 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 1 3.3 COORDINATION 1 A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 3.4 GLAZING, GENERAL I A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1 1. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. 2. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testing. I B. Install setting blocks sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise recommended by glass manufacturer. 1 1. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. I C. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches, and as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. I 2. Install correct size and spacing of spacers to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances. 3. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant I width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. I C. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation. 1. Do not install items that are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are scratched, abraded, or damaged in any other manner. I 2. Set glass so distortion waves, if present, run in horizontal direction. 3. Set glass in a manner which produces greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 : 08 8000 Glazing: Fanno Creek 9 October 12, 2006 Page 6 D. Glaze steelwork with closed cell tape bedding and silicone sealant. 1 E. Do not use 2 different glazing materials in same joint system. F. Miter -cut and seal joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where joints are required. I G. Compress glazing tape or gaskets at least 25 percent of material thickness, with minimum finished thickness of 3/32 inch. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 1 A. Protect glass from damage after installation by attaching crossed streamers or ribbons to framing held free from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. 1 B. Remove excessive glazing compound from glazing and adjacent surfaces without damaging glass or adjacent surfaces. C. Replace broken, cracked, scratched, or otherwise damaged glass. D. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. 1. Protect glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces from build up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. I E. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean glass surfaces on both sides no more than four days before date of Substantial Completion. 3.6 GLASS PRODUCT SCHEDULE A. Glass Type GL -1: (Tinted Insulated Glass) Insulating glass units complying with following requirements: 1 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 25 mm (1 inch). 2. Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). 3. Interspace Content: Air. 4. Coated Clear Indoor Lite: Condition C (other coated glass), Class 1 (clear) float glass; PPG Solarban 60. 5. Coated Tinted Outdoor Lite: Condition C (other coated surfaces) Class 2 (tinted, heat - absorbing and light- reducing) with a tint color of blue; PPG Vistacool Azuria. 6. Low - Emissivity Coating: Sputter coat on third surface. 7. Performance Minimurns: I a. Winter U- Value: 0.31 b. Summer U- Value: 0.30 c. Shading Coefficient: 0.32 d. Visible Light Transmittance: 43 percent. 1 B. Glass Type GL -1T: Same as GL -1 except both lites Kind FT (fully tempered). 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Glazing: 08 8000 October 12, 2006 Page 7 C. Glass Type GL -2: (Tinted Insulating Spandrel Glass) Insulating glass units complying with following requirements: 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 25 mm (1 inch). 2. Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). 3. Interspace Content: Air. 4. Ceramic - Coated Glass Indoor Lite: Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition B (coated), Class 1 (clear) float glass. 5. Coated Tinted Outdoor Lite: Condition C (other coated surfaces) Class 2 (tinted, heat- 6. ' absorbing and light- reducing) with a tint color of blue; PPG Vistacool Azuria. Ceramic Coating: Ceramic frit on third surface by Hartung, Milgard Tempering, N.W. Industries, Oldcastle Glass, or Viracon to match color of outdoor tinted lite. 1 D. Glass type GL -3: Uncoated, single pane glass units complying with following requirements: 1. Thickness of Lite: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). 2. Class 1 (clear) float glass. E. Glass type GL -3T: Tempered, uncoated, single pane glass units complying with following requirements: 1 1. Thickness of Lite: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). 2. Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A, (uncoated) Class 1 (clear) float glass. ' F. Glass Type GL-4: Heat Treated, Laminated, single pane glass units complying with following requirements: (Glazed Canopy) 1. Kind: LHS, consisting of two lites of heat - strengthened float glass. 1 1. 2. Outer Lite: Class 1 (clear) float; minimum 3.0 mm thickness. Inner Lite: Class 1 (clear) float; minimum 3.0 mm thickness. 3. Plastic Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), but not less than that required to comply as a Type II safety glass material. 4. Plastic Interlayer Color: White, perforated pattern. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. i Fanno Creek Place Louvers and Vents: 08 9000 , 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes louvers and vents. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 6000: Flashing and Sheet Metal 2. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants 3. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for louvers that are a part of HVAC equipment, and HVAC ducts connected to louvers. I 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide louvers that meet or withstand the following minimum performance ratings or requirements: I 1. Structural Performance: Gravity and wind loads based on minimum uniform pressure of 25 Ibf /sq. ft. I 2. Seismic Performance: ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Load of Buildings and Other Structures. 3. Thermal Movements: Temperature change of 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. I 4. Air Performance, Water Penetration, and Wind Driven Rain Ratings: As demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units according to AMCA 500 -L. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Product Data, for each type of product specified. Include printed catalog pages showing AMCA Certified Ratings Seals, or evidence that product has been tested according to AMCA 500 -L. I B. Shop Drawings, to show plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and interface with adjacent construction. 1 1. Verify louver and vent openings by field dimensions prior to fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. • 1 B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code — Aluminum. 1 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel. C. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision of work of I those trades for interfacing with work of this Section. 1. Coordinate location, size, and other necessary requirements for proper connection of mechanical ductwork to louvers and vents. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Louvers and Vents: 08 9000 111 October 12, 2006 Page 2 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. The Airolite Company. I 2. Cesco Products. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 4. Greenheck 5. Nystrom Building Products. 111 6 . Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM IB 221, alloy 6063 -T5 or T -52. I B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Fasteners: 300 stainless steel or same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal. E. Bituminous Paint: ASTM D 1187, cold - applied asphalt emulsion. 1 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate frame to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and I installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. B. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds, concealed from view. 2.4 FIXED ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Type: Drainable head and blade louvers. I B. Basis -of- Design Product: Greenheck ESD -403. C. Components: 1 1. Frame: 0.081 inch wall thickness. 2. Blades: 0.081 inch thickness. 3. Frame Depth: 4 inches. 4. Size: As shown. 5. Bird Screen: 1/2 inch square mesh with 0.063 inch wire, or 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick flattened, expanded aluminum. I 6. Louver Factory Finish: Kynar 500. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Louvers and Vents: 08 9000 October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws 1 where required to protect metal surfaces and to make weathertight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. 1. Set flanges and flashings in sealant specified in Section 07 9200. D. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Protect galvanized and nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion ' or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. E. Where HVAC duct meets inside face of louver, provide sheet metal closure between ' perimeter of louver and perimeter of duct; paint exterior face of closure panel flat black. 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A. Clean exposed surfaces with water. Do not use acid or abrasive cleaners. B. Repair damaged finishes so that no evidence remains of corrective work. 1. Replace items that cannot be refinished in the field, or return to factory for refinishing of entire unit. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes gypsum board assemblies and accessories including the following: 1 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board panels for ceilings. 3. Tile backing panels. I 4. Non -load bearing steel framing. B. Related Sections: I 1. Section 05 4000: Cold- Formed Metal Framing, for load- bearing steel framing that supports gypsum board. 2. Section 06 1600: Sheathing, for exterior gypsum sheathing. 3. Section 07 8413: Penetration Firestopping I 4. Section 07 8443: Fire - Resistant Joint Firestopping, for fire - resistant sealant. 5. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for sealants. 6. Section 09 0600: Room Finish Schedule 1 7. Section 09 2117: Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies, for metal shaft wall framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft -wall assemblies. 8. Section 09 3000: Tiling, for tile applied to tile backer board. 7. Section 09 8110: Acoustic Insulation and Sealant I 9. Section 09 9000: Painting, for gypsum board paint finish. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION I A. Acoustic blanket insulation in partitions is specified in Section 09 8100, Acoustic Insulation and Sealant. B. Acoustical sealant in partitions is specified in Section 09 8100, Acoustic Insulation and Sealant. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1 A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA -505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies. I 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, for each type of product indicated. 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. I 1. Installer: Company with not less than 3 years experience installing gypsum board systems in project of similar size, quality and complexity under present name. 1 B. Comply with the following standards: 1. ASTM C 645, Non -Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Rigid 1 2. Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. ASTM C 754, Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw - Attached Gypsum Wallboard. 3. ASTM C 840, Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Place Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 I Fanno Creek yp October 12, 2006 Page 2 4. Metal Lath /Steel Frarning Association "Specification for Metal Lathing and Furring." 1 5. U.S. Gypsum Systems Folder SA 923. 6. Gypsum Association Document GA -216, Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 7. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau recommendations for gypsum wallboard finishes. , C. For fire- resistant rated partitions, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. II 1. Line blockouts in walls for recessed toilet accessories, fire extinguisher cabinets, and the like, with gypsum board as necessary to preserve fire - resistive rating of partition. D. For STC -rated partitions and ceilings, provide materials and construction identical to those 1 tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. . E. Mockup: 1 1. At an area on site approved by Architect, provide a mockup gypsum wallboard panel. I a. Provide one mock -up panel for each gypsum wallboard finish used in Work. b. Minimum panel width 8 feet wide by full height of partition. c. Obtain Architect's approval prior to starting work. d. Approved mockups may be incorporated into finished Work. 2. Maintain mockup panels during construction in a undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed work. I 3. Demolish rejected mockup panels and remove from job site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and 1 identification of manufacturer, with labels identifying fire- resistance rating and water resistance. I B. Store materials inside under cover, dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. 1. Store gypsum panels flat in a manner to prevent sagging. 1 C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain between 55 degrees F and 75 degrees F for 24 hours before installation, during installation, and for 24 hours after materials have dried. B. Maintain at least 30 foot candles of illumination measured 3 feet above floor in Work spaces 1 during joint treatment. • C. Maintain sufficient ventilation for proper joint treatment drying. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 II Fanno Creek Place Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 PART2 PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: 1 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Steeler Inc. I b. Scafco Corporation. c. Other Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) manufacturers. 2. Gypsum Products: 1 a. BPB America, Inc. b. G -P Gypsum. c. National Gypsum Company. 1 d. USG Corporation. 3. Metal and Plastic trim: I a. AMICO. b. Beadex. c. Plastic Components, Inc. I d. Vinyl Corp. 3. Special Moldings and Reveals: I a. b. Fry Reglet Corporation. Gordon, Inc. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. I 2.2 STEEL FRAMING AND EXTERIOR SOFFIT FRAMING I A. Steel Stud Framing, ASTM C 645: 1. Provide standard non - structural punched channel type steel studs with minimum 1/4 inch lip return at flange, with 1 -1/4 inch flange depth, of widths indicated in I Drawings, unless otherwise indicated. Provide metal studs of the following uncoated thickness for gage referenced: a. 0.0188 inch (25 gage). I b. c. 0.0283 inch (22 gage). 0.0312 inch (20 gage). 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, minimum G40, Manufacturer's standard hot -dip 1 galvanized coating. 3. Interior Partitions: Provide metal studs with the following minimum uncoated metal I thickness, unless otherwise noted, for the following applications: a. Studs in partitions with tile finish: 0.0312 inch (20 gage). b. Studs adjacent to door jambs: 0.0312 inch (20 gage). I c. Studs of over 12 feet unsupported height: 0.0312 inch (20 gage). d. Other studs: 0.0188 inch (25 gage). 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 October 12, 2006 Page 4 • 4. Deflection Track: 1 a. "Fire Trak" by Fire Track Corp. I b. DFT (Deflection Track) by Steeler, Inc. c. "VertiClip" by The Steel Network, Inc. B. Steel Furring Channels: I 1. ASTM C 645, hat shaped, 7/8 inch depth, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer's standard hot -dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 653. a. Minimum G40 hot -dip galvanized coating for exterior soffits. 1 3. Minimum 0.0312 inch (20 gage) uncoated metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. I 4. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type steel sheet with minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (20 gage). 5. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch diameter wire, I or double strand of 0.0475 inch diameter wire. C. Cold - Rolled Channel Bridging: 1. Size: Minimum 1 -1/2 inch. 1 2. Uncoated Metal Thickness: 0.0566 inch (16 gage), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Clip Angle: 1 -1/2 by 1 -1/2 inch, 0.068 inch thick, galvanized steel. D. Z- Furring Members: 1 1. Minimum 0.0188 inch e 25 gage) uncoated thickness, corrosion resistant steel per ( 9 9) p I ASTM A 653, depth as indicated in Drawings. 2. Face Flange: 1 -1/4 inch. 3. Wall Attachment Flange: 7/8 inch. E. Steel Fiat Strap and Backing Plate: 1 1. Corrosion resistant steel per ASTM A 653, length as indicated, or required to suit application. I 2. Minimum 0.0451 inch (18 gage) uncoated thickness by 8 inches wide, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer for Preformed Wall Backing System: "Notch -Tite" and "Flush Mount" backing for metal studs by Metal -Lite, Inc. 1 F. Fasteners: Type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates. I 1. Comply with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. G. Other Accessories: As required for a complete and proper installation, and as recommended 1 by manufacturer of steel studs to suit conditions of installation. 2.3 GRID SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY FOR INTERIOR CEILINGS I A. System: Manufacturer's standard direct -hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross - furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting grid network for gypsum board ceiling assemblies. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 1 October 12, 2006 Page 5 B. Acceptable Products: I 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640 Drywall Furring Suspended Ceiling System. 3. Drywall Grid System, by BPB Celotex. II 4. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD I A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36 or ASTM 1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. B. Gypsum Board: 5/8 inches thick with long edges tapered; Fire retardant Type X. 1 1. Gypsum board complying with ASTM C 442 may be used for gypsum backing board for multilayer applications, 5/8 inches thick, Type X. 1 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS . A. Glass -Mat Water- Resistant Gypsum Tile Backing Board; ASTM C 1178, Type X, 5/8 inches 1 thickness: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or approved: 1 a. Product: "DensShield Fireguard Tile Guard" by G -P Gypsum. 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES 1 A. Interior Trim: Comply with ASTM C 1047. 1 1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet or plastic. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. I b. Bullnose bead. c. LC -Bead: J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L -Bead: L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U -Bead: J- shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. I f. g. Expansion (control) joint. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. B. Special Moldings and Reveals: 1 1. Extruded 6063 T5 aluminum alloy in clear anodized finish. 2. Type: As shown on Drawings. 1 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 and GA -216: I 1. Cementitious Backer Board: Type and size recommended by board manufacturer. 2. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members that are 0.033 inch to 0.1.12 inch thick. 1 B. Acoustic Insulation (Sound Attenuation Blankets): Specified in Section09 8110. C. Acoustical Sealant: Specified in Section 09 8110. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Gypsum Place G sum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 a October 12, 2006 Page 6 1 D. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a low VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound recommended for spot - grouting hollow 1 metal door frames. 2.8 JOINTING SYSTEM A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass -Mat Tile Backing Panels: Glass mesh joint type as recommended by panel 1 manufacturer. C. Joint Compound: a. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. b. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound or drying -type, taping (all-purpose) compound. 1) Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim 1 accessories. c. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping or drying -type, topping (aII- purpose) compound. d. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping or drying -type, topping (all- purpose) compound. e. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping or drying -type, topping (all- purpose) compound. f. Optional Latex Surfacing: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high -build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish; one of the following: 1) National Gypsum Company: "ProForm" Brand Surfacer /Primer. 1 2) Sherwin Williams: "PrepRite" High Build Interior Latex Primer /Sealer. 3) USG Corporation: Sheetrock Brand "Tuff- Hide" Primer - Surfacer. 2. Tile Backing Panels: a. Glass -Mat Water- Resistant Gypsum Tile Backing Board: As recommended by manufacturer. b. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.9 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following, or approved, for water - based, job- mixed, drying -type texture finish for spray application: 1. Product: SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture, ready- mixed, by USG 1 Corporation. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 1 October 12, 2006 Page 7 PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine areas and substrates and verify conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION • 1 A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. 1 3.3 STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. I 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. 1 B. Anchor components firmly into position plumb, level and true. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. I D. Align partition wall and ceiling assemblies to a tolerance of one in 200 horizontally and one in 500 vertically without voids. I E. Isolate steel framing where framing and furring abuts structure at the following locations: 1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter and where structure penetrates ceilings. I 2. Where partition framing and wall furring abuts structure, except at floor. a. Install deflection track top runner for lateral support and avoid axial loading. b. Install deflection and firestop track top runner at fire - resistive rated 1 c. assemblies. Attach jamb studs at openings to track with stud clips. F. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members; 1 independently frame both sides of joints. G. Install supplementary framing, including steel flat strap and backing plate, to support fixtures, heavy trim, casework, railings, toilet compartments, grab bars, toilet room accessories, I furnishings, building equipment, and behind wall- mounted door stops. 1. Provide reinforced wall backing for grab bars that is capable of supporting at least I 250 pound point load as required by building code. .4 ION FRAMING I A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. 1. Prior to installation, apply 2 beads of acoustical sealant to back side of runners. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 I Fanno Creek Place YP October 12, 2006 Page 8 1 B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. I 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. Do not fasten studs to top track to allow independent movement of studs and track. 2. Where stud partitions stop at or slightly above ceiling, brace partition to structure as I required to stabilize partitions. C. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 1 D. Space studs at 16 inches o.c. maximum, unless otherwise noted. 1. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in the same direction. I 2. Do not splice studs. 3. Align utility openings in stud webs. E. Form corners and intersections with three studs. Locate studs within 2 inches of internal I corners. F. In cavity walls or other walls without finish material on both faces of studs, provide horizontal I bridging between adjacent studs to eliminate stud rotation. G. Coordinate requirements for pipes and other items designed to be housed within wall system. H. Door Openings: Comply with (3A -600, and the follows: 1 1. Provide partition high stud adjacent to door frame jambs and secure to jambs. 2. Provide additional partition high stud approximately 2 inches from each jamb -stud and I attach to jamb -studs with spacers 18 inches above floor and at 12 and 27 inches below door frame top. 3. Install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. I 4. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. I. Other Framed Openings: Frarne same as required for door openings, unless otherwise I indicated. 1. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. J. Fire - Resistance Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with requirements of fire- 1 resistance rated assembly indicated and support closures to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. I 1. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire- resistance rated assembly. 3.5 GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR INTERIOR CEILINGS 1 A. Install suspended drywall framing system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. 1 C. Mechanically join main beam and cross -tee members to each other and butt- cut to fit into wall track or angle. 1 D. Install cross -tees at 16 inches o.c. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 1 October 12, 2006 Page 9 3.6 SOUND CONTROL PARTITIONS 1 A. Install acoustic blanket insulation and sealant in partitions designated for sound control. B. Install acoustic insulation specified in Section 09 8110. 1 C. Acoustical Sealant: 1. Install acoustical sealant specified in Section 09 8110. I 2. Seal construction at perimeters and at openings and penetration with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. a. Comply with ASTM C 919 for application of acoustical sealant. I b. Where partitions meet ceilings and floors, Apply a continuous bead of sealant between a maximum gap of 1/2 inch between floor and bottom edge of gypsum board, or between ceiling and top edge of gypsum board. I 1) Provide sealant full depth of gypsum board facings; do not skim coat over sealant. 1 c. Apply acoustical sealant around penetrations, such as electrical boxes, pipes, and other items penetrating partitions. 3. Apply fire- resistant acoustical sealant at fire -rated acoustical walls. 1 3.7 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. General: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216. 1 1. Non - Loadbearing Steel Framing: Comply with ASTM C 645 and ASTM C 754. 2. Loadbearing Steel Framing: Comply with ASTM C 955. I 3. Butt panel together for a light contact at edges and ends, with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 4. Locate edge and end joints over supports. 5. At internal and external corners, conceal cut edges of boards by overlapping covered I edges of abutting boards. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. . Maintain 3/8 inch minimum distance between fastener and board edge. I a. b. Drive specified screws with clutch - controlled power screwdrivers. Dimple board surface 1/32 inch with fastener; do not fracture face paper. 8. Screw Fastener Schedule: 1 a. Panel Perimeter Spacing: 8 inches o.c., unless otherwise noted. b. Panel Intermediate Support Spacing: I 1) Walls: 12 inches o.c., typical. 2) Walls with Panels as Tile Substrate: 8 inches o.c. 3) Ceilings: 8 inches o.c. 1 9. Isolate perimeter of non -load bearing partitions at structural abutments, except at floors. I a. b. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joints at these locations. Trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum board are exposed. c. Seal joints with acoustical sealant, comply with ASTM C 919. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 1 October 12, 2006 Page 10 1 B. Walls: 1. Install gypsum board with tapered edges vertical, and to within 1/4 inch of floor, 1 unless horizontal application is required by GA or UL listing for wall types. 2. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partition. 3. Multi -layer Applications: I a. Offset face layer joints at least one stud or furring member from base layer joints. b. Fasten base layer with screws and face layer with adhesive and I supplementary fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Direct Bonding to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. Temporarily brace or fasten panels until adhesive has set. 1 C. Walls as Substrate for Tile: 1. Install glass -mat water- resistant gypsum backer board in accordance with 1 manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Ceilings: 1. Install gypsum board to ceilings with long dimension of board at right angles to supporting members. 2. Board may be installed with long dimension parallel to supporting members that are 111 spaced 16 inches o.c. when attachment members are provided at end joints. 3. Multi -layer Applications: a. Offset face layer joints at least one stud or furring member from base layer 1 joints. b. Fasten both base layer and face layer with screws, and with adhesive between layers. 1 3.8 ALLOWABLE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Ceiling Deflection: Provide framing and thickness of gypsum board, fastened as 1, required, to achieve maximum deflection of 1/360 of span. III B. Maximum Deviation from True Plane: 1/8 inch per 10 foot, and 1/16 inch in any running foot. 1. Check trim for conformance to tolerances. 1 • 3.9 CONTROL JOINTS A. Provide control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 1. Locate control joints at 30 feet maximum in ceilings, and 50 feet maximum in walls. I 3.10 CORNER TREATMENT A. Internal Corners: Treat as specified for joints, but fold reinforcing tape lengthwise through 1 middle and fit neatly into corner. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Gypsum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 I October 12, 2006 Page 11 B. External Corners and Exposed Edges: I 1. Install specified corner bead, fitting neatly over corner and securing with same type fasteners used for installing wallboard. 2. Space fasteners approximately 6 inches o.c. and drive through wallboard into framing or furring member. I 3.11 OTHER TRIM I A. Drawings do not show locations and requirements for all trim. 1. Carefully study Drawings and installation, and provide trim normally recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board. 1 B. Install 3/4 inch wide rolled formed profiles at exterior soffits. 3.12 GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING 1 A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board I surfaces for decoration. Promptly removed residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or bevel edges, and damaged surface areas. I C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories not requiring tape. D. Levels of Finish: Comply with GA -214, and recommendations of Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau for gypsum board finishes, as follows: 1. Level 1, One Coat Application: Above ceiling and concealed areas, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire - resistive -rated assemblies and sound -rated I assemblies. 2. Level 2, One Coat Application: Where panels form substrate for tile. 3. Level 4, Three Coat Application: Gypsum board surfaces with textured paint finish, flat paint finish, unbacked wall covering. 4. Level 5, Three Coat Application with a Skim Coat or Latex Surfacer: Gypsum board surfaces with smooth texture paint finish, or paint finish with higher level of gloss than flat. 1 E. Application of Levels of Finish: 1. Level 1 Finish: One coat application. a. Embed tape in joint compound with surfaces free of excess joint compound. b. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. c. Cover fastener heads with one coat of joint compound in fire resistive assemblies. 2. Level 2 Finish: One coat application. 1 a. Embed tape in joint compound, wipe off excess and leave a thin coat of joint compound over tape. b. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. 1 c. Cover fastener heads with one coat of joint compound. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Gypsum Fanno Creek Place G sum Board Assemblies: 09 2116 October 12, 2006 Page 12 3. Level 4 Finish: Three coat application. 1 a. Embed tape in joint compound leaving a smooth thin coat of joint compound over tape. b. Apply a separate coat of joint compound over the first coat, leaving a smooth surface free of ridges, tool marks and sanding grooves. c. Apply a final coat of joint compound feathered out over the second coat, leaving a smooth surface flush with gypsum board and free of all marks. Feather finishing compound to not Tess than 12 inches wide. d. Cover fastener heads with a coat of joint compound followed with separate second and final coats as described above for taped joints. e. When finishing compounds are dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth surface, taking care to not scuff paper surface of wallboard. f. Wipe gypsum board surfaces with damp cloth. I 4. Level 5 Finish: Three Coat Application for Level 4 Finish with a Skim Coat or Latex Surfacer. a. Skim Coat: A thin coat of joint compound over entire finished gypsum board surface. Wipe down immediately, leaving a tight smooth film of joint compound. 3.13 WATER RESISTANT SEALANT M A. Apply a continuous bead of water resistant sealant around cutouts at raw edges and at penetrations of glass -mat water resistant tile backer board. 1 3.14 GYPSUM BOARD SURFACE TEXTURE A. Spray -apply texture compound to produce a fine -spray texture finish in accordance with i approved mock -up. B. Apply texture compound only after gypsum board joints are taped and dry, and after painter - applied surface primer specified in Section 09 9000, Painting, is applied and dry. I 3.15 REPAIRS • A. Repair screw pops by installing new screw approximately 1 -1/2 inches away from projecting E. screw and reset projecting screw if face paper is fractured, remove projecting screw; fill damaged surface and finish flush and smooth. B. Fill cracks; finish flush and srnooth. 1 3.16 CLEANING UP A. Clean exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section, and repair imperfections in finish. iII B. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum board scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces. C. Remove scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section at completion of each segment of installation and dispose of in legal manner. END OF SECTION I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies: 09 2117 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes proprietary fire rated gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies for the following applications: 1. Shaft enclosures. 2. Chase enclosures. 3. Stair enclosures. 4. Horizontal duct enclosures. B. Related Sections 1. Section 07 8413: Penetration Firestopping 2. Section 07 8443: Fire - Resistant Joint Firestopping, for fire- resistant sealant. 3. Section 09 2117: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for gypsum board products and non -fire rated partition assemblies. 4. Section 09 8110: Acoustic Insulation and Sealant. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA -505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Provide gypsum board shaft wall assemblies capable of withstanding the full air- pressure loads indicated for maximum heights of partitions indicated without failing and while maintaining an airtight and smoke -tight seal. Evidence of failure includes deflections exceeding limits indicated, bending stresses causing studs to break or to distort, and end - reaction shear causing runners to bend or to shear and studs to become crippled. a. Intermittent Air - Pressure Loads: 7.5 Ibf /sq. ft. b. Deflection Limit: L/360. 2. Provide gypsum board shaft wall assemblies for horizontal duct enclosures capable of spanning distances indicated within the deflection limits indicated. 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft wall assembly indicated. B. Fire - Test - Response Reports. 1. Include data substantiating that elevator entrances and other items that penetrate 1 each gypsum board shaft wall assembly do not negate fire - resistance. rating. C. Research /Evaluation Reports. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Gypsum Fanno Creek Place G sum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies: 09 2117 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE • 1 A. Fire - Resistance Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly according to ASTM E 119 indicated by design designations from one of the following: 1. GA -600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual.' 2. UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." 3. FM's "Approval Guide, Building Products." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .N A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. I B Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Il II 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with requirements for environmental conditions, room temperatures, and ventilation specified Section 09 2116 for gypsum board products. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. • A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide proprietary products by one of the following: 1. BPB America Inc. 2. G -P Gypsum, a Georgia- Pacific Company. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. United States Gypsurn Co. 2.2 ASSEMBLY MATERIALS A. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645; Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members and corner and end members and 1. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant coating. 1 2. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for fire - resistance -rated assembly indicated and in depth and thickness indicated in the Drawings. 3. Track (Runner): Manufacturer's standard J- profile track with long -leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches. 4. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J- profile strut with long -leg length of 3 inches, in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch thick (20 gage). B. Gypsum Liner Panels: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels in 1 -inch thickness with moisture - resistant paper faces. C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396, core type as required by fire - resistance rated assembly 1 indicated with tapered edges. D. Glass -Mat, Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Complying with ASTM C 1178, in manufacturer's standard thickness, but at least 1/2 inch. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 i i Fanno Creek Place Acoustical Ceilings: 09 5100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Acoustical ceiling panels. 2. Exposed suspension system for ceilings. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for grid suspension systems for gypsum board finished ceilings. I 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1 B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling mounted items, and details of installation. Show the following: 1 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Ceiling mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. I 3. Details for lateral restraint, compression post installation, method of attaching posts and hangers to building structure, and interface of work of adjacent trades ii C. Samples: 1. Acoustical Panel: Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Molding, and Trim: 12 inches long of each I type, finish, and color. QUALITY Y ASSURANCE ,1 A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. B. Source Limitations: 1 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects I of earthquake motions according to the following: 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 2. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies - Seismic Zones 3 & 4." i 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Acoustical Ceilings: 09 5100 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceiling or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire - suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Deliver to Owner an extra stock of approximately 2 percent of each type of acoustical material installed, separately packaged, marked, and protected against deterioration. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS A. Acoustical Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of products that comply with I ASTM E 1264 classification, Type and Form as indicated, for each designation in the Acoustical Ceiling Panel Schedule at the end of PART 3. 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felded. 2. Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram - positive and gram- negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth then tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or STM G 21. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM i A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635 for each designation in the Acoustical Ceiling Panel Schedule at the end of PART 3. B. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide zinc- coated carbon -steel wire complying with ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times the design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung ") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135 inch diameter wire. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: 1. AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. 2. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Company. B. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements and fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension system indicated, formed of sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS I A. Provide other materials, required for a complete installation. LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Fanno Creek Place Acoustical Ceilings: 09 5100 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 3.2 INSTALLATION, SUSPENDED CEILING PANELS A. Install acoustical ceiling to comply with ASTM C 636, with seismic restraint complying with I ASTM E 580 and CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies - Seismic Zones 3 & 4." 1. In areas designated as "Tenant," install suspended grid in open 4 foot by 4 foot module. Store T -bars not installed but required for final 2 foot by 4 foot grid in tenant area for future installation with tenant construction. I B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less than half width panels at border. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from structural members, plumb and free from contact with I insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers to miss obstructions. Where width of ducts and other construction interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. --- D. Install edge moldings and trim at perimeter of acoustical ceilings and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. . I 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system I runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Do not install acoustical panels in areas designated as "Tenant;" store acoustical I panels in tenant area for future installation with tenant construction. 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT I A. Clean exposed surfaces of grid and acoustical materials using cleaning materials recommended for purpose by manufacturer of material being cleaned. I B. Remove and replace panels that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to eliminate evidence of damage. C. Remove and replace suspension system runners that are dented, bent, or kinked. I I I ' LRS Architects, Inc. Acoustical Ceilings: Fanno Creek Place Acou s: 09 5100 g October 12, 2006 Page 4 3.4 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL SCHEDULE A. Acoustical Ceiling Panel, ACP -1: Where this designation is indicated, provide water - felted, mineral -base acoustical panels complying with the following: 1. Product: One of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries: Dune 1773. ' b. BPB Celotex: Baroque BET -197. c. USG Interiors, Inc: Radar 2310. 2. Color: White. 3. Light Reflectance: LR 0.80 - 0.83. 4. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.50. 5. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 30. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E 1264; Flame Spread 25 or under. 7. Edge Detail: Square lay -in. 8. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 9. Size: 24 by 48 inches. 3.5 CEILING GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM SCHEDULE I A. Suspension System for Acoustical Ceiling Panel, ACP -1: Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panel ceiling suspension system complying with the following: 1. Wide -Face, Single -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold - rolled steel sheet electrolytically zinc coated, with prefinished 15/16 inch wide flanges, and as follows: a. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty. b. Face Finish: Painted white. c. Adjustable seismic compression struts by USG Interiors, or approved. d. Hanger wire: Galvanized carbon steel, soft temper, prestretched, yield stress load at least three times design load, but not less than 12 gauge. 2. Product: Armstrong World Industries: Prelude XL. I END OF SECTION I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Fanno Creek Place Resilient Base and Accessories: 09 6513 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Resilient wall base. 2. Resilient carpet accessories. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for wall substrate. 2. Section 09 6800: Carpet, for installation of resilient accessories furnished under I provisions of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples: 12 inch length for each type, color, and pattern specified. I . 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Engage installer who is approved by manufacturer and has successfully completed 5 I projects of similar size, quality and complexity. B. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper interface with work of this Section. 0 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction concerning use of I products with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs). B. Fire -Test- Response Characteristics: Provide products complying with the following tests: I 1. 2. ASTM E 648: Critical Radiant Flux; 0.45 W /sq. cm. or greater. ASTM E 662: Smoke Density; maximum specific optical density of 450 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Deliver in unopened packages with manufacturer's original, legible labels intact. B. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use, and I , manufacturer's run number for matching floor coverings. C. 't\e off ground, in dry spaces protected from weather and damage. Il 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not start installation of resilient base and accessories until permanent HVAC system is in I complete operation. 1. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours after installation. B. Coordination: Coordinate with work of other Sections that require resilient floor accessories. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Resilient Base and Accessories: 09 6513 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra stock of not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of resilient product installed. B. Deliver to on -site location designated by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS . I 2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Provide products complying with ASTM 1861, Type TP, (Rubber, Themoplastic) and with I requirements specified in the Resilient Floor Covering Schedule at the end of PART 3. B. Style: I 1. Style A, Straight with no toe at carpet. 2. Style B, Cove, topset with toe at other locations. 1 C. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch. D. Length: Continuous. 2.2 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Accessory Moldings: Provide products with requirements specified in the Resilient Floor Covering Schedule at the end of PART 3. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES . A. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and IN substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that have a low VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Rubber Edge Strips: 1. Size: One inch wide, beveled, matching flooring thickness. 2. Color: As selected from standard range. C. Sealant: I 1. Manufacturer: Dow Corning, General Electric, or approved. 2. Type: ASTM C -920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS; Clear, translucent silicone with mildew inhibitor. D. Cleaners: Neutral type provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 111 A. Examine substrates and surface conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerance, and other conditions affecting performance. _ 1. Verify that bottom of wall surfaces to receive base are within 1/4 inch from top of floor. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Resilient Base and Accessories: 09 6513 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 • 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. General: Comply with resilient wall base and accessories manufacturer's installation instructions for preparing substrates to receive resilient floor products. I 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Install resilient products according to manufacturer's installation instructions. I B. Apply wall base to walls, columns, wall projections, casework and cabinet toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures, in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of I adjacent pieces aligned. D. Where applied on irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's adhesive filler material. I E. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. F. Job - Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Form from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove I strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Form from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an inverted V- shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3. Set toe of base in continuous bead of sealant. Remove excess sealant from exposed surfaces. I 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION I A. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Scribe stringers to fit stair profile and align top with top of wall base. Shape top edge to match top edge of base. 1 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: I 1. Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 2. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. I 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove excess adhesive and other residue from exposed surfaces. I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 r Fanno Creek Place Resilient Base and Accessories: 09 6513 October 12, 2006 Page 4 3.7 RESILIENT FLOOR COVERING SCHEDULE 1 A. Rubber Base RB -1: Where this designation is indicated, provide thermoplastic rubber wall base complying with the following: 1. Product: Roppe, or approved. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect. 3. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch. 4. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. B. Rubber Accessory Moldings: 1 1. Product Description: a. Carpet edge for glue -down applications. b. Carpet nosing. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION I i 1 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Carpeting: 09 6800 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Carpeting and carpet accessories. B. Related Sections: 1 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for moisture vapor emission testing for concrete slabs -on- grade. 2. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for substrate affecting work of this Section. I 3. Section 09 6513: Resilient Base and Accessories: Resilient wall base and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Product data and manufacturer's specifications for each type of carpet material, and installation accessory specified. 1 1. Include installation methods for carpet on each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built -in cabinets, I locations where cutouts are required in carpet, and the following: 1. Carpet type, color, dye lot, and where dye lot changes occur if applicable. 2. Seam locations, types, and methods. 4 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation and method. 5. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 6. Pile direction. I 7. Type, color, and location of inserts and borders. 8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips, including transition details to other materials. I C. Samples for verification, from same material to be used in the work: 1. Two 18 x 27 inch samples of each type, color, and pattern specified. 1 2. 12 -inch samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item. D. Schedule of carpet using same room number designations indicated in Drawings. l E. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain removal products and procedures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Provide carpet that comply with Department of Commerce Flammability Standard COC FF 1 -70, ASTM D 1335 and ASTM D 2859. 1 1. Carpet in Exitways: Comply with requirements of National Bureau of Standards Radiant Panel Test 75 -950. 2. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630. I I ' LRS Architects, Inc. : 09 6800 Car Carpeting: Fanno Creek Place P 9 October 12, 2006 Page 2 B. Provide carpet that comply with ASTM E 84 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials for the following ratings: 1. Flame spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke density: 450 or less. C. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W /sq. cm per ASTM E 648. D. Provide carpet of each color /pattern from same dye lot. E. Coordinate Work of this Section to interface with Work of other trades. ' 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction concerning use of materials with Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs). 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rugs Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and Handling." B. Deliver materials in original unbroken mill wrapping, with manufacturer's register number I labels intact. Labels to include identification of manufacturer, brand name and lot number. C. Store in an area protected from weather and damage in a well - ventilated area. I 1. Lay flat, with continuous blocking off ground; do not store rolls on end. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2: "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof, nominally dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until concrete has cured and is sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by carpet manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture tests. 1. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Maximum moisture emission rate of 3 lb of water /1000 1 sq. ft. in 24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in accordance with ASTM F 1869, unless otherwise recommended by flooring manufacturer for specific products. 2. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range or 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is applied. 3. Conduct tests by an independent testing agency, engaged by the Owner, under provisions of Section 01 4500. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field verify dimensions prior to installation; If differing significantly from Drawings, or approved Shop Drawings, obtain Architect's approval before proceeding. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I II Fanno Creek Place Carpeting: 09 6800 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 1.8 WARRANTY I A. Provide the following warranties: 1. 5 year warranty that carpet shall maintain specified limits of static electricity I 2. generating. 10 year warranty that carpet shall not lose more than 10 percent of face fiber by weight. I 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Carpet: Full -width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type, color and pattern indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. . I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET I A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each designation in the Carpet Schedule at the end of PART 3. I 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. I B. Leveling and Patching Compounds: 1. Ardex SD -P Instant Patch or Ardex SD -F Feather Finish, as applicable, MI 2. Armstrong Latex Underlayment S -183 or S -184 as applicable. C. Adhesives: Water- resistant, mildew- resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor I conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. 1. Products: Use W. W. Henry Company "Henry GreenLine GL 62 High Performance I Carpet Adhesive" for low emissions and odor. D. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt adhesive tape recommended by carpet manufacturer. I E. Resilient Edge Strips: Product types to suit application specified in Section 09 6513, of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. F. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum type products to suit application, of maximum lengths I to minimize running joints. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and surface conditions for compliance with requirements for installation I tolerance, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete floor slabs comply with ASTM F 710. 2. Verify that concrete floor slabs are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, I hardeners, foreign deposits, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. 3. Verify that concrete slabs have cured for minimum of 28 days prior to application of resilient floor coverings. Ill 11 LRS Architects, Inc. Carpeting: Fanno Creek Place rp : 09 6800 9 October 12, 2006 Page 4 4. Verify moisture vapor emission tests have been performed for concrete substrates. 5. Verify that concrete floor slab finish complies with requirements specified in Section 03 3000 for concrete slabs receiving resilient floor coverings, and with warranty requirements of Vapor Emission Control System specified in Section 03 3000. 6. Verify that subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, and depressions, and that open joints have been filled. 7. Verify that substrate is smooth and level, with flatness not exceeding 3/16 inch in 10 ft., noncumulative, in all directions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's installation instructions for preparing substrates to receive carpet. 1. Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710. 2. Prepare concrete substrates in accordance with warranty requirements of Vapor Emission Control System. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes and depressions in substrates, including open joints, and to align substrates with adjacent surfaces. 1. Build -up and feather out leveling compound a minimum of 4 feet from adjacent floor surfaces to achieve alignment of top of finish flooring surfaces. 2. Level subfloor to achieve flatness of 3/16 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative, in all directions. 3. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps and ridges. C. Remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible with resilient products, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9: "Direct Glue -Down Installation." 1. Install carpet only after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 2. Install carpet with pile inclination in one direction. 3. Scribe carpet accurately at edge and fit neatly into breaks and recesses, against bases, around pipes and penetrations, under saddles and thresholds, and around permanent cabinets and equipment. 4. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open- bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves and similar openings. 5. Align lines of carpet pile, as woven, using no fill strips less than 6 inches wide, laying carpet pile and seams in same direction unless specifically directed otherwise by Architect. 6. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 7. Bind cut edges where not concealed by protective guards or overlapping edges. B. Seams: 1. Minimize numbers of seams, and locate where shown in Drawings, approved Shop Drawings, or where specifically approved by Architect. 2. Locate seams to minimize number of seams, and to maximum extent possible, out of way of traffic and in direction of traffic. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Carpeting: 09 6800 I October 12, 2006 Page 5 3. Fabricate seams by compression method, using a butt joint, and properly bead and seal. I 4. Do not stretch seams. 5. Match carpet pattern at seams. 6. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. I C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of finished carpet tile floor, install carpet tile before installation of these items. I 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: I 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face - beater element. I B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." I C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by carpet manufacturer. I 1. Provide heavy non - staining paper or plastic walkways over carpeting in direction of traffic, maintaining intact in carpeted space until Substantial Completion. 3.5 CARPET SCHEDULE PI A. Carpet CPT -1: Where this designation is indicated, provide carpet complying with the following: I1. Manufacturer: Invision. 2. Style: Floored. • 3. Color /pattern: 32.18.121.159. I B. Carpet CPT -2: Where this designation is indicated, provide carpet complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer: Invision. 2. Style: Earth. 3. Color /pattern: W032 Thermal. C. Carpet CPT -3: Where this designation is indicated, provide carpet complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer: Van Dijk. 2. Style: Protect Super. 3. Color /pattern: 61. D. Resilient Accessory Moldings and Wall Base: As specified in Section 09 9613, Resilient Base I and Accessories. I END OF SECTION I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Acoustic Insulation and Sealant: 09 8110 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustic insulation and sealant. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 2100: Building Insulation, for thermal insulation. 2. Section 07 8443: Fire - Resistant Joint Firestopping, for fire- resistant sealant. 3. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for installation of acoustic insulation and sealant in metal stud wall framing and gypsum board assemblies. 4. Section 09 2117: Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies, for installation of acoustic I 4. insulation in shaft -wall assemblies. Section 09 5100: Acoustical Ceilings, for installation of acoustical insulation over suspended ceiling panels. 1.2 PRODUCTS SPECIFIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Acoustic blanket insulation and acoustic sealant in partitions installed under provisions of Section 09 2116, Gypsum Board Assemblies, and 09 2117, Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies. B. Acoustic sealant at suspension systems for acoustical panel ceilings installed under provisions of Section 09 5100, Acoustical Ceilings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide with material of this Section a continuous acoustic barrier at interior partitions where indicated in the Drawings when used in conjunction with materials specified in Section 09 2116, Gypsum Board Assemblies and 09 2117, Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Certified test reports showing compliance with required fire performance values. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use workers who are trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. I 1. 2. Flame Spread: No greater than 25. Smoke Developed: No greater than 50. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. B. Store inside and in a dry location. C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. LRS Architects, Inc. Insulation Fanno Creek Place Acoustic and Sealant: 09 8 110 October 12, 2006 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTIC INSULATION A. ASTM C 665, Type I, preformed glass -fiber or mineral wool type, unfaced; minimum 3/4 to 1 lb/cu ft. density. B. Acceptable Products: I 1. Owens Corning: Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation. 2. Johns Manville: Sound Control Batts. 3. United'States Gypsum: Attenuation Blanket. C. Minimum Thickness: 3 inches in walls, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 ACOUSTIC SEALANT A. Exposed and Concealed Joints: ASTM C 834; nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant • that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission as demonstrated by testing assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Chem Inc., Contech Brands; PL Acoustical Sealant. 2. Pecora; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. 3. U.S. Gypsum; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. B. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic I rubber sealant for sealing jkoint to reduce airborne sound transmission. 1. Miracle; 21. 2. Pecora; BA 98 Acoustical Sealant. 3. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 09 2116 and 09 2117 for installation of blanket acoustic insulation and acoustical sealant in partitions. B. Refer to Section 09 5100 for installation of acoustic sealant at suspended ceilings. I END OF SECTION I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Fanno Creek Place Painting: 09 9000 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL II 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of paints and coatings. I B. Related Sections: 1. Sections where factory preparation, priming, or priming and finishing, of painted or I finished surfaces is specified. 2. Section 07 1900: Water - repellent. 3. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for substrate. 4. Section 09 2117: Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies, for substrate. I 5. 6. Division 22: Plumbing, for painting of plumbing work. Division 23: Heating Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for painting of HVAC work. 7. Division 26: Electrical, for painting of electrical work. I 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and I inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, and duct shafts. B. Metal surfaces of anodized or painted aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, I bronze, and similar finished materials shall not require painting under this Section, unless otherwise noted. C. Do not paint moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve IIIII operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts. D. Do not paint required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. I E. Do not paint gypsum board walls above suspended ceilings. I 1.3 REFERENCES A. The Master Painters Institute (MPI): Approved Product List, Latest Edition. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint ", as included herein, means coating, systems materials including primers, emulsions, epoxy, stained enamels, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as primer, I intermediate, or finish coats. B. Gloss /Sheen Parameter (Reflectance based off 60 degree angle reading) based on MPI (Master Painters Institute): I 1. Gloss Level 1: Maximum 5 units. Flat matte finish 2. Gloss Level 2: Maximum 10 units Flat, high side sheen; velvet -like finish 3. Gloss Level 3: 10 -25 units Eggshell -like finish 4. Gloss Level 4: 20 -35 units Satin -like finish 5. Gloss Level 5: 35 70 units Semi -gloss 6. Gloss Level 6: 70 -85 units Gloss I 7. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units High gloss I I LRS Architects, Inc. : 09 9000 Fanno Creek Place Painting: October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Materials list of required coating materials. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number, general classification, and cross - reference with finish system and application. 2. Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. B. Samples: ' 1. Stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, of each color and material to be applied. a. Provide three Samples of each drawdown, approximately 8 x 10 inches in size, each marked with specified color designation. b. If requested by Architect, submit samples during construction representative samples of the actual substrate. 2. Revise and resubmit Samples as requested until required sheen, color, and texture is achieved. Approved Samples become standards of color and finish for accepting or rejecting Work of this Section. 3. Do not commence painting until approved Samples are on file at job site. C. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workers who are trained and experienced in crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Provide Work in conformance with recommendations in the "Architectural Painting I Specification Manual" by The Master Painters Institute (MPI). C. Mock -up: Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project, where directed by Architect, and where permanent lighting has been activated. 1. Walls and Ceilings: Provide samples on a minimum of 100 sq. ft. 2. Doors and Frames: One door and frame at exterior steel and interior locations. 3. Approved mock -ups will be used as standard for Work of this Section. 4. Approved mock -ups may be used as part of the finished Work. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with legible labels intact. I B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well - ventilated area at a minimum temperature of 45 degrees F. I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Painting: 09 9000 October 12, 2006 Page 3 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F. B. Apply solvent- thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and I surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F. C. Use low temperature paint products equal to specified products, as approved, for applications ' when air temperatures are below 50 degrees F. D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces. I 1. Applications may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer as being suitable during application and drying periods. I 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish and deliver to the Owner extra paint materials from the same production run as the I A. materials applied equaling 5 percent, but not less than one gallon or more than 5 gallons, of each material, color, and gloss applied. I 1. Package paint materials in unopened, factory- sealed containers for storage, clearly labeled describing contents and location where used. PART 2 PRODUCTS . III 2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed in the Paint Schedule at the I end of Part 3. Selection of paint products listed are based on the following: 1. Products listed in the MPI (Master Painters Institute) Approved Product List, latest I edition. 2. Low VOC content. B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500, and the following: 1 1. Products are listed in the MPI (Master Painters Institute) Approved Product List, latest edition, have low VOC, and comply with quality requirements of those specified. Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500 with paint manufacturers I evidence that proposed substitution is equal or superior to product listed. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL I A. Material Compatibility: Provide fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. I B. Undercoats and Thinners: 1. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coat. I 2. Use only thinners recommended by paint manufacturer, and use only to recommended limits. 3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a unified system of paint finish, except where material is factory primed. LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Painting: 09 9000 October 12, 2006 Page 4 4. Where accent colors are scheduled or indicated, provide appropriate and sufficient I undercoats accordingly. C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations. I 2.3 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. For application of paint materials, use only such equipment as is recommended for i application of particular paint by manufacturer of that paint, and as approved by Architect. B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify proposed equipment is compatible with material to be applied, and integrity of finish will not be jeopardized by use of proposed equipment. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials required for a complete and proper installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not proceed with application of paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are receiving paint are thoroughly dry. ' B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. 1. Provide barrier coats over non - compatible primers, or remove primer and reprime as required to achieve compatibility with finish coatings. 2. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems using materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: , 1. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to painted. If removal is impractical or impossible, provide surface - applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. 2. After completion of painting operations in each space or area, reinstall removed items by using workers who are skilled in trades involved. B. Cleaning and Preparation: 1. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations for each substrate condition, and as specified. 2. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of low toxicity and flash point in excess of 200 degrees F, prior to start of mechanical cleaning. 111 3. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet painted surfaces. • I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Painting: 09 9000 I October 12, 2006 Page 5 C. Preparation of Metal Surfaces: I 1. Ungalvanized, Uncoated Surfaces: Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease, and loose mill scale. I a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment l wash coat before priming. 2. Ungalvanized, Coated Surfaces: Clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease, and touch up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been damaged. I 3. Touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. Galvanized surfaces: Remove oil and surface contaminants with nonpetroleum -based solvents. Use mechanical methods to remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock. I D. Materials Preparation: I I. Mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. 2. When materials are not in use, store in tightly covered containers. 3. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue. I 4. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density. a. Do not stir surface film into material; remove surface film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply paint materials in accordance with manufacturers and referenced standard's recommended installation procedures. I 2. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide a lighter shade in each undercoat to distinguish each separate coat. 3. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to unaided eye from a distance of five feet. 4. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint backsides to match exposed faces. 5. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 6. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch up painted. 7. Apply additional coats where undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the I final coat of paint, until paint finish is uniform in color, appearance, and opacity. B. Drying: 1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying period as recommended by material manufacturer to suit weather conditions. 2. Consider oil -base and oleo- resinous solvent -type paint as dry for recoating when paint I feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of thumb, and when application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of undercoat. I I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Painting: 09 9000 October 12, 2006 Page 6 C. Brush Applications: 1. Brush out and work brush coats onto surface in an even film. 2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, and other surface imperfections to be repaired. D. Spray Application: 1. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide hiding equivalent of brush coats. 2. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass. E. For completed Work, match approved Samples as to texture, color, sheen. 1. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. F. Minimum Coating Thickness: Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system specified, but in no case less than recommended by the manufacturer. G. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures: 1. Exposed Mechanical Items: i a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, plug mold, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents, and items of similar nature to match the adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces in finished spaces. b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers, and grilles flat black. c. Wash galvanized metal with solvent, prime, and apply 2 coats of specified enamel. 2. Hardware: a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces. b. Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb seals, and astragal seals to match color of door frame, unless otherwise directed by Architect. 3. Wet Areas (Toilet Rooms, Showers, Kitchens, Janitors, and the Like): , a. Add an approved fungicide to paint. b. For oil base paints, use 1 percent phenylmercuric or 4 percent tetrachlorophenol. c. For water emulsion and glue size -sized surfaces, use 4 percent sodium tetrachloropenate. 4. Exposed Vents: Apply two coats of heat - resistant paint. 5. Plywood at Walls for Mounting Electric, Telephone and Data Equipment: Paint gray or blue as directed by Owner. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. The Owner reserves the right to engage an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being applied, and test for minimum coating thickness. B. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Painting: 09 9000 ' October 12, 2006 Page 7 C. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specification requirements. ' 1. The Contractor shall pay for testing, and repaint surfaces found to be coated with noncomplying paints. If the noncomplying paints are incompatible with specified paints, the Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from painted surfaces. 3.5 CLEANING 1 A. Remove from the site each day, empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded refuse created by Work of this Section, and dispose of in a legal manner. 1 1 . 2. Do not dump waste materials, including thinners, on site. Do not use sanitary or storm drains. ' 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect Work of other trades against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs at newly painted finishes. C. Touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces caused by other trades. 1 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Provide minimum dry mil thickness of 4.5 mils, but in no case Tess than recommended by paint manufacturer, or as otherwise noted. B. Provide•gloss /sheen indicated in this schedule unless otherwise indicated in Color Schedule. ' C. Use low temperature paint products equal to specified products, as approved, for applications when air temperatures are below 50 degrees F. ' D. Exterior paint products listed are assumed to have a VOC content not exceeding 200. Other acceptable products are those that comply with that criteria and are listed by MPI. E. Primer: Ferrous Metal: 1 1. First Coat: Rust Inhibitive Primer (Water Based) - Reference MPI #107. Benjamin Moore: Acrylic Metal Primer M04. ICI Dulux: Devflex DTM Flat Interior /Exterior W.B. Primer 4020. Kelly- Moore: DTM Acrylic Metal Primer 5725. Miller Paint Co: Acrimetal Primer — Finish White 5000. Sherwin Williams: DTM Acrylic Primer /Finish B66W1. • 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Painting: 09 9000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 8 F. Primer and Pretreatment: Galvanized Metal: 1. Pretreatment (Metal Conditioner): Clean and acid etch. Keeler and Long 6235. Oakite 33. Porter Prep 99. ZRC Metal Conditioner. 2. First Coat: Galvanized Primer (Water Based) - Reference MPI #134. Benjamin Moore: Alkyd Metal Primer M04. 1 ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings Devflex WB DTM Primer Finish 4020. Kelly- Moore: KeI -Guard Galvanized Iron Primer 1725. Miller Paint Co: Acrimetal Primer - Finish White 5000. G. Primer: Aluminum — Mill Finish: 1. First Coat: Vinyl Wash Primer - Reference MPI #80 (no VOC criteria required) 1 Miller Paint Co: Vinyl Wash Coat Primer 9172. • PPG: Polyclutch Vinyl Wash Primer 97- 687/688 Series. Rodda Paint Co: Professional Maintenance Vinyl Wash Coat 709700X. Sherwin Williams: DTM Wash Primer B71Y1* H. Finish Coats: Ferrous and Galvanized Metals: 1 1. Second and Third Coats: Exterior Latex Semi -Gloss - Reference MPI #11. ICI Dulux: Ultra -Hide Durus Exterior Acrylic Semi -Gloss 2416 -0110. Kelly- Moore: Acry- Lustre Exterior Semi -Gloss Acrylic Finish 1250 -121. Rodda Paint Co: Unique II Semi -Gloss Exterior Latex Enamel 54 2001 1. Sherwin Williams: A -100 Exterior Gloss Latex A8W16. ' 2. MPI Gloss Level 5: Semi - Gloss; gloss of 35 -70 units at 60 degrees. System for Brick - Transparent Finish: 1 1. Water repellent coating specified in Section 07 1900. J. System for Tilt -Up Concrete — Elastomeric Coating specified in Section 09 9653. 1 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Provide minimum dry mil thickness of 4.5 mils, but in no case less than recommended by paint Manufacturer, or as otherwise noted. B. Provide gloss /sheen indicated in this schedule unless otherwise shown in Color Schedule. C. Interior paint products listed are assumed to have a VOC content not exceeding 150. Other acceptable products are those that comply with that criteria and are listed by MPI. D. Primer: Wood - Opaque Finish: 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Painting: 09 9000 ' October 12, 2006 Page 9 E. Primer: Gypsum Board: 1 1. First coat: Interior Latex Primer Sealer - Reference MPI #50. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Undercoater & Primer Sealer 253 -00. ICI Dulux: Ultra -Hide PVA Interior Primer - Sealer 1030 -1200. Kelly- Moore: Enviro -Cote Interior Latex Primer 1505. Miller Paint Co:'SuperSeal Acrylic Primer 9607. PPG: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer 6 -2. Rodda Paint Co: Scotseal Heavy Bodied Latex Sealer 50 7801 1. Sherwin Williams: PrepRite 400 Interior Latex Primer B28W400. F. Primer: Ferrous Metal: Same as specified for exterior applications. ' G. Finish Coats: Gypsum Board - Dry Areas: (Acrylic) 1. Second and Third Coats: Interior Latex Eggshell - Reference MPI #52 Benjamin Moore: Architectural Coatings Regal Aquavelvet 319 -01. Kelly- Moore: Dura -Poxy 100% Eggshell Acrylic Enamel 1686 -121. ' Miller Paint Co: MPI #52 'Eggshell -Like' MPI #52. PPG: Satin Latex Interior Acrylic 6 -3511. Sherwin Williams: MPI 52 Gloss level 3 Interior Latex Eg -Shel B20W8521. ' 2. MPI Gloss Level 3: 'Eggshell -like' finish; gloss of 10 -25 units at 60 degrees. H. Finish Coats: Gypsum Board - Wet Areas, Ferrous Metals: (Acrylic) 1. Second and Third Coats: Interior Latex Semi -Gloss - Reference MPI #54 Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel 276 -01. ICI Dulux: Dulux Professional S.G. Wall and Trim Enamel 1406. ' Kelly- Moore: Enviro -Cote Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 1520. Miller Paint Co: Pro -Jex Semi -Gloss Latex 1680. PPG: Speedhide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex 6 -500. ' Rodda Paint Co: Master Painter Interior Latex Semi -Gloss 54 3101 1. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 400 Interior Latex Semi -Gloss B21 W451. 2. MPI Gloss Level 5: Semi - Gloss; gloss of 35 -70 units at 60 degrees. System for Wood - Lacquer Finish (Clear): 1. First Coat: Lacquer Sanding Sealer - Reference MPI #84. ' Dunn - Edwards: 550 Decolac Clear Sanding Sealer LQ 140 -0. Kelly- Moore: Kel -Lac Sanding Sealer 4183. Rodda Paint Co: Cat -A -Lac Sanding Sealer 706400x. 2. Second, Third, and Fourth Coats: Lacquer, Clear, Satin - Reference MPI #85. I Dunn - Edwards: 550 Decolac Satin LQ 144 -0. Kelly- Moore: Kel -Lac Lacquer 2184. Rodda Paint Co: Cat -A -Lac Precatalyzed - Semi -Gloss 746400X. Sherwin Williams: Sher -Wood Moisture Resistant Lacquer T70F22. I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Painting: 09 9000 October 12, 2006 Page 10 3.9 PAINT AND COLOR SCHEDULE I A. Provide gloss /sheen indicated in this schedule meeting parameters of gloss /sheen indicated I in Paragraph 1.4B, of products, or equivalent products, specified in Paint Schedules above. � B. Match the following colors and sheens: P -1 Miller Paint 8693M Stucco Greige I P -2 Miller Paint 8715D Moose Point P -3 Miller Paint 8681W Artist's Canvas P-4 To be selected. III P -5 Not Used P -6 Benjamin Moore OC -39 Timid White P -7 Miller Paint 8212W Millet I P -8 Miller Paint 8185D Ardmore Green P -9 Miller Paint 7756N Cockatoo Gold P -10 Miller Paint 8806N Tudor House P -11 Miller Paint 8266N Brazilian Brown I P -12 Miller Paint CW025W Restoration P -13 Miller Paint 8214M Tobacco Road P -14 Miller Paint 7826A Ayers Rock END OF SECTION I • I M I I I • I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Elastomeric Coatings: 09 9653 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes elastomeric coatings on exterior cementitious surfaces. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 4712: Tilt -Up Concrete, for substrate. I 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each type of material and product specified. I 1. Include Material Safety Data Sheets for each product. B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples, in sizes illustrating range of colors and textures I available for each surface finishing product scheduled. C. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and I substrate conditions requiring special attention. D. Copy of proposed material and performance warranty. I E. Laboratory tests and data that validate product compliance with performance criteria specified. F. Documentation of applicator's qualifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with I minimum five years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum five years I documented experience and approved by manufacturer. . Field Supervision: 1 1. A technical representative of materials manufacturer shall periodically observe Work in progress for a minimum of 3 visits. 2. Notify manufacturer's technical representative, a minimum of 2 weeks before start of work. I 3. First visit by technical representative to occur prior to start of work for examination of preparation work and condition of substrates. a. Application of elastomeric coating without prior notice will not constitute I acceptance by manufacturer of waterproofing inspection and warranty procedure. D. Provide materials that are compatible with each other and acceptable by manufacturer to secure a single source warranty. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery products in original factory packaging bearing identification of product, manufacturer, batch number, and material expiration date. I LRS Architects, Inc. Elastomeric 09 9653 I Place Fanno Creek Pl c Coatings. 0 96 October 12, 2006 Page 2 B. Store products in a location protected from freezing, damage, construction activity, I precipitation and direct sunlight in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations C. Handle products with Appropriate Precautions and care as stated on Material Safety Data I Sheet. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Do not apply products during precipitation or freezing weather, or when such conditions are predicted. B. Do not apply when either ambient or surface temperature is 40 degrees F or below, or when I relative humidity is in excess of 90 percent. C. Use appropriate measures for protection and supplementary heating to ensure curing I conditions are in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Protect Adjacent Work from contamination due to mixing, handling, and application of preparation and repair products and elastomeric coating. 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Install cap flashing a minimum of 1 week before application of elastomeric coating. I • 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide 5 Year material warranty. I 1. Include coverage for coating failing to resist penetration of water. iii. • B. Applicator's Warranty: Provide 5 Year labor warranty PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer /Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I 1. Benjamin Moore: Moorlastic Acrylic Elastomeric Waterproof Coating Low Lustre 055. 2. ChemRex Inc., Sonneborn: Colorflex SW -332. 3. ChemRex Inc., Thoro: Thorolastic TH -140. I 4. Kelly- Moore: Kel -Seal Ter Polymer 100% Acrylic Elastomeric 1128. 5. Miller Paint Co.: Milastic Elastomeric Coating 8800. 6. Rodda Paint: Super Roflex Acrylic Elastomeric Coating 51 1301 1. 7. Sherwin Williams: Sherlastic A5W151. B. Provide primers, sealers and block fillers as recommended by elastomeric coating manufacturer to suit application. III 2.2 MATERIALS A. 100 percent acrylic polymer emulsion type; elastomeric, high build waterproof coating. I B. Finish Colors and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. C. Primers and Sealers: As recommended by coating manufacturer. I D. Patching Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer. I LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Elastomeric Coatings: 09 9653 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Examine conditions under which work of this Section will be performed, and verify acceptability of conditions with manufacturer's technical representative prior to start of Work. 1. Inspect expansion joints for deteriorated sealant, adhesion loss. I 2. 3. Inspect sealing of through wall penetrations. Inspect flashing, including cap roof flashing and verify a water tight seal. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive coating. B. Verify that all surfaces are solid, sound, and cured. I C. Verify that surfaces are dry, clean and free of mildew, fungus, organic material, dust, dirt, oil and grease. Seal open cracks and joints in accordance with elastomeric coating I manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Pressure wash concrete substrates at minimum 2100 psi. I D. Fill hairline cracks with coating prior to application of overall coating. E. Confirm acceptance of preparatory work by manufacturer's representative prior to proceeding with application of elastomeric coating. in 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of I warranty. 1. Apply elastomeric coating only to smooth, dry substrates; I 2. Do not apply elastomeric coating until concrete substrate has cured for a minimum of 28 days. 3. Apply primer, sealer or block filler as recommended by coating manufacturer. 4. Apply in two coats as recommended by manufacturer. I 5. Apply to a minimum total dry film thickness of 12 mils. B. Apply coating in uniform texture throughout and free of runs and sags. I C. Cut or mask all edges clean and sharp with no overlap. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Manufacturer's Field Service: 1. Manufacturer's Representative will inspect finished surface preparation, application, I - and finished coating and may require further preparation or application to achieve appropriate result. B. Inspect finished surfaces and touch -up or refinish rejected Work. I C. Owner's representative may conduct film thickness tests to determine dry film thickness. 1. Recoat work not conforming to specified dry mil thickness. t I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Elastomeric ' o Creek Place c Coatings. 09 965 3 October 12, 2006 Page 4 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Carefully remove spatterings from adjoining Work and repair all damage caused by cleaning , operations. B. Protect applied coatings from damage by other construction operations. I END OF SECTION I 1 1 r I I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Fanno Creek Place Signage: 10 1440 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Post mounted disabled parking signs. 2. Code required interior room identification signs. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000: Cast -in -Place Concrete, for post mounted disabled parking sign footings. I 2. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for metal wall framing and gypsum 3. Section 32 1724: Painted Pavement Markings 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign, and mounting heights. I 1. Provide message list for each sign. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of post mounted signs. I B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation template and attachment devices. C. Samples: Provide the following samples for each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture. 1. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's color charts in actual I sections of material including full range of colors available. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation template and attachment devices. I 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. I B. For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a single manufacturer. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Comply with The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and State Building Code for accessibility recommendations and requirements for the physically disabled. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 POST MOUNTED DISABLED PARKING SIGNS 1 A. Provide metal disabled parking signs with night reflective surfacing, with the international symbol of accessibility and letters on sign that state "Disabled Parking." I 1. Sign size shall have a width -to- height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1, and a stroke width - to- height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. B. Provide color contrasting characters and symbols with light characters on dark background. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Signage: 10 4 14 0 October 12, 2006 Page 2 C. Mount signs on a galvanized metal support pole at minimum height of 4' -6" above concrete sidewalk. 1. Verify height with local jurisdiction. D. Accessories: Mounting Hardware; galvanized screws and anchor bolts. ' 2.2 CODE COMPLIANT SIGNS A. Type: Manufacturer's standard tactile signage series, employing Manufacturer's graphic blast process. B. Materials: Manufacturer's standard ES plastic high - pressure laminate. 1/8 inch thick, fire- retardant, self- extinguishing. C. Style: Signs shall be of the four -in -one construction style having the following characteristics: 1. Tactile Characters /Symbols: Raised 1/32 inch from sign plate face. 2. Grade 2 Braille. 3. Provide letters, numbers, symbols, and Braille contrasting with their background, and in compliance with Chapters 10 and 11 of the State Building Code based on 2003 International Building Code. D. Lettering Style: Helvetica Medium, uppercase. E. Lettering Size: Comply with Chapter 10 of the State Building Code based on 2003 International Building Code. • F. Layout: Center lettering on sign face with Braille message below. G. Size: Vary sign size with regard to message. Provide a 1 inch wide border on all sides of message area. H. Mounting: 1. Attach to wall surface with Manufacturer's standard general purpose adhesive. 2. Height: Mount signs at 60 inches above finished floor to centerline of sign. a. Verify height with local jurisdiction. 3. Location: a. Single -Swing Doors: Sign edge 6 inch from strike jamb. b. Double -Swing Doors: Sign edge 6 inch from right -hand jamb. c. No Door: As directed by Architect. Signs: 1. Toilet Room Identification Signage: Self adhering black plastic sign with white international symbol for male and female, of same size, type, and color as room sign. 2. Provide code required signs at all locations in compliance with Chapters 10 and 11 of • the State Building Code based on 2003 International Building Code. • 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Signage: 10 1440 ' October 12, 2006 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. ' B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in compliance with The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). B. Install signs after doors and wall surfaces are finished, in locations indicated. C. Center parking signs on parking space. 1 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of signs. 1 END OF SECTION I I I 1 I 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Metal Toilet Compartments: 10 2113 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes metal toilet compartments: 1. Compartment Style: Floor mounted, overhead braced. B. Related Sections: i 1. Section 09 2600: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for wall framing, blocking and support backing. 2. Section 10 8100: Toilet Accessories, for toilet accessories mounted in Work of this ' Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, for each type and style of toilet compartment and urinal screen specified. 1. Include details of construction details, material description, fabrication, and installation ' 2. requirements. Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings. B. Shop Drawings, showing fabrication and dimensional installation of toilet compartment assemblies. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment- mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show layout of toilet compartments in relationship to entire room including fixtures and counters. ' a. Show and indicate that clearances to walls and fixtures are in compliance with Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for Accessibility. ' C. Samples: Of each compartment color and finish required, prepared on 6- inch - square Samples of same thickness and material indicated. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. B. Comply with requirements in CID -A -A- 60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. • 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Metal Toilet Compartments: 10 2113 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceiling, and other construction in areas of installation .• by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made before fabrication without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and coordinate wall, floor, ceiling and other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades I for interface with work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS, , 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following: 1 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 3. Global Steel Products Corp. 4. Knickerbocker Paritions Corp. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 1 2.2 MATERIALS A. Baked - Enamel Units: Facing sheets and closures fabricated from ASTM A 591, 80 oz. electrolytically zinc - coated or ASTM A 653 hot -dip galvanized or galvannealed, commercial steel sheet for exposed applications, that is mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness. 1. Steel: Cold rolled, Stretcher - leveled steel, minimum base -metal (uncoated) facing ' sheet thicknesses as follows: • a. Panels: 0.0269 inch. . b. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: 0.0329 inch. c. Door Panels: 0.0269 inch. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard pigmented, organic coating, including thermosetting, electrostatically applied, and powder coatings. a. Colors: Selected from manufacturer's standard range. B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edge closures. Seal corners by welding or clips. Grind exposed welds smooth. 1. Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness with exposed surfaces free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other unacceptable imperfections. 2. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound - deadening honeycomb of resin - impregnated kraft paper. 3. Door and Panel Thickness: 1 inch. 4. Pilaster Thickness: 1 -1/4 inches. 5. Grab Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. • 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Fanno Creek Place Metal Toilet Compartments: 10 2113 October 12, 2006 Page 3 6. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. I C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeve Caps: Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not less than 0.0312 inch thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. I D. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Compartment Panels: Stirrup type ear or U- brackets, chrome - plated or zamac. 111 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment- mounted I hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated B. Floor Mounted, Overhead Braced Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor I conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. C. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24- inch -wide in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments, and 36- inch -wide out - swinging doors with a minimum 32- inch -wide clear opening for disabled accessible compartments. I 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self - closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Slide bar latch with combination stop and latch keeper, designed for emergency access and complying with disabled accessibility requirements. I 3. Coat Hook: Combination hook and rubber - tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment- mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber - tipped bumpers at out - swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Comply with accessibility requirements at out - swinging doors. Provide I units on both sides of doors at disabled accessible compartments. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 , EXAMINATION A. Verify areas and conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. I B. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION I A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and requirements Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for Accessibility. 1 B. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. I C. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. D. Secure compartment panels to walls and panels with not less than three brackets attached at I midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. I LRS Architects, Inc. i Fanno Creek Place Metal Toilet Compartments: 10 2113 October 12, 2006 Page 4 E. Floor Anchored Overhead Braced Compartments: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten. 1. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. 1 F. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. I 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturers written instructions for proper operation. B. Set hinges on in- swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. C. Set hinges on out - swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION I I I 1 1 1 1 I I r LRS Architects, Inc. i I Fanno Creek Place Toilet Accessories: .10 2813 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes toilet room accessories. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for metal blocking and support backing I 2. for wall mounted accessories. Section 10 2113: Metal Toilet Compartments, for mounting reinforcement in toilet compartments for accessories. I 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: I 1. 2. Construction details and dimensions. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 1 4. Features that will be included in Project. 5. Manufacturer's.warranty. I B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. C. Maintenance Data: For toilet accessories to include in maintenance manuals. I 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. 1. Grab Bars: I a. Comply with structural strength requirements for grab bars and mounting of grab bar fasteners as stated in Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. b. Coordinate placement of wall reinforcement for grab bars of sufficient length I to meet the above requirements and capable of supporting at least a 250 pound point load. 1 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with placement of internal wall reinforcement, and reinforcement of toilet partitions I to receive anchor attachments for work of this Section. B. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, I operation, cleaning and servicing of accessories. I I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place • Toilet Accessories: 10 2813 October 12, 2006 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the Schedule of toilet accessories at the end of PART 3, as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. I 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. 4. Gamco. 5. McKinney /Parker. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312 inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 1008, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359 inch I minimum nominal thickness. C. Tubing: ASTM A 269, stainless steel. I D. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel. Provide tamper and theft resistant where exposed. F. Expansion Shields: As recommended by manufacturer for suitable for application. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. ' 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish. 2.5 LOCKS AND KEYING A. Provide tumbler locks for all lockable access doors and panels. , B. Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of 6 keys to Owner. 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. 1 I Fanno Creek Place Toilet Accessories: 10 2813 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify location and placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement in toilet I partitions to receive anchor attachments for work of this Section. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. I 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for I accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. B. Install each item in its proper location, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to wall framing. I 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces. 3.4 SCHEDULE 1 A. Toilet Accessories: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. products are listed as standard: . 1. SC/TP /SN Toilet Seat Cover / Toilet Paper Dispenser / B -3574 Sanitary Napkin Receptacle I 2. SC/TP Toilet Seat Cover / Toilet Paper Dispenser B-3474 3. PTD/WR Paper Towel Dispenser / Waste Receptacle B -369 4. GB Grab Bars, bar lengths as shown B -5806 I Series 5. SD -1 Soap Dispenser B -8221 6. RH Robe Hook B -6717 7. MH ,. Surface mounted stainless steel mop and broom B -223 I holder x 24 END OF SECTION I I I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 Fanno Creek Place Fire Protection Specialties: 10 4400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Cabinets for fire extinguishers. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies, for metal stud wall framing, wall finishes, blocking and support backing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, for each type product and accessory specified or required. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Include rough -in dimensions, mounting methods, trim style, door hardware, cabinet type, and panel style. B. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance. manuals. . 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Provide extinguishers, cabinets and accessories from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Provide fire extinguishers that are UL listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification, or other independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Fire -Rated Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire - resistance rating of walls where they are indicated. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interfacing with work of this Section. B. Coordinate size of fire extinguisher cabinets to ensure they are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in Manufacturer's original containers with original labels intact I and legible. B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. I I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place p a Fire Protection Specialties: 10 4400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS I A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following: 1. J.L. Industries. 2. Larsen Manufacturing. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS I A. General: Provide extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire extinguisher cabinet and at other locations indicated. B. Mounted in Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (FEC): 1. Multi- Purpose Dry Chemical Type in Steel Container: U.L. rating: 2A -10BC. 2. Capacity: 5 lbs. 3. Color: Red. 4. Mounting: One per cabinet. I C. Surface Mounted on Brackets (FE): 1. Regular dry chemical: U.L. rating: 80B. 2. Color: Red. 3. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard bracket. 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS I A. Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, fire extinguisher mounting bracket, and hardware to suit cabinet indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 1 B. Non -Fire rated Cabinet: 1. J.L. Industries Semi- recessed: Ambassador No. 1817F12 I 2. Larsen Manufacturing Co. Semi - recessed: Architectural Series No. 2409 -R3. C. Fire -rated Cabinet: UL listed with fire - resistive rating equal to that of wall assembly that cabinet is installed. 1. J.L. Industries Semi - recessed: Ambassador No. 1817F12 FX 2. Larsen Manufacturing Co. Semi - recessed: Architectural Series No. FS 2409 -R3. D. Mounting: Semi - recessed, with 2 -1/2 inch rolled edge return trim. E. Materials: Steel cabinet with steel door. I 1. Door style: Full glass. 2. Door glazing: 1/4 inch clear acrylic. I F. Minimum inside cabinet dimensions: 9 -1/2 inches wide by 24 inches high by 5 inches deep. F. Exterior and interior cabinet and door finish: Manufacturer's white, unless otherwise noted. I LRS Architects, Inc. , I .1 Fanno Creek Place Fire Protection Specialties: 10 4400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 2.4 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Manufacturer's standard steel, size as required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish. I 1. Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets, and on walls for extinguishers not located in cabinets. 2.5 STEEL FINISHES I A. Factory Applied Baked Enamel Finish: Two -coat, baked - enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Verify walls and partitions have suitable framing depth and blocking where cabinets or wall brackets will be installed. B. For fire -rated walls with non -fire rated cabinets, verify recess is lined with gypsum board to I maintain fire - resistive rating. 3.2 , INSTALLATION I A. Install Work of this Section in accordance with regulations of governing authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. I B. Mount cabinets and wall brackets at height to comply with requirements of Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. C. Location: Refer to Drawings (Fire extinguisher cabinets are designated as "FEC "), or comply with requirements of NFPA 10. D. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. E. Apply sealant between cabinet flange and wall surface. I F. Fill and service each fire extinguisher prior to Date of Substantial Completion; attach certificate of service, including date. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION I A. Clean exposed surfaces and cabinet interiors. B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace cabinets that cannot be restored to factory finished I appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire extinguisher cabinet manufacturer. I END OF SECTION I I LRS Architects, Inc. I 1 . Fanno Creek Place Entrance Mats: 12 4813 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes exterior entrance floor mats with recessed frame and drain. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000: Cast -in -Place Concrete, for concrete recess to receive work of this I 2. Section. Section 22: Plumbing, for exterior mat recess drain piping and connection to storm system. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product specified in this Section. B. Manufacturers installation instructions. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS I A. Maintain installation area at 60 to 90 degrees F temperature and 30 to 60 percent relative humidity for 24 hours prior to and during installation of rubber carpet mats. I 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with work of Section 03 3000 for entrance mat recess in concrete. I B. Coordinate Work of this Section with work of Division 22 for piping of water drainage from mat recess. I 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard one year warranty against defective materials and labor on I manufacturer's standard form. P ART PRODUCTS I 2.1 ENTRANCE MATS AND FRAMES A. Manufacturer: Construction Specialties, Inc., or approved. I B. Product: PediTred LP, with level base frame and drain pan. 1. Tread Insert: Exterior Carpet, Color as selected by Architect. 2. Tread Spacing: 1 -1/2 inches. I 3. Rail /Frame Color: Clear anodize. 4. Tread Depth: 1/2 inch. 5. Base Frame: I a. Material: 6063 -T5 aluminum alloy. b. Depth: 3/4 inches. I 5. Recess Depth: 13/16 inches; verify with manufacturer. 6. Drain Pan: 16 gage aluminum, waterproof construction with 2 inch I.P.S. PVC drain and stainless steel strainer. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Entrance Mats: 12 4813 October 12, 2006 Page 2 • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify areas and conditions are ready to receive Work of this Section. 1. Verify recess in concrete is correctly sized to receive mat. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interface with work of this Section. B. Install work of this Section where shown on Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations. 1. Assemble and install mat recess frame during finishing operations of concrete slab, providing a uniform recess in slab to specified depths, with square corners as required for proper installation of entrance mat. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove protective coverings. ' B. Adjust mat for noiseless operation. C. Clean, and protect entrance mat from damage during remainder of construction period. I END OF SECTION • 1 /7 1 a I I 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. I t Fanno Creek Place Bicycle Racks: 12 9313 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes bicycle racks. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for mounting substrate. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's published product data, including installation instructions. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original containers, with labels intact and legible. B. Store above ground, under cover and protected from damage. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS t A. Subject to requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Brandir International 2. Columbia Cascade; Cycloops 3. Creative Pipe Inc. 4. Huntco 5. Life Rax 6. The Radius Bike Rake B. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Material: 2 -3/8 inches OD by 2 inch ID by 1.54 inch Wall, ASTM 53 Schedule 40, Steel Pipe. B. Mounting: Surface mount. C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory finish, color as selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install work of this Section in accordance with Drawings, and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces and repair as necessary. END OF SECTION LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Hydraulic Elevators 14 2400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Hydraulic elevator system; holeless type. 2. Passenger cars with doors and frames; hoistway entrance doors and frames. 3. Motors and pumps, controllers, hoistway equipment, and accessories. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000: Concrete, for concrete for elevator pit and grout for thresholds. I 2. 3. Section 05 1200: Structural Steel Framing, for hoistway framing. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications, for pit ladder and miscellaneous elevator support fabrications. 4. Section 09 2117: Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies, for elevator shaft enclosure. I 5. 6. Section 09 6800: Carpet, for car flooring. Division 22: Plumbing, for pit sump pump. 7. Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, for ventilation system. I 8. Division 26: Electrical, for lighting and power requirements, and conduits. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I A. Elevators No. 1 and No. 2 Functional Requirements: 1. Type: Passenger 2. Stops: 3 III 3. Rise: As shown 4. Rated Load: 3500 pound 5. Rated Speed: 125 FPM 6. Platform: 6' -8" wide x 5' -5" deep clear dimension inside car I 7. Ceiling Height: 7'-4" 8. Canopy Height: 8' -0" 9. Entrance Size: 3' -6" x 7' -0" I 10. Entrance Type: Double -leaf center opening 11. Power Supply: 3- phase, 60 hertz, alternating current 12. Pump Oil: "ISO 32" Environmentally friendly oil 13. Operation: "Group automatic operation" as defined in ASME A17.1 I B. Design Requirements: 1. Provide equipment to fit space and structural conditions shown. 1 2. Performance conforming to the following: a. Speed in the up direction not less than 95 percent or more than 110 percent I of specified speed; maximum down speed not greater than 133 percent of up speed. b. Car leveling within 1/8 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. I 3. Provide effective sound isolation of machines, equipment and drive systems from building structure to prevent noise transmission to public spaces and elevator car. Noise level not to exceed NC -35. I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Hydraulic Elevators 14 2400 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and catalog cuts or renderings of items exposed to public view and communication devices. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide complete erection drawings with plans, elevations, sections, and large -scale I details indicating service at each landing, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. 2. Provide plans and sections of hoistway, pit, and machinery spaces; indicate required clearances around equipment. 3. Include static and dynamic loads imposed on building structure, and details of sound isolation. 111 4. Provide machine room heat release, diversity factor and power requirements. 5. Provide communication wiring diagrams for connection of communication service in machine room. C. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by governing 1 authorities for normal, unrestricted elevator use. D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. E. Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Provide complete set of maintenance and operating instructions, including parts list, for elevator system. Assemble manuals for component parts into single binder and identify. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Oregon Elevator Specialty Code State Building Code and ANSI A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators," for manufacture and installation of elevator system, and elevator design requirements for earthquake loads in ASCE 7. B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. I 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and embedded anchors for elevator equipment. 1 1. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms. , 1.6 WARRANTY A. Guarantee installed equipment and devices against defects and faulty workmanship for one year after Owner acceptance. Repair or replace defective material. 1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of elevator system and components during warranty period. • I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Hydraulic Elevators 14 2400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS • I 2.1 MANUFACTURERS • A. Elevator System and Car Enclosure: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide I products manufactured by one of the following: 1. KONE Elevator Company. 2. Otis Elevator Company. l 3. Schindler Elevator Corporation. 4. ThyssenKrupp Elevator Corporation. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 2500. I 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems; components as published by manufacturer as included in standard pre- engineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system. I B. Pump Units: Positive - displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. 1. . Provide motor with solid -state wiring. I 2. 3. Provide variable - voltage variable- frequency motor control. Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation- absorbing material in a blowout -proof housing at pump unit. I C. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight of piping recommended by manufacturer, with flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. D. Inserts: Furnish required inserts and anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, I and other components of elevator work, which may be installed under work of other sections. E. Machine Beams: If required by elevator manufacturer, provide framing to support elevator I . hoisting machine and deflector sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Section 05 5000, Metal Fabrications, for materials and fabrication. F. Roller Guides: Provide roller guides at top and bottom of car and counterweights frames. I G. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. 2.3 FINISH MATERIALS I A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304, with No. 4 satin finish. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2 or Grade M -2 Exterior Glue, 45 pcf density, of grade I to suit application; sanded faces. C. Plastic Laminate: High - pressure type complying with NEMA LD3, HGS. I D. Sheet Steel: Cold- rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 366, with factory- applied rust - inhibitive primer. E. Rolled Steel Section, Shapes, Rods: ASTM A36. I F. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, extruded. I 111 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek P lace Hydraulic Elevators 14 2400 October 12, 2006 Page 4 2.4 FINISHES A. Machinery and equipment shall be degreased and shop painted with manufacturer's standard rust - inhibiting primer. Paint hoistway equipment black. B. Steel: Apply in shop, primer, and three coats of low sheen alkyd enamel; sand each coat smooth; color as selected. 1 C. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin finish with graining vertical, unless otherwise noted. D. Aluminum: Clear anodized. I E. Touch -up: Field touch -up abraded and damaged surfaces; use same paint as factory. 2.5 CONTROL SYSTEMS , A. Provide solid -state microprocessor control system to perform functions of elevator motion, car operation, group supervisory and door control. 1. Provide hardware to connect, transfer, interrupt power, and protect components from overloading. 2. Properly shield controller containing memory equipment from line pollution. 2.6 WIRING A. Copper conductors; flame- retardant, moisture -proof wire per National Electric Code. I B. Travel Cable: Provide adequate wire for all required controls plus one spare pair of shielded communication wire. C. Provide work light and receptacle on top of elevator car. 2.7 SIGNALS AND FIXTURES A. General: Satin stainless steel signal equipment with hall call and car call buttons that light when activated and remain it until call has been fulfilled. Manufacturer's standard design. 1. Push - Buttons: Manufacturer's standard push -button fixtures with buttons flush with parent surface. a. Push -button devices to incorporate solid state switching and illumination of floor number via integral LED's only. Mechanical contact type switches and illumination via miniature incandescent light bulbs are not acceptable. B. Car Control Stations: Mounted in return panel adjacent to car door to include the following: , 1. Braille- Arabic, raised characters in accordance with applicable codes, with back mounted mechanical fastenings; exposed fasteners, or decals not acceptable. Locate adjacent to the left of each public use button. 2. Floor indication buttons for each floor served. 3. Door open and door close buttons. 4. Emergency stop switch and emergency alarm per code. 5. Manufacturer's standard key switches for specific functions and operation. 6. Fireman's key switch and /or phone jack, if required, per code. 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I I Fanno Creek Place Hydraulic Elevators 14 2400 I October 12, 2006 Page 5 C. Emergency Communication System: Provide a two -way voice communication without using a handset system that complies with ASME A17.1 and Chapter 11 of the State of Oregon 1 Structural Specialties Code for accessibility requirements for the physically disabled. House system in flush - mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. ' 1. Provide wiring from machine room mounted controller to communications devices in elevator car, complete with hookup. I D. Car Position Indicator: Located above car door or control panel. E. Hall Push Button Fixtures: Locate at each landing for each group of elevators. I F. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows. G. Hall Position Indicators: Locate above each hoistway entrance at ground floor. I H. Designations: Provide in compliance with State Building Code and ADA requirements, on car operating panel and hoistway entrance frames. I 2.8 DOOR OPERATION A. Provide DC door operator to open and close car and hoistway doors quietly and smoothly; mount independently of car enclosure; manufacturer's standard for specified system. I B. Door Reopening Devices: 1. Provide door reopening with microprocessor controlled, infrared light beams I projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. In addition, equip elevator door with a mechanically actuated reversing safety edge. 2. Doors to remain in the open position for a predetermined interval unless the closing is I initiated by interruption of re- establishment of the light ray, by registration of a car call, or pushing the door close button. 3. Doors will be prevented from closing as long as either the light ray is interrupted or I the mechanical safety edge is activated. If the doors are closing and either the light ray or the mechanical safety edge is activated, the doors will stop and re -open. After an adjustable length of time, the doors will proceed to close. If the light ray device fails, means shall be provided to de- activate the system. I 4. Automatic Disable Feature: Should the photocell unit indicate an obstruction for an adjustable time period, a loud buzzer shall sound, and the self- contained control circuitry shall override and disable the sensing unit to allow door closure. 5. The mechanical safety edge will not be de- activated under any normal conditions. I 2.9 .ACCESSORIES A. Provide emergency light system utilizing normal car fixtures. B. Provide one set of pads in each car to cover wall and front return with cutouts for operating panel, and stainless steel pad hooks to support pads on side wall and returns. j 2.10 CAR ENCLOSURE, FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's standard for specified system. I B. Car Panels: Vertical panels faced on front and back and edged with plastic laminate. C. Front Return: Swing type, stainless steel, with operating buttons mounted integrally. LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Hydraulic Elevators 14 2400 October 12, 2006 Page 6 D. Ceiling Design: Suspended luminous translucent panels set in an aluminum frame with fluorescent light fixtures; Paint inside of canopy white. 1. Provide minimum of 15 foot - candles, measured 4 feet above car floor. E. Car Doors: Flush type hollow metal, stainless steel. *0 laei S tom_ �M a 1 F. Car Door Sill: Extruded Aluminum. Y� G. Ventilation: Single speed low velocity exhaust fan mounted on car top. I H. Handrails: No. 4 stainless steel, cylindrical on back wall only. Car Flooring: Carpet; refer to Section 09 6800. 1 2.11 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Hoistway Doors: Stainless steel. , B. Hoistway Frames: Stainless steel C. Provide steel still angles to adequately support sills. , PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive work and conditions under which work will be performed. B. Require conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work to be • remedied. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Verify dimensions before proceeding with work. Obtain field measurements for work , accurately fitted to other construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION I A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted 1 connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operations, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration isolating mounts designed to minimize structure borne noise from elevator system. C. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. D. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. i .' Fanno Creek Place Hydraulic Elevators 14 2400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 7 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1 A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use of elevators, either temporary or permanent, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. 1 1. Provide personnel, test instruments and equipment to make the following tests: a. Contract speed. I b. Vertical acceleration, deceleration. c. Leveling. d. Door operation. e. Motor Control, including full load test, starting, and shutdown. I f. Demonstration of all special operation functions. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION I A. Clean exposed surfaces. B. Protect finished surfaces until acceptance of the work. Replace damaged material. 1 3.6 TEMPORARY USE A. Do not use elevators for construction purposes prior to elevator acceptance by Owner unless I agreed to by elevator supplier and installer, cars are provided with temporary enclosures within finished cars, or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from damage, and construction use will not affect manufacturer's warranty for elevators. I B. Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent em ployees of the elevator installer for elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective I 1. components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. 2. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original I equipment. C. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevators. I 1. If elevators become damaged engage elevator installer to restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. 2. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs 1 and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION I A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to instruct Owner's personnel in proper use and maintenance of elevator system and equipment. I1. Review emergency provisions and procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. I 1 I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Hydraulic Elevators 14 2400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 8 3.8 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish maintenance and call back service as specified after elevator is completed and placed in operation. 1. Service shall consist of periodic examinations of the equipment, adjustments, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the equipment in proper operation. 2. All work shall be done by factory trained personnel. END OF SECTION 1 i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Common Results for Plumbing: 22 0500 ' October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping joining materials. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Sleeves. • 4. Identification devices. 5. Grout. • 6. Piping system common requirements. I 7. Equipment installation and common requirements. 8. Concrete bases. 9. Metal supports and anchorages. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings and identification devices. ' B. Welding certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. • Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." ' 1. 2. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. ' C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS l A. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. ' 1. ASME 816.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class. 125, cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full - face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. ' B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. • I WRG Design 1 Fanno Creek Place Common Results for Plumbing: 22 0500 October 12, 2006 Page 2 C. Plastic, Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water- flushable flux according to , ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for general duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: I 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 2.2 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. B. Dielectric Unions: ' 1. Description: Factory- fabricated, union, NPS 2 and smaller. a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig at 180 degrees F. ' b. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory- fabricated, bolted, companion - flange assembly, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 and larger. 1. Description: Factory- fabricated, union, NPS 2 and smaller. ' a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig b. End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder -joint copper alloy threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric Couplings: • 1. Description: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, NPS 3 and smaller. • a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 degrees F. ' b. End Connections: Threaded. WRG Design I Fanno Creek Place Common Results for Plumbing: 22 0500 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 E. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining. I a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 degrees F. b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved. 2.3 SLEEVES I A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. I B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain I ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. I E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. F. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth -outer surface with nailing flange I for attaching to wooden forms. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES I A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped. I 1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential' data. 2. Location: Accessible and visible. I B. Pressure - Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color- coded, pressure- sensitive vinyl type with permanent adhesive. - l C. Pipes with OD„ Including Insulation, Less Than 6 inches: Full -band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. .I D. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 inches and Larger: Either full -band or strip -type pipe markers, at least three times . letter height and of length required for label. E. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each I application length. 1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both I directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. I • I WRG Design I Fanno Creek Place Common Results for Plumbing: 22 0500 October 12, 2006 Page 4 F. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color- coded, pressure- sensitive, self- adhesive vinyl tape, at least 3mils thick. 1. Width: 1 -1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2 -1/2 1 inches for larger pipes. 2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. G. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2 inch sequenced numbers. Include 5/32 inch hole for fastener. • 1. Material: 0.032 inch thick, polished brass. 2. Material: 0.0375 inch thick stainless steel. 3. Material: 3/32 inch thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white inner layer. 4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic. 5. Size: 1 -1/2 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system. H. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire -link or beaded chain; or brass S- hooks. Engraved Plastic- Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper -base, phenolic- resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES -2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. 2. Thickness: 1/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/16 inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch for larger units. 3. • Fasteners: Self- tapping, stainless -steel screws or contact -type permanent adhesive. J. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color , codes: 1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above. 5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following: • a. Name and plan number. • b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. 7. Size: 2 -1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4 -1/2 by 6 inches for equipment. ' • I WRG Design I I 1 Fanno Creek Place Common Results for Plumbing: 22 0500 October 12, 2006 Page 5 2.5 GROUT I A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic- cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post - hardening, volume- adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, I nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28 -day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS 1 A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metal with the following: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric unions. I 2. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Dielectric flanges. B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metal with the following: I1. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Dielectric nipples. • I 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. I B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of . piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate I friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at I right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping to permit valve servicing. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. I F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. I I. Sleeves are not required for core- drilled holes. J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. I WRG Design i • Fanno Creek Place Common Results for Plumbing: 22 0500 October 12, 2006 Page 6 K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. , • a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. ' 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. 111 b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum -board partitions. L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. ' M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing -in requirements. 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before ' assembly. D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ■SME 81.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal 1 threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved -end pipe coupling with coupling housing, 1 gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. H. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water- flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. 1 Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper - phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. 1 WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Common Results for Plumbing: 22 0500 I October 12, 2006 Page 7 J. Plastic Piping Solvent - Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: I 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. . I 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other - than - schedule- number PVC I 5. pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. I L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. p M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. N. PE Piping Heat - Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. I 1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. I M. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. I 3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: I 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final I 3. connection to each piece of equipment. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION I A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated. I B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION I A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot noninsulated piping. I WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Common Results for Plumbing: 22 0500 October 12, 2006 Page 8 2. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following: I a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious. c. ar locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible enclosures. d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed, piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic - laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each , major item of equipment. 1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths of size of principal lettering. 2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions. 3.7 CONCRETE BASES ' A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. . 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy- coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000 psi, 28 -day compressive- strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Section 03 3000, Cast -In -Place Concrete. ' 3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES • A. Refer to Section 05 5000, Metal Fabrications, for structural steel. ' B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Common Results for Plumbing: 22 0500 t October 12, 2006 Page 9 3.9 GROUTING ' A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. ' F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 WRG Design I * Fenno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water- distribution piping and specialties outside the building for the I following: . • 1. Water services. 2. Fire- service mains. I 3. 4. • Combined water service and fire - service mains. Aboveground water piping for applications other than water - service piping. I 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: II. Valves and accessories. 2. Water meters and accessories. 3. Backflow preventers and assemblies. 4. Fire hydrants. I 5. Fire department connections. • B. . Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. I C. Field quality - control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following: 1. Water meters. 2. Valves. I 3. Backflow preventers. 4. Protective enclosures. 5. Hydrants. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: • I 1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. 2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable - water - service I piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. 3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire - suppression water - service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing. I B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. • C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in I NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. Comply with FM's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire- I service -main products. E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and I valve and hydrant supervision for fire - service -main piping for fire suppression. I WRG Design ' 11 Fanno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 October 12, 2006 Page 2 F. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable- water - service piping. Include marking 1 "NSF -pw" on piping. 2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water - service piping and specialties for - domestic water. • I 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless ' permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. I 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other PART 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following ' requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the ' manufacturers specified. 2. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS , A. Refer to PART 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2:3 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Mechanical- Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical - joint, bell- and plain- , spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Mechanical- Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray -iron glands, • rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. B. Push -on- Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint, bell- and plain- spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. ' 1. Push -on- Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C1.11, rubber. • 1 WRG Design 1 • Fanno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 ' October 12, 2006 Page 3 C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed ' temper. 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast - copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought- copper fittings if indicated. D. PE, ASTM Pipe: ASTM D 2239, SIDR Numbers 5.3, 7, or 9; with PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 200 psig. ' 1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, made of PA, PP, or PVC with serrated, male insert ends matching inside of pipe. Include bands or crimp rings. 2. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket- or butt- fusion type, made to ' match PE pipe dimensions and class. E. PVC, Schedule 40 Pipe: ASTM D 1785. 1. PVC, Schedule 40 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466. 1 F. PVC, Schedule 80 Pipe: ASTM D 1785. 1. PVC, Schedule 80 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467. G. PVC, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 200, with bell end with gasket and spigot end. 1. Comply with UL 1285 for fire - service mains if indicated. 2. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, Class 200, with bell- and - spigot or double -bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. ' 3. PVC Molded Fittings: AWWA C907, Class 150, with bell- and - spigot or double -bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. • ' 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for commonly used joining materials. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series. C. Soldering Flux: ASTM B 813, water- flushable type. D. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, lead -free type with 0.20 percent maximum lead content. E. Plastic Pipe - Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES ' A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. ' B. Tubular - Sleeve Pipe Couplings. 1. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping ' to be joined. a. Standard: AWWA C219. WRG Design • Water Distribution: 22 1100 I Fanno Creek Place at October 12, 2006 Page 4 - • 2.6 GATE VALVES • ' A. AWWA, Cast -Iron, Gate Valves: I 1. Manufacturers: a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. ' b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. c. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. I f. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. g. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). h. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. I i. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe; Utilities Div. j. NIBCO INC. k. United States Pipe and Foundry Company. 2. Nonrising - Stem, Metal- Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C500, gray- or ductile -iron body and bonnet; with cast -iron or bronze double -disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut. I a. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig. b. End Connections: Mechanical joint. c: Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. I • 3. Nonrising -Stem, Resilient- Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C509, gray- or ductile -iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile -iron gate, resilient seats, bronze I stem, and stem nut. . a. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig. b. End Connections: Mechanical joint. o t c. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. B. UL /FM, Cast -Iron Gate Valves: I 1. Manufacturers: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. I b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. c. Central Sprinkler Company. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. I f. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. g. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). h. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. • ' i. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. • j. NIBCO INC. . k. United States Pipe and Foundry Company. 2. UL/FM, Nonrising -Stem Gate Valves: UL 262, FM- approved iron body and bonnet I with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, and inside screw. a. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psig. I b. End Connections: Flanged. I WRG Design • I I 1 . Fanno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 ,1 October 12, 2006 Page 5 • 2.7 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES I A. Tapping - Sleeve Assemblies: Comply with MSS SP -60. Include sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine. I i. Manufacturers: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. c. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. d. International Piping Services Company. e. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). I f. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. g. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. h. United States Pipe and Foundry Company. I 1. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile -iron or stainless - steel, two -piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of • pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve. 2. Valve: AWWA, cast -iron, nonrising -stem, metal- seated gate valve with one raised . face flange mating tapping - sleeve flange. B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast -iron valve boxes. Include top section, I adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering 'WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, and approximately 5 inch diameter barrel. I i. Operating Wrenches: Steel tee - handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut. C. Vertical -Type Indicator Posts: UL 789, FM- approved, cast -iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast -iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve. 2.8 CORPORATION VALVES AND CURB VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Amcast Industrial Corporation; Lee Brass Co. 2. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). 3. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. • 4. Jones, James Company. I 5. Master Meter, Inc. 6. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 7. Red Hed Manufacturing Co. I B. Service - Saddle Assemblies: Comply with AWWA C80 0. Include saddle and valve compatible with tapping machine. I 1. Service Saddle: Copper alloy with seal and AWWA C800, threaded outlet for corporation valve. 2. Corporation Valve: Bronze body and ground -key plug, with AWWA C800, threaded inlet and outlet matching service piping material. 1 C. Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800. Include bronze body, ground -key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material. I WRG Design • i . • I • • Fanno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 I October 12, 2006 Page 6 D. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast -iron valve boxes. Include cast -iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over curb valve, and approximately 3 inch diameter barrel. 1. Shutoff Rods: Steel, tee - handle with one pointed end, stem length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve. 2.9 WATER METERS A. Manufacturers: • 1 1. AMCO Water Metering Systems. 2. Badger Meter, Inc. I 3. Carlon Meter Co. • - 4. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. 5. Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters. 6. Neptune Technology Group Inc. .I 7. Sensus Technologies, Inc. B. Description: AWWA C700, displacement -type, bronze main case. Register flow in gallons unless cubic feet are indicated. B. Description: AWWA C702, compound -type, bronze case. Register flow in gallons unless cubic feet are indicated. I C. Water -Meter Boxes: Cast -iron body and cover for disc -type water meter with lettering "WATER METER" in cover; and slotted, open -bottom base section of length to fit over service piping. 1 2.10 BACKFLOW- PREVENTION DEVICES A. Manufacturers: I 1. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. I 2. Conbraco •Industries, Inc. 3. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. 4. Flomatic Corporation. 5. Watts Industries, Inc. 6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. B. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers. 1. Working Pressure: 150 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 1 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 3. NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast -iron, steel, or stainless -steel body with flanged ends. I • a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA - approved, epoxy coating for backflow preventers having cast -iron or steel body. 1 4. Interior Components: Corrosion - resistant materials. 5. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome - plated piping system. C. Pipe - Applied, Atmospheric -Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001, with floating disc and atmospheric vent. 1 WRG Design • I •Fanno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 • October 12, 2006 Page 7 • D. Reduced - Pressure - Principle Backflow Preventers: AWWA C511, suitable for continuous I pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and pressure - differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2, air -gap fitting located between two positive- seating check valves. • 1 1. Maximum Pressure Loss: 12 psig through middle 1/3 of flow range. E. Double- Check -Valve Backflow Prevention Assemblies: AWWA C510, suitable for continuous I pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and two positive- seating check valves. j 1. Maximum Pressure Loss: 5 psig through middle 1/3 of flow range. F. Double- Check -Valve Backflow Prevention Assemblies: UL 312, FM approved; with two UL 312, FM- approved, iron -body, 175 psig working - pressure, flanged -end check valves and I two UL 262, FM- approved, iron -body, outside screw and yoke, flanged, 175 psig working - pressure gate valves. 1. Maximum Pressure Loss: 5 psig through middle 1/3 of flow range. G. Antisiphon Pressure Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, suitable for continuous pressure application. Include shutoff valves, spring - loaded check valve, spring - loaded floating disc, test cocks, and atmospheric vent. 1. Maximum Pressure Loss: 5 psig through middle 1/3 of flow range. I 2.11 FREESTANDING FIRE HYDRANTS A. Dry- Barrel Fire Hydrants: UL 246, FM- approved, one NPS 4 -1/2 and two NPS 2 -1/2 outlets, 5 -1/4 inch main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 mechanical joint inlet. Hydrant shall have cast -iron body, compression -type valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure, and 150 psig minimum working - pressure design. A. Dry- Barrel Fire Hydrants: AWWA C502, one NPS 4 -1/2 and two NPS 2 -1/2 outlets, 5 -1/4 inch main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 mechanical -joint inlet. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550. Hydrant shall have cast -iron body, compression -type valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure, and 150 psig minimum working - pressure design. I 1. Manufacturers: I a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. . b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. c. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. d. American Foundry Group, Inc. e. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. • f. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. . g. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). h. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. I,, i. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. j. Troy Valve. k. United States Pipe and Foundry Company. 1 2. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. Include cast -iron caps with steel chains. I 3. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 1 -1/2 inches point to flat. WRG Design i Fanno Creek Place • Water Distribution: 22 11 00 October 12, 2006 Page 8 4. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or counterclockwise. 5. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd -gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated. 2.12 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS • A. Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast - bronze body, with thread inlets according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department hose threads, and threaded bottom outlet. Include lugged caps, gaskets, and chains; lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose - connection inlet; 18 inch high brass sleeve; and round escutcheon plate. 1. Manufacturers: a. AFAC, Inc.; Badger Fire Protection. I b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. c. Fire End & Croker Corporation. d. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.. g. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. h. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter - Roemer Div. 2. Connections: Two NPS 2 -1/2 inlets and one NPS 4 outlet. 3. Connections: Four NPS 2 -1/2 inlets and one NPS 6 outlet. 4. Inlet Alignment: Square. 5. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome plated. 6. Escutcheon Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Refer to Section 31 2000, Earth Moving, for excavating, trenching, and. backfilling. B. Underground Water - Service Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1,. NPS 3/4 to NPS 2: Soft copper tube, Type K or Type L; wrought - copper fittings; and soldered joints. 2. NPS 3/4 to NPS 2: PE, ASTM pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and clamped joints. 3. NPS 3/4 to NPS 2: PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 4. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 3 -1/2: Soft copper tube, Type K or Type L; wrought- copper fittings; and soldered joints. 5. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 3 -1/2: PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. . 6. NPS 4: Ductile -iron, mechanical joint pipe; ductile -iron, mechanical joint fittings; and mechanical joints. 7. NPS 4: PE, AWWA pipe; PE, AWWA fittings; and heat - fusion joints. 8. NPS 4: PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent - cemented joints. 9. NPS 4: PVC, AWWA Class 150 pipe; PVC, AWWA Class 150 fabricated fittings; and gasketed joints. • I WRG Design I Fanno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 October 12, 2006 Page 9 10. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Use NPS 6 ductile -iron, mechanical joint pipe; ductile -iron, mechanical joint fittings; and mechanical joints. 11. NPS 5 and NPS 6: PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 12. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Use NPS 6 PVC, AWWA Class 150 pipe; PVC, AWWA Class 150 fabricated fittings; and gasketed joints. C. Underground Fire - Service -Main Piping: Ductile -iron, mechanical joint pipe; ductile -iron, mechanical joint fittings; and mechanical joints. D. Underground Combined.Water-Service and Fire - Service -Main Piping: Ductile -iron, mechanical joint pipe; ductile -iron, mechanical joint fittings; and mechanical joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS I • A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 and larger underground installation. Use threaded- or flanged -end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL /FM, nonrising -stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation. B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1 1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: AWWA, cast -iron, nonrising -stem, high- . pressure, resilient- seated, gate valves, with valve box. • 2. Underground Valves, NPS 4) and Larger, for Indicator Posts: UL /FM, Cast -iron, nonrising -stem gate valves with indicator post. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION t , A. See Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for basic piping joint construction. B. Make pipe joints according to the following: 1. Ductile -Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water - Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 2. Ductile -Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire - Service -Main Piping: UL 194. 3. Copper Tubing Soldered Joints: ASTM B 828. Use flushable flux and lead -free solder. 4. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 5. PE Piping Insert- Fitting Joints: Use plastic insert fittings and fasteners according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for joining piping of dissimilar metals. 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Water -Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location. indicated 1 in water main. A. Water -Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated. WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 October 12, 2006 Page 10 • B. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following: 1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP -60. i 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove tapping machine and connect water - service piping. 4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP -60. Install valve with stem pointing up and with valve box. C. Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following: 1 1. Install service - saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement required by utility company standards. 2. Install service- saddle assemblies on water - service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for corporation valves. 3. Use drilling machine compatible with service- saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water - service piping. 4. Install corporation valves into service- saddle assemblies. 5. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main. 6. Install curb valve in water - service piping with head pointing up and with service box. D. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire - service -main piping materials and installation. E. Install ductile -iron, water - service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 1 F. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." G. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to AWWA M23 and ASTM F 645. H. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645. 1 I. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches, with top at least 12 inches below level of maximum frost penetration. J. Extend water - service piping and connect to water - supply source and building water piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 1. Terminate water - service piping at building wall until building water piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building piping systems when those systems are installed. 1 K. Sleeves are specified in Section 22 0500, Common Results for Utilities. L. Plumbing pipe sleeve seals are specified in Section 22 0500, Common Results for Utilities. 1 M. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie -rods and clamps, and other supports. N. Anchor service -entry piping to building wall. I WRG Design a�P ' 1 , Fanno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 I October 12, 2006 Page 11 3.5 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: I 1. Gasketed- Joint, Ductile -Iron, Water - Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. 2. Gasketed- Joint, PVC Water - Service Piping: According to AWWA M23. 3. Fire - Service -Main Piping: According to NFPA 24. 4. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion- resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices. 3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION II A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box. . 1 B. UL/FM Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast -iron indicator post. C. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed 1. up and with service box. . ' 3.7 WATER -METER INSTALLATION A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company's written requirements. 1 B. Water Meters: Install displacement -type water meters, NPS 2 and smaller, in meter boxes with shutoff valves on water -meter inlets. Include valves on water -meter outlets and valved bypass around meters unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. I B. Water Meters: Install compound -type water meters, NPS 3 and larger, in meter vaults. Include shutoff valves on water -meter inlets and outlets and valved bypass around meters. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. I C. Rough -in piping and specialties for water -meter installation according to utility company's written instructions and requirements. D. Water Meter Box Installation: • 1. Install water meter boxes in paves areas flush with surface. 1 2. Install water meter boxes in grass or earth areas with tope 2 inches above surface. 3.8 BACKFLOW - PREVENTER INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction. I B. Do not install backflow preventers with relief drain in vault or other space subject to flooding. C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. D. Support NPS 2 -1/2 and larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor and on brick or concrete piers. . 1 WRG Design 1 Fanno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 • October 12, 2006 Page 12 3.9 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position. B. AWWA -Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17. C. UUFM -Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24. 3.10 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install fire department connections of types and features indicated. B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains. I C. Install protective pipe bollards on three sides of each freestanding fire department connection. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards. 3.11 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections.. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. B. See Division 22 Section "Common Results for Plumbing" for piping connections to valves and equipment. 1 C. Connect water - distribution piping to utility water main. Use tapping sleeve and tapping valve D. Connect water - distribution piping to interior domestic -water and fire- suppression piping. E. Connect waste piping from drinking fountains to sanitary sewerage system. See Section 22 1300, Sanitary Sewerage, for connection to sanitary-sewer piping. I E. Connect waste piping from drinking fountains to storm - drainage system. See Section 22 1400, Storm Drainage Utilities, for connection to storm -sewer piping. F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Sections for Grounding and Bonding. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. I B. . Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1 -1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50 psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits. C. Prepare reports of testing activities. WRG Design i Fanno Creek Place Water Distribution: 22 1100 October 12, 2006 Page 13 3.13 IDENTIFICATION A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water - service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. See Section 31 2000, Earth Moving, for underground warning tapes. B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker, indicating plastic water_ service piping, on main electrical meter panel. See Section 22 0500, Common Results for Plumbing, for identifying devices 3.14 CLEANING ' A. Clean and disinfect water - distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. 3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or as described below: • a. Fill system or part of system with water /chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. l b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with 1 water /chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. • 1 B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. END OF SECTION • • 1 I I WRG Design • • Fanno Creek Place Sanitary Sewerage: 22 1300 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes gravity -flow, nonpressure sanitary sewerage outside the building, with the ' following components: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Precast concrete manholes. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for concrete structures. 2. Section 22 0500: Common Work Results for Plumbing, for basic piping materials and installation. • 3. Section 31 2000: Earth Moving, for trenching excavation, bedding, and fill. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage- Piping Pressure Rating: 10 foot head of water. t�. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For special pipe fitting, backwater valves, cleanouts, channel drainage systems, and drains indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers. C. Coordination Drawings: • t 1. Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. 2. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sanitary sewerage piping. 3. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures. D. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. • 1. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not less than 1 inch equals 50 feet and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. 2. Indicate manholes and piping. 3. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping. E. Field quality control test reports. • 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with regulations and requirements of the following: 1. Oregon State Plumbing Code. 2. Oregon Department of Environmental Quality Standards 3. Requirements of local governing jurisdiction. 1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING • A. Do not store plastic pipe, fittings, or structures in direct sunlight. WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Sanitary Sewerage: e: 22 1300 October 12, 2006 Page 2 I B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate sanitary sewerage connections to utility company's storm sewer. B. Coordinate with building sanitary sewerage system. C. Coordinate with other utility work. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 . PIPING MATERIALS I A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. 2.2 HUB - AND - SPIGOT, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. I B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calking Materials: 'ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.3 DUCTILE -IRON, GRAVITY SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A 746, for push -on joints. B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push -on joints. C. Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push -on joints. D. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, with bell- and - spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.5 NONPRESSURE -TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion - resistant- metal,tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. i I WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Sanitary Sewerage: 22 1300 October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Sleeve Materials: I 1. 2. For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. D. Shielded, Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full - length, corrosion - resistant outer shield and corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. E. Ring -Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 2.6 BACKWATER VALVES A. Gray -Iron Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, gray -iron body and bolted cover, with bronze 1 seat. 1. Horizontal Type: With swing check valve and hub - and - spigot ends. 2. Combination Horizontal and Manual Gate -Valve Type: With swing check valve, integral gate valve, and hub - and - spigot ends. 3. Terminal Type: With bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet. 1, B. PVC Backwater Valves: Horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable cover, and PVC swing check valve. 2.7 CLEANOUTS A. Gray -Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray -iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray -iron cover. Include gray -iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered- thread, brass closure plug. 1. Top- Loading Classification: Heavy duty. 2. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings. B. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping. 2.8 MANHOLES A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. 3. Base Section: 6 -inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 4. Riser Sections: 4 -inch minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated. 1 I WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Sanitary Sewerage: 22 1300 October 12, 2006 Page 4 5. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type, unless concentric -cone or flat - slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 8. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches. 9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 10. Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 11. Potective Coating: Plant- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint 15- mil minimum thickness applied to exterior and interior surfaces. 12. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch ID by 7- to 9 -inch riser with 4 -inch- minimum width flange and 26 -inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." a. Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 gray iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint; 15 -mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 CONCRETE 'I A. General: Provide cast -in -place concrete and reinforcement according to requirements of Section 03 3000. B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water - cementitious materials ratio. I 1. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water /cementitious materials ratio. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use nonpressure -type flexible couplings where required to join gravity -flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. Unshielded, increaser /reducer - pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD. c. Ring -type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. ,1 WRG Design 1 I Fanno Creek Place Sanitary Sewerage: 22 1300 October 12, 2006 Page 5 B. Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size range: 11 ' 1. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Hub - and - spigot, Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. I 2. NPS 3 and NPS 4: NPS 6 ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile -iron standard fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. NPS 3 and NPS 4: NPS 4 PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 4. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Hub - and - spigot, Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; I gaskets; and gasketed joints. NPS 5 and NPS 6: NPS 6 ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile -iron standard fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 6. NPS 5 and NPS 6: NPS 6 PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. I 7. NPS 8 and NPS 10: Hub - and - spigot Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 8. NPS 8 and NPS 10: Ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile -iron standard; gaskets; l and gasketed joints. 9. NPS 8 and NPS 10: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 10. NPS 12 and NPS 15: Hub - and - spigot, Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 11. NPS 12 to NPS 16: Ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile -iron standard fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 12. NPS 12 and NPS 15: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 1 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location I and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written I instructions. • B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. C. Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of I pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. Install ravit -flow non pressure, drainage piping according to the following: 9 Y � P 9 PP 9 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in I direction. Use corrosion - resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast -in- place- concrete supports or anchors. 3. Install piping with 36 -inch minimum cover. 4. Install piping below frost line. I 5. Install hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." 6. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. I 1 WRG Design r Fanno Creek Place Sanitary Sewerage: 22 13 00 October 12, 2006 Page 6 F. • Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Section 22 0500, "Common Work Results for Plumbing." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Join gravity -flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: • 1. Join hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. 2. Join hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints. 3. Join ductile -iron, gravity sewer piping according to AWWA C600 for push -on joints. 4. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric- gasket joints. 5. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure -type, flexible couplings.. 3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION I A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891. 1 C. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet. D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT I A. Place cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. 3.7 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION • A. Install horizontal -type backwater valves in piping where indicated. B. Install combination horizontal and manual gate valve type in piping and in manholes where indicated. C. Install terminal -type backwater valves on end of piping and in manholes where indicated. 11 Secure units to sidewalls. 3.8 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION • A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast -iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast -iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. • 1. Use light -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot - traffic areas. 2. Use medium -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in paved foot - traffic areas. 3. Use heavy -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in vehicle - traffic service areas. WRG Design I Fanno Creek Place Sanitary Sewerage: 22 1300 1 October 12, 2006 Page 7 4. Use extra- heavy -duty, top- loading classification cleanouts in roads. B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast -in- place- concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Connect nonpressure, gravity -flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Division 22 Sections for facility plumbing. B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. 1. • Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping 9 in branch connections. Remove 9 section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6 -inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ,1_ A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. • 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: • a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or i repaired, for leaks and defects. i 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having I jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Sanitary Sewerage: 22 1300 • I October 12, 2006 Page 8 5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following: a. Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal. /inch of nominal pipe size per mile of pipe, during 24 -hour period. b. Close openings in system and fill with water. c. Purge air and refill with water. d. Disconnect water supply. 111 e. Test and inspect joints for leaks. f. Option: Test ductile -iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic , Testing" Section. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig. 6. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI -B -6, and the following: i a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417. b. Option: Test concrete gravity sewer piping according to ASTM C 924. 7. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969. C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. 3.13 CLEANING 1 A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous material. Flush with potable water. I END OF SECTION • I .I I 1 1 1 1 I WRG Design I 1 Fanno Creek Place Storm Drainage: 22 1400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes gravity -flow, nonpressure storm drainage outside the building, with the I following components: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Precast concrete manholes. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete, for cast -in -place concrete structures. 2. Section 22 0500: Common Results for Plumbing, for basic piping materials and installation. 3. Section 31 2000: Earth Moving, for trenching excavation, bedding, and fill. a 4. Section 33 4613: Foundation Drainage, for foundation drains connecting to storm drainage system. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS I A. Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage - Piping Pressure Ratings: 10 foot head of water. I 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For manholes and catch basins. Include plans, elevations; sections, details, and manhole frames and covers, and catch basin frames and grates. C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. D. Field quality control test reports. I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with regulations and requirements of the following: I 1. Oregon State Plumbing Code. 2. Oregon Department of Environmental Quality Standards 3. Requirements of local governing jurisdiction. I 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS • Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. . I A. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate connection of storm drainage to utility company's storm sewer. B. Coordinate with building drainage systems. I C. Coordinate with other utility work. WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Storm Drainage: 22 1400 October 12, 2006 Page 2 • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to PART 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. 2.2 HUB - AND - SPIGOT, CAST -IRON. SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS I A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. • C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. • 2.3 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS I ' A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 10 and Smaller: AASHTO M 252M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings. 2. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 to NPS 48: AASHTO M 294M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 3. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings. 2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS ' . A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, with bell- and - spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: NPS 18 and Larger: ASTM F 679, T -1 wall thickness, with bell - and- spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.5 NONPRESSURE -TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS I A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. B. Sleeve Materials: 1. For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. • 2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. C. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. D. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM•C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full - length, corrosion - resistant outer shield and corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. E. Ring -Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. J I WRG Design • I I Fanno Creek Place Storm Drainage: 22 1400 October 12, 2006 Page 3 2.6 BACKWATER VALVES I A. Gray -Iron Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, gray -iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat. I 1. Horizontal Type: With swing check valve and hub - and - spigot ends. 2. Combination Horizontal and Manual Gate -Valve Type: With swing check valve, integral gate valve, and hub - and - spigot ends. 3. Terminal Type: With bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet. I B. PVC Backwater Valves: Horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable cover, and PVC swing check valve. I 2.7 CLEANOUTS A. Gray -Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray -iron housing with clamping device and I round, secured, scoriated, gray -iron cover. Include gray -iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered- thread, brass closure plug. 1. Top- Loading Classification(s): Heavy duty. 2. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings. 2.8 MANHOLES • I A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth ,P � P indicated, with provision for sealant joints. I 1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base I 3. section, as required to prevent flotation. Base Section: 6 inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 inch minimum thickness . for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. I 4. Riser Sections: 4 inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated. . 5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric -cone or flat- slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. I 7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 8. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder wide enough to allow worker to place I both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12 to 16 inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches. . 9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and I diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring • manufacturer. 10. Grade Rings: Reinforced- concrete rings, 6 to 9 inch total thickness, to match I diameter of manhole frame and cover. 11. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 inch ID by 7 to 9 inch riser with 4 inch minimum width flange and 26 inch diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER." I a. Material: ASTM A 48, Class 35 gray iron, unless otherwise indicated. • I . WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Storm Drainage: 22 1400 October 12, 2006 Page 4 2.9 CONCRETE 0 A. General: Cast -in -place concrete and reinforcement according to ACI 318', ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 1 maximum water - cement ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed steel. 2.10 CATCH BASINS A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of . depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. Base Section: 6 inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 inch minimum thickness 111 for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: 4 inch minimum thickness, 48 inch diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 3. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type unless concentric -cone or flat - slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60- 40 -18, ductile iron designed for A -16, structural loading. Include 24 inch ID by 7 to 9 inch riser with 4 inch minimum width flange, and 26 inch diameter flat grate with small square or short- slotted drainage openings. 1 1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use nonpressure -type flexible couplings where required to join gravity -flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. Unshielded, increaser /reducer - pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD. • c. Ring -type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. I 2. Use pressure -type pipe couplings for force -main joints. • • a r WRG Design 1 • I • Fanno Creek Place Storm Drainage: 22 1400 I October 12, 2006 Page 5 • B. Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each I size range: 1. NPS 3 to NPS 6: Hub - and - spigot, Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. I 2. NPS 3 to NPS 6: Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints. 3. NPS 3 to NPS 6: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 4. NPS 8 to NPS 15: Hub - and - spigot, Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; • gaskets; and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 15: Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints. III 6. . NPS 8 to NPS 15: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 7. NPS 18 to NPS 30: Corrugated PE pipe and fittings, soiltight couplings, and coupled joints. 8. NPS 18 to NPS 30: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 1 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. I B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, I cements, and other installation requirements. C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch I connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. I E. Install gravity -flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: I I. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion - resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast -in -place concrete supports or anchors. 3. Install piping with 36 inch minimum cover. 4. Install piping below frost line. 5. Install hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe III and Fittings Handbook." 6. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. I F. Clear interior of piping and manhoes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. 3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION I A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Section 33 0500, Common Work Results for Utilities. Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. • I WRG Design • • Fanno Creek Place Storm Drainage: 22 1400 October 12, 2006 Page 6 B. Join gravity -flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1 1. Join hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. 2. Join hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints. 3. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric -seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric gasket joints. 4. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure -type flexible couplings. • C. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure -type couplings. 3.4 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION • A. Install horizontal -type backwater valves in piping where indicated. I B. Install combination horizontal and manual gate valve type in piping and in manholes where indicated. I C. Install terminal -type backwater valves on end of piping and in manholes where indicated. 3.5 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION ., I A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at.grade. Use cast -iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast -iron soil pipe for riser I extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. Use light -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot - traffic areas. 2. Use medium -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in paved foot - traffic areas. 3. Use heavy -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in vehicle- traffic service areas. 4. Use extra- heavy -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in roads. I B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast -in -place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade. • C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. iii 3.6 MANHOLE INSTALLATION • A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. B. Install precast concrete manhole sections according to ASTM C 891. 11 C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Connect nonpressure, gravity -flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified in Division 22 Sections, for facility plumbing. I WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Storm Drainage: 22 1400 • October 12, 2006 Page 7 B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6 inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL IA Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has . occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. I 1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cy of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed , broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. ' 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects . are within allowances specified. 4: Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. • I 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity -Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI -B -6, and the following: 1 a. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. I END OF SECTION 1 WRG Design I Fanno Creek Place Site Clearing: 31 1000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 • PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes site clearing: ' 1. Protecting existing trees and other vegetation to remain. 2. Removing trees and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. I 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing site utilities. 7. Removal of abandoned utilities. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 7419: Construction Waste Management, for disposal of recyclable materials. 2. Section 01 7700: Closeout Procedures, for record drawings of capped utilities. 3. Section 31 2000: Earth Moving, for soil materials for fills. 4. Section 31 2500: Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A: Submit Record Drawings to include identification and location of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical and plumbing items, according to provisions of Section 01 7700, Closeout Procedures. I 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain dust permit from governing jurisdiction. ' B. Herbicides shall be approved by governmental authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Obtain written authorization from owner prior to using herbicides. C. Underground Utilities: 1. Verify location of all underground utility lines including underground storm and I sanitary utilities. 2. Notify Underground Utility Provider 48 hours prior to starting clearing and grubbing. 3. Comply with requirements of Governmental Authorities having jurisdiction for capping and sealing existing utilities to be abandoned in place. I D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are approved by local authority and are in place. I 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS • A. Material Ownership: Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or identified to remain the I Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. B. Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or I used facilities during site clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct adjacent street, drive lanes, utility easements, walks, and exit passageways without permission of authorities having jurisdiction. . WRG Design i Fanno Creek Place Site Clearing: 31 1000 October 12, 2006 Page 2 2. Keep streets and sidewalks clean. C. Protection of persons and property: 1. Barricade open depressions and holes occurring as part of work, and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access. 2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day, and as otherwise required to ensure safety of persons. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by operations of this Section. , D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to occupants of adjacent properties, and to other work being performed on or near the site. E. Maintain access to the site at all times. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials is described in Section 31 2000, Earthwork, for filling excavations, depressions, and holes as part of the work of this Section. 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off -site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on -site. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 1 A. Protect benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during site clearing operations. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated: . C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged site improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TREE PROTECTION • A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fencing when construction is complete. 1. • Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the drip line of trees identifies the tree protection zone. 2. Do not store construction material, debris, or excavated material within drip line of trees. 3. Do not permit vehicles, equipment or foot traffic within drip line of trees. 4. Do not excavate within drip line of trees to remain, unless otherwise indicated I B. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations. 1. Engage a qualified arborist to propose details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and other vegetation to remain. 1 WRG Design 1 I Fanno Creek Place Site Clearing: 31 1000 I October 12, 2006 Page 3. 3.3 UTILITIES I A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. I B. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. C. Excavate and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. I 3.4 SITE IMPROVEMENTS • A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements, such as slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base, as indicated. I B. Unless full depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw cut existing pavements between sections to remain and portions to be removed. 1 3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove trees, shrubs, grass, vegetation and other obstructions in the area of site I improvements, such as buildings and pavements, and in area of new landscaping. 1. Removal includes digging out of stumps, obstructions, and grubbing roots. Obstructions include rock larger than 4 inches. I . 2. Remove to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade under site improvements, and to a minimum depth of 12 inches in areas of landscaping. 3. Treat remaining roots with herbicide per Manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with governmental regulations. I B. Do not remove trees, shrubs and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated. C. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with soil materials specified for I fill materials in Section 31 2000, Earth Moving, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. I 1. Structural fill is required for depressions that occur in areas where site improvements, such as buildings and pavements, are shown. 3.6 . TOPSOIL STRIPPING I A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with I underlying subsoil or other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil in an area clear of new construction, without intermixing with subsoil. I D. Maintain topsoil stockpile in a manner that does not obstruct the natural flow of drainage on the site. I 1. Shape stockpile to drain water. 2. Maintain stockpile free from debris and trash. 3. Keep the topsoil damp to prevent dust and drying out. 4. Cover to prevent windblown dust. I • I WRG Design ' Fanno Creek Place Site Clearing: 31 1000 October 12, 2006 Page 4 3.7 DISPOSAL A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, demolished material, obstructions, brush, grass, roots, and other debris from the site. B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities under provisions of Section 01 7419, Construction Waste Management. • C. Legally dispose of material removed from site. D. Do not burn debris at site. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 • 1 I i I i I 1 I I 1 WRG Design • 1 I Fanno Creek Place Earth Moving: 31 2000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 • PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on- grade, walks, pavements, and plantings. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs -on- grade. • I 4. Subbase course for cement concrete walks and pavements. 5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. ' 8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 9. Backfilling for foundation drainage piping. I B. Related Sections. 1. Section 01 5000: Temporary Facilities and Controls , I 2. Section 03 3000: Cast -In- Place Concrete, for vapor retarder over drainage course for concrete slabs -on- grade. 3. Division 22: Plumbing, for installing underground plumbing utilities and buried utility structures. I 4. _Division 26: Electrical, for installing underground electrical utilities and buried utility structures. • 5. Section 31 1000: Site Clearing, for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and protecting trees to remain. I 6. Section 31 2500: Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 7. Section 32 1216: Asphalt Paving, for sub -base course, base course, and separation fabric for asphalt paving. 8. Section 32 1313: Concrete Paving, for base course for concrete pavement. I 9. Section 32 9200: Turf and Grasses, for finish grading, including preparing and placing topsoil and planting soil for lawns. 10. Section 32 9300: Plants, for finish grading, including preparing and placing topsoil and I planting soil for plantings. 11. Section 33 4613: Foundation Drainage, for drainage systems at foundations. 1.2 DEFINITIONS I A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low- strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to I 2. support sides of pipe. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Layer placed between subbase course and asphalt paving. I C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Course supporting slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. 1 I • WRG Design 1 • • PI Earth Moving: 31 2000 Movin Fanno Creek Place g October 12, 2006 Page 2 F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Rock: Rock material and boulders 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows /2 inches according to ASTM D 1586. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. J. Subbase Course: Course placed between subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or course placed between subgrade and cement concrete paving or sidewalks. K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. L. Utilities include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For geotextile. 1 B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of on -site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for on -site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock - definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 3100. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility service according to requirements indicated. 1 WRG Design • 1 I Fanno Creek Place Earth Moving: 31 2000 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 1. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. . Project 9 I B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS I A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. I B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols;•free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. I C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. I 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. I D. Subbase Material: ASTM D 2940; Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. I E. Base Course: ASTM D 2940; Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, with at least 95 percent passing a 1 -1/2 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. IF. Engineere Fill: ASTM D 2940; Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. I G. Bedding Course: ASTM D 2940; Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, except with 100 percent passing a 1 inch sieve with not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. I H. Drainage Course: ASTM D 448; Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. I I. Drainage Fill Topping: ASTM D 448; Self- draining, washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; 3/4 inch minus with not more than 3 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. I J. Filter Material: ASTM D 448; Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; coarse aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1 inch I sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. K. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. I L. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. I WRG Design i o Creek Place Earth Moving: Fanno : 31 2000 9 October 12, 2006 Page 4 2.2 GEOTEXTILES A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle - punched geotextile made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: . 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. • 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4833. ' 6. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 7. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 257 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 90 Ibf; ASTM D 4533. ' 5. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 6. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 7. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Irrigation Sleeves: PVC pipe, Schedule 40; sizes as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Section 31 1000, Site Clearing. 1 C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Section 31 2500, Erosion and Sedimentation Controls, during earth moving operations. D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. 3.2 DEWATERING • I A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. I 1 WRG Design I I Fanno Creek Place Earth Moving: 31 2000 I October 12, 2006 Page 5 • B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. ' 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage I 2. ditches. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. I 3.3 WATERING A. Furnish and apply water for the following: I 1. Compaction and preparation of excavations, subgrades, subbases, base course, and surfacing. 2. Alleviation or prevention of dust nuisance. . I B. Perform watering at any hour of day, and on any day of week, as necessary for protection of work and for alleviation of dust nuisance. I 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL • A. Excavation to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated is classified as earth and rock. I 1 Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. I 2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. a. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross - sectioned by Architect. I b. Rock excavation will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to • agreed upon unit prices. I B. Use suitable material taken from excavations for embankments, subgrade, and backfilling. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials . and rock, replace with borrow materials. I 2. When volume of excavation is not sufficient for construction fill to grades indicated, supply deficiency from borrow sources at locations authorized by Architect. • 3. When volume of earth excavation exceeds that for embankments, subgrade, and backfilling, remove as waste, unless otherwise directed by Architect. 1 4. Do not use topsoil or strippings in fills or subgrades. . • 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES I A. Excavate to indicated elevations within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. 1. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and I removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. B. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: 1 1. Do not disturb bottom of excavation. 2. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. 3. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. I • I WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Earth Moving: 31 2000 111 October 12, 2006 Page 6 , I C. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: . 1. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus • 1 inch. 2. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR PAVING AND SIDEWALKS I A. Excavate surfaces under paving and sidewalks to indicated' lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 1 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. I 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: As indicated. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace • with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof -roll subgrade below building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. I 1. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28 day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. _ I I WRG Design I I Fanno Creek Place Earth Moving: 31 2000 1 October 12, 2006 Page 7 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS I A. Stockpile borrow materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. 1. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. I 2. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. 4. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. I 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: I 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. I 4. Removing concrete formwork, including temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting 5. Removing trash and debris. I B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL I A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, I fittings, and bodies of conduits. . C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. I D. Provide 4- inch - thick, concrete -base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. 1 1. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. I E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both I sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. • 3.13 SOIL FILL I A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 1 I WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Earth Moving: 31 2000 October 12, 2006 Page 8 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. t 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. • C. Place backfill. on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. • I 3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before ' compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air -dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent. 3.16 GRADING A. • General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. 1. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 2. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 3. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 -foot straightedge. 3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES ' A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 1 WRG Design I I Fanno Creek Place Earth Moving: 31 2000 October 12, 2006 Page 9 B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's I instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place base course material over subbase course under asphalt pavement. 3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades. 4. Place subbase -and base 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 5. Place subbase and base that exceeds 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 6. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. C. Pavement Shoulders: ' 1. Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. ' 2. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. ' 3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Under slabs -on- grade, install drainage fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. Place drainage course on drainage fabric and as follows: B. On, prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast -in -place concrete slabs -on -grade as follows: 1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 4. Compact layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1 A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality control testing. ' B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work complies with requirements. ' C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. I WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Earth Moving: 31 2000 o g October 12, 2006 Page 10 D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, 1 ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 1 E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. • 3.21 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. I • Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to math adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.22 REPAIR OF DAMAGED AREAS A. Replace existing pavement areas damaged due to hauling or to any other construction activity. B. Restore disturbed areas due to construction activity outside pavement area to their original condition prior to final acceptance of Project. I • 3.23 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, I trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. • END OF SECTION • 1 I WRG Design I . Fanno Creek Place Erosion and Sedimentation Controls: 31 2500 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL • I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Erosion and Sedimentation Control (ESC) Plan. ' 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor responsible for implementation of ESC Plans and construction, maintenance, I replacement, and upgrading of ESC facilities until construction is completed and approved and vegetation /landscaping is established. B. Flag boundaries of clearing limits shown on plan in field prior to construction. 1 1. Do not permit any disturbance beyond flagged clearing area during construction period. . 2. Provide flagging for duration of construction. I C. Construct ESC facilities shown on drawings in conjunction with clearing and grading activities, and in manner toy ensure that sediment and sediment laden water do not enter drainage I system, roadways or violate applicable water standards. D. ESC facilities shown on drawings are minimum requirements for anticipated site conditions. I I. Upgrade these ESC facilities as needed during construction period for unexpected storm events or site conditions to ensure that sediment and sediment laden water do not leave site. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS I A. Provide materials required for this work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE A. Inspect ESC facilities daily and maintain as necessary to ensure continued functioning. I B. Do not allow more than one foot of sediment to accumulate within a trapped catch basin, • 1. Clean catch basins and conveyance systems prior to paving. 1 2. Do not allow cleaning operations to flush sediment laden water into downstream. C. Construct Stabilized Construction Entrances at beginning of construction and maintain for duration of project. I 1. Provide additional measures required to ensure paved areas adjacent to project are kept clean for duration of project. D. Remove sediment fences and straw bale barriers when they have served their purpose, and when •approved by Architect, but not before upslope area has been permanently stabilized. I E. Follow guidelines established by Governing Authority for construction and maintenance of graveled construction entrances, temporary sediment fences, and straw bale sediment barriers. 1 • WRG Design i • Fanno Creek Place Erosion and Sedimentation Controls: 31 2500 1 October 12, 2006 Page 2 ' F. Follow guidelines established by Governing Authority for erosion control work. 1 G. Provide materials in good physical condition to provide proper sediment retention. H. Inspect sediment fences and barriers immediately after each rainfall and 'at least daily during - prolonged rainfall and perform required repairs. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 1 I 1 1 WRG Design 1 I Fanno Creek Place Asphalt Paving: 32 1216 i October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Hot -mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot -mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot -mix asphalt paving overlay. I 4. • Asphalt surface treatments. B. Related Sections: I1. 2. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for independent inspection. Section 31 2000: Earth Moving, for aggregate subbase and base courses. 3. Section 32 1723: Pavement Markings, for pavement marking paint. 4. Section 32 1313: Concrete Paving, for concrete paving and curbs. I 5. Section 32 1373: Concrete Paving Joint Sealants, for joint sealants and fillers at concrete paving and curbs. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definition of terms. I 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide asphaltic concrete pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the latest edition of standard specifications of the State of Oregon I Standard Highway Department (OSHD) Specifications for Highway Construction. 1. Design paving for parking, light duty commercial vehicles, and movement of trucks up to 30,000 pounds. 1.4 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B. Job Mix Design: For each job mix proposed for the Work. I C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material. Certification that job -mix design meets specified requirements. I D. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving -mix manufacturer registered with Oregon State I A. Highway Department. B. Installer Qualifications: Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this I Section. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable • 1 requirements of governing authorities for asphalt paving work. WRG Design . i Fanno Creek Place Asphalt Paving: 32 1216 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.6 . ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS • A. Do not apply asphaltic concrete materials if substrate is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, of if the following conditions are not met: 1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 degrees F. 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 degrees F and rising at time of placement. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 degrees F at time of placement. 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Aggregates: • 1. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone or gravel, or cured 1 crushed blast- furnace slag. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, sharp -edged natural sand, or sand prepared from stone or gravel, or combinations thereof. ' a. Limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass. B. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242 or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material. C. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP -la, performance grade as recommended by local DOT Specifications. D. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime complying with local DOT Specifications. E. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140; emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. F. Water: Potable. ' G. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. • ' H. Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288, nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack, rot, mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 6690 or AASHTO M 324, Type as applicable, hot - applied, single- component, polymer- modified bituminous sealant. 2.2 MIXES ' A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Mix: Dense, hot -laid, hot -mix asphalt plant mix approved by authorities having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in Al MS -2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot -Mix Types." and complying with the following requirements 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area hwere Project is located. 2. Various classes of asphaltic concrete are noted in the Drawings. WRG Design 1 Fanno Creek Place Asphalt Paving: 32 1216 1 October 12, 2006, Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads. I B. Proof -roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic -tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or require further compaction. I C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Verify that utilities, traffic loop detectors, manholes, catch basins, and other appurtenances and structures that are exposed are adjusted to finish grade. I 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted I aggregate base before applying paving materials. 1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose. I C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing pavement, at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd.. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot -mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. I Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. D. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound aggregate base to penetrate I and seal surface. 1. Apply at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal. /sq. yd. 2. Allow prime coat to cure. I 3. Protect prime coat from damage until ready to receive paving. E. Paving Geotextile Installation: I 1. Apply tack coat uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.20 to 0.30 gal. /sq. yd. 2. ' Place paving geotextile according to manufacturer's instructions. Broom or roll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches I • and transverse joints 6 inches. 3.3 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PLACEMENT I A. Machine place hot -mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment. I 1. 2. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. Place hot -mix asphalt surface course in single lift. • 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 degrees. 4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and • tears in asphalt paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips of not less than 10 feet wide, except where infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Asphalt Paving: 32 1216 p 9 October 12, 2006 . Page 4 I C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot -mix asphalt to I prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.4 JOINTS . A. Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. I 1. Construct joints free of depressions and with same surface uniformity of texture, density, smoothness, etc., as other sections of course. I 2. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. 3. Offset longitudinal joints ;, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 4. Offset transverse joints in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 5. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes I work at a subsequent time. a. Cut back on previous day's application to expose full depth of course and apply tack coatto exposed edge. I 6. Compact joints as soon as hot -mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. I 7. Compact asphalt at jolts to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. B. Where new pavement joins to existing pavement, saw cut full depth of existing pavement in a straight and true line. 1. Protect saw cut edges from damage until finished surface has been completed. 2. Resaw damaged edges entire length of matching joint prior to placing finished surface. . I 3.5 COMPACTION . A. Begin compaction as soon as Oving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement or I hair check. 1. Compact paving with hilt, hand held tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas I inaccessible to rollers. 2. Complete compaction tlefore mix temperature cools to 185 degrees F. B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. 1. Examine surfaces immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, I and smoothness. I 2. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while • asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until asphalt course has been uniformly compacted 1:o the following density. I. 1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not Il than 90 percent no greater than 96 percent. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to I proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly I WRG Design I I Fanno Creek Place Asphalt Paving: 32 1216 October 12, 2006 Page 5 ' F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot -mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. ' G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become ' marked. 3.6 ASPHALT CURBS ' A. Construct hot -mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 1 1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface - course mix. • B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and ' outside edge. C. Place hot -mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand - placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot -mix asphalt has cooled. 3.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES ' A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. ' 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10 foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. ' 2. 3. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template; maximum allowable variance from template of 1/4 inch. ' 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing agency to perform field inspections and tests and t to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret test and state in test reports whether work complies with specified requirements. ' 2. Additional testing to determine compliance of corrected work to meet specified requirements will be at Contractor's expense. B. Pavement Thickness: In -place compacted thickness of hot -mix asphalt courses will be ' determined according to ASTM D 3549. C. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot -mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. WRG Design ( Fanno Creek Place Asphalt Paving: 32 1216 October 12, 2006 Page 6 1 D. In -Place Density: Testing Agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979 or AASHTO T 168. 1. Reference laboratory d I nsity will be determined by averaging results from 4 samples of hot -mix asphalt -pavii g mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job -mix specifications. 2. In -place density of compacted material will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 11188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core samdle will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken. b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according. E. Replace and compact hot -mix asphalt where core tests were taken F. Remove and replace or install additional hot -mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate noncompliance with spii cified requirements. 3.8 DISPOSAL A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site ' and legally dispose of them in an EPA - approved landfill. END OF SECTION • • • 1 1 1 1 WRG Design • 1 ' Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving: 32 1313 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 ' PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in- place - exterior reinforced cement concrete paving including, but not I limited to, the following: 1. Driveways and roadways. . 2. Curbs and gutters. I 3. Walkways. B. Related Sections: • I 1. Section 01 4500: Quality Control, for testing procedures. 2. Section 03 3000: Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for expansion and isolation joint sealant. 4. Section 31 2000: Earth Moving, for base course for concrete paving. I 5. Section 32 1723: Pavement Markings 1.2 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product specified. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mixture. I C. Reinforcement Shop Drawings: 1. Submit steel reinforcing placement drawings prior to fabrication of reinforcing. I 2. Identify and dimension each type of reinforcing bar. D. Test Reports: Submit copies of laboratory and field test reports for concrete work. .' E. Ready -Mix Concrete Batch Ticket: • 1. Provide a batch weight ticket with each truck for inspection agency. I 2. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 Batch Ticket Information. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer: Engage an experienced installer who is familiar with requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Ready -Mix Concrete Manufacturer: Comply with ASTM C 94 requirements for production I facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete Association's Plant Certification Program. I C. Source Limitations: Provide each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, and each aggregate from one source. I D. Comply with ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. I E. Comply with requirements in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement. WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving: 32 1313 1 October 12, 2006 Page 2 F. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to standards of governing authorities for paving work on public property. PART 2 PRODUCTS • .' 2.1 FORMS A. Form Material: APA Grade "B" or better plywood, metal, or other approved panel -type materials to provide full - depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. B. Form Release Agent: Commercially formulated form - release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT ' A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. , C. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. D. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82. ' E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement, bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS ' A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. B. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, Class 4S 4M Moderate coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. C. Water: ASTM C 94. D. Air - Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260. I E. Chemical Admixtures: 1. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. • 2.5 CURING MATERIALS ' A. Clear Waterborne Membrane Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. B. Moisture Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene sheet. ' C. Water: Potable. I WRG Design 1 . Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving: 32 1313 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS • I A. Expansion and Isolation Joint Filler Material: 3/8 inch nominal thickness. • 1. ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber. I 2. ASTM D 1752, cork or self- expanding cork. . Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two- component epoxy resin, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to requirements; for bonding freshly mixed concrete to I hardened concrete. C. Concrete Surface Cleaner: Heavy Duty Concrete Cleaner, by ProSo Co., or approved. 1 2.7 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of I normal weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience, and as follows: 1. Minimum of 5 -1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete. a. Fly Ash: Limit percentage by weight to 25 percent. I 2. 3. Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch maximum. Proportion cement, sand, aggregate and water in a workable mix to provide a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days, in conformance with ACI 318 -771. I 4. Concrete Slump: Between 2 inches and 4 inches at time of placement. 5. Air Entrainment Admixture: Include 5 percent (plus or minus one percent) of Admixture. 6. Water Cement Ratio: 0.45 maximum. I B. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Certified by materials supplier to meet compressive strengths specified and conforming to ASTM C 94. I1. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and • delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes. 2. When air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 I minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify substrates are set to proper lines and grade. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface to verify subbase is firm and stable. I 1. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1.2 inch require correction according to requirements in Section 31 2000, Earth Moving. I 2. Remove standing water. B. Proceed with placement of pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. I I WRG Design 1 n Creek Place Concrete Paving: Fan no C ee ace Co : 32 1313 e g • October 12, 2006 Page 4 3.2 EDGE FORMS A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required • lines, grades, and elevations. B. Treat forms with approved and nonstaining form oil or wax immediately before placing concrete. Do not use materials that will adhere to or discolor concrete 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing of Reinforcing Bars" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. C. Installed welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.4 JOINTS • A. General: Form construction, isolation, and.contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement, and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hours, unless pavement terminates at expansion or isolation joints. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Butt Joints: Use epoxy bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened of partially hardened concrete surfaces. 3. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate 1/2 of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Expansion or Isolation Joints: Form expansion and isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips, as follows: 1. Width of Joint: 1/2 inch, unless otherwise indicated. • a. 3/4 inch where new concrete surfacing abuts other pavement. • 2. Extend joint fillers to full depth of pavement if joint sealant is not indicated. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. a. Fill top of joint flush with pavement with pourable, self - leveling traffic sealant specified in Section 07 9200. 4. Locations: a. Between driveways and other pavements. b. Transversely in walks at a distance of six to eight feet in from curbs that occur at walk -ends. c. Transversely in walks opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. d. Elsewhere at such locations that distance between transverse expansion joints does not exceed 25 feet. WRG Design 1 I Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving: 32 1313 I October 12, 2006 Page 5 e. Where pavement abuts poles, posts, driveways, boxes, concrete curbs, catch • basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects which I protrude through, into, or against pavement. f. Adjacent to other new or existing pavements. I D. Contraction Joints: Form contraction joints of weakened plane, sectioning concrete into areas indicated. 1. Space at a maximum of 5 feet, unless otherwise indicated. I 2. Form joints to a depth of 1/3 of thickness of concrete and to a width of approximately 1/8 inch: 3. Tool joint edges smooth. . 4. Provide sawed joints only with approval of Architect. I 5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate 1/2 of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT I A. . . Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. I B. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. C. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. I D. Do not use concrete that does not reach its final position in forms within 1 -1/2 hours after introduction of water to mix at batch plant. I E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. F. Place concrete ih a continuous operation between transverse joints. • I G. Consolidate concrete, during and immediately after placing according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, and tamping. I H. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. I. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1, and as follows: I 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 2. . When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 45 degrees F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture I temperature of not less than 50 degrees F and not more than 80 degrees F at point of placement. 3. Do no use calcium chloride, salt, or other material containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. I J. Warm Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301, and as follows: I1. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength caused by air temperatures above 75 degrees F. 2. Maintain a concrete temperature of not more than 75 degrees F at point of placement: I 3. Fog stray forms, reinforcement, embedded items, and subgrade with cool water immediately prior to concrete placement. 4. Cover reinforcement steel with water soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before concrete is placed. WRG Design 1 Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving: 32 1313 October 12, 2006 Page 6 5. Protect placed concrete from shrinkage crack damage until protected by curing procedure. 3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMS • I A. Give consideration to location and character of concrete, weather and other conditions influencing setting of concrete and materials used in mix in determining time for removal of I forms. 1. Comply with recommendations, precautions and requirements of ACI 347and ACI 318. 2. In any case, do not remove forms for a period of 4 days following placement of I concrete. 3.7 CONCRETE FINISHING I A. Floated Finish: Comply with ACI 301, Paragraph 11.7.2. 1. Provide floated finish for slab surfaces to receive washed and broomed finish. 2. Begin floating when bleed -water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. 3. Check surface plane with a 10 foot straightedge at two or more angles during or after first floating. I 4. Cut high spots and fill low spots during floating to level to class B tolerance, 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 5. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture. B. Broom Finish: Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 11.7.4. ' 1. Medium -to -Fine Texture: Draw a soft bristle broom across float finished concrete perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine -line texture I 2. Medium -to- Course Texture: Striate float finished concrete 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff - bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. C. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float finished concrete I perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, gritty texture. D. Monolithic Exposed Aggregate Finish: Expose coarse aggregate in pavement surface as I follows: 1. Immediately after floating, spray apply chemical surface retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' 2. Cover with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove when ready to continue finishing operations. 3. Remove excess mortar without dislodging aggregate by lightly brushing surface with a I stiff, nylon bristle broom. 4. Fine spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required. E. Seeded Exposed Aggregate Finish: 1. Immediately after floating, broadcast a single layer of aggregate uniformly on pavement surface. 2. Tamp seeded aggregate into plastic concrete and float to entirely embed aggregate I with mortar cover of 1/16 inch. 3. Spray apply chemical surface retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Cover with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove when ready to I continue finishing operations. • I WRG Design • I • .1 Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving: 32 1313 I October 12, 2006 Page 7' • 5. Remove excess mortar without dislodging aggregate by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon bristle broom. I 6. Fine spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required. 1 F. Colored Dry-Shake Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake materials in . accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as follows: 1. Apply dry-shake hardener at minimum rate of 60 pounds per 100 sq. ft., unless I 2. otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Apply in 2 or more shakes. 3. Float after each application. 4. Trowel to smooth and uniform texture after final floating. I 5. Tool edges to 1/4 inch radius. 6. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry-shake hardener manufacturer. I 3.8 CURING A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot I temperatures. 1. Comply with ACI recommendations for cold weather and hot weather protection during curing. 1 B. Cure concrete by one of the following, or a combination of methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep concrete surfaces continually moist for not less than 7 days I with water, continuous water -fog spray, or use of water saturated absorptive cover kept continuously wet. 2. Moisture Retaining Cover Curing: Cover concrete with moisture retaining cover with sides and ends lapped and sealed by waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation according to manufacturer's instructions. I 3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with, tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: I 1. 2. Elevation: 1/4 inch. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Not to vary more than 1/4 inch when tested with a 10 foot straight edge. 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. I 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. I 1. Notify testing and inspection agency 24 hours prior to delivery and placement of concrete. 2. Concrete strength tests for quantities less than 50 cubic yards will not be required I when waived by Architect. B. Do not place concrete or reinforcement in footing forms until compacted soil and aggregate materials within forms have been examined. I WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving: 32 1313 October 12, 2006 Page 8 1 C. Do not place concrete in formwork until reinforcing steel has been examined. D. Ready Mixed Concrete Inspection and Testing: I 1. Sample each truck load of ready mixed concrete, complying with ASTM C172. 2. Perform one slump test for each truck load of ready mixed concrete, complying with ASTM C 143. 3. Perform one air content test for each set of compressive strength specimens, complying with ASTM C 231. 4. Make one set of 3 of compressive strength specimens for each day of structural concrete pouring or each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each class of concrete, complying with ASTM C 31. a. Test one specimen in accordance with ASTM C 39 after curing 7 days, one specimen after curing 28 days, and retain one specimen for testing after 35 • days or as directed by Architect. 5. Batch Ticket: I a. Receive a batch weight ticket from each truck; batch ticket to comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 in Article 16 for Batch Ticket Information. b. Verify water /cement ratio. 1) No water may be added if load is at specified ratio. 2) Reject truck if ratio does not conform. I 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Reconstruct damaged pavement for entire length between regularly scheduled joints. 2. Dispose removed concrete of in legal manner at no additional cost to Owner. B. Protect concrete pavement from damage and discoloration. 1. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. ' C. Clean discolored concrete. 1. Apply concrete cleaner, in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, to remove oil residues, scum, excess mortar, and the like. • END OF SECTION • • 1 I I I WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving Joint Sealants: 32 1373 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement. I B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants, for sealing nontraffic and traffic joints in locations not specified in this Section. 2. Section 32 1216: Asphalt Paving, for constructing joints between concrete and asphalt pavement. 3. Section 32 1313; Concrete Paving, for constructing joints in concrete pavement. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. • C. Product Certificates. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: . 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint - sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants to joint sealant manufacturers for testing according to ASTM C 1087, or manufacturer's standard test methods, to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. • I 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving Joint Sealants: 32 1373 1 October 12, 2006 Page 2 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 3. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost. . 4. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint - sealant manufacturer for in applications indicated. II 5. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL II li A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint - sealant manufacturer based on testing and field . experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.. 2.2 COLD - APPLIED TRAFFIC -GRADE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single component, pourable, self - leveling, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, Use related to joint substrate M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Pecora Ufexpan NR -201. 2. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL 1. 3. Tremco Vulkem 45 or Tremflex S /L. B. Single component, pourable, self - leveling, ASTM D 3405, cold - applied joint sealant. 1. W.R. Meadows Sealtight Safe -Seal 3405. C. Two component, pourable, self - leveling, ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, Use related to joint substrate M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. 1. Pecora Ufexpan NR -200 (self - leveling), or Dynatred (slope - grade). 2. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL 2, or SL 2 Slope- grade. 3. Tremco THC- 900/901. 4. Tremco Vulkem 245 or THC -900 (self - leveling), or THC -901 (slope - grade). 5. W.R. Meadows Sealtight Gardox. 2.3 JOINT - SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS I A. General: Provide joint - sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint - sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. I • I LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving Joint Sealants: 32 1373 1 October 12, 2006 Page 3 1. One of the following types, as applicable: a. Round Backer Rods for Cold - Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1 or 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. b. Backer Strips for Cold - Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. 2.4 PRIMERS A. Product recommended by joint - sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 EXECUTION . 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint - sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests or prior experience. • 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths. that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: . 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. LRS Architects, Inc., Fanno Creek Place Concrete Paving Joint Sealants: 32 1373 October 12, 2006 Page 4 E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating , substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 1 1 I 1 I I I LRS Architects, Inc. I Fanno Creek Place Extruded Concrete Curbs: 32 1415 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes machine extruded concrete curbs. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4115: Quality Control, for testing procedures. 2. Section 03 3000: Cast -in -Place Concrete 3. Section 32 1216: Asphalt Paving 4. Section 32 1723: Pavement Markings 5. Section 32 1615: Extruded Concrete Curbs. 6. Civil Drawings: General Notes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's Specifications and other data needed to show compliance with specifications 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in work of those trades for interfacing with work of this Section. " 1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS • A. Field verify dimensions prior to installation; if vary significantly from Contract Documents, inform and obtain Architect's approval before proceeding. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year written limited warranty signed by installer and stating that installer shall replace, at no cost to Owner, curb sections that break under normal traffic conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Curb Installers: 1. Concrete Construction Co. 2. Schneider Perma- Curbs. • 3. Westside Concrete. 4. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. B. Concrete Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C -150, Type I. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C -33. 3. Water: Clean, free of contaminating material. • • • 1 1 WRG Design • • Fanno.Creek Place Extruded Concrete Curbs: 32 1415 .1 October 12, 2006 Page 2 . C. Solvent Based Resin Curing Compound: - I. 0 1. Manufacturer and Type: a. A.C. Horn Horncure 30 C or D. b. Burke RES -X. c. W.R. Meadows Sealtight AR -30 or AR -30D. d. Substitutions: Submit according to requirements of Section 01 2500. 2. Comply with ASTM C -309, Type 1 or 1 D. • • 3. Material: Acrylic, or approved. I D. Epoxy adhesive: Strength to exceed tensile strength of asphaltic concrete paving. E. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by Contractor. I. F. Concrete mix: 1. Mix Proportions: Not less than 7 sacks of portland cement per cu. yd. ill 2. Slump: No slump allowed. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi in 28 days. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I A. Surface conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. 1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work. • II 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION . 1 A. Pressure wash paving surface and blow or sweep paving areas dry prior to installing concrete curbs. B. - Protect work of others. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install work of this Section in accordance with Drawings, and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. i. B. Where extruded curbs are a continuation of cast -in -place curbs, align exposed face and install expansion material. C. Apply epoxy adhesive to paved surface in a zig -zag pattern as wide as curb. D. Machine extrude concrete to profile shape of 6 inches wide x 6 inches high with slope sides and rounded top, or as shown on Drawings. . E. Form and trowel concrete curbs in small areas where extruding machine cannot travel. F. Cut curb and install premolded expansion joints at 60 ft. maximum spacing and where curb meets cast -in -place concrete. • I WRG Design I Fanno Creek Place Extruded Concrete Curbs: 32 1415 October 12, 2006 Page 3 G. Cut crack control joints every 20 lineal feet and at tangent points of curves with less than 5 foot radius. H. Hand trowel rough areas to a dense, uniform, smooth texture. I. Bevel top of curb down 45 degrees at independent ends. J. Apply curing compound at compound manufacturer's recommended gallon rate. K. Remove and replace curbs which crack; cut out chipped or cracked areas and reinstall new concrete. 1. Replace any sections not bonded securely to pavement. 3.4 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION A. Place temporary folding barricades or plastic cone barriers to keep vehicular traffic away from curbs for 28 days. B. Remove excess concrete from paving surfaces. C. Clean, without damaging, exposed surfaces affected by work of this Section and repair as necessary. END OF SECTION I I I I I I . I WRG Design • I Fanno Creek Place . Parking Bumpers: 32 1713 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes precast concrete parking bumpers (wheel stops). I . B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000: Cast -In -Place Concrete I 2. Section 07 9200: Joint Sealants 3. Section 32 1216: Asphalt Paving 4. Section 32 1723: Pavement Markings I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE WHEEL STOPS I A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air - entrained concrete with cast openings for dowels, chamfered edges, with drainage slots on underside, and free from pits and rock pockets. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi 1- 2. Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C 150, Type II. 3. Aggregates: Meet requirements of ASTM C 33. 4. Reinforcing Steel: Meet requirements of ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Two #3 bars I minimum, full length of bumper. 5. Nominal Size: a. Height: 6 inches. I b. Width: 9 inches. c. Length: 72 inches. 2.2 DOWELS A. Galvanized steel. • 1. Size: 3/4 inch diameter. 2. Length: Minimum 10 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate wheel stops where shown in Drawings. B. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded in holes cast into wheel stops. I C. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. D. Extend upper portion of dowel 5 inches into wheel stops, one inch below top of wheel stop, I and lower portion a minimum of 5 inches into pavement. 1. Install backer rod on top of pin. 2. Fill recess with self leveling sealant. I E. Level wheel stops with paving and aligned with sidewalks. END OF SECTION ii Ill WRG Design 1. Fanno Creek Place Pavement Markings: 32 1723 • I October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: It 1. Traffic lane, curb, and parking stall painting and striping. 2. S Y mbols of accessibility. 3. Directional arrow painting. I B. Related Sections: 1. Section 10 1427: Post Mounted Signs, for disabled accessibility parking signs. 2. Section 32 1216: Asphalt Paving 3. Section 32 1313: Concrete Paving 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Product data sheet for paint to include general properties of paint, surface preparation, application instructions, and cleanup information. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic II compounds (VOCs). 1.4 SITE CONDITIONS I A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not apply marking paint when wind velocity exceeds 15 mph. 2. Do not apply marking paint when pavement temperature is less than 40 degrees F, and ambient air temperature is less than 45 degrees F. . 1.5 SCHEDULING I A. Perform pavement marking work after concrete curbs, and walks have been installed and cured. I B. Perform pavement marking work after asphaltic concrete paving has been installed, cured, and sealed. PART 2 PRODUCTS II 2 . 1 TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT A. Industry Standard: FS TT- P- 1952B, Type 1. B. Latex Traffic Marking Paints: Subject to listing in The Master Painters Institute (MPI #97) Approved Product List, latest edition, provide products by one of the following: I 1. Benjamin Moore: Safety & Zone Marking Latex M58. (2) 2. Devoe Fuller: Devoe Acrylic Traffic Paint DV850XX. (2) 3. ICI Dulux Paints: Traffic Paint Water Reducible Acrylic 4800 -XXXX. (2) 4. Kelly- Moore: Mark Right Latex Traffic Paint 1450. (3) 5. Miller Paint: Acrylic Zone Marking Finish; 8001 White, 8013 Yellow. (2) 6. Rodda: Professional Maintenance Driveline, 7341 White, 7342 Yellow. (3) 7. Sherwin- Williams: Setfast Acrylic Waterborne Traffic Paint TM2251TM226. (3) r I WRG Design . Fanno Creek Place Pavement Markings: 32 1723 October 12, 2006 Page 2 . C. Asphalt Materials: 1. Asphalt Emulsion: SS -sh. I 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Apply paint with motor powered atomizing spray striping machine. PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.1 PROTECTION AND PREPARATION A. Protection: Place temporary barricade and rope or plastic cone barriers to protect striping from vehicular traffic until paint is dry. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Pressure wash paving surface and blow dry wet areas prior to applying paint. I 3.2 PAVEMENT STRIPING A. Spray apply paint with straight edges, true alignment, and uniform wet film thickness of 17 1 mils with thickness variation not to exceed 2 mils. B. Form disabled accessibility symbols and arrows with templates. I C. Apply white paint to paving areas and perimeter of access drive lanes. • D. Apply yellow paint to curbs where parking is restricted, center lines of two direction drive lanes, and no parking striped paving areas. E. Apply blue paint for disabled accessibility symbols and markings. F. Apply parking area striping in 4 inch wide white lines. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Remove misplaced marking paint from concrete surfaces. B. Cover misplaced paint on asphaltic concrete with asphalt emulsion. END OF SECTION 1 I WRG Design I 1 Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 1 I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping, valves, sprinklers, specialties, controls, and wiring for automatic control irrigation system. • 1.2 DEFINITIONS • 1 A. Circuit Piping (A.K.A. Lateral Pipe): Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. J B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit - piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure. ' C. Irrigation Main Piping (A.K.A. Mainline): Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water - distribution- system pressure. D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: I 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene plastic. 2. FRP: Fiberglass- reinforced plastic. 3. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic. 4. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 5. PP: Polypropylene plastic. 6. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. III 7. PVC:. Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 8. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. I 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design 100 percent water - coverage irrigation system for lawns and exterior plants indicated. B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. 1 Maintain 100 percent water coverage of turf and planting areas indicated. C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, • valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated: I 1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2. Circuit Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3. Drain Piping: 100 psig (690 kPa). 1 I . WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 2 • 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models for • the following: 1. Water regulators. 2. Water hammer arresters. 3. General -duty valves. 4. Specialty valves. 5. Control -valve boxes. 6. Sprinklers. 7. Irrigation specialties. 8. Controllers. Include wiring diagrams. 9. Control cables. Include splice kits. B. Shop Drawings: Show irrigation system piping, including plan layout, and locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of irrigation system piping components. Include water meters, backflow preventers, valves, piping, sprinklers and devices, accessories, controls, and wiring. Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray. Show wire size and number of conductors for each control cable. • C. Coordination Drawings: Show piping and major system components. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping, system components, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures. D. Field quality - control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For irrigation systems, to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and . Maintenance Data," following: I 1. Automatic - control valves. 2. Sprinklers. 3. Controllers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Deliver piping with factory- applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. I .1 WRG Design • I Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 3 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1. A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Architect's written permission. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sprinkler Units: Equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type and size indicated, but no fewer than 10 units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. • ' 2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. B. Mechanical- Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical joint, bell- and plain- spigot end. 1. Mechanical- Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C1.53, ductile -iron compact pattern. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. I 1 WRG Design 1 Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 4 C. Push -on- Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint, bell- and plain- spigot end. 1. Push -on- Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern I or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111,. rubber. D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast - copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought - copper, solder -joint fittings. Furnish wrought- copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder -joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast - copper - alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball -and- socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends. E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40. 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 80. 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 80: ASTM D 2467. 2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464. G. PVC, Pressure -Rated Pipe: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound SDR 21 and SDR 26 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 80: ASTM D 2467. H. Transition Fittings: Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for transition fittings. I. Dielectric Fittings: Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for dielectric fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used joining materials. 2.4 CORROSION - PROTECTION ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING I A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, PE film, 0.008 -inch (0.20 -mm) minimum thickness, tube or sheet. I I WRG Design I 1 Fanno Creek Place • Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 5' 2.5 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES A. AWWA, Cast -Iron Gate Valves :, AWWA C500, metal- seated or AWWA C509, resilient- seated nonrising -stem, gray- or ductile -iron body and bonnet gate valve; with bronze stem and stem nut. 1. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2. End Connections: Mechanical joint. 3. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. 4. Available Manufacturers: a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. c. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Company Subsidiary. d. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. e. NIBCO INC. f. Stockham. g. United States Pipe and Foundry Company. B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast -iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, and approximately 5 -inch- (125 -mm -) diameter barrel. 1. Operating Wrenches: Furnish total of one steel, tee - handle operating wrench(es) with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching . valve operating nut. C. MSS, Cast -Iron, Nonrising -Stem Gate Valves: MSS SP -70, Type I, Class 125, with solid wedge and flanged ends. Include all bronze trim, cast -iron body, and handwheel. 1. Manufacturers: 1 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. NIBCO INC. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. D. MSS, Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem - SS, Cast Iron, Rising Stem Gate Valves: MSS SP 70, Type I, Class 125, with solid wedge and flanged ends. Include all bronze trim, cast -iron body, and handwheel. I 1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. ' b. Hammond Valve. c. NIBCO INC. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. E. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar t� AWWA M44 requirements for cast -iron valve boxes. Include cast -iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over curb valve, and approximately 3- inch- (75 -mm -) diameter barrel. 1. Shutoff Rods: Furnish total of one steel, tee - handle shutoff rod(s) with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve. I WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 6 . F. Copper -Alloy Ball Valves: MSS SP -110, one -piece brass or bronze body with chrome - plated 1 bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats, and 400 -psig (2760 -kPa) minimum CWP rating. - 1. Manufacturers: t a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. NIBCO INC. d. Stockham. G. Copper -Allay Ball Valves: MSS SP -110, two -piece brass forged -brass body with full or regular port, chrome - plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600 -psig (4140 -kPa) minimum CWP rating and blowout -proof stem. 1. Manufacturers: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Hammond Valve. • c. NIBCO INC.. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. • H. Bronze Gate Valves: MSS SP -80, Class 125, Type 1, nonrising -stem, bronze body with solid wedge, threaded ends, and malleable -iron handwheel. • 1. Manufacturers: a. Hammond Valve. b. NIBCO INC. • I. Bronze Globe Valves: MSS SP -80, Class 125, Type 2, with bronze body and nonmetallic PTFE YP Y or TFE disc. 1. Manufacturers: I a. Hammond Valve. • b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. J. PVC Ball Valves: MSS SP -122, union type, with full -port ball, socket or threaded detachable end connectors, and pressure rating not less than 125 psig (860 kPa). 1. Material Option: MSS SP -122, of plastic other than PVC and suitable for potable water. Include threaded ends and pressure rating not less than 150 psig (1035 kPa), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturers: a. American Valve, Inc. b. NIBCO INC.; Chemtrol Div. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. • I 1 WRG Design .I Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 7 2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Bronze Automatic Control Valves: Cast - bronze body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24 -V ac solenoid. 1. Manufacturers: a. Buckner by Storm. b. Champion Irrigation Products. c. Rain. Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. B. Plastic Automatic Control Valves: Molded- plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24=V ac solenoid. 1. Manufacturers: a. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. C. Automatic Drain Valves: Spring - loaded -ball type of corrosion - resistant construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2 -1/2 to 3 psig (17 to 20 kPa). D. Quick - Couplers: Factory- fabricated, bronze or brass, two -piece assembly. Include coupler water -seal valve; removable upper body with spring - loaded or weighted, rubber - covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4- 11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key. 1. Locking -Top Option: Vandal- resistant, locking feature. Include two matching key(s). 2. Manufacturers: a. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. 2.7 CONTROL -VALVE BOXES A. Plastic Control -Valve Boxes: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade. Include size as required for valves and service. 1. Shape: Rectangular or round. 2. Sidewall Material: PE, ABS, or FRP 3. Cover Material: PE, ABS, FRP, or polymer concrete a. Lettering: VALVE BOX# 4. Available Manufacturers: a. Rainbird • B. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum to 3 inches (75 mm) maximum. 1 1 WRG Design . 1 • Fanno Creek Place • Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 8 2.8 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, single- seated, direct - operated, water- pressure regulators, rated for 150 -psig (1035 -kPa) minimum initial -inlet working pressure, with size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Include integral factory- installed or separate field - installed Y- pattern strainer that is compatible with unit for size and capacity. 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze or cast -iron body with flanged ends. 3. Interior Components: Corrosion - resistant materials. 4. Manufacturers: a. BERMAD. �. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Operation. ! B. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, with bellows or piston -type pressurized cushioning chamber and in sizes complying with PDI WH 201, Sizes A to F. C. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1. Include 4 -1/2 -inch- (115 -mm -) diameter dial, dial range of 2 times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet. 2.9 SPRINKLERS A. Description: Brass or plastic housing and corrosion- resistant interior parts designed for uniform • coverage over entire spray area indicated, at available water pressure. 1. Manufacturers: a. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. 2. Flush, Surface Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment. 3. Bubblers: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment. 4. Shrubbery Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw - type flow adjustment. 5. Pop -up, Spray Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment and stainless - steel retraction spring. 6. Pop -up, Rotary, Spray Sprinklers: Gear drive, full - circle and adjustable part- circle types. 7. Pop -up, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full - circle and part- circle types. 8. Aboveground, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full - circle and part- circle types. 2.10 SPRINKLER SPECIALTIES A. Application Pressure Regulators: Brass "or plastic housing, NPS 3/4 (DN 20), with corrosion - resistant internal parts, and capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 psig (138 kPa). B. Strainer /Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion- resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices downstream from unit. WRG Design • I 'if Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 • Page 9 • C. Emitters: PE or vinyl body. I 1. Manufacturers: a. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. I . 2. Single - Outlet Emitters: To deliver the following flow at approximately 20 psig (138 kPa): a. Flow: 1/2 gph (1.9 Uh) 1 b. Tubing Size: 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) minimum ID and 10 feet (3 m) long. 3. Outlet Caps: Plastic, for outlets without tubing. I . D. Drip Tubes: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) flexible PE or PVC tubing for emitters and other devices, of length indicated and with plugged end. I 1. Manufacturers: a. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. 2.11 AUTOMATIC - CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1 . 1. 'Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. B. Interior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, drip proof, with locking cover and two I matching keys. 1. Material: Molded . lasti p c 2. Mounting: Surface type for wall mounting. 1 C. Control Transformer: 24 -V secondary, with primary fuse. 1 D. Controller Stations for Automatic Control Valves: Each station is variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each station. E. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24 -hour, 14 -day clock, with automatic operations to skip operation I any day in timer period, to operate every other day, or to operate 2 or more times daily. 1. Manual or Semiautomatic Operation: Allows this mode without disturbing preset .1 automatic operation. 2. Nickel- Cadmium Battery and Trickle Charger: Automatically powers timing device during • power outages. 3. Surge Protection: Metal- oxide - varistor type on each station and primary power. I _ F. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF-B multiconductor, with solid- copper conductors and insulated cable; suitable for direct burial. III 1. Manufacturers: a. AFC Cable Systems Inc. I b. Alcatel Canada Wire, Inc. c. American Electric Cable Co. d. American Insulated Wire Corp. e. Cerro Wire & Cable Co., Inc. 1 WRG Design 1 • Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 0 . • Page 10 f. Colonial Wire and Cable Co., Inc. g. Essex Group, Inc.; Building Wire Products Division. h. Precision Cable Manufacturing Co., Inc. i. Southwire Company. j. Triangle Wire and Cable Co. • 2. Feeder - Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers. 3. Low - Voltage, Branch - Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color -coded different from feeder - circuit - cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple -cable installation in same trench. 4. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring -type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial. G. Concrete Base: Reinforced precast concrete with opening for wiring. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grades, 1 except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavement and slabs. C. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads. 1. Install piping sleeves by boring or jacking under existing paving if possible. I D. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3 inches (19 to 75 mm), to 12 inches (300 mm) below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt- saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material. E. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: I 1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below finished grade. 2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches (300 mm). 3. Drain Piping: 12 inches (300 mm). 4. Sleeves: 24 inches (600 mm). 3.2 N PR PARATI E O A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain Architect's approval before excavation. 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. B. Piping in control -valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges instead of joints indicated. WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 11 C. Aboveground Irrigation Main Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size I range: 1. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Steel pipe; malleable -, gray -, or cast -iron fittings; and threaded joints. 2. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Type M (Type C) hard copper tube, wrought- or cast - copper fittings, and soldered joints. 3. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Schedule 80, PVC pipe; socket -type PVC fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 4. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Schedule 80, PVC pipe; threaded PVC fittings; and threaded joints. 5. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Steel pipe; malleable -, gray -, or cast -iron fittings; and threaded joints. 6. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Schedule 40 PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent - cemented joints. 7. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Schedule 80, PVC pipe; Schedule 80, threaded, PVC fittings; and threaded joints. D. Underground Irrigation Main Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: NPS 3 and NPS 4 (DN 80 and DN 100) ductile -iron, • mechanical joint pipe; ductile -iron, mechanical joint fittings, glands, bolts, and nuts; and gasketed joints. - 2. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: NPS 3 and NPS 4 (DN 80 and DN 100) ductile -iron, push- on-joint pipe; ductile -iron, push -on -joint fittings and gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Type L (Type B) soft copper tube, wrought- copper fittings, and soldered joints. 4. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Schedule 80, PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent - cemented joints. 5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Schedule 80, PVC pipe; threaded PVC fittings; and threaded joints. 6. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: SDR 21, PVC, pressure -rated pipe; Schedule 80, PVC socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 7. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger ductile -iron, mechanical joint pipe; ductile -iron, mechanical joint fittings, glands, bolts, and nuts; and gasketed joints. 8. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger ductile -iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile -iron, push-on-joint fittings and gaskets; and gasketed joints. 9. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Schedule 40 PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent- '" cemented joints. 10. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: SDR 21, PVC, pressure -rated pipe; Schedule 80, PVC 1 socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. E. Circuit Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent - cemented joints. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: SDR 26, PVC, pressure -rated pipe; Schedule 40, PVC socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: DR PE, controlled OD pipe; PE socket or butt - fusion fittings; and heat - fusion joints. 4. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: SIDR 9, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and banded or coupled joints. • 1 WRG Design • • Place Planting Irrigation: Fanno Creek 9 ation: 32 8400 9 October 12, 2006 Page 12 I F. Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: Schedule 80, PVC pipe; threaded PVC fittings; and threaded joints. 1. Option: Plastic piping manufactured for this application may be used instead of pipe and fittings specified. G. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: Type M (Type C) hard copper tube, I wrought - copper fittings, and soldered joints. H. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: Schedule 80, PVC pipe and socket fittings; j and solvent- cemented joints. I. Drain Piping: Use any of the following piping materials: I 1. All Sizes: Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 2. All Sizes: SDR 21, 26, or 32.5, PVC, pressure -rated pipe; Schedule 40, PVC socket fittings; and solvent - cemented joints. 3. All Sizes: SIDR 9, 11.5, or 15, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and banded or coupled joints. J. Sleeves: Schedule 40 PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. S K. Transition Fittings: Use transition fittings for plastic -to -metal pipe connections according to the following: 1.. Couplings: a. Underground Piping NPS 1 -1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or I coupling. b. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA transition coupling. • 2. • Fittings: a. Aboveground Piping: Plastic -to -metal transition fittings. b. Underground Piping: Union with plastic end of same material as plastic piping. L. Dielectric Fittings: Use dielectric fittings for dissimilar -metal pipe connections according to the following: 1 1. Underground Piping: a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples. b. NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Prohibited except in valve box. 2. Aboveground Piping: a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric unions. . b. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Dielectric flanges. 3. Piping in Valve Boxes or Vaults: a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric unions. b. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Dielectric flanges. WRG Design . I I Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 13 • 3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Aboveground, Shutoff -Duty Valves: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze ball valve. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast -iron, rising -stem gate valve. B. Underground, Shutoff -Duty Valves: Use the following: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Curb stop with tee head, curb -stop service box, and shutoff rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA cast -iron gate valve with elastomeric gaskets and stem nut, valve box, and shutoff rod. C. Underground, Manual Control Valves: Bronze globe valve with control -valve box and valve key. D. Control Valves: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Plastic ball valve. 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves. C. Install piping free of sags and bends. D. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. F. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller pipe connection. G. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) or larger pipe connection. H. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals. I. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 690. • J. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. K. Install ductile -iron piping according to AWWA C600. L. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F 5 deg C. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F 5 deg C before testing unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. M. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet. 1 • WRG Design • 1 • Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 a 9 9 October 12, 2006 • Page 14 N. Water Hammer Arresters: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves in valve box. 3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Underground Gate Valves: Install in valve box with top flush with grade. I 1. Install valves and PVC pipe with restrained, gasketed joints. B. Underground Curb Stops: Install in service box with top flush with grade. I C. Underground, Manual Control Valves: Install in manual control -valve box. D. Control Valves: Install in control -valve box. I E. Drain Valves: Install in control -valve box. • 3.7 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is I completed. B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights. I C. Locate part- circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches (100 mm) from walls and 2 inches (50 mm) from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 AUTOMATIC - CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases not less than 36 by 24 by 4 inches (900 by 600 by 100 mm) thick, and not less than 6 inches (150 mm) greater in each direction than overall dimensions of controller. B. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 2 inches (50 mm) below piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer. Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas if irrigation piping is installed in sleeve. 3.9 CONNECTIONS I A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. • B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -. I tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 1 1 WRG Design I I Fanno Creek Place . Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 October 12, 2006 Page 15 • 3.10 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic - laminate equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller. identifying i i in n multiple units, operator of 1. Text: In addition to unit, distinguish gui sh betwee p s, p operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. B. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tape over underground piping, during backfilling of trenches. C. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for warning tapes. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field - assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. i B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak.Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls ' and equipment. C. Remove and replace units and reinspect as specified above. 3.12 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 26 Sections. D. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 ADJUSTING A. Adjust settings of controllers. B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. 1 WRG Design • 1 Fanno Creek Place Planting Irrigation: 32 8400 1 October 12, 2006 Page 16 • C. Adjust sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) above, finish grade. 3.14 CLEANING I A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. I 3.15 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controller and automatic control valves. END OF SECTION 1 I 111 • I I 1 I I I 1 1 • WRG Design 1 Fanno Creek Place Turf and Grasses: 32 9200 I October 12, 2006 Page 1 I PART 1 - GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: • 1. Sodding. 1 B. Related Sections: 1 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading. 3. Division 32 Section "Plants" for border edgings. I 1.2 DEFINITIONS I A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. . B. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand I with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. I D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface 9 p 9 P of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil. 1 E. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. f 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass -seed monostand or mixture . stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1. Certification of each seed mixture for sod identifying source, including name and telephone number of supplier. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer. E. Material Test Reports: For imported topsoil. F. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting. I . WRG Design 1 Fanno Creek Place Turf and Grasses: 3 2 9200 00 October 12, 2006 Page 2 G. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for I maintenance of lawns during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods. . • 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful I lawn establishment. • 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full -time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress. B. Soil- Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil- testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant- nutrient content of topsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State - recommended quantities of nitrogen, I' phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in TPI's "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver. sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS • A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of planting completion. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. 1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Lawn Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Sodded Lawns: 90 days from date of planting completion. WRG Design 1 Fanno Creek Place Turf and Grasses: 32 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 3 B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TURFGRASS SOD A. Turfgrass Sod: Approved complying with TPI's "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Turfgrass Supplier: JB Instant Lawn or approved equal. • 2.2 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off -site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well- drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. • a. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off- site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well- drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. 2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25 -mm). sieve. 2. Class: 0, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25 -mm) sieve. 3. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone. B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35 -mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425 -mm) sieve. C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. WRG Design r Fanno Creek Place Turf and Grasses: 32 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 4 . F. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium sulfate. G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials. H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, diatomaceous earth, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. I. • Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS I A. " Compost: Well- composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55'percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2 -inch (12.5 -mm). I 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2.5 PLANTING ACCESSORIES A. Selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application. • 2.6 FERTILIZER • I' • A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow - release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb /1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil- testing agency. B. Slow - Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water - insoluble 1 nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil- testing agency. 2.7 MULCHES A. Compost Mulch: Well - composted, stable, and weed - free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; 3 moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1 -inch (25 -mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 2 to 5decisiemens /m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60percent of dry weight. WRG Design t I Fanno Creek Place Turf and Grasses: 32 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 5 B. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed -wood, cellulose -fiber mulch; nontoxic; free of plant - growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 1 6.5. C. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber -mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant - growth or germination inhibitors. D. Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D 977, Grade SS -1; nontoxic and free of plant - growth or germination inhibitors. I 2.8 EROSION - CONTROL MATERIALS A. Erosion - Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut -fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches (150 mm) long.. B. Erosion - Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable burlap or spun -coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb/sq. yd. (0.5 kg /sq. m), with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches (150 mm) long. 2.9 PLANTING SOIL MIX A. Planting Soil Mix: Topsoil mixed with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities: 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4. 2. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per the soil analysis recommendations. 3. Weight of Slow - Release Fertilizer per the soil analysis recommendations. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 • EXAMINATION • A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. B. Provide erosion - control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 1 WRG Design • I Fanno Creek Place Turf and Grasses: 32 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 6 3.3 LAWN PREPARATION A. Limit lawn subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm. Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply superphosphatefertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off -site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 3. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 9 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after Tight rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. • Spread approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil mix over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm)] of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil mix. b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. C. Unchanged Subgrades: If lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface -soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 1 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm). Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. a. Apply superphosphatefertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening. 3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. 1 D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting. if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Before planting, restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION - CONTROL MATERIALS A. Prepare area as specified in "Lawn Preparation" Article. 1 WRG Design 1 1 • 'Fenno Creek Place Turf and Grasses: 32 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 7 B. For erosion - control mats, install planting mix in two lifts, with second lift equal to thickness of erosion- control mats. Install erosion - control mat and fasten as recommended by material 1 manufacturer. C. Fill cells of erosion - control mat with planting mix and compact before planting. D. For erosion - control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 1 3.5 SODDING A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to • subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. • 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 1 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) below.sod. • 3.6 LAWN MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. B. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn- watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). • 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water lawn with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. 1 WRG Design 1 r Fanno Creek Place Turf and Grasses: 32 9200 October 12, 2006 Page 8 • 1 C. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass -leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: 1. Mow grass to a height of 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm). 1 D. Lawn Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. 1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb /1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 1 sq. m) to lawn area. • 3.7 SATISFACTORY LAWNS 1 A. Lawn installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect: 1. Satisfactory Sodded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well- rooted, even - colored, viable lawn has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. • B. Use specified materials to reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory. 3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris, created by lawn work, from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after lawn is established. C. Remove non - degradable erosion - control measures after grass establishment period. END OF SECTION • 1 1 WRG Design • 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 October 12, 2006 • Page 1 • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Trees. 2. Shrubs. 3. Ground cover. 4. Plants. 5. Tree stabilization. B. Related Sections: • 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and plantings, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. • 1.2 DEFINITIONS • A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required; wrapped, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. 1 C. Balled and Potted Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not Tess than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant required. D. Bare -Root Stock: Exterior plants with a well- branched, fibrous -root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant required. E. Clump: Where three or more young trees were planted in a group and have grown together as a single tree having three or more main stems or trunks. F. Container Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well rooted exterior plants grown in a container with well - established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant required. G. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. H. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. I. Multi -Stem: Where three or more main stems arise from the ground from a single root crown or at a point right above the root crown. WRG Design • • • Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 October 12, 2006 Page 2 J. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to 1 become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface 1 of a.fill or backfill, before placing planting soil. L. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:. t 1. 5 lb (2.2 kg) of mineral mulch for each color and texture of stone required, in labeled plastic bags. 2. Edging materials and accessories, of manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected. 3. Humus. 4. Organic Mulch. 5. Topsoil Analysis and recommendations. 6. Stakes and guys. 7. Sod supplier information. 8. Tree ties sample - 6" length 9. Plant photos — one of each species typical of plants to be installed on site. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. 1 D. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. E. Material Test Reports: For imported topsoil. F. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants. 1 G. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of exterior plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required • maintenance periods. H. Warranty: ,Sample of special warranty. 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full -time English Speaking supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress. • WRG Design 1 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 October 12, 2006 Page 3 • B. Soil- Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, (Agricheck Inc 800 537- 1129 or approved equal) recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil- testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium • absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant- nutrient content oftopsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for plant growth. State - recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil. • D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock." 1. Selection of exterior plants purchased under allowances will be made by Architect, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting. E. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or caries in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above the ground for trees up to 4 -inch (100 -mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip -to -tip. F. Observation: Architect may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size,and quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project 1 site. 1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver exterior plants freshly dug. 1. Immediately after digging up bare -root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery except as approved by Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop I exterior plants during delivery and handling. C. Handle planting stock by root ball. 1 1 WRG Design Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 October 12, 2006 Page 4 1 D. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants and • trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Heel -in bare -root stock. Soak roots that are in dry condition in water for two hours. Reject dried -out plants. 2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 3. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on -site with a fine -mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather • conditions permit planting to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. C. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs afterfinish grades are established and before planting lawns unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1 1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace 1 plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.. c. Faulty operation of tree stabilization. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion: 1 a. Trees and Shrubs: One year. b. Ground Cover and Plants: One year. • • 1 1 9 WRG Design 1 Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 1 October 12, 2006 Page 5 3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. b. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. c. A limit of one replacement of each exterior plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. ' d. Provide extended warranty for replaced plant materials; warranty period equal to original warranty period. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: Three months (90 days) from date of planting completion. B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover, and Plants: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and • well established, but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: Three months from date of planting completion. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well- shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorousstock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. B. Provide trees and shrubs of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60. for types and form of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Root -Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. D. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. 1 WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 October 12, 2006 Page 6 E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs is shown, select stock for uniform 1 height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting. 2.2 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES A. Type 1 Shade Trees: Single -stem trees with straight trunk, well - balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required. . 1. Provide balled and burlapped trees. 2. Branching Height: One -third to one -half of tree height. B. Small Upright Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with • relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem form as follows: 1 1. Stem Form: Single trunk. 2. Provide balled and burlapped trees. C. Small Spreading Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem form as follows: 1. Stem Form: Single trunk. 2. Provide balled and burlapped trees. 2.3 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS A. Form and Size: Shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub. 1. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning. 2. Provide container -grown shrubs. 1 2.4 CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS A. Form and Size: Normal- quality, well- balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1. • 2.5 BROADLEAF EVERGREENS A. Form and Size: Normal - quality, well - balanced, broadleaf evergreens, of type, height, spread, 1 and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1. 2.6 GROUND COVER PLANTS A. Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1. • i WRG Design G esign 1 • • Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 October 12, 2006 Page 7 2.7 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch,(25 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well- drained construction or mining sites where topsoil . occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. 2.8 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25 -mm) sieve. 2. Class: 0, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25 -mm) sieve. 3. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone. B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35 -mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425 -mm) sieve. C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. F. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium sulfate. G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials. H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, diatomaceous earth, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. 1 I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. • 2.9 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well- composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) sieve; contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 1 1 WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 October 12, 2006 Page 8 . 2.10 FERTILIZER A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow- release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil- testing agency. C. Slow- Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water - insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil- testing agency. 2.11 • MULCHES 1 A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1 1. Type: Ground or shredded bark. B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1 -inch (25 -mm) sieve; contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: • 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 1 2.12 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS A. Stakes and Guys: 1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough -sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure- 1 preservative- treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 -by- 2 -inch nominal (38- by -38 -mm actual) by length indicated, pointed at one end. 2. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes . 1 2.13 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS 1. Wood Edging: Shovel cut bed edge. 2.14 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS 1 A. Antidesiccant: Water - insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel, 3 /4" diameter. C. Planter Filter Fabric: Woven or nonwoven geotextile manufactured for separation applications 1 and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them. 1 WRG Design 1 1 Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 October 12, 2006 Page 9 2.15 PLANTING SOIL MIX A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities: 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4 2. Weight of Slow - Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per the soil analysis recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect'structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations. I • B. Provide erosion - control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as required. ' D. Lay out exterior plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation. 1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting. F. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation. 1 1 1 WRG Design • Plants: 32 9300 Fanno Creek Place PI a October 12, 2006 Page 10 3.3 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT A. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm. Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off -site before spreading. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few , days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 2. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 9 inches unless noted otherwise on plans (24" , depth in planter islands), but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Spread approximately one -half the thickness of planting soil mix over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of subgrade. Spread • remainder of planting soil mix. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. C. Before planting, restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 1 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS • A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped stock. 2. Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare -root stock. 3. If drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile. B. Subsoil removed from excavations may not be used as backfill. 1 C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. 1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) diameter holes, 24 inches (600 mm) apart, into free - draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free - draining material. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits. 1 E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 1 WRG Design 1 Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 . October 12, 2006 Page 11 3.5 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. B. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root 1 inch (25 mm) above adjacent finish grades. 1. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one -half backfilled, water thoroughly ' before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix. C. Set container-grown .stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball inch (25 mm) above above adjacent finish grades. 1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one -half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. • Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix. • D. Organic Mulching: Apply 3 -inch (75 -mm) average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches (300 mm) beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 2 inches of trunks or stems. E. Inspect tree.trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation; take corrective measures required before wrapping. Wrap trees of 2 -inch (50 -mm) caliper and larger with trunk -wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and securely attach without causing girdling. 3.6 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. B. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Architect. C. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to retain • natural character. 1 i 1 WRG Design • Fanno Creek Place Plants: 32 9300 October 12, 2006 Page 12 1 3.7 TREE STABILIZATION A. Trunk Stabilization: Unless otherwise indicated, provide trunk stabilization as follows: 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5 -inch (50- through 125 -mm) caliper. Stake trees of Tess than 2 -inch (50 -mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip -out. Use a minimum of 2 stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches (450 mm) below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend one third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. 2. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. 3.8 PLANTING IN PLANTERS A. Place a layer of drainage,gravel at least 4 inches (100 mm) thick in bottom of planters, cover with filter fabric, and fill with planter soil mix. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) below top of planter, allowing natural settlement. 3.9 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants as indicated. • B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots and backfill with planting soil. 1 C. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. D. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. E. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. • 3.10 PLANTING BED MULCHING 1 • A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated. Provide mulch ring around trees in lawn areas. 1. Organic Mulch: Apply 3 -inch (75 -mm) average thickness of organic mulch, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems. . 3.11 EDGING INSTALLATION A. Shovel cut edgings: shovel cut bed edges smooth with arcs indicated on plan without 1 irregularities. • 1 1 WRG Design • • 1 • 1 Fanno Creek Place Plants. 32 9300 October 12, 2006 Page 13 3.12 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Tree and Shrub Maintenance: Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing stakes and guy supports and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings. B. Ground Cover and Plant Maintenance: Maintain and establish plantings - by watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. 3.13 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged •plantings. 3.14 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 • 1 1 1 WRG Design • 1 Fanno Creek' Place Foundation Drainage: 33 4613 1 October 12, 2006 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes subdrainage systems for building foundations. 1 B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22: Plumbing, for connections to storm drainage system. 1 2. Section 31 2000: Earth Moving, for excavating, trenching, and backfill. 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1 A. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene B. NPS: Nominal pipe size. • 1 C. PE: Polyethylene. ' D. PP: Polypropylene. E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For drainage piping and geotextile fabrics. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic pipe in direct sunlight. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate piping termination with storm drainage system, and location of other utilities. PART PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PERFORATED -WALL DRAINAGE PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type. 1 B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell- and - spigot ends, for loose joints. . 2.2 SOLID -WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS 1 A. Cast -Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra -Heave classes, hub -and spigot ends, gray, for gasketed joints. 1 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, of thickness matching class of pipe. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Foundation Drainage: 33 4613 October 12, 2006 Page 2 B. PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. 1 C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, bell- and - spigot ends, for gasketed joints. 1 • 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 2.3 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS 1 A. . Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined • and corrosion - resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Unshielded Flexible Couplings:Elastomeric sleeve with corrosion - resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end 2. Shielded Flexible Couplings:' ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full - length, corrosion- resistant outer shield and corrosion - resistant metal tension band . and tightening mechanism on, each end 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Cast -Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M; with round- flanged, cast -iron housing; and secured, scoriated, Medium -Duty Loading class, cast -iron cover. Include cast -iron ferrule and countersunk, brass cleanout plug. B. PVC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. 1 2.5 SOIL MATERIALS A. Drainage Fill: ASTM D 448; Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, coarse aggregate, grading Size No. 57, with 100 percent passing 1 -1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing No. 8 sieve, unless otherwise indicated in 1 Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 2.6 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS • A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 1 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L /min. per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. 1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle - punched continuous filament. 2. Style(s): Flat or sock, as applicable. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.T EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 31 2000, Earth Moving. 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc. 1 'Fanno Creek Place Foundation Drainage: 33 4613 I October 12, 2006 Page 3 • 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS 1 • A. NPS 4 and NPS 6 Piping: . 1. Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. • 1 2. Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell- and - spigot joints. 3.3 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS 1 A. At Grade in Earth: PVC cleanouts. • B. At Grade in Paved Areas: Cast -iron cleanouts. • • 3.4 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete I footings have been cured and forms removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not Tess than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide. B. Lay flat -style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides I C. Place supporting layer of drainage coarse over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches. 1 D. Encase pipe with sock -style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with adhesive or tape. I E. Install drainage piping as indicated in PART 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation subdrainage. F. Add drainage coarse to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to 1 perform tests. G. After satisfactory testing, cover piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away from footing 1 and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade. H. Install drainage coarse and wrap top of drainage coarse with flat -style geotextile filter fabric. I I. Place layer of flat -style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage coarse, overlapping edges at least 4inches. I J. Place initial backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose -depth layers not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish elevations and slope away from building 1 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION . A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with I unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. I 1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 1 LRS Architects, Inc. Fanno reek Place Foundation Drainage: 33 4613 C g October 12, 2006 Page 4 3. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe where applicable. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and 1 fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. C. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321. 1 D. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321: 3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 1 A. Cast -Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Hub and spigot, with rubber compression gaskets according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." Use gaskets that match class of pipe and fittings B. Join PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soil -tight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties;" or according to ASTM D 2321. C. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. D. Join perforated, PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose, bell- and - spigot joints. 1 E. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both pipe materials and dimensions. 3.7 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. B. In vehicular traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast -iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. 1. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast -in -place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches in depth. 2. Set top of cleanout plug flush with grade. 3. Cast -iron pipemay also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular traffic areas. C. In nonvehicular traffic areas, use NPS 4 PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and 1 riser extensions to cleanout. 1. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast -in -place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 �. inches in depth. 2. Set top of cleanout plug 1 inch above grade. 3.8 CONNECTIONS 1 A. Drawings indicated general arrangement of piping, fitting, and specialties. B. Connect low elevations of foundation drainage system to building solid storm drainage system. LRS Architects, Inc. 1 Fanno Creek Place Foundation Drainage: 33 4613 October 12, 2006 Page 5 . • 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing drainage fill to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat 1 test until results are satisfactory. 3.10 CLEANING ' A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION • • • • 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LRS Architects, Inc.